...,_ ·,, 
I\/·;~, 
.b/S: t!ioii 
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 

NBC 
DEFENSE 
REFERENCE 
AND 

STUDY GUIDE 
SUNY a·.: Buffalo 
The Libraries 

e 6 1 9 s 
FEB 85 
Depository Copv 

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

PAGE 1
INTRODUCTION 2
PROTECTIVE MASK TECH ASPECTS OF CB DEFENSE 8 MISSION-ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE 29 CHEMICAL AGENT DETECTION, IDENTIFICATION, RECONNAISSANCE AND REPORTING 45 DECONTAMINATION 
149 
PREPARE FOR NBC ATTACK 	209 227
NBC PREDICTIONS RADIAC INSTRilllENTS 308 RAD MONITORING, SURVEY, RECON & REPORTING 371 OPERATIONAL ASPECTS 411 UNIT TRAINING 446 
INTRODUCTION TO UNIT NBC DEFENSE 
Unit NBC defense measures are those actions taken by personnel in a unit tosurvive in an NBC environment. Implementation of these measures wi I I require
constant coordination and supervision. In units which do not have a Chemical
Corps officer or NCO assigned, the commander must appoint an NBC defense
officer and NCO on an additional duty basis. 

The overal I responsibi Iity for the success of the unit NBC defense programrests with the unit commander. As an NBC officer or NCO, however, you wi I I bethe commander's representative in these matter. Whether assigned to a companyor a battalion, it wi I I be your job to establish and maintain the NBC defenseprogram for that unit. It wi II also be your responsibility to keep the
commander abreast of the NBC posture of the unit. You may find that it wi I Irequire a cxertain amount of salesmanship to gain the command emphasis neededto promote your NBC defense program. If you can show how your program wi I I blend with and, in fact, enhance the accomplishment of the unit's primarymission, you wi I I probably have Iittle difficulty initiating your program. 
Paramount to the NBC training program initiated by the NBC officer and NCO isthe integration of NBC tas~s into everyday training. Perhaps the mostfrequent fai I ing of most NBC training programs is its failure to become justanother aspect of routine mission accompl i3hment. The focus should be on a
soldier's abi Iity to clean his or her weapon as easily in MOPP posture as
without MOPP. The true secret to success wi I I be not only convincing the
commander, but to convince the many first I ine supervisors that NBC task
integration is not difficult, not time consuming when proficient, and
essential on the integrated battlefield. 

The focus of this unit and the other units found in this series is to prepare
the additional duty NBC officer and NCO to return to his or her unit with theknowledge to conduct smal I unit operations on the integrated battlefield.
More specifically, our purpose is to train first line supervisors to
accomplish their major ARTEP tasks when placed in an NBC environment and to

maintain assigned equipment in an operational ready status. 
INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS IN AN NBC ENVIRONMENT 
During World War I, chemical agents were introduced to the battlefield with
. devastating effects. One reason for the enormous number of casualties wasthat soldiers were unaccustomed to operating in a chemical environment. Since
the introduction of chemical agents, improvements have been made in the
protective equipment avai !able to protect personnel. 

In 1945, nuclear weapons were first employed in wa~. The effects of theseweapons proved to be more destructive than any single weapon used by man up tothat point. In addition to the destruction, these weapons held a new featurethat continued to cause casualties long after the initial burst. Nuclearradiation can continue to cause casualties through radiation for long periodsof time and many miles away from the point of detonation. 
Even as late as World Was I I, there were more American soldiers removed from 
battle by sickness and disease than by combat wounds. Imagine the impact if 
biological agent had been intentionally employed as a weapon. 

Only through proper use of protective equipment and application of prescribed
NBC defense measures can a unit operate within an NBC environment. 

SUPERVISE FITTING PROTECTIVE MASKS CONDITIONS: Given: Two or more soldiers with serviceable protective masks that requirefitting. STANDARDS 
1. Masks are adjusted for proper fit: M17-series masks in accordance with TM 
3-4240-279-10; M24 and M25-series masks in accordance with TM 3-4240-280-10. 
2. 
Masks are checked for a proper fit: M17-series masks in accordance with TM 3-4240-279-10; M24 and M25-series masks 

in accordance with TM 3-4240-280-10. 

3. 
Masks are checked for leaks: M17-series masks in accordance with TM 


3-4240-279-10; M24 and M25-series masks in accordance with TM 3-4240-280-10. 
CAUTION 
A mask that leaks wi I I not protect soldiers from toxic chemical 
agents. The mask must be checked for leaks each time it is put 
on. 

Soldiers must be clean shaven as beard growth may cause a bad 
seal between face and mask. 

Female soldiers must remove alI hairpins, combs, hair knots, buns, 
or braids which wi I I interfere with mask seal.

; 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. Directs the fitting of protective masks. 
a. 
For M17-series protective masks refer to TM 3-4240-279-10. 

b. 
For M24 and M25-series protective masks refer to TM 3-4240-280-10. 


2. Check the protective masks for proper fit. 
a. 
For M17-series protective masks refer to TM 3-4240-279-10. 

b. 
For M24 and M25-series protective masks refer to TM 3-4240-280-10. 


2 

3. 	Checks the protective masks for leaks. 
a. 	For M17-series protective masks refer to TM 3-4240-279-10. 
b. For M24 and M25-series protective masks refer to TM 3-4240-280-10. REFERENCES FM 21-3, Task 031-503-3012 
SUPERVISE FITTING OF PROTECTIVE MASKS The mask must be checked for fit. Check the following items to ensure the 
mask is adjusted for proper fit to the soldier's face. Temple straps are above the ears. Buckles are flat and the straps form a straight I ine with the tabs. Pupi Is of the eyes are near the center of the lenses. Edge of the mask fits wei I up on the forehead and within 1 inch of the ear. Next, have the soldier press the palms firmly over the inlet valves. Do 
not 	press so hard that the facepiece is distorted. This could cause leaks. Now have the soldier inhale Iightly and hold breath for 10 seconds. If the facepiece tends to col lapse and remain col lapsed during this time, the mask is effectively airtight. 
3 

CHECtZ r!iASK r-OR r=IT. 
EDGE:-OF 1-'...ASK CO!·~ES ~.'LLL UP THE FOREHEAD AND WITHIN 1 INCH OF THE EAR 
PUPILS OF THE EYES ARE 
t-."EAR CEliT.ER OF LENSES 

H..~.SK DOES NOT PRESS -----STR.AJ'S -DO NOT CUTFLESH s·o TIGHT:JTHAT INTO THE EARSEYES }i.-\Y PARTl..A.LLY CLOSE 
Y..ASK DOES NOT LEAK. AROmm EDGES 
NOSECUP DOES NOT . 
05SCU?~ THE~VISION 
BOTTOM OF HASK DOES NOT
OR PRESS PAINFULLY CUT IliTO THE THROAT
0~ 1'EE NOSE 
The initial fitting of the protective mask cannot be overemphasized. It isImagine the number
necessary to ensure that any smal I unit is combat ready. 
of. casualties that would result if every member in a platoon was not properly 

fitted with their assigned protective mask, and that fit was never tested for

leaks'. 

INITIAL FITTING 
The initial mask fitting should be performed by the unit NBC NCO or another trained person. Soldiers to be fitted wi I I need masks and seating faci Iities. 
Extra masks in assorted sizes should be readily available. The fitter wi II follow the procedures below the fitting each mask for the first time. 
Ask the soldier to seated. 
Hood and eyelens outserts should be removed. Straps on the head harness 
should be loosened so the metal tips at the strap ends are about 1 inch (2.5 centimeters) from the clip-buckle assemblies. 
4 
Have wearer open the facepiece assembly with thumbs under the head harness. 
Instruct wearer to place chin into the chin pocket. 
Tel I wearer to slip the head harness over the head while pul Iing the mask 

over the face. Have wearer hold mask tightly against the chin. Make sure the outlet valve is not covered. Instruct wearer to position head harness pad directly over the high point on the back of the head and to hold the head pad in place with the free hand. Place your forefinger or thumb under the clip-buckle assembly of one forehead (top) strap and give the strap end a sharp tug unti I the clip-buckleassembly feels snug. Adjust the other forehead strap in the same manner. Use the same technique to adjust the cheek straps (bottom). Have wearer release the mask. It should not slip. If the mask slips,
readjust the forehead and cheek straps until it remains in place. Adjust the temple (midOie) strap, using the same technique as above. With the wearer standing, check the mask for proper fit according to the 
following eight points: 
-Edge of mask comes up on forehead but not into hair I ine, and within 
1 inch (2.5 centimeters) of the ears. 
-Temple straps and cheek straps do not cut into ears. 
-Eye pupi Is are centered in the eyelenses. 
-Mask does not press skin so tightly that eyes are partly closed. 

-Mask does not leak around the edges. 
-Bottom of mask does not cut into throat. 
-Skin in front of ears is not wrinkled. 
-Nosecup assembly does not obscure vision or press into the nose. 

Optical Inserts (if used)--Fit prongs of plastic frames into alternate holes in the optical insert supports. Install wire frames inside eyelenses of mask facepiece. 
NOTE: Optical inserts are personal issue items. Inserts should 
be retained throughout a soldier's mi I i tary careet. If mask is difficult to fit, try another size. When you have an apparent fit,the mask should be checked for leaks as described be.low. 
5 

Testing for Leaks 
Testing the fit of the mask can be accomplished in two ways: chamber exercise 
and banana oi I method. The chamber exercise is an effective method when 
checking the fit of the mask of a large number of soldiers. The chamber 
exercise also provides a vehicle for soldiers to gain confidence in the 
protective mask and should be used when the protective mask is due its semi
annual services. Prior to conducting a mask confidence exercise, you must 
check local policies and regulations. The procedures to conduct the exercise 
are out I ined in FM 21-48. 
Another method to test fitting of the mask uses banana oi I (isoamyl acetate)
and is less costly. The I iquid comes in ampules and bottles--ampules are 
preferred. It is effective, available, and authorized in TB Med 223. 
NOTE: Isoamyl acetate, or banana oi I, does not replace the 
use of the CS chamber. The chamber insti IIs confidence in the protective mask. 
Health and Safety Precautions 
WARNING 
Banana oi I vapor is flammable .. 
Banana oi I liquid may irritate skin. 
Banana oi I I iquid and vapor may irritate the eyes , nose, and throat. 
CAUTION 
Liquid banana oi I penetrates and softens hood and 
mask facepiece materials. 
Before getting into how you use the banana oi I, there are health and
some 
safety precautions you must be aware of. Observe the following precautions inalI uses: 
Conduct banana oi I vapor test outdoors or in a wei 1-venti lated indoor
location. 
Banana oi I vapor is flammable. No open flame or smoking can be allowed
in the test area. 

No special storage conditions are required for ampules; but be careful not to crush boxes containing them. 
Persons conducting tests must wear rubber gloves if the vapor source 
wets their fingers. After testing, the tester must wash gloves and hands with soap and water. If tester experiences eye, nose, or throat discomfort, he or
she must wear a protective mask. 
6 

Dispose of used ampules in an outdoor trash container. 
Conduct the Test 
The Chemical Research and Development Center recommends vapor testingmasks when initially issued and periodically thereafter. Banana oi I vaportests are made after the mask has been properly fitted and checked for leaks. 
It is easier to do the test when the masked soldier is seated. Instructthe wearer to breathe normally. Crush the ampule according to manufacturer's
instructions. Move the crushed ampule around the edge of the mask facepiecewhere it forms a seal with the face. Keep the ampule 1 to 2 inches from theedge of the mask. Do NOT touch the mask or the soldier with the ampule.Liquid banana oi I penetrates and softens hood and mask facepiece materials.Exposure to I iquid or prolonged exposure to vapor can cause severe skinirritation. 
Use the same testing technique for the components in the front of thefacepiece, such as the eyelenses, air intakes, and voicemitter assembly. 
If the wearer smel Is banana oi I vapor and if strap adjustments do not
eliminate the odor, he or she has the wrong size mask or has a faulty mask.It should be turned in forreplacement or repair.· 
One ampule should test 5 to 10 masks during initial fitting; 10 masks
during rechecks. 
Conditions for Masking Without Order or Alarm 

Once an attack with a chemical or biological agent is detected or suspected,

or information is available that such an agent is about to be used, you mustSTOP breathing and mask immediately. Under the following circumstances, do
not wait to receive an order or alarm when: Your position is hit by: A r t i I I ery o r mo rt a r f i r e . Missiles or rockets. Smoke or mists. Aerial spray or bombs. Smoke from an unknown source 1s present. A suspicious Iiquid or solid is present. -You are entering an area suspected of being contaminated. -You have one or more of the following symptom~: 
7 
An unexplained runny nose. 
A feeling of choking or tightness in the chest or throat. 
Dimming of vision. 
Irritation of the eyes. 
Difficulty in or increased rates of breathing without obvious reasons. 
TECH ASPECTS OF CB DEFENSE 
IDENTIFY ELEMENTS OF AN NBC ATTACK 
Threat nations are capable of employing NBC weapons in large numbers. They
have delivery systems with great range and mobility. These attacks wi II not 
appear the same as conventional attacks, although NBC attacks wi I I certainly
be exploited using conventional means. Instead NBC attacks may appear as 
an 
enormous cloud, a fine mist, or Iiquid droplets. Yet, they can be deadly to a
soldier who does not recognize the hazard and is not prepared to defend against
it. Therefore a fundamentaJ aspect to protection is understanding the hazards 
as they wi I I be employed. -As an individual and then as a first I ine supervisor 
you must check to ensure that you and your subordinates are able to recognize 
an NBC attack. 
Identifying the elements of an NBC attack requ1re you to be able to: 
Recognize a chemical attack. 
Recognize a biological attack. 
SUPERVISE PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL 
Supervising the protection of personnel in your unit really boi Is down to 
supervising the immediate defensive measures out Iined in the Soldier's Manual 
of Common Tasks. These include, recognition of an attack, and those actions 
necessary to survive. These steps include but are not I imited 
to assuming andmaintaining the proper MOPP level and preforming individual decontamination as
required. 
Characteristics of Chemical Agents 
Planning for the defense against chemical agents employed by Threat forces wi I I be incorporated into the scheme of offensive and defensive maneuvers byalI US Army units. Chemical strikes may be employed in an antipersonnel role to destroy US defenses or may be used to contaminate specific areas with 
persistent agents to act as an obstacle. It is certain, however, chemical agents wi I I be used by Threat forces to attempt to destroy our offensive 
capabilities. 
8 

Chemical agents are affected by the environment. Weather conditions have a
significant effect on the behavior of chemical agents. 
There are certain
times and conditions where they can be employed most effectively. The most
favorable conditions usually occur at night, during early morning, at dusk,
and when there is a heavy overcast with I ight, steady winds. Smooth terrain
is usually more favorable for the employment of chemical agents than rough
terrain. Low places generally are more favorable than higher elevations.·
Agents tend to Iinger and settle in the low places and in heavily vegetated
areas such as dense woods and urban terrain. 
The persistency (duration of effectiveness) of a chemical agent depends on itsphysical properties, weather conditions, method of agent dissemination, andterrain on which the agent is deposited. The terms "persistent agent" and
"nonpersistent agent" express the relative duration of effectiveness of
chemical agents in the attack area. 
These terms do not refer to the durationof the effects of the agents on personnel. 
Persistent Agent. The initial sign of a persistent agent attack is Iiquid
droplets of agent. These wi I I resemble 
rain and may be the consistency of
syrup. The droplets ~ay come from: airburst artillery, bomblets, bulk agent
fi I led missile warheads, aircraft spray, or landmines. These agents are used

to contaminate equipment and terrain and to cause casualties by skin
absorption. The agents may include persistent nerve agents, blister agents,
or any combination thereof. 
Nonpersistent Agents. The signs of a nonpersistent agent attack are insidiousin that they consists of vapors and aerosols from point or above-surfacedetonating arti I lery munitions, bombs, or bomblets. Use of these agents is
primarily intended to cause casualties by entry into the body through therespiratory tract. The agents may include nonpersistent nerve agents, blisteragents, blood agents, choking agents, or various combinations. 
Recognize a Chemical Attack 
Chemical agents are powerful and are released in ways that enable them tocover large areas. Since the agents are likely not to have smel I and Iittle orno color, it is necessary to learn other ways of recognizing chemical
hazards. To recognize when a chemical agent is present, you must be able to
identiy the characteristics of different chemical agents, factors that affectthe persistency of agents, and the types of munitions' systems used to deliverthe agents on the battlefield. 
Being alert for the agent symptoms or the delivery weapon is important for
protecting yourself and your unit against chemical attack. There are alsoadditional sources of information for determining that an attack is occurringor has occurred. These include alarm systems, chemical agent detector kits,contamination markers, NBC reports, appearance of dead animals, or theappearance of oily substances on foliage. 
9 
Characteristics of Chemical Agents 
Foui types of chemical agents are generally used in chemical warfare: nerve,
blister, blood, and choking agents. They may be disseminated in the form of 
I iquids, vapors, or aerosols. They may be persistent or nonpersistent. 
Choking Agents. Choking agents usually are disseminated as gases and are 
taken into the body by inhalation. They affect the respiratory system by
damaging the lungs and in extreme cases, causing them to fi I I with I iquid. 
Choking agents are colorless and have an odor resembling new-mown hay, grass, 
or green corn. 
Symptoms of Choking Agents. Symptoms of choking agents may include: 
-Coughing 
-Choking 
-Tightness in the chest 
-Nausea 
-Vomiting 
-Headache 
-Tears Choking Agents (Lung Damaging Agents) Chemical agents that aLtack lung tissue, primarily causing pulmonary edema 
(fluid buildup), are classified as lung damaging agents. This group includes phosgene (CG), diphosgene (DP), chlorine (CL), and chloropicrin (PS). Of 
these four agents, phosgene is the most dangerous and is more I ikely to be employed by the enemy in future conflict. Phosgene is a colorless gas. Protective Measures. Your protective mask gives adequate protection against
choking agents. Symptoms. During and immediately after exposure to choking agents (depending on agent concentration and length of exposure), you may experience some/alI of 
the following symptoms: -Lacrimation (tears). -Dry throat. -Coughing -Tightness of chest. 
10 
-Nausea and vomiting. 
-Headaches. 
Self-aid. 
-If phosgene is detected, irritation of the eyes, or change in the 
taste of a cigarette (may become tasteless or offensive) occurs, STOP 
BREATHING and mask immediately. 

-If vomiting occurs, follow procedure out I ined in for control Iing
vomiting when exposed to toxins. 

-If it appears that only mrnrmum amounts of the agent were inhaled (you do not experience difficulty in breathing, or if there is an absence of nausea and vomiting, and no more than the usual shortness of breath uponexertion), you may continue normal duties. 
-Seek medical assistance if any of the above symptoms occur. 
Death. With ordinary field exposure to choking agents, it is not anticipatedthat deaths wi II occur. However, prolonged exposure to high concentrations of 
the vapor and neglect or delay in masking can be fatal. 
BLISTER AGENTS. Blister agents affect the eyes and lungs, and blister the ~kin. Some types are painless, others sting, and sti I I others cause the 
formation of wheals, or welts, on the skin. Blister agents may appear as 
colorless to dark brown, oily I iquid droplets, but are normally invisible when in vapor form. In I iquid or vapor form, these agents may burn or blister anypart of the body that they contact, either internal or external. They are effective even in smal I quantities and produce delayed casualties. A drop of 
mustard-type blister agent the size of a pinhead can produce a blister 1 inch in diameter. Unprotected troops exposed to a low vapor concentration of agentfor a long period of time may eventually become casualties. 
Blister agents act on the eyes, the lungs, and the skin; they burn and blister the skin or any other part of the body they touch. They damage the 
respiratory tract when inhaled, and cause vomiting and diarrhea when absorbed. 
Blister Agents 
Blister agents (vesicants) include mustard (HD), nitrogen mustards (HN),
nitrogen mustards (HN), lewisite (L), and other arsenicals, mixtures of mustards and arsenicals, and phosgene oxime (CX). Vesicants act on the eyes,the lungs, and the skin. They burn and blister the skin or any other bodyparts that they come in contact with. Even, relatively low doses may cause serious injury. Blister agents damage the respiratory tract (nose, sinuses,
and windpipe) when inhaled and cause vomiting and diarrhea when absorbed. Most vesicants are deceitful and there is Iittle or no pain at the time of exposure, except for lewisite and phosgene oxime which cause immediate pain on contact. Thus, in some cases, signs of injury may not appear for several 
11 

hours after exposure. Vesicants can be delivered by artillery shell, mortar 
shell, rocket, aircraft spray, or bombs. 
These agents often have a more serious effect than is immediately apparent.While a few blister agents cause immediate pain or irritation, most do not cause any immediate pain, and signs of injury may not appear for several hours. 
Symptoms of Blister Agents. Blister agent symptoms may include any of the 
following: 
-Irritation or stinging of eyes 
-Irritation of nose 
-Stinging of skin, welts, and blisters 
Symptoms of Blister Agent Poisoning. 
-Instant eye pain upon contact with lewisite and phosgene oxime. No 
initial pain upon contact with mustard. 

-Inflammation and blister (burns), i.e., tissue destruction. The 
severity of a chemical burn is directly related to the concentration of the 
agent and the duration of contact with the skin. The longer the agent is in 
contact with the tissue, the more serious the injury. 
-Vomiting and diarrhea. Exposure to high concentrations of vesicants may cause vomiting and/or diarrhea. 
-Death. With ordinary field exposure to vesicant vapors, it is not anticipated that death wi I I occur from the internal body (systemic) effects of the absorbed agent. However, such deaths may occur from prolonged exposure to 
high concentrations of vapor or instances of extensive I iquid contamination 
(over wide areas) of the skin, particularly when decontamination is neglected or unduly delayed. 
First Aid Measures 
Step 1. Use your M258A1 decontamination kit to decontaminate your skin and use water to flush contaminated eyes. Decontamination of vesicants must be accomplished immediately. 
Step 2. If blisters form, cover them loosely with a field dressing and secure the dressing. 
CAUTION 
Blisters are actually burns. DO NOT attempt to decontaminate skin where blisters have formed. 
12 

Step 3. If you receive blisters over a wide area of the body, you are 
considered seriously burned. Seek medical treatment IMMEDIATELY. 
Step 4. If vomiting or diarrhea occurs after having been exposed to blister 
agents, seek medical treatment IMMEDIATELY. 
Protective Measures. Your protective mask with hood and protective 
overgarments provides you protection against blister agents. If it is known 
or suspected that blister agents are being used, STOP BREATHING, mask and put 
on alI of your protective overgarments. 
CAUTION 
Large drops of Iiquid vesicants on protective overgarmentensemble may penetrate garment if allowed to stand for an extended period. Remove large droplets as soon as possibleby pinch blotting with M258A1 towelettes or other disposablematerial. 
3LOOD AGENTS. Blood agents usually are disseminated as vapors or gases and are taken into the body by breathing. They affect the circulatory and respiratory systems by preventing the body eel Is from using the oxygen carried by the blood. After inhal~g a high concentration of blood agent; a humari maybecome unconscious and die within a few minutes. Blood agents are colorless, but may have a faint odor similar to peach kernels or bittei almonds. Some blood agents are very irritating to the eyes and mucous membranes. 
Symptoms of Blood Agents. Depending upon the amount of agent present, the effects of blood agents may range from mild incapacitation to death. Some of the symptoms are: 
Vertigo (dizziness) 
Nausea 
Headache 
Convulsions 
Coma 
NERVE AGENTS 
Background Information 
Nerve agents are among the dead! iest chemical agents. They can be delivered by arti I lery she! I, mortar shel I, rocket, aircraft bomb or spray, and land m1ne. Nerve agents enter the body by inhalation, ingestion, and through the skin. Depending on the route of entry and amount, nerve agents can produce 
13 

InJury or death within minutes and achieve their effects with smal I amounts of 
the agent. Nerve agents are absorbed rapidly and the effects are felt 
immediately upon entry into the body. You wi I I be issued the nerve agent
antidote kit MARK I, each containing two autoinjectors (clipped together-two 
to a kit), which should be carried in the inside pocket of your mask carrier. 

When you recognize the signs and symptoms of nerve agent poisoning, you should 
quickly put on the protective mask and then inject yourself with one dose of 
the antidote. You should inject yourself in the outside (lateral) high
muscle, or for a very thin soldier, the upper, outer part of the buttocks 
(lateral buttocks). 

Symptoms of Nerve Agent Poisoning 
The symptoms of nerve agent poisoning are grouped as~symptoms, (those 

symptoms which you experience yourself (self-aid), or severe symptoms (those 
symptoms which require your assistance (buddy-aid). 
Early Symptoms (Self-aid) 

-Unexplained runny nose. 
-Unexplained sudden headache. 
-Excessive flow of saliva (drooling). 
-Tightness of chest, creating breathing difficulties. 
-Muscular twitching of exposed/contaminated skin. 
-Stomach cramps. 
-Nausea. 

Difficulty seeing (bltirred vision). 
Severe Symptoms (Buddy-aid) -Strange and confused behavior. -Gurgling sounds produced when breathing. -Severely pinpointed pupi Is. -Red eyes with tearing. -Vomiting. -Severe muscular twitching. -Loss of bladder/bowel control. 
14 

-Convulsions. 
-Stoppage of breathing. 
(
First Aid for Nerve Agent Poisoning 
Self-aid. 
Step 1.  Put  on  protective mask.  
Step 2.  Remove  one  nerve  agent antidote kit  from  the mask carrier.  
Step 3.  Hold  the set  of  injectors by  the plastic clip with  the big injector  

on top at eye level (where you can see it). 

Step 4. Grasp the smaller auto injector with the thumb and two fingers of the 
free hand. 
Step 5. Pul I the injector out of the clip with a smooth motion. 
Step 6. Form a fist around the auto jector. 
Step 7. Place the green (needle) end of the injector against your outer 

(lateral) thigh muscle, or if you ar a thinly bui It individual, place injector 

against the upper, outer (lateral) part of your buttocks. 
Step 8. Apply firm even pressure to the injector unti I it functions by 
pushing the needle into your thigh muscle. 

Step 9. Hold the injector in place for at least ten seconds. 
Step 10. Carefully remove the auto injector. 
Step 11. Place the used injector carefully (watch out for the needle) between 

two fingers of the hand holding the clip. 
Step ~2. Pul I the larger injector out of the clip and inject yourself the 
same way as before, holding the black (needle) end against your outer thigh, 

or if you are a thinly bui It individual place the injector against the upper 
outer (lateral) part of your buttocks. 
Step 13. Drop the clip without dropping the used injectors. 
Step 14. Attach the used auto injectors to your clothing. 

-Push the needle of the used injectors (one at a tjme) through the left pocket flap of your protective overshirt. -Bend the needle to form a hook. 
15 

Step 15. Wait 10-15 minutes after g1v1ng yourself the first set of injectors. If you are sti I I experiencing any of the symptoms (unexplained runny nose, sudden unexplained headache, drooling, stomach cramps, nausea, or difficulty breathing or seeing), or if symptoms recur, give yourself the second set of injections. 
CAUTIONJ If, within 5 minutes after the administration of any set of injections, your heart beats very rapidly and your mouth becomes very dry, DO NOT give yourself another set of injections. Step 16. Wait 10-15 minutes after giving yourself the second set of injections. If you are sti I I experiencing any of the symptoms, or if symptoms recur, give yourself a third set of injections. CAUTION DO NOT give yourself more than .three sets of injections of antidote. 
Step 17. Seek medical aid ~f symptoms persist after giving yourself three 
sets of injections. 
Buddy-aid 
Step 1. Mask the casualty. 

-Move (rol I) the casualty from whatever position he/she is in onto his/her back (face up). Open the casualty's mask carrier and remove the protective mask. -Situate yourself near the casualty's head. -Squat near the casualty's left shoulder, facing his/her feet. 
CAUTION DO NOT KNEEL. If you kneel, the action may force the chemical agent into or through your protective clothing. 
-Open the mask. 
-Grasp the mask with your thumbs o~tside the cheek pouches and your 

fingers insid~ (the cheek pouches). -Spread the mask open and position it on the casualty's chin. Lift the casualty's head and slide the head harness over it as follows: 
16 

-Position thumbs through the two bottom straps of the head harness. -Cup the casualy's head with the fingers of both hands and Iift 
s I i gh t I y. -Move thumbs back and down behind the casualty's ears. -Make sure the head pad is centered in the middle of the back of the 
head. Check for a complete mask seal by covering the mask's inlet valves. The mask will collapse if properly fitted, indicating a good seal. 
Pul I the protective hood over the head, neck, and shoulders of the casua Ity. Step 2. Administer the antidote injections. 
-Position yourself near the casualty's left thrgh; this wi I I make it easier to reach into the casualty's mask carrier. -Remove one nerve~gent antidote kit from the inside pocket of the casualty's mask carrier. -Hold the set of injectors by the plastic clip with the big injector on top in front of you at eye level (where you can see it). -Grasp the Atropine (smal I) auto injector with the thumb and first two fingers of the free hand. -Pul I the injector out of the clip with a smooth motion. -Form a fist around the auto injector. 
-Place the green (needle) end of the injector against the casualty's outer thigh muscle. For thinly bui It individuals, re-position casualty onto his/her side or stomach and inject the antidote into the upper buttocks. 
-Apply firm even pressure to the injector until it functions bypushing the needle into the casualty's muscle. -Hold the injector in place for at least 10 seconds. -Remove the autoinjector. -Place the used injec~or carefully (watch out for the needle!)between two fingers of the hand holding the clip. 
I 
-Pul I out the large injector and inject the casualty the same way as before, holding the black (n edle) end against the casualy's outer thigh or upper buttocks. ! 
17 

-Drop the clip without dropping the used injectors. -Attach the extended autoinjectors to the casualty's clothing. -Push the needle of the used injectors (one-at-a-time) through thepocket flap of the casualty's protective outer garment. -Bend the needle to form a book. CAUTION DO NOT stick yourself with the needle. Step 3. Immediately repeat the above steps using the second and third kits,nerve agent antidote, MARK I. Step 4. Decontaminate the casualty's skin. VOMITING AGENTS Vomiting agents produce a strong pepper-! ike irritation in the upper
respiratory tract with irritation of the eyes and tearing. They cause violentuncontrollable sneezing, coughing, and vomiting, and a general feeling ofdiscomfort. The principal agents in this group are: diphenylchlorasine (DA),
diphenylaminearsine chloride (adamsite, (DM), and diphenylcyanarsine (DC).They are dispensed as aerosols and produce their effects by inhalation or by
direct action on the eyes. When concentrated, DM smoke is canary yellow; DAand DC smokes are white. AI I become colorless when diluted with air. Low
concentrations of these agents are effective and may not be detected at thetime of exposure. Protective Measures. Your protective mask provides adequate protectionagainst vomiting agents. Should you become exposed to these agents,protective overgarments are not necessarily required to be worn. Symptoms. A feeling of pain and sense of fullness in the nose and sinuses. -Severe headache or burning sensation in the throat. -A feeling of tightness and pain in the chest. Irritation of the eyes and tearing. -Uncontrollable coughing, sneezing, and salivation. -Nasal secretion (runny nose) accompanied. by pronounced nausea and
vomiting. 
-Mental depression may occur during the progression of these symptoms.Mi ld"symptoms caused by very low concentration resemble those of a severe 
18 
cold. The onset (start) of symptoms may be delayed for several minutes after initial exposure, especially with OM. However, you may be effectively exposedto the agent long before the smoke is suspected and/or detected. 
-Symptoms of exposure to field concentrations of vomiting agents usuallyreach their climax in 5 to 10 minutes and completely disappear with 1 to 3 hours. However, DEATH can occur if an individual is exposed to highconcentrations in a confined space. 
-Symptoms have a tendency to increase in severity for several minutes after masking, thus giving the impression that your mask is ineffective. Should this occur, remove your mask only under self-control led conditions and only to accomplish those self-aid measures. 
Self-aid. If exposed to vomiting agents: 
-STOP breathing and put on mask. 
-If avai !able, crush chloroform capsule in a wad of cotton
one or  
handkerchief and push saturated material instant relief from these symptoms.  inside mask.  Chloroform wi I I provide  
_..  

-If eyes, face, or other exposed skin areas become contaminated, follow 
procedures as described before. 
-If vomiting occurs, follow procedures as described for toxins. If necessary, rinse your mouth with water, but do not swallow. 
TEAR AGENTS (CS or CN) 
Should you be exposed to a tear agent before masking, it can cause an increased flow of tears and intense eye pain. It may irritate the upperrespiratory tract. If you mask after exposure, be .sure to clear your mask and 
keep your eyes open as much as possible. Recovery from the tear agent effects wi I I be spontaneous. 
If heavy skin contamination occurs in a hot, humid, or closed environment,blistering may result unless the agent is rinsed from the skin with water. If the agent in liquid or solid form has entered your eyes, force your eyes openand flush them with water. 
INCAPACITATING AGENTS 
Generally speaking, an incapacitating agent is any compound which can interfere with the performance of mi Iitary duties by affecting the central nervous system and by producing muscular weakness and abnormal behavior. It is I ikely that such agents wi I I be disseminated by smoke-producing munitions 
or aerosols, thus making breathing their means of entry into the body. The use 9f the protective mask is, therefore, essential for protection againstagents. 
19 

There is no special first aid to rei ieve the symptoms of incapacitating 
agents. Supportive first aid and physical restraint may be indicated. 
Weapons and other potentially harmful materials should be removed from th 
possession of individuals who are suspected of having these symptoms. This 
includes cigarettes, matches, medications, and smal I items which might be 
swallowed accidentally. Delirious persons have been known to attempt to eat 
items bearing only a superficial resemblance to food. 
Anticholinergic drugs (BZ type) may produce alarming dryness and coating of 
the lips and tongue; however, there is usually no danger of immediate 
dehydration. Fluids should be given sparingly, if at alI, becsause of the 
danger of vomiting and because of the I ikel ihood of temporary urinary
retention due to para1ysis of bladder muscles. An important medical 
consideration is the possibi Iity of heatstroke caused by the stoppage of 
sweating. If the environmental temperature is above 78° F, remove excessive 
clothing from the soldier and dampen him/her to allow evaporative cooling and 
prevent dehydration. If the soldier does not readily improve, apply first aid 
measures for heatstroke and seek medical attention. 
Individuals may be exposed to toxic substances in everyday activities or on 
the battlefield. Learn to identify the signs and symptoms and take immediate 
first aid measures to reduee or eliminate the effects of the substance. 
Medical personnel wi I I nor-always be readily available to provide first aid. 
Your quick response can make the difference between life and death for 
yourself and for your fellow soldiers. 
Current doctrine on treatment of chemical/biological agent casualties 
encompasses medical evacuations only when absolutely necessary. When exposed
to sub-lethal doses of nerve agent for example, the affected soldier may not 
be able to pe~form primary tasks; for instance, a TOW gummer who rei ies who Ily on the ability to see to track targets. Nerve agents may severely impair the soldier's vision to the point he/she cannot effectively employ the weaponsystem. However, this individual may recover, probably sooner than a replacement can be sought or obtained. 
Consider having 10 percent or more of your unit stricken with sub-lethal 
expospre of chemical agent. To evacuate this large a number would severly
cripple the unit's abi Iity to accomplish its mission. As the supervisor, it 
is your responsibility to consider the possibility of evacuating
chemical/biological casualties from the battlefield in conjunction with organic medical personnel. If the decision is made to evacuate, you, as the 
supervisor, must expedite that mission. 
CHARACTERISTICS OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS 
On every battlefield, the soldier has to fight disease as wei I as the enemy.Disease has proven to be a formidable antagonist, determining the outcome of many battles. Prior to the development of modern medicine, disease ki Iled more soldiers than did actual combat. This was due to overcrowding, poor camp
hygiene, inadequate medical support, and the physical stresses of combat. World War I I was the first war in the history of the US Army where deaths from 
20 

combat exceeded those from disease. But death from disease is not the only
problem. The fighting strength of the US Army in World War I I was
significantly weakened by lost man-days due to sickness. In World War I I, the
number of lost man-days due to naturally occurring disease was equivalent to
18 US Army infantry divisions operating for a 3-year period. 
The mi Jitary potential of disease has not been overlooked. If naturally
occurring disease can have a major mi I itary impact, how much greater could
that effect be if disease-producing microorganisms were employed
intentionally? Biological operations are not new. The popular notion was
that foul odors and decaying material could cause disease. In the Middle
Ages, this misconception led to the hurling of corpses and excreta into
besieged cities by means of an immense machine cal led a trebuchet. A more
sophisticated approach was used by the British against the Indians at FortPitt, Pennsylvania in 1763. The British commander infected the local Indiantribe with smallpox by giving them blankets taken from smallpox patients. The
Indians had a low biological resistance to the disease and many died. 
In the 20th century there have been numerous allegations about the use of
biological agents. There is one case which is supported by substantial
evidence. Duing World War I, Germany used the causative agent, glanders, toinfect French and Romanian~cavalry horses. Biological agent research was alsoactive in Germany and Japan during the 1930s. The threat that this biological
research posed to the Free World was evaluated in the United States by the
National Academy of Sciences. Their study determined that "the value of
biological warfare wi I I be a debatable question unti I it has been clearly
proven or disproven by experiences. The wide assumption is that any method
which appears to offer advantages to a nation at war wi I I be vigorously
employed by that nation. There is but one logical course to pursue, namely,to study the possibilities of such warfare from every angle, make everypreparation for reducing its effectiveness, and thereby, reduce the Iikel ihoodof its use". The report led to the development of the US Army biological
defense research program in 1942. 
The ultimate objective of biological operations is to directly or indirectly
reduce a target population's abi I ity to wage war. This objective might beachieved directly by attacking you. It also might be achieved indirectly by
attacking your crops, domestic animals, or supplies, thereby limiting yourmeans of support. 
General Characteristics of Biological Agents 
Biological weapon systems are technically feasible. They possess a masscasualty potential which cannot be safely ignored. It is imperative to be
able to defend against biological attack. The first step in preparing a sounddefense is to understand the nature of the threat. This involves sweepingaway some of the misconceptions associated with biological agents. Theseagents are not the ultimate weapons referred to by science fiction writers.Knowledge of the general characteristics of biological agents and toxinsenables the soldier to place their threat in perspective. 
21 
Low Agent Requirement. Biological weapon systems are unique in that the 
agents involved are alive. Only a smal I number of microorganisms are needed 
to establish infection. The agents reproduce in the host to bring about 
disease. A natural regional outbreak of a disease which affects many a 
individual and spreads rapidly is cal led an epidemic. In such a situation 
there is an unusual increase in the number of cases of a disease in a limited time among a I imited population. In nature, the spread of disease occurs from direct contact between individuals, contact with or ingestion of excreta and contaminated food, exposure to dusts and mists of infective material (aerosols) and from transmission by animal or anthropod vectors. Followinglarge-scale dissemination of a biological agent, an initial outbreak of disease of epidemic proportion might occur. This depends upon th contagiousness of the agent, the presence or absence of favorable environmental conditions, and the level of medical support. Epidemics among any group can be control led or minimized by sanitation, immunization, quarantine, and treatment. Rapidly spreading epidemics are not considered to be the Iikely result of a biological attack in a civi Iized country, so long as, control Iing factors remain at a high level of efficiency. 
Large-Area Coverage. Biological weapon systems have the potential to cover larger areas than other weapons. Extremely large numbers of infective doses of biological agents can bll of smal I volume because of the microscopic size of 
the organisms. A single delivery vehicle can cover target areas up to 
thousands of square kilometers with a casualty-producing biological agent 
aeroso I. 
Dependence on Weather. There are four significant weather conditions which 
directly affect a biological agent aerosol. These are sunlight (ultravioletradiation), relative humidity, wind (both speed and direction), and air sabi lity. Ultraviolet radiation is lethal to most biological agents;therefore, most biological attacks may be expecte at night. Each potentialbiological agent, once aerosolized, has an optimum relative humidityrequirement for survival. Therefore, the degree of variance from the optimum,influences the rate of decay of an aerosol. However, there are some potentialbiological agents that are not significantly influenced by the relative humidity when in an aerosol form. The importance of wind effects varies with the type of weapon system used to disseminate the agent. If dissemination is by a weapon that releases the agent directly on target, then wind direction and speed have Iittle effect on the target coverage; however, downwind effects from the target must be considered. If dissemination is by a weapon that releases the agent upwind of a target area, then the wind must carry it to the target area. Normally, the most effective wind speeds for effective target coverage with a biological agent aerosol involving downwind travel are from 8 
to 18 knots. 
Delayed Effect. Biological agents do not cause casualties immediately. Time 
is required for the agent to reproduce. After the microorganisms have multiplied in sufficient quantity, they may overcome the body defenses and cause disease. There is a period of time from the time of entry into man to the time he is actually sick and becomes a casualty. This period of time, "exposure-to-casualty" (incubation period) is specific for each agent and varies from a few days to a few weeks or even months. 
22 

Pervasive. The particles of biological agent aerosols are so smal I and I ight 
that they are carried by wind currents or insects (vectors) into dug-in
posdions, fortifications, or other shelters and structures. So-called hard
targets for other weapon systems would not be considered hard targets for
biological weapon systems. It is possible that the dose received inside a
nonai rtight structure may exceed that received on the outside. This is true
because the structure, once penetrated, affords protection for the agent and
it wi I I probably persist for a much longer period of time. 
Nondestructive. Since biological agents (other than antimaterial agents)affect only Iiving things; equipment, facilities, and structures wi I I be leftintact by a biological attack. In addition, explosive biological munitionsuse very low order explosives for dissemination of the agent. Such explosionsare not of sufficient force to produce any significant destruction. Sprayweapon systems are completely nondestructive. 
Difficult to Detect. Biological agents that are disseminatd as aerosols are
not detectable by any of the five physical senses (sight, smel I, taste, touch,and hearing). When you come in contact with such an aerosol, you inhale theorganisms without suspecting you have been the target of an attack. Effectsdo not occur immediately, so the attack goes unnoticed. It is only withspecial instruments that the presence of biological agents can be detected.At present, the capabi Iities of such instruments are very I imited. 
Decay of Agent. Biological agents are living microorganisms, they are
affected by environmental conditions-during storage, shipment, and
dissemination. Refrigeration is necessary during storage and shipment to
reduce the loss of viability and strength of the agent. The rate at which
most microorganisms die off is predictale arid is referred to as the "decay
rate". 
Easy to Produce. Biological agents are the least expensive of the mass
casualty weapons. Any enemy nation with a modest biological research or
production base, such as in the pharmaceutical or brewing industry, could
produce biological agents. 
Severity of Effects. Effects can be either lethal or nonlethal
(incapacitating). Lethal or ki I ling agents can produce death in susceptible
individuals, but from a practical standpoint, death occurs only in apercentage of those exposed. The nonlethal pathogenic agents usually do notki I I but might produce infection or disease which disables susceptible
individuals. Food and industrial products can be rendered unsafe or unfit foruse by contamination or by the effects resulting from contamination with
biological agents. 
General Characteristics of Toxins 
General lyi a poison produced by microorganisms, vegetables, or animals iscal led a toxin. True toxins are protein which are more or less unstable, and
require a period of incubation or a latent period .to produce symptoms. 
23 
Once a toxin-producing pathogen has entered the body, the various toxins can disrupt the delicate chemical balance within the body's eel Is and a disease can result. These toxins can be broadly classed into two types depending upon their composition, resistance to heat, and method of release from the producing organism. 
Exotoxins. Exotoxins are proteins of varying molecular weight. Their primary action is upon the digestive tract. These toxins produce severe nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea, but the possibi I ity of death is remote. Man normally acquires these heat-stable toxins following ingestion of contaminated food. 
Endotoxins. Endotoxins, a protein complex, are synthesized by the eel I membrane and become a part of the eel I wal I of the microorganism. Since this 
toxin is part of the cell wall, it can only be released upon death. The Rickettsiae which causes typhus fever produces an endotoxin which causes the 
rapid destruction of the red blood eel Is resulting in bleeding. 
Recognize a Biological Attack 
Although biological agents are used on different targets to produce varying effects on the targets, the ultimate objective of Threat use of biological agents is to reduce the abi~ity of US forces to fight. This objective may be accomplished by ki I ling or incapacitating troops and/or by creating food and supply shortages. 
living germ or microorganism type biological weapons systems (for example, bacteria, viruses, rickettsiae, fungi) are unique in that the agents involved areal ive. If used by the Threat forces, these agents wi II probably be used primarily in a straight role to attack support troops at rear area 
instal lations or to destroy plant and animal resources. 
Only a smal I number of microorganisms are needed to establish infection. The agents reproduce in the host body to bring about disease. large-scale dissemination of a biological agent may cause an outbreak of disease of epidemic proportions. An epidemic is an unusual increase in the number of cases of a disease in a limited population. How great the epidemic is depends upon the contagiousness of the agent, the presence or absence of favorable environment conditions, and the level of medical support. 
Types of Biological Agents. Biological antipersonnel agents are those which are effective directly against humans and are selected on the basis of their abi I ity to cause or disabi I ity through disease. Biological antipersonnel agents may include bacteria, rickettsiae, viruses, or fungi. Bacteria can cause such diseases in humans as scarlet feve~. meningococcal meningitis, gonorrhea, anthrax, syphi I I is, and salmonel Ia food poisoning. 
Rickettsiae are parasites that produce diseases such as typhus fever and spotted fever. Viruses cause diseases such as influenza, rabies, smallpox, yellow fever, infectious hepatitis, mumps, and measles. Fungi cause diseases that may resemble influenza in milder cases, or chronic infections involving alI organs of the body. 
24 

Several diseases transmitted by microorganisms begin in animals and are 
transmitted to humans. Others are caused by insects or contaminated water or
food. Sti I I others are transmitted by direct contact with infected persons. 
Symptoms of Biological Agents. Unlike symptoms of chemical agents, biologicalagents symptoms may not appear for days following an attack. The incubation 
period makes it important for soldiers to be alert for any signs of i I lness in
their unit, especially if an unusual number of soldiers begin to display
symptoms of i I lness. There also wi II be an increase in the sick cal I rate. 
These symptoms may indicate that a biological attack has occurred. 
Factors that Influence the Effect of Biological Agents. In most cases, thenormal healthy body is capable of overcoming the invasion of smal I quanti ties of disease-producing microorganisms. However, the body's defenses are a relative matter, it is generally expected that they wi I I not be able to overcome the mass invasion of disease germs I ikely to be encountered during
biological attack by Threat forces. Some of the factors involved in the 
infection of individuals by biological agents are the route of entry of the agent into the body, the body defenses available to fight the agent at the
time it enters the body, and the effectiveness of the agent at that time. 
Toxins. Toxic biological~eapon systems are non-1 iving, poisonous, chemical compounds which are produced synthetically or by germs, animals, or plants.Toxins can produce the same symptoms as nerve, blister, choking, and blood agents and in any combination of effects. Operationally, they behave in much the same way as chemical agents. Because of these characteristics, it isexpected that the enemy may use toxins in a tactical situation. 
There are no rapid detection/warning devices currently fielded for biological weapon system defense. Therefore, the soldier must rely on intel Iigencewarning, or the recognition of the patterns of attack. 
Suspect a biological attack if: 
Low-flying aircraft appear to produce a mist or spray. 
, Ammunition is delivered by enemy aircraft that has 
no 
apparent explosive impact. 
Unusual bomblets are found. 
Numerous, unexplained, iII personnel or animals are in the area. 
Unusual amounts of vectors (for example, lice, ticks, fleas, and 
mosquitoes) are present or vectors that are not normally abundant tn
the area of operations. 
25 

Toxins Toxins areal leged to have been used in recent conflicts. Witnesses and victims have described the agent as toxic rain (or yellow rain) because it was 
reported to have been released from aircraft as a yellow powder or Iiquid that covered the ground, structures, vegetation, and people below it. Protective Measures. Individual protective measures normally associated with 
persistent chemical agents wi I I provide you protection against toxins, i.e., the wearing of the protective mask with hood; overgarment ensemble, gloves and booties; and implementation of mission oriented protective posture level-4 (MOPP 4). 
Symptoms. The symptoms associated with toxins may include any/alI of the following: -Dizziness. Severe itching or tingling of the skin. Formation of multiple, smal I, hard blisters. -Coughing of blood. 
-Shock and/or death. Self-aid. Upon recognition of an attack employing toxins or the onset (start)of symptoms Iisted above, you must immediately take the following actions: 
Step 1. STOP BREATHING and put on your protective mask with hood and protective clothing. Step 2. Should severe itching of the face become unbearable, quickly: Loosen the cap on your canteen. -, Remove helmet. Take and hold a deep breasth and remove mask. -While holding your breath, quickly, close your eyes and flush your face with generous amounts of water. 
CAUTION 
Do not rub or scratch your eyes or let the water run onto your
clothes or protective overgarments. 

Step 3. Put on, reseal, clear, and check mask. NOTE The effectiveness of the M258A1 skin decontamination kit is unknown at this time; however, flushing the skin with large amounts of water wi I I reduce the effectiveness of the toxins. 
26 

Step 4. If vomiting occurs: 
Saturate a piece of cloth or handkerchief with water. 
Remove your mask and hold the dampened cloth over your mouth and nose. 
Breathe through the dampened cloth and attempt to control vomiting. If
necessary, rinse your mouth with waer, but do not swallow. 
Step 5. After having brought vomiting under control, put on, reseal, clear,
and check mask; fasten hood. 
Medical Assistance. If you suspect that you have been exposed to toxins, you
should seek medical assistance immediately. 
SCREENING SMOKES 
Titanium Tetrachloride (FM) Smoke. This smoke is relatively nontoxic, but the
I iquid burns the skin Iike a strong acid. The smoke is irritating to the nose
and throat, but only mi Idly so, at the concentration usually found in a smoke
cloud. 
The protective mask should be worn in heavy concentrati ions of FM.
Flush any liquid FM from the skin with water. 
Sulfur Trioxide-Chlorosulfonic Acid Solution (FS) Smoke. 
Smoke of this
solution causes a prickling sensation on the skin because of the minute acid
particles of which it is composed. 
Liquid FS is highly corrosive to the
skin. Splashes of liquid FS in the eyes produce extremely painful acid
burns. Exposure to heavy concentration or prolonged exposure to ordinary
concentrations may cause severe irritation of the eyes, the skin, and the
respiratory tract. The protective mask should be worn in high FS smoke
concentrations. Flush any liquid FS from the skin and eyes with water. 
HC Mixture (HC). High concentrations of this smoke encountered near an
operating munition, in an inclosed space, or near dense HC smoke screens, and
in ordinary field concentrations for a prolonged period may have a sufficient
amount of zinc chloride bui It up to produce toxic effects. The protective
mask should, therefore, be worn. The effects of exposure to HC may includeirritation of the nose and throat, coughing, choking, h~adache, fever, chestand muscular pains, and suffocation. If nausea, vomiting, or difficulty inbreathing occurs, get medical aid as soon as conditions permit. Aspirin wi I I
ease general discomfort. 
Oi I Smoke. 
Inhalation of oi I smoke produces no apparent symptoms immediatelyeven though it is inhaled for extended periods. Operating personnel exposedto prolonged high concentraions of oi I smoke should wear protective masks as
much of the time as possible since the development of pneumonia may occur with
prolonged breathing of smoke. 
White Phosphorus (WP) Smoke. This smoke is harmless in normal fieldconditions; however, injuries from burning solid or I iquid WP are serious.Thes~ burns heal very slowly. 
27 
Incendiaries 
Incendiaries can be grouped as white phosphorus, thickened fuel, metal, and oi 1 and metal. You must learn to protect yourself against these types of 
incendiaries. 
-White phosphorus (WP) is used primarily as a smoke producer but can be used for its incendiary effect to ignite field expendients and combustible materials. The burns from WP are usually multiple, deep, and variable in size. When particles of WP get on the skin or clothing, they continue to burn unti I deprived of air. They also have a tendency to stick to a surface and must be brushed off or picked out. 
Should burning WP strike you, proceed as follows: 
Step 1. Smother the flame by submerging yourself in water or by dousing the WP with water from your canteen or any other source. Urine, a wet cloth, or mud can be used. Copper sulfate pads, if available, can be moistened and put over the burning WP. The copper sulfate reacts chemically to coat the phosphorus particles and to prevent further activity. You may be able to take off contaminated clothing quickly before the phosphorus burns through to the skin. 
NOTE 
Since WP is poisonous to the system, grease or oi I should NOT be used to smother the flame because the WP wi I I be absorbed into the body with the grease or oi I. 
Step 2. Keep the WP rarticles covered with wet material to exclude air unti I you can remove them .or get them removed from your skin. 
Step 3. Remove the WP particles from the skin by brushing them with a wet cloth and by picking them out with a knife, bayonet, stick, or similar object. 
Step 4. Report to a medical faci I ity for treatment as soon as your mission permits. 
-Thickened fuel mixtures (napalm) have a tendency to cling to the clothing and the body surfaces, thereby producing prolonged exposure and severe burns. The first aid for these burns is the same as for other heat burns. The heat and irritating gases given off by these combustible mixtures may cause lung damage, which must be treated by a medical officer. 
-Metal incendiaries pose special problems. Thermite and thermate particles on the skin should be immediately cooled with water and then removed. Even though thermate particles have their own oxygen supply and continue to burn under water, it helps to cool them with water. The first aid for these burns is the same as for other heat burns. Particles of magnesium on the skin burn quickly and deeply. Like other metal incendiaries, they must be removed. Ordinarily, the complete removal of these particles should be done by trained personnel at a medical treatment faci I ity, using local anesthesia. Immediate medical treatment is required. 
28 

-Oil and metal incendiaries have much the same effect on contact with theski~ and clothing as those discussed above. 
IMPLEMENT MISSION-ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE (MOPP) CONDITIONS Given a direcdtive to implement a specific MOPP level, protective masks, andclothing for you and your soldiers. STANDARDS Soldiers are wearing the appropriate clothing for the MOPP level specified andalI clothing and equipment is properly fitted. PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 	Tel I your soldiers to put on the proper protective clothing and equipment
for the designated MOPP level. The MOPP level wi I I normally be set by your
chain of command. However, if your unit is attacked with chemical agents
without warning, go immedi~ely to MOPP 4. 

MOPP 	LEVEL OVERGARMENT OVERBOOTS MASK/HOOD GLOVES 0 STOWED(NOTE A) STOWED(NOTE A) CARRIED STOWED(NOTE A) 1 WORN (NOTE B) CARRIED CARRIED CARRIED 2 WORN (NOTE B) WORN CARRIED CARRIED 3 WORN (NOTE B) WORN WORN· (NOTE C) CARRIED
! 
4 WORN CLOSED WORN WORN CLOSED WORN NOTE A -ITEMS WILL BE STOWED NEARBY FOR READINESS NOTE B -OVERGARMENT WORN OPEN OR CLOSED BASED UPON THE TEMPERATURE NOTE C -HOOD WORN OPEN OR CLOSED BASED UPON THE TEMPERATURE Check yourself and your soldiers to be sure that: 
a. 	AI I soldiers are wearing the right clothing and equipment for the
designated MOPP level .I 
b. 	At MOPP levels 3 and 4 protective masks fit properly and are sealed. 
c. 	Protective clothing fits properly. 
29 
REFERENCES: 
FM 21-3, TASK 031-503-3008 
MISSION-ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE 
Threat forces have the capability to employ chemical and biological agents and are wi I ling to do so. Protective clothing and equipment are used to counter this threat through Mission-Oriented Protective Posture (MOPP). MOPP is a flexible system of protection against chemical and biological agents which is used to facilitate mission accomplishment. It requires the soldier to wear individual protective equipment consistent with the chemical threat, the work rate imposed by the mission, and the temperature. Individual protective clothing is a standard issue item. 
It is the corps and higher-level commanders' resonsibi lity to direct MOPP 0 and MOPP 1 and recommend the higher MOPP levels appropriate to the threat. They are aware of the strategic tactical intelligence that might indicate the probable use of NBC weapons. Ordering MOPP 2 through MOPP 4 is the responsibi I ity of division and lower-level commanders. The ultimate responsibi I ity, however, Ls that of the company commander. At this level there is a better appreciation for what the unit can and cannot do. The commander increases or decreases the unit's protective posture based on an analysis of the situation and guidance from higher command. Final responsibi I ity at this level retains the flexibi Iity the system provides. 
MOPP does not mean that individuals must wear alI of their protective equipment alI of the time. In fact, because of duty requirements, body heat buildup, and basic human needs, protective clothing and equipment cannot be worn for an indefinite period. MOPP levels give the commander and staff a range of choices of chemical protection for their units, from no protection at alI to ful I protective clothing and equipment. The ideal situati ion is to be able to determine a balance between the need for chemical protection and the work rate required by the mission. This ideal balance wi I I minimize both chemical and heat casualties. Unfortunately, the ideal wi I I usually be diffi~ult to achieve. 
All combat operations are conducted under the Mission-Oriented Protective 
. Posture system. Of course, if there is no threat, there is no protection requirement; this is cal led MOPP 0. At the other extreme, when there is a continuing, immediate threat and the Threat force has a capabi I ity to produce an unacceptable casualty level among unprotected troops, they may be required to wear protective clothing and equipment for extended periods. 
The chemical protective overgarment ensemble is permeable clothing. It is normally worn over the duty uniform. The overgarment consists of one coat (also cal led a shirt) and one pair of trousers. Both are expendable. The shirt and trousers are made of two layers of material. The outer layer is made of nylon cotton. The inner layer is charcoal-impregnated polyurethane foam. Some charcoal wi I I be deposited on clothing worn under the undergarment. This wi I I not detract from the chemical characteristics of the overgarment. 
30 

The shirt has a short stand-up collar and a ful 1-length zipper opening covered 
by a_double protective flap. The cuff of the sleeves has elasic closures. Two outer pockets are located at chest level. The trousers have two pocketsand a fly-fran with a protective flap. The waist has adjustable tabs plussuspenders and belt loops. Each leg has a zipper closure on the lower outside 
section. The overgarment is available in eight sizes: xxx-smal I, xx-smal I,
x-smal I, smal I, medium, large, x-large, and xx-large. When sizing the 
overgarment, remember that it is worn over the duty uniform. The overgarment
is packaged in a vapor barrier bag. This bag protects the overgarment from possible ontamination due to moisture; petroleum, oi I, and lubricants (POL)products; and solvents. General instructions and a sizing chart are printed on the bag. The overgarment provides protection to the soldier exposed to 
vapors, aerosols, and smal I liquid droplets of nerve and bl.ister agents. The 
protective capabi Iities start with the opening of the vapor barrier bag and 
continues for up to 14 days, or unti I the overgarment becomes contaminated. 
When contaminated, the overgarment gives the soldier a minimum of 6 hours of protection before it must be discarded. 
The footwear covers are loose-fiting impermeable rubber. They have anon-slipsole. There are two models: one uses four eyelets to lace around the foot,the other uses five eyelets. The footwear covers are one-size-fits-alI. They can be worn on either the~ight or left foot. The footwear covers are issued in a plasic bag with two pairs of laces and an instruction sheet. The footwear covers provide protection to the soldier from alI known field concentrations of chemical agents. This protection is provided for a minimum of 14 days starting with the first day of wear. If the footwear covers are in good condition, they can be decontaminated and reused. 
The protective gloves are issued as a set. The glove set consists of an outer glove and an inner glove to assist in absorption of perspiration. The outer gloves are made of an impermeable, black butyl rubber. The inner gloves are a 
thin, white cotton glove which can be worn on either hand. The gloves are available in four sizes: smal I, medium, large, and x-large. The gloves are 
issued in a plastic bag with an instruction sheet. The gloves provide
protection to the soldier exposed to vapors, aerosols, and smal I droplets of chemical agents. This protection is good for a minimum of 14 days, startingwith,the first day of wear. Gloves in good condition can be decontaminated and reused. The standard issue leather gloves can b worn over the protective
gloves. It is important to wear leather gloves when handling rough objects.This wi I I protect the protective glove from punctures and tears. During cold weather operations cold weather mittens can be worn over the protectivegloves. Contamination of the leather gloves or cold weather mittens wi I I require the soldier to discard these items and be issued replacements. 
31 

OVERGf..R·~~ ENT 
SHIRT 

COr\~PONENTS OF PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. 
OVERGARf.~ENT 
TROUSERS 
/ 
FOOTWEAR COVERS 
When preparing for an NBC attack, particularly a chemical attack, checking your individual protective equipment for serviceabi Iity and completeness is critical to prevent becoming a casualty. If in a MOPP posture that requires wearing the chemical protective overgarment, ensure that there are no rips, 
tears, or broken zippers. Also, check the footcovers and gloves, whether worn or not worn. Avoid coming into contact with petroleum products such as gasoline, oi I, or diesel fuel to prevent breaking down the protective 
32 

qualities of the overgarments. Minimize getting the overgarment wet bywearing a poncho or wet weather gear. When traversing dew moistened terrain or fording streams, efforts should be directed to prevent pant legs from ~ getting wet. Although data is not available to specify the degradation of th ~ overgarment when wet, the commander should be advised that the protective qualities have been reduced and efforts initiated to secure additional overgarments to be changed when the commander feels the risks of wearingdegraded protecive overgarments is not warranted for the successful completionof the mission. When overgarments are contaminated and the possibi Iity of soldiers becoming wet during an operation exist, added concern is merited. Unti I data becomes avai !able, changing of overgarments is a commander's decision. That decision is based on the threat, logistical support (short erm and long term), operational commitments, and wi I I ingness to take risks. 
In addition to the overgarment, footcovers and gloves, the term "MOPP gear" includes other individual items. These additional items are necessar for a soldier to assume a protective posture and must be checked by smal I unit leaders. 
ADVISE COMMANDER ON MISSION-ORIENTED PROTECTIVE POSTURE 
CONDITIONS 
Given personal protective equipment, mission requirements, weather data, intelligence data, and contamination data information lAW FM 3-4. 
STANDARDS 
1. Commander is advised on MOPP level options in completing the mission requirements based on the following: 
a. 
Condition of troops. 

b. 
Environmental factors. 

c. 
Enemy situation and capabi I ities. 


2. Recommend MOPP level is provided to the commander considering standard 1. 
REFERENCES 
STP 3-54E2, SM, Task 031-506-2053 (TBP) 
USE OF MOPP 
The most critical aspect .of supervising the protection of personnel in your unit is being able to advise the commander on a MOPP level consisent with the mission and the threat. Being prepared in the correct MOPP level before the 
33 

attack wi I I significantly reduce casualties and allow continuation of the assig~ed mission. 
AI I combat operaions are conducted under the mission-oriented protective psoture system. Of course, if there is no threat then there is no protection requirement, but this is sti I I a MOPP. At the other extreme, when there is a continuing, immediate threat of chemical attack and the threat force has a capability to produce an unacceptable casualty level among unprotected troops,they may be require to wear protective clothing and equipment for extended periods. In this case, some form of safe area must be provided so that troops can perform necessary functions that require the removal of some or alI of the protective gear. 
MOPP Flexibility-Limiting Factors 
With the publication of FM 3-4, the MOPP system has been made more flexible. MOPP levels should be ordered at the lowest practical level. Captains, 
I ieutenants, and sergeants wi I I often have the best information about local 
conditions to set or change existing MOPP levels. The flexibi Iity of MOPP 
provides for varying levels of individual protection but is I imited by the 
factors described below. 
Heat Exhaustion. Individuals operating at moderate to heavy work rates while 
in chemical protective gear, may experience heat exhaustion (dizziness and 
fainting) at any time, especially during periods of high temperature. 
Fatigue. Individuals in MOPP 4 wi I I tend to experience fatigue resulting from such factors as mask breathing resistance, increase in body temperature from work energy/solar heat, and psychological/physiological stress. This condi ion of fatigue increases the need for rest and sleep to maintain individual alertness and efficiency. 
Senses. Individuals who are required to perform duties involving the senses or related functions such as manual dexterity, visual acuity, and voice communication wi II operate at varying decreased levels of efficiency, depending on training and proficiency, while in ful I protective gear. 
Personal Needs. Individuals cannot be in ful I chemical protection for 
indefinite periods and sti I I attend to certain personal needs such as eating,caring for wounds, shaving, and elimination of body wastes. 
Considerations for MOPP 
You, as the primary advisor to the commander on NBC related matters, wi I I be required to give recommendations to the commander as to the appropriate MOPP for a particular mission. The commander's general guidance for the use of protective clothing and equipment should be stated in the SOP. This SOP should also define the levels of MOPP in detai I as they wi I I be used in that unit and what items of protective equipment are required for each level and how they are to be used. 
34 

When the commander gives planning guidance for a particular mission, the commander may specify variations on the MOPP levels and any such variations from-the SOP are published in the coordinating instructions of operations orders and plans. 
Your evaluation of the unit's possible courses of action to accomplish the mission must consider the commander's guidance, the inherent degradation of the unit's capabi I ity to perform the mission in increasing MOPP levels, and acceptable numbers of casualties from chemical agents, heat buildup, and conventional munitions. In determining what MOPP to recommend, you must evaluate the type of mission and its relative importanc to the overal I mission. When the mission is analyzed in relation to chemical protection, the following questions must be answered before MOPP is established. 
a. 
What work rate does the mission involve? 

b. 
What wi I I the temperature be during the mission? 


c. 
Can the mission given to subordinates be changed or modified to achieve similar results with an increase in protection or a decrease in risk? 

d. 
The chemical threa!J Part of the threat is the capabi I ity of the threat forces to employ chemical agents and the probabi I ity that they wi I I do so. Information on this capability and probability may be provided through intelligence channels or may be based on previous experience. It also encompasses the capability of a unit to survive in a chemical environment. 


You must consider if the chemical threat could prevent the accomplishment of .. the mission, cause temporary modification of the mission, or cause the 1~ commander to accept the possibi I ity of more heat casualties to preven excessive casualties from chemical agents .. If the commander does allow the troops to reduce their protection, the risk of increased numbers of chemical casualties must be accepted. The number and severity of these casualties wi I I depend on the alertness of the troops, adequacy of the warning and alarm systems, elapsed time between the attack and subsequent personal decontamination, and adequacy of first-aid treatment. 
Reduced chemical protection of troops should not be permitted unnecessarily 
because the risk of heat stress, or even exhaustion, normally involves only a 
brief i I !ness, whereas chemical casualties can be much more serious. It 
should be realized that most cases of heat exhaustion wi I I recover within a 
few hours. Heat stroke and chemical casualties may not recover or wi I I be 
incapacitated for much longer periods. Heat stroke has a 50 percent mortality 
rate but it accounts for only a very smal I percentage of alI heat casualties. Heat exhaustion can be considerably reduced by command emphasis on making 
certain that troops are in excel lent physical condition and drink enough water. 
The support required to minimize casualties from alI causes and the estimated 
time to complete the mission must be carefully studied. The time needed to 
perform most tasks wi I I be increased when troops are requied to wear ful I 
protective gear. This fact must be accepted and included in the planning. 
Performance degradation wi I I be discussed at length later. 
35 
The Effects of Environmental Factors such as Temperature and Wind Speed: 
a. 
Temperature directly affects body heat buildup, especially when wearing protective clothing. This buildup, in turn, directly affects the unit's abi Iity to accomplish its mission. High temperature, on the other hand, severely curtai Is the MOPP options. 

b. 
Wind speed has an effect in that high winds decease the probabi Iity that the enemy wi I I employ chemical agents and thus allows the commander the opportunity of designating a lower MOPP level. Winds also aid in the dissipation of body heat when troops are able to open or partially remove their protective clothing. 


The Physical Needs of the Soldier 
In using the MOPP system you must also consider the physical needs of the 
troops, such as eating, drinking, sleeping, elimination of body wastes, bathing, shaving, and changing clothes. The wear of protective clothing and equipment creaes unique problems in these areas. 
Feeding. The feeding of personnel in a chemical environment depends primarily on the type and extent of the contamination. Some of the available options are as follows: 
a. If the unit is in a contaminated area where there is also a vapor hazard, feeding must be done inside some sort of collective protection, if any is available. An expandible van truck, such as the M291A2 with the M14 collective protection equipment, or the M51 collective protection shelter could be used for this purpose. Since any available shelter wi I I probably have a smal I capacity, the commander wi II have to establish a rotational system, feeding smal I elements of the unit and rotating in other elements unti I the entire unit is fed. FM 3-4 specifies entry and exit procedures for collective protective shelters. Units with collective protective shelters should include these procedures in their unit SOP. 
·b. If the unit is located in an area that is heavily contaminated and no col lec~ive protection is available, it may be necessary to withdraw troops to a nearby safe area or to a rear area for feeding. This could be done on a 
rotational basis but could also be done by a unit replacement system. The method used would be highly dependent on the situation, the distance involved, and the availability of an uncontaminated area. 
c. If the unit is located in a contaminated area but there is no detectable vapor hazard or is in an uncontaminated are but under constant threat of chemical attack, feeding can be done in the open but should be done on a rotational basis al lowin about 25 percent of the unit to unmask at one time. In alI of these situations, it is imperative that great care is taken to ensure that the food has not been contaminated with chemical agents. 
Drinking Water. Troops equipped with certain types of the M17-series protective masks use the drinking device while in a contaminated area. 
36 

Normally, drinking from and refi I I ing the canteen in an area contaminated 
with a chemical agent that does not present a vapor hazard can be done with only.minor decontamination of the canteen cap and the water spigot areas. 
In more hazardous areas, the commander must make arrangements for the delivery of fi I led canteens with the caps on in exchange for empty ones that are collected in the contaminated area. The empties must then be decontaminated 
thoroughly before refi I I ing. 
Sleeping. Personnel should sleep in ful I chemical potection and under cover whenever possible. 
Personnel Identification. The wear of chemical protective clothing and equipment makes normal identification of personnel difficult. Each unit should devise an expedient method of making identification easier. One such method is the wearing of color coded tape for the personnel of each platoon of a company. 
CAUTION 
Never place tape on the overgarments because it breaks down the protective qugj ity. Markings must not be placed on the overgarment for the same reason. 
Defecating and Urinating. A decontaminated area should be provided, if possible, for troops to use for the elimination of body wastes. They should also be instructed in the methods of opening, closing, and removing of contaminated protective clothing to prevent contamination of underclothing or exposed skin. 
Shaving, Bathing and Changing Clothes. Personnel must be provided with a means of shaving, bathing, and changing clothes when operating for extended periods in a contaminated environment. A CLOSE SHAVE IS NECESSARY TO ENSURE A GOOD SEAL FOR THE PROTECTIVE MASK. Bathing and changing clothes are essential for troops to maintain personal hygiene. 
ADVISE COMMANDER ON PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION 
CONDITIONS 
Given a simulated situation where you are to supervise two or more soldiers dressed in MOPP 4 performing a specific task in 20°F, 50°F, or 85°F (-6°C, 10°C, or 29°C) temperatures and the requirement to advise the commander on performance degradation. 
STANDARDS 
The commander is advised on performance degradation lAW Appendix A, Performance Degradation Data in FM 3-4. 
37 

REFERENCES 

FM 3-4, Appendix A 
STP 333-54E2 SM, Task 031-507-3012 (TBP) 

MOPP ANALYSIS 
You have learned the different MOPP levels and items that needed checking when supervising the implementation of MOPP. You learned how to advise your commander on what MOPP level was needed based on the threat and unit mission. 
In this lesson, you wi I I learn how to advise the commander on the performance degradation of assigned missions when conducting operations in MOPP level 4. 
Every commander has a responsibi Iity to go through a MOPP analysis based on the particular situation. This analysis establishes a balance between reducing the risk of casualties and accomplishing the mission. The use of MOPP involves balancing the risk of casualties from chemical or biological attacks against the need for higher mission performance provided by low MOPP levels. As~ minimum, the following nine questions must be considered in the analysis before a decisioQ;is made. 
1. How likely is it that the unit wi I I be attacked with NBC weapons? 
The answer is an intuitive judgement based on knowledge of the way NBC weapons are used. First, there is the matter of the unit location on the battlefield. For example, is the unit close to the front I ines? Can mortars and arti Ilery deliver chemicals accurately? Remember, the closer the unit is to enemy observers, the more accurate and timely enemy fire is likely to be. Is the unit considereu a primary target in the rear area? Persistent agents are more likely to be used in the rear to disrupt operations that support the front line. 
2. How much warning of an enemy NBC strike can be anticipated? 
Avai table intelligence should be considered. Consider each of these questions: Has the enemy been using NBC weapons? Has the enemy deployed weapons systems? Do wind direction and speed place the unit in a downwind hazard area? If so, consideration should be given to the placement of the unit alarms. What is the lay of the land and the wind direction? Are the alarms stationed upwind in locations that might give some early warning? Has 
there been any unexplained i I lness in adjacent units? 
3. What types of mission has the unit been given? 
The mission wi I I greatly affect the amount of protection that must be worn by each soldier. How important is the mission, and what risks must be taken to accomplish it? 
38 

4. What are the weather conditions and how wi I I they influence the unit's performance? 
It is known that high temperatures and humidity create conditions that make it difficult for the body to dissipate heat. This is compounded when soldiers are wearing protective clothing, for this makes the body retain even more heat. The more body heat retained, the fewer hours soldiers can work, and the greater their chance of heat exhaustion or heat stroke. This, coupled with the work rate, requires units to take longer and more frequent breaks. Therefore, it takes longer to accomplish the mission. 
Wind speed may also be a factor to consider. High wind speeds aid in the dissipation of body heat as wei I as decrease the probability that the enemy wi II employ chemical agents. 
5. Is it day or night? 
The best time to use chemical agents is between late evening and early morning when stable or neutral temperature gradients are prevalent. Under these conditions, agents tend to linger close to the ground and move horizontallywith the wind. During unstable conditions, in the heat of the day, agents rise rapidly, reducing th~time on target. 
6. How wei !-trained are the troops and what is their physical condition? 
Wei !-prepared troops suffer less stress in MOPP 4 than troops who are less prepared. Wei !-prepared troops are those who have trained extensively in protective gear and are in good physical condition. It cannot be ovremphasized that soldiers must train with their MOPP gear, to include manyhours of training in MOPP 4. An infantryman trains extensively with the M16 rifle to become proficient with its use. Likewise, a soldier must contJnual lytrain with MOPP gear to become more confident of the equipment and learn how to adjust his or her way of working. Soldiers cnnot be expected to fight successfully in full MOPP gear if they have not trained with the equipment.Training in ful I MOPP gear helps soldiers understand the problems they wi II encounter when required to wear MOPP gear. 
7. What work rate wi I I be required to accomplish the mission? 
Physical work rate is normally categorized as light, moderae, or heavy.Clerical and administrative tasks and riding in vehicles are examples of lightwork. Handling supplies and equipment and preparing defensive positions are examples of moderate work. Fighting or forced marching are examples of heavy work. Remember, soldiers performing heavy work-rate tasks tire more quickly.
If soldiers are also in ful I MOPP (MOPP 4), they wi I I not be able to work as hard or as long. 
8. How long wi II it take to accomplish the mission at different levels of MOPP? 
39 

Once the commander has answered the questions discussed, he or she can estimate how much time wi II be needed to accomplish the mission. Unit 6 gives several tables for varying types of units to give commanders an idea of how long tasks wi I I take in MOPP 4. Remember, the tables are only a guide. Accurate times for the unit are obtained only by experience. 
Increases in the time needed to conduct operations in MOPP 3 are somewhat less because some body heat can dissipate by opening the hood and overgarment. are
However, normal work times cannot be achieved unti I the mask and hood 
removed. The head and shouler areas release most of the body heat, but when 
retained, this buildup of body heat under the hood contributes to the time 
require to do a job due primarily to fatigue. Remember, there are no 
significant time increases for units operating in MOPP 1 and MOPP 2. 
9. What additional degree of protection against Iiquid agent contamination is available to the unit? 
Any form of avai !able overhead cover provides additional protection. 
Depending on the wind speed and type of cover, MOPP levels can be reduced. 
Sound judgement must be used. The possibi Iity of a percutaneous (through-the
skin) hazard sti I I exists and must be considered. Therefore, it is 
recommended that soldiers wear as much protection as mission accomplishment 
allows. 
Once these questions are answered, the commander can apply the information toward deciding the amount of protection needed to accomplish the mission. This process must be continuously updated and refined as the situation changes. 
OPTIONS IN DETERMINING THE MOPP LEVEL 
Based on your recommendations and commander 1 s analysis of the situation, the 
commander must determine what levels of chemical protection is appropriate so 
that his/her unit can accomplish its mission in a chemical environment. The 
tactical implicaions of wearing the current chemical protective ensemble are 
clear. Even at cool temperatures there wi II be performance degradation for 
task~ requiring delicate work as a result of the decrease of manual dexterity 
and the touch sensastion while wearing gloves. Vision in the mask, 
particularly downward vision, is limited, producing problems when moving 
. through jungle or marked areas and in personnel identification. 
Speech and hearing are also impeded when wearing the mask and hood. Another 
nonthermal problem is the breathing difficulty caused by the mask. Tolerance 
time for troops fighting in protective clothing, even in temperate climates, 
wi I I be Iimited by heat stress at temperatures above 21°C (70°F). 
Individuals in less than top physical condition, particularly overweight, wi I I 
have the greatest difficulty in performing their tasks and are more apt to 
become heat casualties. Unit leaders, who cover more ground in checking on 
the progress of their soldiers, are also a greater risk unless transportation 
40 

can be provided. AI I of the tabular data presented should be used as a guide only and may be changed based on experience with the abilities of the personnel of a unit to perform under these conditions. 
Whenever possible, the commander should specify, before the start of a mission, the MOPP level that individuals wi I I adopt. He/She may later direct that this level of protection be increased, decreased, or varied among 
individuals or elements within the unit according to his/her evaluation of the current situation and operational limitation. The commander must consider 
that, as the temperature and work rate increase, the level of individual protection must be reduced, work pacing options must be taken, or he/she must accept the possibi I ity of greater numbers of heat casualties. 
One of the options is to reduce the chemical protection according to the temperature and work rate. 
Other options are contingent on the hazards of contamination present. 
In a contaminated area, the commander may: 
a. 
Rotate jobs requiring a heavy work rate among subordinate units, elements, or individuals. 

b. Authorize longer and more frequent rest periods. 

c. 
Provide adequate water supply so that personnel can increase their water intake by frequent drinking of smal I amounts. Provide water in pre-fi I led canteens with the M1 canteen cap. 


d. Use vehicular transportation whenever possible. 
When there is no immediate hazard from chemical agents, a commander may rotate personnel to various combinations of reduced chemical protection to provide rei ief from buildup of body heat. The commander may also allow a smal I percentage of the troops to be out of some oral I of their chemical protectiveclothing at one time. 
The number of personnel in reduced protection is determined by the unit commander according to the local situation evaluation. 
Reduced protection also is permitted on a selective basis for personnel performing certain tasks requiring manual dexterity, visual acuity, and voice communi cat ion . 
Reduced protection may also be necessary after considering the long-term psychological effects on personnel in ful I chemical protective clothing and equipment for extended periods. 
When there is no danger from chemical contamination, verified by the use of the unit's chemical agent detector kits, and troops are required to operate at moderate to heavy work rates, the commander may authorize them to progressively reduce their protection by: 
41 

a. 
Open~ng the zipper of the hood (and possibly rol I ing it up) for vent i I at ion . 

b. 
Remove the protective gloves. 

c. 
Remove the protective mask and hood. 



d. 
Open the duty uniform or the chemical protective clothing for ventilation. This wi II require loosening or removal of external load-bearing equipmen. 

e. 
Remove some oral I of the protective clothing. Finally, the commander has the option of increasing the work times significantly when a job requires a sustained effort for proper accomplishment or is of an emergency nature. It must be noted, however, that troops who are worked continuously for those periods indicated in Unit 6 or FM 3-4, wi I I then require an extended rest (as much as 2 hours or more) to dissipate the bu i It-up heat. 


CONDUCT MOPP GEAR EXCHANGE CONDITIONS Given the requirement to Iist, in writing, the steps required to conduct MOPP 
gear exchange and paper and penci I. 
STANDARDS 
The steps are listed in proper sequence with 100% accuracy. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 

-Gear drop 
-Hood decon 
-Overgarment off (Removal) 
-Boots and gloves off (Removal) 
-Overgarment on 
-Boots and gloves on 
-Secure hood 
-Secure gear 

REFERENCE FM 3-5 
42 

MOPP GEAR EXCHANGE 

General Guidance 
Usually managed by squad size elements. Two soldiers perform this task as a 
tam; squad leader suprvision is recommended. 
Soldiers are paired into buddy teams. The teams are spaced around a circle 
with 1 to 3 meters between teams. 
A lead team, composed of the squad leader and a companion, direct the exchange from the center of the circle as they go through it themselves. 
At any time during the technique, if you suspect you have spread contamination onto your skin or undergarments stop; decon immediately with the skin decon kit, then proceed with the MOPP gear exchange. 
The technique begins with a company supply vehicle unloading replacement overgarments and decontaminants. The squad members pick up this material pair up, and form a circle around the lead team. The soldiers alternate as they go
through Step 1 gear drop and Step 2 hood decon. The first soldier in each 
buddy team helps the secon~soldier do step 1, then the second soldier helps
the first soldier do step 1, and so on. At step 3, overgarment off, the soldiers no longer alternate between steps. The f.irst soldier goes alI the way through Step 3 through Step 7 (secure hood) before alternating. This is 
necessary, to ensure no contamination is spread onto skin or undergarmens. 
Equipment and personne I requirements necessary for· MOPP gear exchange 
Equipment. Four long-handled scrub brushes per squad, one cutting tool perbuddy team, sufficient sizes of MOPP gear for alI personnel (overgarment,chemical protective gloves, and boots). For chemical/biological decon: One M258A1 decon kit per person and one 5-gal lon container of STB per 12 soldiers. 
Personnel. Two personnel from company decon team or the squad leader and assistant are required to set up and supervise the MOPP gear exchange area. 
Step 1. Gear Drop. The purpose of this is to remove gross contamination from individual gear (weapon, helmet, load-bearing equipment, and mask carrier)For chemical or biologic,al contamination the gear wi 1.1 ;be covered wih STB drymix and brushed or rubbed into the material. Gently sh~ke off the excess and s~t gear aside on an uncbntaminated surface. If avai l~ble, wash equipmentwith warm soapy waer. The materials you wi II need. for ~this step are four long-handled brushes, one 5-gal lon container of STP per squad and, if available, warm soapy waier. 
Step 2. Boot Decon. The purpose of this step is to remove grosscontamination from the mask and hood. Soldier 1 loosens the neck cord and hood straps of soldier 2. For chemical or biological decon soldier 1 uses the M258Al kit to decon the hood and exposed parts of soldier 2's mask (including 
43 

the canister and hose on the M24/M25A1 mask). The mask eyelens outserts 
should be wiped with decon packet #2 first, followed by decon packet #1 
(reverse the usual order). This is required so no residue is left on the lens 
from decon packet #2. This wi I I not affect the efficiency of the 
decontamination or cloud the eyelens outsert. When soldier 1 is finished 
wiping the mask of soldier 2, soldier 1 wipes down his/her own gloves. 
Cool, soapy water is not as effective for removing contamination, but can be 
used if you scrub longer. Soldier 1 then rol Is the hood of soldier 2, soldier 
1 leaves the ziper closed and Iifts the hood straight up off the shoulders of 
soldier 2 by grasping straps. The hood is pulled over the head of soldier 2 
unti I most of the back of the head is exposed but the hood is not pulled
completely over the soldier's face. The straps ae reattached to velcro 
patches, the hood is rolled starting at the chin and working around the mask. 
It is Jol led tightly, but without pul Iing off the back of the head. Soldier 2 
now helps soldier 1 decon and rol I his hood. The materials you wi II need for 
this step are one M258A1 decon kit per individual, three containers, two 
sponges, and paper towels or similar drying material. 
Step 3. Overgarment Off. The purpose of this is to remove overgarments
before chemical agents penetrate through to undergarments or skin. Soldier 1 
unfastens the three snaps ~n the back of the jacket of soldier 2 to include 
the cord and zipper. Soldier 1 pul Is the jacket off soldier 2, one arm at a 
time, turning the jacket inside out. Soldier 2 should make a fist as each 
sleeve is pulled off to prevent the gloves from coming off. The jacket is 
placed on the ground black side up, nearby. It wi II be used later as an 
uncontaminated area to stand on while redressing. Next, soldier 1 removes 
his/her buddy's trousers by first opening the trouser cuffs, then the waist 
snap, zipper, and, if necessary, the waist tabs. The soldier pul Is the 
trousers off by the cuff, one leg at a time, then places the trousers out of 
the way. Only one soidier wi I I remove his overgarments at this time. The 
materials you wi II need for this step are two containers to hold contaminated 
trousers (plastic bags are recommended). 
Step 4. Overboots and Gloves-Off. The purpose of this is to remove contaminated gloves and boots (footwear covers), to I imit the spread of contamination. For overboot removal, soldier 2 stands next to his/her jacket,
soldier 1 cuts the overboot strings of soldiers 2's overboots. Soldier 1 pul Is off the overboots of soldier 2 one at a time; soldier 2 steps onto his 
jacket. Soldier 2 removes his/her gloves. Soldier 1 assists so that soldier 
2 does not touch the outside of his/her gloves with bare hands. The materials 
required for this step are two containers (to hold contaminated overboots and gloves) and a knife or a pair of scissors (to cut overboot laces). The soldier hand Iing the overboots should decon his/her gloves in case of contact with contamination that might be on the overboots. 
44 

Step 5. Overgarment On. The purpose of this step is to restore protective
posture. Soldier 1 opens a package of new overgarments but does not touch the 
garment itself. Soldier 2 reaches into the package and pul Is the overgarment 
out without touching the package. Soldier 2 now puts on the overgarment
leaving the cuffs open. The material required for this step are sufficient 
sized overgarments for alI personnel. 
Step 6. Overbdoots and Gloves On. The purpose of this step is to restore protective posture. Soldier 1 picks up a package of clean overboots and opensit without touching the boots inside, soldier 2 reaches into the package and removes the overboots and puts them on. Soldier 1 opens a package of new gloves without touching the gloves inside. Soldier 2 removes them from the package and puts them on. The materials that are required for this step are sufficient sizes of boots and gloves for alI personnel. 
Step 7. Secure Hood. The purpose of this step is to restore protective
posture. Soldier 1 decontaminates his/her gloves with M258A1 skin decon kit. 
Once the gloves are deconned, soldier 1 unrol Is the hood of soldier 2 and 
attaches the straps. Soldier 2 closes alI zips and ties on his/her hood and 
overgarment. At this time the two soldiers wi I I reverse roles and repeat 
steps 3 through 7. This time soldier 2 assists soldier 1 through the steps. 
Step 8. Secure Gear. The purpose of this step is to prepare to return to 
battle. The soldiers wi II secure their individual gear, put it back on, and 
move to the assembly area. The soldiers wi I I use the buddy system to check 
the fit of alI secured gear. 
CHEMICAL AGENT DETECTION, IDENTIFICATION, 
RECONNAISSANCE AND REPORTING 

M8 PAPER, CHEMICAL AGENT DETECTOR 
M8 detector paper is used to test for I iquid toxic agents. The booklet of M8 
paper contains 25 sheets of paper colored a slightly brownish, dark gray.
Some b.ooklets contain perforated sheets, which doubles the number of avai fable 
sheets. When a sheet of paper touches a Iiquid chemical agent, the paper
immediately changes color. The paper wi I I turn dark green or black if it touches a V agent. It will turn yellow if it contacts:a G agent. If the paper touches a blister agent (H), it turns dark red or purple. Certain G agents wi I I turn the paper a red-brown color. The color changes are immediate. 
The inside back cover of the booklet of M8 paper gives ' instructions for its use. To use the paper; simply tear out a strip of paper, if the paper is perforated, use one-half strip. Lay the paper on a su~pected I iquid so that the paper just touches the I iquid, or secure the paper !so that it wi II detect any Iiquid agent that tal Is upon it. The inside cover of the booklet depictsthe color changes the paper wi I I undergo if the agent is present. 
M8 paper has Iimitations. It wi II detect only I iquid chemical agents, and some decontaminants wi II cause color changes similar to those of chemical 
45 

·agents. Thus, M8 paper should not be relied upon totally. It is one test, but _it should be supplemented by other means. 
M9 Paper, Chemical Agent Detector. M9 paper is gray-green in color and has an adhesive back. The adhesive back is protected by a white paper backing unti I dispensed from the rol I. The paper is 2 inches (5. 1 centimeters) wide and 30 feet (9.1 meters) long. Each rol I is contained in a cardboard dispenser equipped with a cutter edge. The dispenser is packaged in a foi 1-type shipping bag. A resealable plastic storage bag is included for storing the dispenser after removal from the shipping bag. 
The detector paper wi I I detect a chemical agent under alI types of weather conditions. It is worn by an individual or attached to a vehicle or a piece of equipment. The detector paper indicates the presence of liquid chemical agents. When a Iiquid chemical agent touches the paper, a pink, red, redbrown, red-purple colored spot appears. The spot may be as smal I as a pinhead or as large as a dime. 
USE THE M256 CHEMICAL DETECTOR KIT 
CONDITIONS 
Given: An M256 chemical detector kit. Chemical agents are in your area. You 
are wearing protective clothing and mask. 
STANDARDS 
Do the steps to check the M256 chemical detector kit and take current readings. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 
Check the date on the outside of the kit. Order a new kit of the 
expiration date is within 6 months. 


2. 
Check inside the kit. If any of the samplers/detectors are damaged or 
torn, ,throw them away. If less than five samplers/detectors are in the kit, 
get a new kit. 


3. 
Take out a sampler/detector. Tear open the protective bag and take out 
the sampler/detector. 


4. 
Throw away the two pieces of paper between the heater and blister spot. 

5. 	
Look at the ampou I es marked "3", "4", and "5". If they do not have a 
I iquid inside, throw the sampler/detector away and start over. 


6. 
Pull off tab marked "1". 

7. 
Fold over the white paper tab marked "2". Rub the top of it against the 
tablet. (You exposed the tablet when you removed the tab in step 6). 



46 

8. 
Hold the sampler/detector so that the test spots are up. Crush alI ampo_ules marked "3" with your fingers. 

9. 
Turn the sampler/detector so that the test spots are lower than the ampoules. Squeeze each ampoule marked "3" so that the I iquid runs onto the test spots. 

10. 
Swing hinged heater away from the blister spot. 

11. 
Crush one of the two ampoules marked "4". Swing the heater over the blister test spot. 

12. 
Wait 2 minutes. Swing heater away from spot. Swing hinged protective strip away from spots. 

13. 
Put the sampler/detector in a shady area for 10 minutes. 

14. 
Pick the sampler/detector back up holding it by the hinged protective strip. Crush last ampoule marked "4". Swing heater over the blister test spot. 

15. 
Wait 1 minute. Swing h~ater away from spot. 

16. 
Hold the sampler/detector so that the test spots are down. Crush the two ampoules marked "5". Squeeze the ampoules to force the liquid onto the test spots. 

17. 
Fold over the white paper tab marked "2". Rub bottom half of it against the tablet. Compare this mark to the first mark. See performance measure 7. 

18. 
Turn the sampler/detector over and read your test results. 

19. 
Report results to your supervisor. 


REFERENCES 
FM 21-.3, Task 031-503-3001 
USE THE M256 CHEMICAL AGENT DETECTOR KIT 
Once chemical warfare has been initiated, it wi I I be necessary that chemical agents can be detected and identified all the way down to the squad level in order for units to take appropriate actions. In order to use the M256 Chemical Agent Detector Kit, you must be able to state its purpose, capabi I ities, Iimitations and components. 
The purpose of the M256 Chemical Agent Detector Kit (cal led the M256 kit) is to detect the presence of chemical agents in I iquid and vapor forms. The kit is issued to squad Ieve I. It is used in the reconnaissance and monitoring of suspected contaminated areas. It is employed in determining the boundaries of contaminated areas. It is used to determine if it is safe to initiate 
47 

unmasking procedures. The kit is also used to detect any contamination that
remains on clothing or equipment after they have been decontaminated. 

' 
SOLDIER SHO\-.TN CARRr'"ING THE l-1256 KIT • 
,... -... '\ 
I \ ...

<,I \•• 
I
I
,.\ t... ... ... 
'II '\'I

\ 
'
'
' 
I
I ' 
'I 'I 
'\ 
I I '\ 
' 

'
I I I'
' I I 
I
' I .i 
' ' 
\
)--L--1 \
I I '
,___ !._ __ ) 
Capab i Ii t ies 
The M256 kit can detect the presence of blister, blood, and nerve agents. Thekit can detect these agents within 16 minutes plus preparation time. The kitcan be used to conduct 12 tests for vapor chemical agents -1 test for each
sampler in the kit. The M256 kit can detect the following chemical agents: -Mustards -H, HD Phosgene oxime -CX -Lewisite-L -Blood Agents ~ AC, CK -Nerve agents -V and G 
48 
Limitations 
The M256 kit can only detect the presence of the agents Iisted above. It cannot detect choking agents. 
Components of the M256 Kit 
Carrying Case. The case, made of plastic, is 7 inches wide, 3 inches deep, and 5 inches high. An adjustable shoulder strap and waist belt strap enable the kit to be carried over the shoulder and attached at the waist. The top of the case is attached to the bottom by a hinge. A hook and pile fastener tape holds the case securely closed. The discard date and lot number of the kit are stamped on the top. 
ABC-M8 VGH Chemical Agent Detector Paper. One booklet of M8 paper is placed 
inside the kit. The booklet contains 25 sheets of M8 paper. This paper is also contained in the carriers of alI protective masks. The M8 paper can detect the presence of liqujd nerve and blister agents. It wi I I change color upon contact with these agents. 
Operating Instruction Cards. One set of operational instruction cards is attached to the case by a lanyard or cord. These cards contain complete stepby-step instructions for performing tests for· chemical ayents. 
CAUTION 
Refer to the operating instruction cards whenever you perform a procedure using the M256 kit. 
49 

SAMPLER. 

FROr-.:T  8t.C1~  
LEWISITE TABLET MARKII..JG PAD  EIGHT GLASS Ar,;?OULES  LEWISITE TAcLET r.-~ARKtr~G Pt-D  
"'  HINGED CHEMICAL  
HEATER STRIP  

t=ULL TA.S 
f~ERVE.~GERT T~SY sr;or 
ELOOD t.GEf~T t Klf~<:=ED
TEST SPOT 
PROTECTIVE Si"RIP 
Sampler-detectors. Each kit is packed with 12 sampler-detectors (cal led 
samplers). Each sampler is individually wrapped in a protective bag. The sampler is a smal I card, approximately 3 inches by 4 inches._ On one side are glass ampoules sheathed in plastic, test spots, a chemical heater assembly, a 
lewisite tablet, and a rubbing tab. On the other side of the card are examples of safe and danger color indications. These help the soldier 
identify any chemical agents that are present. Each sampler-detector has a 
lot number and discard date stamped on the protective bag. 
Sampler Components 
The eight glass ampoules on the sampler are protected by a molded plastic cover. The six reagent ampoules can be crushed inside the plastic, and the 
reagents can then be channeled to the three test spots. The reagents are substances used to detect chemical agents. When they ar~ absorbed by the test spots, a color change wi II indicate the absence of presence of harmful amounts of chemical agents in the air. The hinged chemical heater strip is placed over the blister agent test spot to heat the reagent for the blister agent 
test. 
50 

COMPONENTS Oi= Tl-iE r,'i256 KIT. OPERATif~G INSTRUCTIOR CARDS 
PJ..FE'R. CHEt.:ICI.l J..6EilT ) ~~-----------
l (j OPEHTI~S II!SiilUCTIOr.S
DEiECTOr~ riiH, J.CC·liS 
CHEl:ICJ.l J.SEt:T DETECTD: 
.--------------
............... 

---------------~--
SAri. PLE ~DETC:CTOR 
The hinged protective strip protects the blood agent tes~spot and the nerve 
agent test spot when they .are not in use. The protective strip is also used 

as a handle for holding the sampler. The pull tab protects the lewisite 
detecting tablet. The lewisite tablet marking pad is used with the lewisite 
tablet to detect the pres~nce of lewisite, a blister agent. 

The numbers printed on each ampoule and on the back of the lewisite tablet 
marking pad are sequence riumbers. They indicate the order in which the 
different tests are perfor~ed . 

.Qn the other side of the samplers are references to the instructions providedand color indicators. Th~ indicators show what colors the test spots should be if different chemical agentsare present. They also show what colors the 
test spots should be if no chemical agent is present. The indicators· can be 
matched against the co.lors, appearing on the test spots tcrdetermine if a safe 

or danger cond i t ion exists. ·· I · 
51 


Preventive Maintenance 
Once you have learned the purpose, capabilities, Iimitations, and components, you must learn preventive maintenance of the M256 kit. 
To maintain the M256 kit properly, you must inspect it and replace outdated components of the kit. 
Inspection Before Use. 
Inspect the carrying case. If a strap is missing or torn, requisition a new kit. 
-Inspect the booklet of M8 paper. If fewer than five sheets of paper remain in the booklet, requisition a new booklet. 
-Check the samplers. Discard any that are opened or that have discard dates that have passed. 
-Repack the usable samplers in the carrying case. Pack them in pairs, side one to side one tear lines at opposite ends. Place a maximum of three pairs on each side of the case. 
-Ensure that there are at least five samplers remaining in the kit. 
-The operator must notify the supervisor that 6 months of less remains on the sampler, so that a refi I I kit can be ordered before the discard date. 
Inspection During Use. Check the discard date on the samplers. Do not use a sampler if the discard date has passed. 
Inspection After Use. 
Again, check the straps on the carrying case. If a strap is missing or broken, requisition a new kit. 
-Check components for completeness. Requisition replacements for any expended items. 
Before beginning the test for chemical agents in vapor form, you must inspectthe protective bag that holds the sampler you intended to use. Are there any punctures, rips, or tears? If so, do not use that sampler. Has the expiration date passed? Again, do not use that sampler. It may giveunreliable test results. This could endanger soldiers. They may unmask, thinking that no chemical agents are present. 
Preparing the Sampler for Use 
The procedure for preparing the sampler for use IS performed according to the following steps: 
52 

Step 1. Remove the operating instruction cards from the kit. Read the 
instructions on the three operating instruction cards before proceeding. 
Step 2. Remove a protective bag containing a sampler from the kit. 

WARNING Do not use an outdated sampler, because it will_.giveunreliable test indications. 
Step 3. Read the instructions on both sides of the protective bag before 
proceeding. 
Step 4. Open the sample protective bag by tearing the bag along the tear line 
marked with arrows. 

CAUTION Protect the sampler during exposure from excessive moisture,such as rain and dew. Step 5. Carefully remove the sampler from the protective bag. Retain the protective bag for reference to the instructions written on it. CAUTION Do not touch the sampler agent test spots because incorrect test results may be produced. Step 6. Handle the sampler carefully. Hold the sampler by the hinged protectstrip in its closed position. CAUTION Keep the hinged protective strip in the closed position to 
protect test spots. Step 7. Swing the hinged heater assembly away from the test spot and discardthe two loose protective strips under the hinged heater assembly. NOTE Disregard the colored beads in the ampoules. They have no function to perform. They were instal led during manufacture 
of the sampler as an aid in identifying the reagent ampoules. Using the Sampler The procedure for us1ng the sampler IS performed accordrng to the following
steps: 
53 

Step 1. Pul I off and discard the pul I tab (mark led 1) to expose the lewisite 
detecting tablet. 
Step 2. Bend the #2 TAB over unti I it contacts the lewisite tablet near the 
stem of the #2 tab, rubbing it back and forth unti I a mark is visible. 
Step 3. Hold the sampler in the vertical position so that the ampoules are 
down. 
Step 4. Finger-crush the four reagent ampoules in the three center pockets
marked with the number 3. 
Step 5. Rotate the sampler unti I the test spots are in a down position.
Force the I iquid from the four ampoules through the formed channels to the 
test spots to ensure wetting. 
Step 6. Check that the hinged protective strip is over the test spots. Hold 
the sampler in a horizontal position with the thumb over the center test spot 
Step 7. Swing the hinged heater assembly away from the test spot. 
WARNING 
The heater produces hot vapors and is hot to the touch. Keep away from face and bar skin after the ampoules are broken. 
Step 8. Finger-crush one of the two green ampoules marked 4. Immediatelyswing the hinged heater assembly over the test spot. Vent vapor away from the operator's body. Leave the hinged heater assembly in place for 2 minutes. 
Step 9. After 2 minutes have passed, swing the hinged heater assembly and 
hinged protective strip away from the test spots. 
Step 10. Hold the sampler by the hinged protective strip. 
Step 11. Hold or emplace the sampler approximately 2 to 3 inches above the 
ground. Shield the test spots from direct sun Iight. Wait 10 minutes. 
Step 12. Finger-crush the second green ampoule marked 4. Swing the heater assembly over the test spot. Vent vapor away from operator's body. Leave the hinged heater assembly in place for 1 minute. 
Step 13. After one minute has passed, swing the hinged heater assembly away
from the test spot. 
Step 14. Hold the sampler vertically with the test spots down. 
Step 15. Finger-crush the remaining ampoules marked 5. Force the I iquid from 
the two ampoules through the formed channels to the test spots to insure wetting. 
54 

Step 16. Rerub the lewisite detecting table with the lewisite tablet rubbing tab. Make sure that the second rub mark is next to the first rub'mark. Immediately observe spots for a color difference between the two marks. 
Step 17. Immediately turn the sampler over to determine safe or danger conditions. Color comparisons can also be made by the operator using those shown on the operating instruction cards. Wait 3 minutes for nerve agent indications. NOTE: Disregard blue area under nerve spot rim. 
Colors That Indicate Danger 
Agents are present if color indications on the sampler are as follows. 
1. 
Lewisite is present if the rub mark on the lewisite marking tabd turns olive green. 

2. 
A blister agent is present if the blister agent test spot turns purple/blue (H) or red/purple (CX). 

3. 
A blood agent is present if the blood agent test spot turns pink (weak concentration) or blue (strong concentration). 

4. 
A nerve agent is present if the nerve agent test spot 1s colorless or peach-colored. 


55 

Test for Vapors Above Surfaces Suspected of Being Contaminated With Liquid Agents 
There are two ways to perform this test using the M256 kit. Both tests use 
the sampler. The first test uses available boxes or cans to concentrate the vapors. The second test uses only the sampler. 
Use-Available Boxes or Cans. This test is performed in _two parts. One part tests for blood agents while the other tests for nerve and blister agents. Both parts can be run at the time if separate boxes or cans and samplers are used. To perform the two parts of the test at the same time, you wi II need two boxes or cans. (If only one box or can is available, perform Part 1, then Part 2). 
PART 1. The test for blood agents is performed according to the following steps: 
Step 1. Remove a sampler from the M256 kit. Check it for punctures, rips, or tears. Check its expiration date. 
Step 2. Remove the sampler from its protective bag. Hold the sampler by the hinged protective strip in its closed position. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT touch the sampler agent test spots, becauses incorrect 
test results may be produced. 
Step 3. Finger-crush only the two ampoules in the center pocket (double pocket marked 3). Do NOT crush the outer ampoules (marked 3). 
Step 4. Rotate the sampler, holding the test spots down. Force the I iquid from the crushed ampoules through the formed channels to the blood agent test spot to ensure wetting. 
Step 5. Swing the hinged heater assembly and hinged protective strip away
from test spots. Discard the two loose protective strips of paper under the hinged heater assembly. Swing the heater assembly back over the test spot. 
Step 6. Place the sampler with the instruction side up over the suspected area, and place the box or can over the sampler. Expose the spot for 10 minutes. 
Step 7. After 10 minutes, removes the sampler and turn it over to determine safe or danger conditions. 
56 

EXPOSC: THE TEST SPOT FORi 0 f/iiNUicS. 
PLAClNG BOX OR CAN OVER SAMPLER. 
PART 2. The test for nerve and blister agents is performed according to the following steps: 
Step 1. Remove a second sampler from the kit. Check it for punctures, rips, or tears. Check its expiration date. 
Step 2. Remove the sampler from its protective bag and hold it by the hinged protective strip in its closed position. 
Step 3. Discard the tab (marked 1) to expose the lewisite detecting tablet. 
Step 4. Run the top half of the white paper side of the lewisite tablet rubbing tab (marked 2) on the lewisite detecting tablet. Repeat rubbing unti I a mark is visible. 
Step 5. Hold the sampler in the vertical position so that the ampoules are down. Finger crush the two outer reagent ampoules (marked 3). DO NOT crush 
the two ampoules in the center pocket (marked 3). 
Step 6. Rotate the sampler unti I the test spots are in a down position. Force the I iquid from the two outer ampoules through the formed channels to 
the blister agent test spot and the nerve agent teshspot to ensure wetting. 
Step 7. Check the hinged protective strip is over the test spots. Hold the sampler in a horizontal position with the thumb overi the center test spot. 
Step 8. Swing the hinged heater assembly away from the test spot. Discard the two loose protective strips of paper under the 'hinged heater assembly. 
57 

Step 9. Finger-crush one of the two green ampoules (marked 4). Immediatelyswing the hinged heater assembly over the test spot. Vent vapors away from the operator's body. Leave the hinged heater assembly in place for 2 minutes. 
Step 10. After 2 minutes have passed, swing the hinged heater assembly and 
hinged protective strip away from the test spots. 
Step 11. Place the sampler, with the instruction side URr over the suspected area. Place the second box or can over the sampler. Expose the test spotsfor 10 minutes. 
Step 12. After 10 minutes, remove the sampler from under the box or can. 
Hold the sampler by the hinged protective strip. 
Step 13. Finger-crush the second green ampoule (marked 4). Swing the hinged
heater assembly over the test spot. Vent vapors away from the operator's
body. Leave the hinger heater assembly in place for 1 minute. 
Step 14. After 1 minute has passed, swing the hinged heater assembly away
from the test spot. Hold the sampler test spots down. 
Step 15. Finger-crush the remaining two outside ampoules (marked 5). Force the liquid from these ampoules through the formed channels to the blister agent test spot and nerve agent test spot. 
Step 16. Rerub the lewisite tablet rubbing tab (marked 2) on the lewisite detecting tablet next to the first rub mark. Immediately observe for a difference in color between the two marks. If lewisite is present, the tab 
wi I I turn olive green. 
Step 17. Turn the sampler over to determine safe or danger conditions. 
Use Sampler Only. When no can or box is available, the normal sampler
procedure is used with one exception. After Step 10 of ~lhe regular procedure,lay the sampler with the instruction side up on top of the suspected area for 10 minutes. After 10 minutes have passed, continue the pro6edure as outlined 
previously to determine if chemical agents are present. 
Use the M256 Kit Under Special Conditions 
Three types of conditions may affect the procedures for using the M256 kit. These conditions are (1) cold temperatures, (2) high temperatures, low humidity, and (3) high temperatures, high humidity. 
In Cold Temperatures. Normal procedures are followed in cold temperatures.Additional steps are added to compensate for the cold, which may freeze the ampoules. 
When the Temperature is Below 50°F (10°C). When the temperature is below 50oF~ wiit 5 minutes before making color comparisons. 
58 

When the Temperature is Between -25°F (-32°C) and +32°F (0°C). At these temperatures, the sampler needs to be warmed before use and care taken during the procedure to keep the reagents warm. Perform the normal operating procedures, with these additional steps: 
Step 1. Before using the sampler, place the unopened protective bag in a warm area (within a heated shelter or vehicle) for 5 minutes or more to thaw the reagents. 
Step 2. Then proceed to open the bag and remove the sampler. If any reagents are sti I I frozen, wait unti I they are completely thawed. I 
Step 3. Continue the normal operating procedure for testing for vapors. 
Step 4. When you reach Step 11, "Expose the test spots to air", place the sampler outside. Shield it from direct sunlight. Wait 10 minutes. 
Step 5. After 10 minutes, bring the sampler into the warm area and wait for any frozen reagents to thaw before proceeding with the remainder of the test. 
Step 6. After the reagents have thawed, continue the normal procedure out I ined previously. 
NOTE 
Always protect the sampler as much as possible from snow or 
rain. Use your body or any available shelter. 

In High Temperature and Low Humidity (Desert Conditions). Under desert conditions, the sampler is operated the same as under normal conditions, with one exception. Five minutes after exposure of test spots has started, the nerve agent test spot must be wet again. To do this, squeeze the remaining I iquid in ampoule 3 onto the nerve agent test spot. 
NOTE 
On the blister agent test spot, a faint blue color may appear 
in the ABSENCE of blister agents Hand HD. 

In High Temperature and High Humdidity (Tropical Conditions). Under these conditions, the color change for lewisite rub marks may be very slight. Compare with a second rub mark before making judgment. 
NOTE 
On the blister agent test spot, a faint blue color may appear 
in the ABSENCE of blister agents H and HD. 

When a weak blood agent is indicated (pink color change), a second test wi I I be don~ using only the components needed for the blood agent test. 
59 

USE AND MAINTAIN M8 ALARM SYSTEM 

CONDITIONS 
You are given an M8 alarm system, M229 refi I I kit, a power source (M10 power supply, 8A3517/U or 88501/U, 8A3030 battery), a reel of field wire (WD-1), and TM 3-6665-225-12. 
STANDARDS 
The following must be performed in accordance with TM 3-6665-225-12 and must not cause damage to the equipment: 
1. 
Operator's preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) are performed in accordance with Table 3-1. 

2. 
Preoperational procedures are performed in accordance with paragraph 2-6. 


3. Pre-startup procedures are performed in accodance with paragraph 2-7. 
4. System is started up and operated during usual conditions in accordance with paragraph 2-9. 
5 System is operated during unusual conditions in accordance with paragraph(s) 2-14, 2-15, 2-16, 2-17, or 2-18. 
6. 
Continuous use checks and reservicing procedures are conducted in accordance with paragraph 2-10. 

7. 
The system is reactivated following an operational alert in accordance with paragraph 2-12. I 

8. 
System is shutdown for less than 72 hours in ac~rdance with paragraph 2-13b. 

9. 
System is shutdown for more than 72 hours in accordance with paragraphs 5-1 and 5-2. 


PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 
Perform operator's preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) in accordance with page 3-21, Table 3-1 of TM 3-6665-225-12. Reports deficiencies (if any) to the supervisor. 

2. 
Performs preoperational procedures in accordance with paragraph 2-6 of TM 3-6665-225-12. 


60 

3. 
Performs pre-startup procedures in accordance with paragraph 2-7 of TM 3-6665-225-12. 

4. 
Performs startup and operating procedures in accordance with paragraph 2-9 


of 	TM 3-6665-225-12. AND/OR 
Performs operating procedures under unusual conditions in accordance with 
paragraph 2-14, 2-15, 2-16, 2-17, or 	2-18 of TM 3-6665-225-12. 
5. 
Conducts continuous use-checks and reservicing procedures in accordance with paragraph 2-1Q of TM 3-6665-225-12. 

6. 
Reactivates alarm system following an operational alert in accordance with paragraph 2-12 of TM 3-6665-225-12. 

7. 
Performs a shutdown for less than 72 hours in accordance with paragraph 2-13b of TM 3-6665-225-12. 


AND/OR 
Performs a shutdown for more than 72 hours in accordance with paragraphs 5-1 and 5-2 of TM 3-6665-225-12. 
8. Performs alI procedures without causing damage to the equipment. 
REFERENCES 
FM 21-3 
Tasks 031-503-2004 
031-503-2003 
031-503-2005 
USE AND MAINTAIN M8 ALARM SYSTEM 
The use of chemical agents in warfare is not new. Chemical agents were used 
in World War I and caused many casualties because the target troops did not expect the attacks, were not trained in defense against chemical agents, and had no means other than their physical senses for detecting an approaching chemical agent cloud. 
Since World War I, chemical :agents have not been used: extensively. There have been reports of the isolated use of them in countries· such as Laos, Cambodia, and Afghanistan, but sustain'ed or large-scale use of 1;them has not occurred. This wi I I probably not be tHe case in any future arme~ conflict involving nations which pose a threat :to the United States. 
I 
The United States policy is,jthat US forces will not initiate chemical warfare. Threat forces do not have ttl1e same policy. Although their decision to use 
I 
61 

chemical agents wi I I be made at the highest political level, they do not have any restrictions again~t first use of them. In fact, they are prepared to use whatever means are required to win when they go to war. Chemical weapons are 
routinely included in Threat fire plans. Since potential enemies wi I I probably use chemical agents, and since the Unied States reserves the right to 
retaliate, chemical weapons are very I ikely to be used in future armed conflicts. 
Chemical agents are insidious. Most of them are invisible, odorless, and highly toxic in field concentrations. Since they cannot be detected in the field by the physical senses, the damage has often already been done when they are discovered. Since the introduction of chemical warfare in World War I, the insidious nature of chemical agents has been a threat to armies engaged in tactical operations. Unti I recently, lethal vapors of chemicals could drift into a unit area unnoticed unti I the effects appeared in personnel. Even wei 1-trained personnel wi I I suffer some casualties from a chemical hazard entering an area undetected. 
Recognizing the nature of chemical agents, the Army realized it needed a device that could detect the approach of chemical vapors before they reached an area occupied by personnel. The Automatic Chemical Agent-Alarm answers the need for this capabi Iity. Though the concept was conceived in the 1950s, the Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm was not placed in active use in Army units unti I the late 1970s. 
The primary purpose of the Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm System is to detect the presence of chemical agents in the air. The Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm System is an automatic miniature chemistry laboratory which continuously samples the air around it and sounds an alarm when it detects nerve agents, blood agents, or choking agents. These types of agents are, in the same order, V o G agents, AC or CK, and CG. The system cannot detect blister agents (H, HD, or HL). 
USE OF THE AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL AGENT ALARMrSYSTEMJ 
The M8 Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm System consists of the following components: 
-M43 Detector Unit 
-M42 Alarm Unit 
M43 Detector Unit 
The M43 Detector Unit senses the presence of chemical agents in the air and produces an audible signal. The M43 Detector Unit consists of a detector unit assembly secured to a bottom case assembly by four clamping catches. 
62 

·flr43 DETECTOR UNIT CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS. 1 3 
0 
6 
5 
1  ~ETER  4  AIR INLET ASSEMBLY  
2  HAND CRANK  5  ZERO ADJUST KNOB  
3  HORN  6  HORN VOL·BATTER'i' TEST KNOB  
7  RE~OTE BINDING POST  

Detector Unit Assembly. (Figure on previous page). Attached to the detector unit assembly (6) are: a handle (1), a horn (2), a BATTERY TEST switch and HORN VOL control (3), an AIR INLET assembly (4), a ZERO-ADJUST knob (5), an AIR FILTER plug (7), an electrical connector cover '(10), two chains (8) that! attach the AIR FILTER plug and connector cover, a 24 VDC INPUT receptacle (11), four bottom catches (14), four clamping catches (13), two strap fastener 
loops (16), an AIR OUTLET cap (15), an identi ficati!on plate (12), a meter (17), two REMOTE binding posts (18), and a hand cr~nk (19). 
63 

·flr43 DETECTOR UNIT CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS. 
1 3 
4 
6 
5  
1 2 3  ~ETER HAND CRANK HORN  4 5 6 7  ---AIR INLET ASSEMBLY ZERO ADJUST KNOB HORN VOL·BATTER'i' TEST KNOB RE~OTE BINDING POST  

Meter. The meter (1) is located on the top of the unit. It provides a visual indication of the power source voltage when the HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST knob (6)is pressed. Also, the meter is used when setting the ZERO ADJUST knob (5). 
Hand crank. The hand crank (2), located on top of the M43 Detector Unit, is used to manually prime the fluid system of the M43 Detector Unit. It has a storage (up) position and an operational (down) position. 
64 

Horn. The horn (3) is located in the upper-right-hand corner of the M43 Detector Unit. The horn provides an audible signal when the detection 
circuits of the unit are activated. 
Air Inlet Assembly. The AIR INLET assembly (4) is located near the lower
right-front corner of the top. When in the open position, air can be drawn 
into the M43 Detector Unit for sampling. 
Zero Adjust knob. The ZERO ADJUST knob (5) is located in the center-front portion of the top. The knob is used to set the M43 Detector Unit during preoperaional and operational procedures, and to reset the unit after an alert has been sounded. 
Horn Val-Battery Test knob. The HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST knob (6) is located in the center of the M43 Detector Unit top. When the knob is rotated, the horn-output level varies from minimum (LO) to maximum (HI). Pressing in the knob connects the power source to the meter (1) to test the power output of the power source. 
The following figure is an exploded view of the detector assembly to show the parts of the assembly hidden from external view. The handle (2) contains a RAINSHIELD assembly (1) and a FLOWMETER (3). A chassis is mounted to the underside of the detector unit assembly. Mounted to the chassis (4) are four electrical contacts (5), a pump assembly (7), secured by two catches (6), a detector eel I (8), secured by a bai I (9), an electronic module (10), secured by a turnlock fastener (11), and a reservoir assembly (12), which screws into the chassis (4). 
65 

E~PLODED VIEV\' OF DETECTOR ur~IT ASSEfJlBLY. 
1 
5 
7 
l 
11 10 
1r2 
1. Rt-.lh!SI-!IELD ASSEf,~SLY 8 D~tECTOR CELL2 1-::.:.r~ DLE 9 8/C..IL3 r-LO\','L~ ETER I 0 C: Lr: CT F; 0 i~ IC r.~ 0 DUL E 4 ct-:t~ssrs· 11 TUP.I~LOC!~ 1-f.STl::!~ER5 COI-.!TI>.CT 12 RE~:Er-;VOIR {..;,SSEr.~E.LYG Cf-,TC !·! 13 Rf.!r~S:-;tE;LD7 P U f.~ P t.S S Er,'. BLY i ~. ADt.PTER-=--·:~'-·--~----'---------------------...! 
66 
B0-11Of-\1 CASE ASSE~"i BLY. 
s 

1  SE.t..L  3  11-!STRUCTIO!~ PLATE  
2  ':Of~Tt:..CTS  4  CATCH  
5  CU.::.f!;Pih!G CAICH  

Bottom Case Assembly. A seal (1) fits in a groove around the top of the bottom case assembly to ens~re that the interior ot the M43 Detector Unit is watertight and airtight when the bottom case assem~ly is secured to the detector unit assembly. Electrical resistance heat~rs are embedded in the double-walled case of the bottom case assembly. Tw;o pairs of heater contacts 
(2) mate with contacts in tile detector assembly. W,hen the M43 Detector Unit,is operated in temperatures [below 40°F, the heater~ are automatically turned on and off to maintain 40°F lwi thin the bottom case !assembJy. Mounted to the outside of the bottom case assembly are: an instru~tion-plate 93), two catches (4) that attach a BA3517/U battery, and four clamping catches (5) that secu r~ the bot tom case asse~b I y to the detector un iit assemb I y. 
I 
67 
M42 Alarm Unit 
The M42 Alarm Unit, when connected to the M43 Detector Unit, provides a remote audible and visual signal (or visual signal only) whenever the M43 Detector Unit senses the presence of a chemical agent. The M42 Alarm Unit consists of a panel (1) secured to a housing (4) by four knurled screws (9). The panelcontains an ALARM-RED indicator (3), a loudspeaker (5), an identification plate (6), two binding posts (7), and a selector switch (8). Two D-rings (2) are fastened to the housing (4). Four BA3030 batteries are secured inside the 
housing to provide power to the alarm. 
1Vi42 ALARM UN IT. 
3 5 
1 
·-=-_:_--..,·
--· 
(;-...~ ......--· -· 
-
-· _r-_.
'--:_.:;: _.,....,
1 Pt:..f-! t:L 
6 l DE !~II f-ICt.TIO !~ PLATE 
l
2 D·RI r~G 
7 81f~DII~G POST 3 t.. U. r. r.~ ·r. f: D I r~ D I Ct.T 0 R 8 SELL:CIOR S\'.'ITCH 4 I~ OUS I1-.!G 
9 SCR:::\'..! 5 LOUDSP~t.!~r:R 
.... ~~--..-~-....------
68 

Anci I lary equipment available for use with Alarm consists of the items listed below. on the method of employment of the alarm.  the M8 Automatic Chemical AgentThe equipment required wi I I depend  
-Battery, BA3517/U  
-M229 Refi I I Kit  
-Power Supply,  M10  
-Cable Assembly,  M168  
-Battery, Storage, BB501/U  
-High-profile Mount  
-Low-profile Mount  
-Alarm Unit Mounting Bracket  
-Installation Kit  
Battery, BA3517/U  

The BA3517/U, 36-volt battery supplies primary power to the M43 Detector Unit 
when the alarm system is hand-carried or backpacked. The BA3517/U is a nonrechargeable battery with a variable battery life depending on air temperature. When the alarm system uses an M10 Power Supply as a primary DC power source, the BA3517/U battery is connected as a standby power source. The BA3517/U battery has a plastic case, a metal strap (1), a clamping catch 
(3), an identification plate (2), and a cable ~ssembly (4). 
SA3517/U BATIERY. 
::! Cl..J..f.'.f'I~>G (;,"iC"i 
~ c:..=!....= .:...s:;::!.{SL"t 
M229 Ref i I I K i t 
The 	M229 Refi I I Kit contains materials for 15 days of continuous operation. 
/ 	The kit consists of a sleeve (4), two drawers (1), and a plastic strap (2) that is discarded when the refi I I kit is first opened. The sleeve (4) and the drawers (1) are constructed of water-resistant corrugated fiberboard. The expiration date of the kit is marked on the sleeve. M229 Refi I I Kits produced after January 1983 wi I I eliminate alI shelf-life requirements. This change has been made due to an improved paper in the fi Iter padale. Users are cautioned to honor the discard date if it is stamped on the outside of the box. If no discard date appears on the box, the kit does not have a shelf Iife and wi I I have no discard date. Each drawer (1) contains 15 solution reservoirs (5), one sensitivity check bottle (6), and 30 air fi Iter packages (7). Each air fi Iter package consists of an air fi Iter (10), a plastic wrapper (9) in which the air fi Iter is enclosed, and a watertight bag (8) in which the plastic wrapper containing the air fi Iter is sealed. Each drawer is provided with a handle (3) 
11.229 REFILL KIT. 
4 
i 1 
I, 
\ 
\ 
~~ 
""' 
1 Di1t.YIER 
6 SE~SITIVITY CHECY. E:OTTLE
2 
7 AIR FILTER P;.CY,!.GE 
B W.:-TEniiGHT E.:..G 
~ SLEC:'..,'E; 
9 PIJ.STIC WR.:.P?En
5 ~ESERVOIR 	· 
---·-------·--·. --··-··'-~--.~L~ t!~!_gR .. 
M10 Power Supply 
The M10 Power Supply requires input power of 115 or 220 volts at 50, 60, or 400 hertz (found at fixed instal lations), and produces an average output of 
29.5 volts DC. Additional descriptive data on the M10 Power Supply is in TM 3-6665-261-14 
a
9 
M168 Cable, Assembly, Power, Electrical 
M168 Cable connects the 88501/U battery to the M43 Detector Unit or the M10 Power Supply. The cable is 50 inches long and is terminated at one end with an SCL-6028/4-3 connector and at the other end with a!PT05A-14-5P or KPT47024311 connector. 
f1.~ 168 Ct:'.8 LE. 
71 

Battery, Storage, 88501/U 
The 88501/U battery is a rechargeable, heavy-duty, nickel-cadium batteryissued as a component of the winterization kit. 
SE501/U BATTERY. 
High-profile Mount 
The high-profile mount part of the M228 Mounting Kit, is used to electrically connect and mount the M43 Detector Unit to a wheeled vehicle. The highprofile mount secures the M43 Detector Unit and the BA3517/U battery to a front fender of the vehicle. The high-profile mount consists of an electrical 
cable assembly and an inner wrap assembly that is shock mounted to an outer wrap assembly by six resi I I ient mounts. TM 3-6665-273-2~ describes the M228 Mounting kit. 
HIGH PROFILE hWUNT. 
Low-profile Mount 
LOVI PROFILE ~!iOU1-.JT 
Alarm Unit Mounting Bracket The alarm unit mounting bracket, a component of the M182 and M228 installation
kits, is used to electrically connect and mount the alarm unit to a wheeled ortracked vehicle. 
A.LP,Rf\"i WiOUf-.!Tif'I!G BRACKET. 
I____ 
73 
Troop-instal led Kits 
Each installation kit mechanically and electrically adapts a specific vehicle to accept an M43 Detector Unit, an M42 Alarm Unit, an M228 or M182 mountingkit, and in some cases, refi I I kit components and a 8A3517/U battery. TM 3-6665-273-20 and TM 3-6665-274-20 describe the installation kits. 
In addition to the equipment supplied as part of the alarm system, additional 
items are authorized to the operator to complete the system configuration. 
Rucksack and Shelf. When the M8 Alarm System is used in the backpackconfiguration, the operator is authorized a rucksack with shelf. 
Communication Wire (W0-1). The operator must acquire two pieces of WD-1 to connect the M42 Alarm Unit when instal Iing the M8 Alarm System. Telephonecable must also be used when connecting additional M42 Alarm Units to the 
alarm system. 
M253 Winterization Kit. The operator is authorized to requisition an M253 Winterization Kit for operating the M8 Alarm System in temperatures below +20°F. The M253 Winterization Kit consists of two 88501/U batteries and one M168 Cable. 
74 

f\~43 DETECTOR 1 
FLOVv DIAGRAM. Uh:IT AIR·SOLUTION 
·. 
·. 

5 0 
• • • • • • AIR = <=> <= <=> SOLUTIO!~ 
-=-• c:=. • = ' A IR. S0 L U T I 0 I'-! 
f\~IXTURE 
1 f.:.IR II~LET 
2 H1::t,TER

3 .L-IR FIL-C[R 5 RESERVOIR l 4 D~TL:~C-0 6 PUU.P t..sc:r=f-''=<LY~~-__::_-I R cELL 7 I ' ""' -ol ....
------~----·------------~-,E=ATcR 
75 

Functional Description. Air is drawn into the M43 Detector Unit through the AIR INLET (1) and passes through a temperature-controlled heater (2). The heater (2) ensures that the temperature of the air sample, applied to the air filter (3), is not below 90°F. The air filter (3) removes foreign particles before the sample is processed in the detector eel I (4). Solution is pumped from the reservoir (5) into the detector cell (4) by the pump assembly (6). The air sample combines with the solution within the detector eel I (4). An electrical signal produced by the cell is monitored by the electronic module of the M43 Detector Unit. The air-solution mix is pumped out of the detector cell (4) back into the reservoir (5), where the air and solution separate. Next, the pump assembly (6) draws the air from the reservoir (5) and exhausts it through the AIR OUTLET heater (7) into the atmosphere. The AIR OUTLET heater automatically heats the AIR OUTLET to prevent icing. Solution drawn from the reservoir (5) is scrubbed of impurities in the detector eel I (4) as it is recirculated by the pump assembly (6). When the air sample containing chemical agent is mixed with solution, the detector eel I electrical output increases, and the electronic module turns on the horn and turns off the pump assembly. The horn wi I I sound unti I the operator either resets the M43 Detector Unit or disconnects the power source. When the horn sounds, the electronic module also provides a trigger signal to the REMOTE binding posts so that the M42 Alarm Unit also provides a warning signal. 
To put the Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm System into operation, you must first understand: -Uses and components of the M8 Chemical Agant Alarm -Preoperational procedures -Pre-start-up procedures 
A 1982 reclassification action resulted in the elimination of the M10 through M18 chemical agent alarm configurations. The one and only remaining alarm is the M8 configuration, NSN 6665-00-935-6955, LIN A32060. 
76 

Preoperational Procedures 
These procedures prescribe mandatory equipment inspections prior to preparing
the equipment for operation under usual environmental conditions. Usual 
environmental conditions are defined as ambient (surrounding) air temperature
above 49°F, no precipitation, and no apparent presence of blowing dust or 
sand. 
NOTE 
Inspect the exterior of the M43 Detector Unit for cracks or breaks, and loose or missing parts. Turn in units suspectedof damage or inabi Iity to operate properly because of visible de f i c i enc i es . 
M43 Detector Unit. When an M43 Detector Unit is received as new equipment, ortaken out of long-term storage, the following inspection checks should be 
conducted: 
Step 1. Check that RAINSHIELD assembly and FLOWMETER are not damaged, and are instal led in the handle. 
Step 2. Release four clamping catches, and remove the detector unit assemblyfrom the bottom case assembly. Place the detector unit assembly on its side with the AIR FILTER plug up. 
Step 3. Check that the bottom case assembly contacts, and that the meetingcontact on the detector unit assembly is not corroded, broken, bent. 
corresponding fittings in the chassis. Press 
or  
Step 4.  Check  that  the detector eel I is securely  instal led.  
Step 5.  For  new  equipment,  instal I the detector eel I as  follows:  
a.  Remove  the strap  from  the bai I.  
b.  Remove  the detector eel I can  from  the handle.  
c.  Remove  the detector  ce II  from  the  can.  
d.  Remove  the plastic bag,  the  two  caps,  and  : the plug.  
1  
e. water.  Dampen  the outside of  the  two  detector celil '  ports with  a  few drops of  
f.  Position  the detector eel I so  that  its por~s areal igned with  their  

the petector eel I into place in
the chassis. 
77 

g. Center the bai I on the bottom of the detector eel I, and turn the lobed 
nut clockwise unti I i·t is fingertight. 
Step 6. Verify that the catches of pump assembly are secured. 
Step 7. Check that the turnlock fastener of the electronic module is locked 
in position. 
Step 8. Instal I the detector unit assembly in the bottom case assembly and 
secure the four clamping catches. 
M42 Alarm Unit. When an M42 Alarm Unit is received as new equipment, or taken out of long-term storage, the following inspection checks should be conducted: 
Step 1. Install batteries 
NOTE 
Notify personnel within audible range that a test of the M42 Alarm Unit is to be made. 
Step 2. Position the selector switch to TEST. If the M42 Alarm is operative, a loudspeaker wi I I sound, and the ALARM-RED indicator wi I I flash. 
Step 3. If the M42 Alarm Unit does not operate in TEST mode, instal I fresh 
batteries. Repeat #1 above. 
~ Step 4. Position the selector switch to HORN OFF. 
M229 Refi I I Kit. When an M229 Refi I I Kit is received as new equipment, or taken out of long-term storage, the following inspection checks should be conducted: 
Step 1. Check the date on the M229 Refi I I Kit sleeve. Discard any M229 Refi I I Kit with an expired date or mark "For Training Only" on the sleeve. Newer issues of the M229 Refi I I Kit do not have a discard date. These kits are good unti I alI components are used. 
Step 2. Check that each reservoir assembly is fi I led above the I ine on each container. Check that the liquid in the reservoir assembly is clear, not discolored or contaminated. Discard defective reservoir assemblies in the M229 Refi I I Kit. Check that the sensitivity check bottle contains enoughliquid for the mission. 
Step 3. Check the contents of the M229 Refi I I Kit to assure that enoughreservoir assemblies and air filters are available for the mission. 
78 

BA3517/U Battery. Inspect the BA3517/U battery for bent or broken connector
pins that could prevent a proper electrical connection, and also check for
frayed or broken cable assembly insulation. Inspect the case for damage, such
as cracks, that could prevent proper use of the battery. Replace any BA3517/U
battery that is suspected of being damaged. 
If the following items are included in the system configuration, preoperational
checks should be performed on them. 
M10 Power Supply. When an M10 Power Supply is received as new equipment, or
taken out of long-term storage, the following inspection checks should be
conducted: 
Step 1. Unbuckle the strap, unwind the STANDBY BATTERY cable, the DETECTOR
POWER cable, and the 115V/220B cable from the handle. 
Step 2. Connect the 115V/220V cable to a power source. 
Step 3. Set the power switch to either the 115V or 220V position; this is
determined by the input voltage to which the M10 power supply is connected.
The POWER ON indicator must light. 
Step 4. Set the annunciator to its "all white" position by turning it fully
clockwise. Then, rotate the annunciator fully counterclockwise. 
Step 5. Position the power switch to OFF. 
Step 6. Disconnect the 115V/220V cable from its power source. 
BB501/U Battery and M168 Cable. Inspect and service the BB501/U battery inaccordance with TM 11-6140-203-15-3. Inspect the M168 cable for bent orbroken connector pins, frayed or broken cable assembly insulation, and otherdamage that could prevent a proper electrical connection ~d use of thebattery. Replace the discharged or defective BB501/U batlery with a freshlycharged battery, and replace the M168 cable assembly if suspected of being
damaged. 
Mounting Kit. If a mounting kit is part of the system configuration, checkthat the vehicular mounting components are secure. Check the cables fordamage (cuts, chafed insulation, exposed wires) and secure the connections.
Return vehicles to organizational maintenance that have loose-mounting kit
components and cables that are suspected of damage. 
Pre-Sdtart-Up Procedures 
These procedures prescribe the method of preparing and instal Iing the solutionreservoir assembly and installing the air fi Iter in the M-43 Detector Unit. 
79 
CAUTION 
Before airdrop operations, empty the I iquid from the M43 Detector Unit reservoir assembly. Internally splashing liquid may cause the M43 Detector Unit to become inoperative and cause the mission to be aborted. Do not perform the following procedures unti I after the airdrop: 
Step 1. Remove one solution reservoir assembly from the drawer of the M229 Ref i II Kit. 
Step 2. Prepare the solution. 
Step 3. Install the reservoir assembly. 
a. Release the four clamping catches from the bottom catches, and remove the detector unit assembly from the bottom case assembly. 
CAUTION 
Keep the weight assembly free from dirt after removing the reservoir assembly. 
b. 
Hold the detector unit assembly upright by its handle, and unscrew the reservoir assembly counterclockwise. AI low the weight assembly to hang down. Discard the used reservoir assembly in accordance with standing operating procedures. 

c. 
Remove and discard the cap from the prepared solution reservoir assembly. 

d. 
Center the new reservoir assembly under the weight assembly, and screw the reservoir assembly clockwise into the mounting hole in the detector assembly. Ensure a tight seal by turning the reservoir D 1ing clockwise. 


NOTE 
If the M43 Detector Unit is to be backpacked, position the 
bottom case assembly so that the instruction plate is on the 
side opposite the 24 VDC INPUT receptacle. 
e. Check that the seal is completely seated in the groove around the top of the bottom case assembly. Assembly the detector unit assembly to the bottom case assembly and secure the clamping catches. 
Step 4. Install the air filter. 
80 

NOTE 
If the air fi Iter has been installed in the M43 Detector Unit for less than 24 hours, it may be used during the reservicing procedures. Remove one additional air fi Iter package to be used during the start-up procedures. 
a. If the air fi Iter has been in the M43 Detector Unit for 24 hours or 
more, or if no air fi Iter is in place, remove the two air fi Iter packages fromthe M229 Refi I I Kit. Also remove the sensitivity check bottle. 
NOTE 
One air fi Iter wi II be used during start-up and one wi II be used during the mission. 
b. Unscrew the AIR FILTER plug. Remove and discard the air fi Iter from 
the M43 Detector Unit. 
c. Open and discard the watertight bag. Remove the air filter from the plastic wrapper and discard the plastic wrapper. 
d. 
Insert the air filter into the AIR FILTER slot of the M43 Detector Unit with the black side of the fi Iter material facing up 
e. Install and tighten the AIR FILTER plug. 
Perform Start-up and Operational Procedures for the Automatic Chemical AgentAlarm System 
These procedures start and place the alarm system into operation: 
Step 1. Remove the AIR OUTLET cap from the AIR OUTLET port. Remove the cover
from the 24 VDC INPUT connector. 

Step 2. Check that the AIR INLET ASSEMBLY IS IN THE CLOSED position. Unscrew 

the plug. Step 3. Press the ZERO ADJUST knob, rotate it fully clockwise, and release it. NOTE 
Notify personnel within audible range that the alarm system
is to be tested. 
If any start-up test fails, refer to the operato.r's trouble

shooting information. 

81 

Step 4. If the M42 Alarm Unit is not connected to the M43 Detector Unit, it should be connected at this time. The M43 Alarm Unit is connected by attaching the wires at one end of a piece of communications wire (WD-1) to the binding posts on the M42 Alarm Unit, and the wires from the other end of the WD-1 to the binding posts on the M43 Detector Unit. 
Step 5. Connect the power source connector to the 24 VDC INPUT connector of 
the M43 Detector Unit. The M43 Detector Unit horn and the M42 Alarm Unit 
loudspeaker must sound. 
Step 6. Position the M42 Alarm Unit selector switch to HORN OFF, or disconnect one wire from the M43 Detector Unit HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST knob for 
the desired level. 
Step 7. Press the ZERO ADJUST knob, rotate it fully counterclockwise, and release it. The horn must stop sounding and the pump assembly must operate. 
in the AIR INLET and 
Step 8.  Press  the HORN  VOL-BATTERY TEST  knob.  The meter  must  indicate  
24-volt minimum;  release  the knob.  
Step 9.  Remove  the FLOWMETER  from  the handle.  Instal I the  rainshield adapter  

the FLOWMETER on the adapter. 
Step 10. Press down on top of the FLOWMETER. The balI must rise and float within the correct zone for ambient (surrounding) temperature. 
Step 11. Press and hold the ZERO ADJUST knob in. Press in the hand crank, rotate the crank clockwise 50 turns, and release it. 
NOTE 
Keep the hand crank in the down position, not pressed in. 
Step 12. Press and rotate the ZERO ADJUST knob unti I the meter indicates in the ZERO ADJUST zone (blue). Release the knob. After 5 minutes, press and 
reset, if necessary. 
82 

NOTE 
If a new detector eel I was instal led, the M43 Detector Unit must be allowed to operate for 1 hour to stabi Iize the detector eel I before proceeding. 
Step 13. Disconnect the power source from the 24 VDC INPUT connector of the M43 Detector Unit. Position the M42 Alarm Unit selector switch to HORN ON, or connect the wire to the M43 Detector Unit REMOTE binding post. 
Step 14. Remove the protective cap from the sensitivity check bottle. 
Unscrew the AIR FILTER plug and remove the air fi Iter. 
Step 15. Invert the sensitivity check bottle, and while holding the dropper
tip 1/2-inch over the center of the black side of the fi Iter material, allow 

two drops of the solution to fall on the fi Iter. 
Step 16. Immediately replace the air fi Iter in the M43 Detector Unit and secure the AIR FILTER plug. Replace the cap on the sensitivity check bottle 
and return it to the M229 Refi I I Kit. 
Step 17. Connect the power source to the 24 VDC INPUT connector of the M43 
Detector Unit. 
Step 18. Immediately press and hold the ZERO ADJUST knob for 5 seconds and release it. Within 15 seconds to 5 minutes, the M43 Detector Unit horn must sound, the M42 Alarm Unit loudspeaker must sound, and the ALARM-RED indicator must flash. 
NOTE 
If the M43 Detector Unit horn does NOT sound, repeat the above procedures starting with the application of the senstitivity test solution--twice, if necessary~ Use a new filter each time. Then refer to the operator's tro_uble
shooting information. 
Step 19. Disconnect the power source connector from the M43 Detector Unit 24VDC INPUT connector. 
Step 20. Remove the AIR FILTER plug and discard the used air fi Iter. Openthe unused air fi Iter package; discard the watertight bag. Remove the airfi Iter from the plastic wrapper and discard the plastic wrapper. 
Step 21. Insert the air filter into the AIR FILTER slot of the M43 Detector Unit with the black side of the filter material facing upward. Install and
tighten the AIR FILTER plug. 
Step 22. Connect the power source to the 24 VDC INPUT ~onnector. 
83 

Step 23. Press and adjust the ZERO ADJUST knob so that the meter indication 
is within the blue ZERO ADJUST zone. Then release the knob. Repeat after 5 
minutes. 
Step 24. Twist the FLOWMETER and the rainshield adapter clockwise, and remove them from the AIR INLET assembly cover. Instal I the FLOWMETER and the rainshield adapter in the M43 Detector Unit handle. 
Step 25. Rotate the AIR INLET assembly to the OPEN position. 
CAUTION 
To prevent damage by overheating, never operate the M43 Detector Unit when the AIR INLET assembly is in the CLOSED position and the AIR INLET plug is installed. 
Step 26. Instal I and secure the AIR INLET plug. 
NOTE 
The alarm system is now operational. When in operation, keep the M43 generally in an upright position. Tilting at angles greater than 45° may cause improper operation. 
Perform 12-Hour Reservice and Reactivate the System After Alert 
When the system is in continuous use, it must be reserviced periodically. It must also be reactivated after an operational alert. 
12-Hour Reservice 
The procedures for reservice of the system are describe~in the succeeding paragraphs. The procedure begins with checking the power source. 
Power Source Checks. Dependent on the power source used to supply power to 
the M43 Detector Unit, the following checks wi I I be accomplished: 
M10 Power Supply. If the M10 Power Supply and the standby battery are in use, perform the following voltage level checks: 
Step 1. Check the voltage output of the M10 Power Supply by pressing the M43 Detector Unit HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST knob. The meter must indicate the 24-volt minimum. Position the M10 Power Supply power switch to OFF. 
Step 2. Check the voltage output of the standby battery by pressing the M43 Detector Unit HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST knob. The meter must indicate a minimum of 24-volts. Replace the discharged battery. Return the discharged BB501/U battery to organizational maintenance for recharging. Discard the discharged BA3517/U battery. 
84 

BA3517/U or 88501/U Batteries. If a BA3157/U battery or 88501/U battery IS 
used as a primary power source, or the alarm system is instal led in the 
vehicle, check the power source voltage output. Replace a battery which IS 
discharged to the point where the voltage output is less than 24-volts. 
Return the discharged BB501/U battery to organizational maintenance for 
recharging. Discard a discharged BA3517/U battery. 
M43 Detector Unit. At the end of a period of 12 hours of continuous 
operation, the M43 Detector Unit must be reserviced as follows: 
Step 1. Disconnect the power source from the 24 VDC INPUT connector. 
Step 2. Remove one solution reservoir assembly from the drawer of the M229 
Ref i II Kit. 
Step 3. Prepare the solution. 
Step 4. Install the reservoir assembly. 
Step 5. Rotate the AIR INLET assembly to the CLOSED position. Unscrew the 
lug. 
Step 6. Press the ZERO ADJUST knob, rotate it fully clockwise, and release it. 
NOTE 
Notify personnel within audible range that the alarm system is to be tested. 
Step 7. Connect the power source connector 24 VDC INPUT connector of the M43 Detector Unit. The M43 Detector Unit horn and the M42 Alarm Unit loudspeaker must sound. 
Step 8. Position the M42 Alarm Unit selector switch to the HORN OFF, or 
disconnect one wire from the M43 Detector Unit REMOTE binding post. Adjust
the HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST knob for the desired level. 
Step 9. Press the ZERO ADJUST knob, rotate it fully counterclockwise, and release it. The horn must stop iounding, and the pump must operate. 
Step 10. Press the HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST knob. The meter must indicate 24-volt minimum. Release the kndb. 
Step 11. Remove the FLOWMETER from the handle. Insert and twist the FLOWMETER firmly clockwise into the top of the AIR 1NLET assembly cover. Press down on the top of the FLOWMETER. The balI must rise and float within the correct zone for ambient temperature. 
Step 12. Press and hold the ZERO ADJUST knob in. Press in the hand crank, rotate the crank clockwise 50 turns, and release it. 
85 

NOTE 
Keep the hand crank in the down position, not pressed in. 
Step 13. Press and rotate the ZERO ADJUST knob unti I the meter indicates in the ZERO ADJUST zone (blue). Release knob. After 5 minutes, press and reset, if necessary. 
Step 14. Disconnect the power source connector from the M43 Detector Unit 24 VDC INPUT connector. 
Step 15. Remove the protective cap from the sensitivity check bottle. Unscrew the AIR FILTER plug and remove the air fi Iter. 
Step 16. Invert the sensitivity check bottle and, while holding the dropper 
tip 1/2-inch over the center of the black side of the fi Iter material, allow 
two drops of the solution to fall on the fi Iter. 
Step 17. Immediately replace the air fi Iter in the M43 Detector Unit and secured the AIR FILTER plug. Replace the cap on the sensitivity check bottle. 
Step 18. Connect the power source to the 24 VDC INPUT connector of the M43 Detector Unit. 
Step 19. Immediately press and hold the ZERO ADJUST knob for 5 seconds and 
release sound.  it.  Within 15 second to 5 minutes,  the M43 Det ector Unit horn must  
NOTE  
If the M43 Detector Unit horn does NOT sound, Steps 13 through 19--twice, if necessary. Use fi Iter each time. Then refer to the operator's shooting information.  repeat a new trouble 

Step 20. Disconnect the power source connector from the M43 Detector Unit 24 VDC INPUT connector. 
Step 21. Remove the AIR FILTER plug and discard the used air fi Iter. Open the unused air fi Iter package, and discard the watertight bag. Remove the air fi Iter from the plastic wrapper and discard the plastic wrapper. 
Step 22. Insert the air filter into the AIR FILTER slot of the M43 Detector Unit with the black side of the fi Iter material upward. Instal I and tighten the AIR FILTER plug. 
Step 23. Position the M42 Alarm Unit selector switch to HORN ON, or connect the wire to the M43 Detector Unit REMOTE binding post. 
Step 24. Connect the power source connector to the M43 Detector Unit 24 VDC INPUT connector. 
86 

Step 25. Press and adjust the ZERO ADJUST knob so that the meter indication 
is within the blue ZERO ADJUST zone. Then release the knob. ·Repeat after 5 
minutes. 
Step 26. Twist the FLOWMETER clockwise and remove it from the AIR INLET 
assembly cover. Instal I the FLOWMETER in the M43 Detector Unit handle. 
Step 27. Rotate the AIR INLET assembly to the OPEN position. 
CAUTION 
To prevent damage by overheating, never operate the M43 
Detector Unit when the AIR INLET assembly is in the 
CLOSED position and the AIR INLET plug is instal led. 
Step 28. Install and secure the AIR INLET plug. If the M43 Detector Unit is mounted on a vehicle, remove the RAINSHIELD assembly, and instal I and secure 
it in the air inlet assembly. 
NOTE 
The alarm system is not operational. 
Reactivation of the Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm System 
When placed into operation, the Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm wi I I continuously sample the air from the area and, upon detection of a chemical agent, wi I I signal an operational alert. 
NOTE 
The M43 Detector Unit wi II signal in the event of a nuclear 
explosion, or when exposed to heavy concentrations of rocket 
propellant smoke, screening smoke, signaling smoke, or engine
exhaust. 
When the alarm system signals the presence of chemical agents, perform the following steps: 
Step 1. Immediately take the protective measures prescribed 1n FM 21-2. 
Step 2. Give the local alert as prescribed by local standing operatingprocedures (SOP). 
Step 3. Disconnect the power source from the M43 Detector Uni1 24 VDC INPUT connector. 
Step 4. Set the AIR INLET assembly cover to the CLOSED position. Remove the RAINSHIELD assembly from the cover, if used. Install the electrical connector 
87 

Step 9. Press and rotate the ZERO ADJUST knob unti I the meter indicates in 
the ZERO ADJUST zone (blue). Release the ZERO ADJUST knob. After 5 minutes, 
press and reset, if necessary. 
Step 10. If the meter does no indicate in the ZERO ADJUST zone (blue), press
and hold the ZERO ADJUST knob in. Press in the hand crank, rotate the crank 
clockwises 25 turns and release it. Press and rotate the ZERO ADJUST knob unti I the meter indicates in the ZERO ADJUST zone (blue). Release the ZERO ADJUST knob. After 5 minutes, press and reset, if necessary. 
Step 11. Rotate the AIR INLET assembly to the OPEN position. 
Step 12. Twist the FLOWMETER clockwise and remove it from the AIR INLET assembly cover. Instal I the FLOWMETER in the M43 Detector Unit handle. 
Install the plug in the cover, or if vehicle-mounted, install the RAINSHIELD assembly in the cover. 
Shutdown Procedures 
Shutdown for 72 Hours or Less. If alarm system is to be shutdown for 72 hours or less and reused within 72 hours, perform following procedures: 
a. 
If M10 power supply is in use, set 115V/OFF/220V power switch to OFF. 

b. 
Press HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST switch on M43 detector unit and note 


indication of meter. If meter indicates less than 24, discard BA3517/Ubattery or forward 88501/U battery to organizational maintenance for recharging. 
c.  Disconnect power  source  from 24 VOC  INPUT  connector.  
d.  Instal led electrical  connect  cover  on  24 VDC  INPUT  connector.  
e.  Press  in M43 detector unit REMOTE  binding posts,-remove telephone 

cable connections, and release binding posts. 
f. 
Release four clamping catches from bottom catches. Remove the detector unit assembly from the bottom case assembly. 

g. 
Remove reservoir assembly. Discard solution in accordance with standing operating procedures. Instal I empty reservoir assembly to detector un i t assemb I y. 

h. 
Ensure that seal is correctly seated in groove around the top of bottom case assembly; then fasten four clamping catches. 


1. Set AIR INLET assembly to CLOSED POSITION. 
J. Pul I up hand crank to storage position. 
k. Instal I AIR OUTLET cap on AIR OUTLET port. 
89 

Shutdown For More Than 72 Hours. If alarm system is to be shutdown for more 
than 72 hours, return M43 detector unit and M42 alarm unit to organizational 
maintenance for administrative storage. 
M43 Detector Unit 
Before the M43 detector unit is shut down for more than 72 hours, it must be 
cleared of residual solution and inspected, the meter and handcrank must be 
protected from damage, and alI ports must be closed. 
Step 1. Disconnect power source from 24 VDC INPUT connector. 
Step 2. Release four catches and remove detector unit assembly from bottom case assembly 
CAUTION 
Keep weight assembly free from dirt after removing reservoir assembly. 
Step 3. Hold detector unit assembly upright by its handle, and unscrew 
reservoir assembly. AI low the weight assembly to hang down. If solution is 
in reservoir assembly, discard it in accordance with standing operating procedures. 
CAUTION 
Use only disti I led water when preparing the detector unit 
assembly for shipment. Use of water which contains 
impurities wi I I cause damage to the detector eel I. 
Step 4. Rinse reservoir assembly with distilled water and fill it approximately two-thirds with distilled water. 
Step 5. Center reservoir assembly under weight assembly and screw reservoir assembly into mounted hold in chassis. Ensure a tight seal by turning
reservoir assembly D-ring clockwise. 
Step 6. Check that seal is correctly seated in groove around top of bottom case assembly. Assembly detector unit assembly to bottom case assembly and secure four catches. 
Step 7. Remove AIR OUTLET CAP from port. 
Step 8. Remove electrical connector cover from 24 VDC INPUT receptacle. 
Step 9. Check that AIR INLET assembly is in CLOSED position. Unscrew plug. 
Step 10. Attach power source connector to the 24 VDC INPU connector. If horn sounds, press ZERO ADJUST knob and rotate it fully counterclockwise. 
90 

Step 11. Press handcrank in, rotate the handcrank 50 turns, and release it. Do not pul I the handcrank out. 
Step 12. AI low M43 detector unit to run for 4 minutes. Then disconnect power source from the 24 VDC INPUT connector. 
Step 13. Release four catches and remove detector unit assembly from bottom case assembly. 
Step 14. Hold detector unit assembly upright by its handle and unscrew reservoir assembly. 
Step 15. Discard contents of reservoir assembly and screw empty reservoir assembly into mounting hold in chassis. 
Step 16. Instal I detector unit assembly in bottom case assembly and secure it with four catches. 
Step 17. Instal I AIR OUTLET cap in AIR OUTLET port. 
Step 18. Screw plug into AIR INLET assembly. Check that AIR INLET assembly 
is set to CLOSED. 

Step 19. Install electrical connector cover on 24 VDC INPUT connector. 
Step 20. Pu II up handcrank to storage position. 
Step 21. Release catch on BA3517/U battery, i f app I i cab I e , and remove the 

battery. 
M42 Alarm Unit 
Step 1. Remove the batteries. 
Step 2. Close hinged cover and secure it with spring-tension clip. 
Step 3. With gasket in place, position chassis assembly in housing. 
Step 4. Secure by tightening four knurled screws. 

PLAN THE POSITIONING OF THE M8 ALARM CONDITIONS Given a situation where chemical agents have been used or are expected to be 
used, and the directive to plan for the positioning of the M8 Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm. 
STANDARDS Correctly answer 8 out of 10 multiple choice questions on the positioning of the M8 Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm. 
91 

PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 
Planned and supervised positioning the M8 alarm in a stationary setup. 

2. 
Planned and supervised positioning the M8 alarm in a mobile setup. 


REFERENCES: 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-4002. 
TYPES OF SETUPS AND LIMITATIONS FOR THE 
AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL AGENT ALARM SYSTEM 

The Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm is designed to be set up for employment in the following emplacement configurations: 
-Handcarry and backpack system 
-Fixed-emplacement installation 
-Vehicle mounted 
Handcarrying or Backpacking the M43 Detector Unit 
The M43 Detector Unit, when operated in the handcarry or backpack configuration, uses a BA3517/U battery for a power source. The M43 Detector Unit and BA3517/U battery, are secured to a rucksack with a cargo shelf. The M442 Alarm Unit supplied with the handcarry or backpack configuration permits the system to be used as a fixed-emplacement installation with one remote-located M42 Alarm Unit. The following instructions tel I how to set the system up for backpacking. 
-Perform applicable preoperation procedures and prestart-up procedures. 
-Position the cargo shelf on the rucksack. 
Pass the short web strap around the top and middle bars of the rucksack so that the strap is centered between the right and left sides of the rucksack. The buckle of the short web strap must be on the load side of the rucksack and not more than four inches from the middle bar. Insert the plain end of the short web strap through the buckle. Tighten the short web strap as tautly as possible. · 
-Tie one end of the long web strap to the right end of the middle bar of the rucksack using a nons Iip knot. 
-Tie one end of the other long web strap to the left end of the middle bar of the rucksack us1ng a nonslip knot. 
-Pass the free ends of the long web straps through the adjacent outer slots of the cargo shelf. 
92 

-Pul I the cargo shelf into a horizontal position. 
-Perform procedures for start-up of the alarm. 
-Place the rucksack in an upright position. 
-Position the M43 Detector Unit with attached BA3517/U battery on the cargo shelf so that the AIR FILTER plug is facing away from the frame of the rucksack. 
PREPARING RUCKSACK FOR BACKPACKING. 
4 
1 STRAP 3 STRAP 2 RUCKSACK 4 Ct.RGO SHELF 
CAUTION 
Do not block the AIR OUTLET. 
-Tie the long web strap to the right end of the middle bar of the ruksack. Pass the strap across the M43 Detector Unit and attached battery.Turn the strap fastener loop upward on the left side of the M43 Detector Unit. Insert the long web strap through the loop. Pull it until tight. 
93 

-Pass the free end of the long web strap around the top bar, through the slot, and pull it tight. Tie -the free end in an overhand knot while maintaining tension. 
M43 DETECTOR UNIT AND BA3517/U BATIERY INSTALLED ON A RUCK· SACK. 
CAUTION:'STRAP FASTENER LOOP (6) MUST-BE TURNED UPWARD AS SHOWN IN DETAIL TO INSURE ADEQUATE CLEARANCE OF AIR INLET. 
s------!~
·--
1 4 STRAP 2 5 RUCKSACK 3 6 LOOP 
94 
CAUTION 
Do not block the AIR OUTLET. 

-Pass the long web strap, which is tied to the left end of the middle barof the rucksack, across the M43 Detector Unit and battery. Insert this longweb strap through the strap fastener loop on the right side of the M43 Detector Unit. Keep the long web strap flat and pull it downward until tight. Then pass its free end around itself and pull it tight. 
-Tighten the straps to insure that the M43 Detector Unit and BA3517/Ubattery are securely fastened to the rucksack. 
Vehicle-mounted 
Vehicular Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm System instal lations provide
accommodations for an M43 Detector Unit, an M42 Alarm Unit, and a BA3517/Ubattery. Primary power to operate the equipment is supplied by the vehicle 
electrical system. The BA3517/U battery provides power when the M43 Detector Unit is removed from the vehicle and handcarried. 
When instal led on a vehicl~. the M43 Detector Unit is mounted in a highprof i I e mount for whee Ied veh ic I es and in a I ow-prof i I e mount for fu 11-t racked 
vehicles. 
M43 DETECTOR UNIT AND BA3517/U BATTERY INSTALLED IN HIGH· PROFILE MOUNT. 
~ 
95 

The alarm system can be installed on a one-quarter-ton utility truck. The M43Detector Unit is installed and connected to a high-profile mount on the rightfront fender of the vehicle. The M42 Alarm Unit is installed on the dashpane I. 
rl.42 ALARM UNIT ff._jSTALLED IN AONE-QUARTER-TON UTILiTY TRUCK. 
r!.43 DETECTOR 
97 
MS ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLED IN AON E·OUARTER·TON UTILITY TRUCK. 
-------"~\ ~
---\...----
98 
The alarm system can also be instal led on a 2 1/2-ton-truck. The M43 Detector Unit is instal led and connected to a high-profile mount on the rear of the 
left-front fender. The M42 Alarm Unit is instal led on the cab wal I behind the companion seat. 
!ViS ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLED IN A 
TV/o-AND-0 N E ·HALF·TON UTl LlTY 
TRUCK. 
M42 ALARM UNIT 
99 

The diagram below shows the M8 Alarm System instal led on a ful 1-tracked
personnel carrier and recovery vehicle. 
The M43 Detector Unit is instal led
and connected to a low-profile mount on the hul I right-nose plate. 
The M42
Alarm Unit and BA3517/U battery are mounted on a common bracket secured to theright-rear corner of the hull-top plate. 
Refi II kit components are secured ina bracket mounted on the battery box on the right sponson. 
MB ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLED lN AFULL-TRACKED PERSONNEL CAR·
RIER AND RECOVERY VEHICLE. 
100 
When the Automatic Chemical Agent Alarms are mounted on vehicles,consideration must be given to wind direction for the protection of the main body. 
For maneuvering units, upwind security elements employ the Automatic Chemical 
Alarm System to provide early warning for the main body. Increased MOPP is 
required for security elements since they have no early-warning capabi Iity.However, reduced MOPP may be possible for the main body. The commander determines the MOPP based on the mission, threat, and heat-loading factors. 
The single most important factor in employing the system is to make sure that the detector is upwind of the position or formation to be protected. 
MANEUVER ELEMENTS USING THE M8 ALARM SYSTEM 
Fixed-emplacement Installation 
The fixed-emplacement arrangement of the alarm system uses an M10 Power Supply 
as a power source. The M10 Power Supply requires an input voltage of 115 or 220 volts at a frequency of 50, 60, or 400 hertz. A standby battery (eitherthe 8A3517/U or the 88501/U employed with the M43 Detector Unit) is connected 
to the M10 Power Supply to automatically provide power to the M43 Detector Unit in the event of a power failure. If the M10 Power Supply output voltagedecreases to less than 18 volts, a relay in the M10 Power Supply connects 
standby battery power to the M43 Detector Unit. The following instructions tel I how to set the system up for fixed emplacement. 
101 

Be sure that applicable preoperation procedures and prestart-up procedures have been performed lAW the technical manual. 
f!a43 DETECTOR UNIT Erl!PLOYING AN FJi1 0 PO\VER SUPPlY. 
CONNECT TO STANDARD BATTERY  
1 2 3 4 5 t- r!.1 0 POWER SUPPLY 24 VDC lf~PUT CONNECTOR DE:T!::CTOR POW..E.R CABLE (W2) STtd~DBY BATTERY CABLE (V>'3) 220-VOLT COr~r~ECTOR ~~S·VOLTCOr-!f~ECTOR  

102 

In a fixed-emplacement installation of the M8 Au~omatic Chemical Ag~n~ Alar~System, arrangements of one. to five M42 Alarm Untts may be connecte tn sertes to a single M43 Detector Untt. 
M43 DETECTOR UNIT Ei,"\PLOYING M42 ALARM UNIT{S). 
~r.!:THA----
l, 
NOTES 
1. 	
LENGTH A rfiUST NOT EXCEED 400 METERS. 

2. 	
LEf-.!GTH B +-LEr-.!GTH C ~~UST NOT EXCEED ~00 ft.ETERS. 

3. 	
LEt-..!GTH B +LEt"I!GTH D +LENGTH E r.~.UST f..!OT EXCEED 400 fi:ETERS. {(00. L~ETERS = ~37.G YARDS) 


~~·-------------------------------------~--------------~ 
103 


The distance of unit front to be protected corresponds to the number of detectors required for protection. Larger distances require more detectors. The number of detectors required to protect a unit front of a given area is tabulated below. 
M43 DETECTOR UNITS REQUIRED TO PROTECT A Ur-.!lT FRONT. 
.. 

U£-!IT FRO!'IIT SIZE 
{r.f. ETERS) h';43 DETECTOR UNITS REQUIRED 
~  -36  1  
37-372  2  
373-708  3  
709. 1044  4  
1045·1380  5  
1381 -1716  6  
1717 • 20~~ 7  
2053. 2388  8  
2389. 2724  9  
2725 • 3060  10  

NOTE 
Up to five M42 Alarm Units can be connected in an Automatic ChemicaLAgent Alarm System. Do NOT connect more than one M43 Detector Unit in a system. 
Communication Wire (WD-1) is used to connect the M42 Alarm Units to an M43 Detect,or Unit. The M42 Alarm Units are placed at or close to monitoringpositions. 
The M43 Detector Unit and its power source are placed up to 400 meters upwindof the alarm position. When more than one M42 Alarm Unit is connected to an M43 Detector Unit, the warning can be monitored at several positions. 
1. 
Position the M42 Alarm Units with relation to the M43 Detector Unit so that the comma wire lengths will not exceed the distances specified. 

2. 
String commo wire between the M43 Detector Unit and each M42 Alarm Unit, allowing approximately 1 fOot of slack at the end of the wire. 

3. 
Tie each commo wire to the D-ring on its associated M42 ~larm Unit about 9 inches from the end of each commo wire. 


104 

4. Strip about 1/2 inch of insulation from the end of each w1 re. 
5.-Without regard to polarity, connect a wire to each binding post on the M42 Alarm Unit. 
6. 
Repeat steps 4 through 6 above for each M42 Alarm Unit used. 

7. 
Strip about 1/2 inch insulation from the ends of the commo wires to be 
connected to the M43 Detector Unit. 


8. 
Tie each wire to the loop on the M43 Detector Unit about 9 inches from the end of the comma wire. 

9. 
Press in one binding post on the M43 Detector Unit and, disregarding


polarity, insert one strand of each comma wire into the binding post slot. 
Release the binding post. 
10. 
Repeat the above step for the other binding post and remaining wire. 

11. 
Perform start-up and operation procedures. 


The section following, wi IJ discuss concepts for selecting where the detectors should be positioned and me arrays for positioning them. 
SELECT EMPLACEMENT SITE AND OPERATING ARRAY USED 
TO POSITION FOUR-AND SIX-DETECTOR POSITIONS FOR 
THE AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL AGENT ALARM SYSTEM 
The single most important factor in employing the Automatic Chemical Agent
Alarm System is to make sure that the detector is emplaced upwind of the 
position or formation to be protected. The Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm 
System is used for the detection and warning of off-target attacks and wi I I
provide a unit with two ess-en_tial elements of survival in case of a chemical 
agent attack when properly employed. These elements are: 
-Detection of a toxic agent cloud 
-Early warning to troops in the monitored position 
Good judgement in emplacing the detector unit and the alarm in relation to the troop position and the surrounding terrain can mean the difference betweentimely detection and warning or taking unnecessary chemical casualties. 
Emplacement of the System 
In the fixed-emplacement ~tal lation, the M43 Detector Unit can be placed up
to 400 meters from the M42 Alarm Unit. The greater the distance, the greaterthe warning time. However, there are practical limits to the distance. If it is too great, agent clouds that have no chance of hitting the position wi I I be 
105 

detected. If the M43 Detectors are too far out, there is a chance of an agent cloud slipping behind them. If they are too close, the optimum warning will not be obtained. The optimum positioning of the system is to have the M43 Detector Unit 150 meters upwind of the nearest unit. For the actual location of detectors, the chemical agent delivery threat, the terrain, and the state of preparedness of friendly troops must be considered. Remember, the Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm is used for the detection and warning of off
target attacks, array in which the system direction.  and  it must ~e placed upwind of Is set up wi I I depend  the on  area the si to tua be protected. tion and wind  The  
Detector Arrays  

There are several arrays in which the Automatic Chemical Agent Detector System can be set up. Some of the arrays are explained in the following paragraphs. 
Six-detector Array. The diagrdam below shows a company in a defensive position with six detectors deployed. The actual number of alarm systems per unit wi I I vary depending upon the TOE. The 300-meter distance between the M43 Detectors reduces the probabi I ity that agent clouds might drift through holes 
in the array. This array provides a high probabi I ity of detecting an off-target attack within a-reasonable warning time. 
106 

107 

Another example shows an array using four detectors with the wind direction coming from the right flank of the unit. A significant difference between a 
four-detector array and a six-detector array is that with only four detectors, the array must be shifted when the wind di r~ction shifts greater than 20 degrees. Also shown is another point which is often overlooked in chemical warfare defenses: The detector is oriented on wind direction, not on the direction of the enemy. 
108 

PREPARE AND SUBMIT NBC 1 (CHEMICAL/BIOLOGICAL) REPORTS 
CONDITIONS Given a watch, compass, map, penci I, paper and format for an NBC I report. A Chemical or Biological attac~ has just occurred. You are able to collect the 
following information: time attack started, location of attack, delivery means, and type of agent 
STANDARDS 
Within 5 minutes, submit an NBC I report, reporting as a mrnrmum I ines D, F, 

G, and H. NOTE: The other I ines may be used as required by the situation and the avai labi I ity of the information. PERFORMANCE MEASURES Initial NBC I (Chemical or Biological). -Write down the time Jhe attack started as I ine D. -Write down the time the attack stopped as line E. -Write down the location of attack as I ine F. -If you can identify the attack as arti I lery, aircraft, or other means, write that down as line G. -Write down type of attack, biological or chemical, and height of burst 
as  I i ne  H.  
-Give or  send  the  repOit_to your supervisor.  If  the  report  must  be  
transmitted, give  it  a  "Flash" precedence.  
Subseg;uent NBC  I (Chemical  or  Biological).  
-Use the M256 kit  to  identify type of chemical.  Determine weather  

conditions, wind direction, and wind speed. Provide I ines D, F, G, Has before, and subsequent information not originally provided as I ines E, G, H, X, Z.A., and Z.B. to your supervisor. If the report must be transmitted, give it an "Immediate" precedence. 
REFERENCES 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-3005 
109 

CHARACTERISTICS OF AN NBC I (CHEMICAL OR BIOLOGICAL) REPORT 

In ~rder to identify the characteristics of an NBC I (Chemical or Biological) Report, you must be able to define terms related to the report, state the purpose of the report, and identify a chemical or biological (CB) attack. 
Definition of Terms 
Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) Warning and Reporting System. This 
system is a standardized set of procedures for reporting NBC attacks. It 
ensures that alI information is reported the same way. The system is one of 
the commander's primary means for control of unit NBC defense. There are six 
types of NBC reports used in reporting NBC attacks and contaminated areas. 
NBC Information Source. Thi.s is a unit below division, such as a brigade, battalion, company, battery, or troop. The information source also may be an attached or supporting unit, an Air Force or other non-Army unit, or a civi I agency. An NBC information source may be a unit under attack or a unit observing an attack. The source submits NBC reports. 
NBC I Report. This report is used by an observing unit (NBC information source) to give initial a~ subsequent data of an enemy nuclear, biological, or chemical attack. It is also used to report the discovery of unreported chemical or biological contamination. (In this lesson you wi I I study NBC I 
(Chemical and Biological) Reports. NBC I (Nuclear) Reports are covered in Unit 4.) 
Format. This refers to the organization of information within a report. AI I NBC reports follow standardized formats. 
STANAG. This acronym stands for Standardized NATO Agreements. These agreements determine the formats used by US and NATO alI ied forces to report NBC Reports, NBC Attacks and NBC Contamination. Follow the format prescribed in STANG 2103. 
NBCE or NBCC. This is the NBC element or NBC Collection Center. These terms are interchangeable. The NBCE may be part of the tactical operations center. 
(TOCl at division level or higher. 
UTM. This stands for Universal Transverse Mercator Grid System. This Grid system, as modified by the Army Grid Reference System, is used to read US Army maps. AI I locations are given by six or eight digit grid coordinates preceded by two letters that designate a 100,000 meter square. 
ZULU Time. This is Greenwich Mean Time, or the time in Greenwich, England. This time zone is used as the base for alI other time zones. Local time 
refers to the time used in each geographic area. Either ZULU or local time may be used. Specify which time is used. 
110 

Means of Delivery. This refers to what system is used to deliver the chemical or biological agent in a CB attack. These include methods as air craft spray,bomblets from missiles, rockets, or vectors, such as insects. 
Precedence. NBC reports are transmitted from unit to unit using different 
precedences. If a message is sent with a FLASH precedence, then no other 
message sha I I precede that m~ssage. A message with IMMEDIATE precedence wi II 
be sent after message with~ FLASH precedence. 
Purpose of the NBC I (Chemical and Biological) Report 
NBC I (Chemical and Biological) Reports are used by the observing unit or the 
attacked unit to report initial and subsequent data of a CB attack to its 
higher headquarters. The standardized format provides a rapid means of 
sending the information. It does not provide a secure means. If a more 
secure means of sending the information is required, the commander wi II 
determine that means. 
When a unit is attacked, soldiers immediately stop breathing and put on their protective masks. The alarm is given for a chemical attack. Then, the unit reports the attack to its ~xt higher headquarters. This report is the initial NBC I (Chemical or Biological) Report. The NBC I Report must be submitted as soon as possible after the start of a CB attack. As soon as the unit has given the alarm, it must report whatever information is immediately.avai !able. After the chemical has been identified, or when more information is available, another report is submitted. This is a subsequent NBC I (Chemical or Biological) Report. More than one subsequent report may be submitted. 
The NBC I (Chemical or Biological) Report wi I I be transmitted up the chain of command. Each unit alerts Lts subordinate units, then transmits the report.For example, a company undar chemical attack would first alert its subordinate units on the company nets with a FLASH precedence brevity code "Gas." Then the company would alert its battalion headquarters with an initial NBC I (Chemical) Report. The battalion would alert its subordinate, attached, and supporting units. Then it would submit an initial report to its brigade
headquarters. This process continues unti I the report reaches division headquarters. 
Identify a Chemical or Biological Attack 
A CB attack can occur in a number of ways. Threat forces have many delivery systems capable of delivering chemical agents. These include aircraft,
rockets, field arti Ilery, and mortars. These systems can deliver both persistent and nonpersistent agents. A threat attack consisting of I iquid droplets from airburst munitions or bomlets or from an aircraft, may mean persistent agents were usea.-Nonpersisten,t agents may be delivered by vapors or aerosols from point-detonation or near-surface detonation. Arti Ilery,munitions, bombs, or bomblets also may carry nonpersistent agents. 
111 

A ~iological attack may be delivered by missile-delivered warheads containing
bomblets. Aircraft can deliver bomblets in a variety of ways. 
These includereleasing them alI at one time, or at intervals from dispensers. Dispersingdevices may eject them in various directions. Aircraft also can release bombsthat contain clustered bomblets. These are released at predetermined heightsby a time fuse. Spray tanks mounted on aircraft can release biological
agents. A vehicle with a~iological agent generator can release agents alongthe ground. 
Observing the means of delivery is one way to detect a chemical or biological
attack. Other observations may indicate that an attack has occured. Symptomsin individuals, the appearance of dead animals, and unnatural I iquids onvegetation may mean a CB attack. Swarms of vectors, such as insects, couldindicate a biological attack. Color changes on M8 or M9 detector paper thathas been placed on equipment could indicate a chemical attack. If anautomatic chemical agent alarm sounds, an attack may be occuring. 
Whenever a unit observes a CB attack or is attacked, members of that unit
first put on protective masks, then sound the alarm to alI sections of the
unit. The unit then submi)s an NBC I (Chemical or Biological) Report to its

next higher headquarters. ~ 
PREPARING A NBC (CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL) REPORT 
NOTE 
Some letters have two meanings. One meaning is used in nuclearreports. The other is used in chemical or biological reports.In this lesson, only chemical or biological letter meanings
are given. 
The format for NBC reportS-is contained in the Graphic Training Aid 3-6-3revised lAW Ed. 5 STANAG 2103. This GTA card is pocket-sized. It is designed
to be carried by the individual soldier. On the card are the formats for theva~ious NBC reports. Also included are explanations of each alphabeticalletter used in the reports. 
Chemical or Biological Hazard Information 
To determine the impact on the mission, commanders need accurate information
on chemical and/or biological attacks. The information is used to predictvapor hazard areas. The essential information required to predict thesehazards are, the date/time the attack started and ended, the location of theattack, type of munitions, and information on the weather. 
112 
Location of attack area. The location of the area attacked may be given as UTM.grid coordinates or as a place. Depending on the type of attack, the attack area could be in just one location or it could cover a large area. When reporting the location of the attack area be sure to include the whole area. When using grid coordinates you may send one coordinate giving the area or send a set of grid coordinates out I ing the area. You could also give a 
four digit coordinate to signify a whole grid square. 
Kind of attack. The type of attack is very important in determining the hazard area. Different procedures are used in predicting the hazard area for different types of attacks. 
Type of agent. The type of agent must be sent because different types of agents act in different ways. For example, a nerve agent can be in either I iquid or vapor forms. The I iquid form usal ly stays in the area longer than the vapor form. The NBCC needs this information to accurately predict the hazard for the chemical attack. In the initial NBC I chemical report, line item H is usal ly determined by watching the symptoms the soldiers are showing if casualties result from the attack. It will usually be nerve, blood, blister, or choking. For the subsequent NBC I chemical or biological report, you should use the M256 detector kit to determine the actual type of agent (i.e., G-nerve or H-bliste.J-). If the bombs are not bursting on the ground you should try to determine the height at which they are bursting (i.e., lOOm, 200m, etc.) and send this information in I ine H of the subsequent report. 
Weather information. The weather information that should be sent in a subsequent NBC I chemical or biological report is the wind direction and speed, the temperature (outside), the amount of cloud cover, significant weather phenomena, and the air stabi Iity if this information can be assessed. AI I this information is used to predict where the hazard wi I I be and the duration of hazard. AI I this information should be given for the specific area where the attack occuced. If this cannot be done, the information would come from the current chemical downwind message that covers the area. This 
information is usal ly sent in plain language but code could be used. 
-Wind Direction. When sending the wind direction, it is the direction toward which the wind is blowing. It is measured clockwise form grid north (north on a map) and should be stated in degrees or mi Is (mi Is are a unit of measure used by the artillery 6400 mi Is to a circle) (example-180 deg or 3200 mi Is). 
-Wind speed. This is how fast the wind is blowing. It is given in kilometers per hour (km/hr) (example -15 km/hr). 
Temperature. This is for the air temperature outside 1n the attack area. It wi II be given in degrees Celsius (example-IQ°C). 
113 

-Cloud Cover. This tel Is how much of the sky is covered 1n clouds. 
(ex~mple-less than half, more than half, etc.) 

-Significant weather phenomena. This tel Is what the weather is Iike outside in the attack area (example-raining, drizzle, snow, fog, thunderstorm, etc.) 
Air stability. Thig,. tells whether the air outside is unstable, stable, or neutral. 
NBC I Chemical or Biological Report Formats 
-lnital NBC I chemical or biological reports. Line items 0, E, F, G, and Hare normal for initial reports. 
LETTER 	MEANING 
0 	This is the date and time the attack started. It is a 
six digit number where the first two digits wi I I give the day of month and the last four give the time (example-240900Z-the attack started at 0900 GMT on the 24th). 
E 	This is the date and time the attack ended. it is also a six digit number. (NOTE: If the attack lasts longerthan a minute or so don't wait to send Iine ECHO with 
initial report, send 	it when you send the subsequent
report). 
F 	This is the location of the attack area. It can be given as a grid coordinate or as the name of a place. 
G 	This i~ the kind of attack (guns, mortars, missiles, 
spray ,_etc.). 
H 	This is the type of agent and the height of burst. If the type of chemical agent is unknown send unknown. Usually line HOTEL is sent in the subsequent report after the type of agent has been determined using the M256 detector kit. 
-Subsequent NBC I chemical or biological reports. Line item 0, E, F, G,
H, S, Y, Z.A, and Z.B. are normally for subsequent reports. As you ca~ see,it contains the same I ines as the inital report plus Iines S, Y, and Z.A. Line Z.B. is optional. The information given in the initial report should be repeated in the subsequent report. 
114 

LETTER  MEANING  
D  
E  
F  Same  as  for  initial  reports  
G  
H  

s 	This is the date and time that the contamination was detected. (NOTE: This I ine item is also used in NBC 4 Chemical or Biological Reports). 
y 	This is the downwind direction and speed. This direction can be given in degrees or mi Is and the speed is given in km/h r. 
ZA 	This I ine gives the temperature of the air in degrees Celsius, the amount of cloud cover, the significant weather phenomena, and air stabi Iity. 
ZB 	This LJne is for any remarks about the attack. 
Prepare an initial NBC I (Chemical or Biological) report. 
-Immediately upon detecting the attack, check the time and record as I e t t e r i t em D . 
-When the attack ends, again check the time and record as letter item E. If the attack lasts over a minute, send the I ine in the subsequent report. 
-Record type of agent Lf known (example, nerve, blood, blister) as letter item H. If not known use the M256 to find the type of agent and send in the subsequent report. 
-Record the location of the attack as letter item F. 
-If you can identify the kind of attack; example, arti I lery, aircraft, bomblets, record as letter item G. 
-Submit the initial NBC I (Chemical or Biological) report with a "FLASH" precedence to your supervisor. 
115 

Prepare a subsequent NBC I (Chemical or Biological) report. -Obtain type of agent from chemical agent detector kit and record 1n I ine H of the report. (for chemical contamination only.) -Determine the direction the wind is blowing and the wind speed and record in line Y of the report. 
-Determine the temperature (in Celsius), cloud cover, significant weather phenomena, and air stabi Iity conditions and record in I ine Z.A. NOTE: Use plain language. The code may be used. 
SUPERVISE CHEMICAL SURVEY 
Situation: Given a situation in which you are to supervise a chemical survey team withal I authorized NBC protection and detection equipment. STANDARDS 
-AI I equipment is checked for serviceabi Iity. 
-Specified points, routes, or areas are checked. 
-Required reports are submitted as specified by the control party. 
-The presence or absence of chemical contamination is determined and, if 
present, the type and location of contamination are accurately reported. PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
I. Team members check alI equipment for serviceabi Iity. 

2. 
·Team members check specified points, routes, or areas. 


3. 
Team members submit reports specified by control party. 


4. 
Team members determine presence or absence of chemical contamination. 
REFERENCE 
STP 3-54E2, SM, Task 031-506-2223 (TBP) 



116 

CHEMICAL SURVEY OPERATIONS 

The ·avoidance of chemical agents requires a complete understanding of what chemical agents are, how they wi I I be used, and what happens to them once they are employed. Units can then estimate when and where speci fie types of chemical agents wi I I be used, where the hazard is greatest, and how best to avoid them. 
The armed forces of the Soviet Union are equipped, structured, and trained to conduct chemical operations as wei I as any army in the world. So much of their training revolves around the use of lethal agents that it would be unusual, from ami Iitary point of view, if they did not use them. 
The basic Soviet principle is to achieve surprise by using massive quantities of chemical agents on unprotected troops to create casualties, or on equipment or terrain to deny its use. The use of chemical weapons by the Soviets may initially require a decision at the same level as nuclear weapons, but they wi I I most I ikely be used more freely once the initial use has been authorized. A general understanding of the concepts of chemical agent employment wi I I help units avoid chemical hazards. 
Classes and types of chemi~l agents 
The Soviets classify chemical agents according to effect and classify them as six major types. 
Nerve 
Blood 
81 ister 
Choking 
Psycho-chemical 
Ir.r itants 
These six types are divided into two major categories: persistent and non-persistent chemical agents. 
Persistent. 
Persistent chemical agents include nerve agents such as thickened GD (TGD), V-series nerve, and blister agents. The Soviets are known to stockpile V-series, thickened Soman (TGD), and Hand L 81 ister for use as their persistent agents. 
117 

The objective for the use of persistent agents is to deny the use of critical 
terrain, canalize the attacking force, or contaminate materiel. Persistent 
agents produce immediate effects on unprotected troops and delayed effects on 
protected troops. Delayed effects occur if the agent penetrates protective
clothing (either due to massive contamination or neglected contamination) and 
is absorbed through the skin, which produces a casualty. Left untreated, 
death results within 15 minutes after receiving a lethal dose. 
The Soviets wi II use persistent agents to accomplish the following tactical 
objectives: 
-To contaminate rear area supply depots. 
-To defend avenues of approach. 
-To neutralize the personnel defending a strong point. 
-To protect flanks. 
Nonpersistent -(Semipersistent) 
Soviet forces currently st9ckpi le blood agents, choking agents,psycho-chemical agents, and nerve agents such as tabun (GA), Sarin (GB), and Soman (GD). Nonpersistent agents should be expected across the Soviet Front, along the Forward Line of Troops (FLOT), and against units in contact with the attacking echelon. The objective of the use of these agents is to immobi Iize, 
injure, or hinder activities of the unit under attack. The Soviets also expect to reduce morale by forcing troops into a higher level of MOPP. Another advantage is that they would not need to decontaminate the area before occupying it. Nonpersistent agents are used to produce immediate casualties. They are effective through the respiratory system and in some cases, throughskin absorption. 
Soviets wi I I use non-persistent agents to accomplish the following tasks: 
-To create advantageous fighting conditions. 
-To produce casualties prior to an assault. 
-To harass troops by forcing them into a higher MOPP level. 
-AI low occupation without decontamination. 
118 

Detect and Identify Chemical Agents. 
The first, and probably, the most important step in contamination avoidance is detecting chemical agents. Unless this step is accomplished, none of the other avoidance steps can be taken, and the unit probably wi I I not accomplish 
its mission. 
Chemical agents will either=be delivered directly on unit positions (on-target attacks) or delivered upwind and allowed to drift over the unit position (off-target attacks). Detecting chemical agents is different for each type of attack. 
On-target attacks are the hardest chemical agents to avoid. They are designed to either produce immediate casualties or to contaminate troops and equipment. If the attack was intended to produce immediate casualties, a large amount of agent would be delivered in a very short time (within 30 seconds). Because of the reaction time of the M8 alarm, a large percentage of troops would be exposed to chemical agents before the alarm sounds. Therefore, it is not possible to warn troops of an on-target attack. Troops must either recognize the delivery of the chemical agent or the symptoms of chemical agent poisoning. 
Off-target attacks are easier to protect against. Units can rely on the M8 alarm to alert the unit that a chemical agent is about to drift over their position. Protective action can then be taken before troops are exposed to the agent. 
Detection is the finding of the chemical agent, preferably before any troops or equipment are contaminated. The US has several pieces of equipment that can detect and/or identify chemical agents. They are: 
-M8 Automatic Chemical-Agent Alarm (Detects) 
-M256 Chemical Agent Detector (Detects and Identifies) 
-M8 Chemical Agent Detector Paper (Detects and Identifies) 
-M9 Chemical Agent Detector Paper (Detects) 
Locating Chemical Agents 
Chemical downwind hazard predictions provide a means of locating probable chemical hazards. Liquid agents are probably found in the attack area. Vapor hazards are in both the attack area and hazard area. Before units can avoid chemical agents, they must_know what type agent is present and where it is 
located. 
119 

Vapor Hazards are the most difficult to predict. They may arise from an agent delivered as a vapor or from evaporation of a I iquid chemical agent. The chemical downwind hazard prediction, described later, out I ines the largest area and areas where chemical agent vapors still linger. Units use the automatic chemical agent alarm and the M256 sampler/detectors to locate vapor hazards. 
The location of I iquid chemical agents are much easier to predict. This is because they do not move around as much. It takes significant weather such as a heavy rainfal I to move liquid chemical agents. Liquid agents wi I I usually disappear from exposed areas and collect in sheltered areas. Units use detector paper to find I iquid hazards. There are several methods used to locate I iquid and vapor hazards. They are reconnaissance (recon), monitoring and surveys. 
RECON. Recon is detecting a chemical hazard in an area before the unit moves into or through the area. AI I units use recon methods to locate chemical hazards. It is very similar to conventional recon. Before moving into or occupying an area, a unit checks the area for enemy activity and the presence of chemical hazards. When in a static position, units recon areas around their positions. 
Equipment. The equipment for conducting a chemical recon is the same 
regardless of who conducts the recon. The recon element wi I I have an ACAA, M256 Detector Kit, and M8/M9 paper. 
Procedures. Recon procedures are the same; regardless, who conducts it. The purpose of NBC recon is to find the boundary of contamination and/or routes through a contamination area. Recon teams try to find the following 
information: 
-Are there chemical agents present? 
-If present, what type agent is it? 
-Where was the agent first detected? 
-What are the boundaries of the contaminated area? 
-Is there a clear route through the area? 
The unit commander can then use this information to form a picture of what chemical agents are in the area of operation. This is used to plan future operations. 
Prior to leaving the unit area to conduct the recon, the recon team prepares thei~ equipment and determ_ines areas of priority. Areas of priority include possrble movement route~ and possible unit locations. The unit commander designates an area for the recon team to return to for decontamination. 
120 

The method used for a recon depends on the tactical situation and need. The 
commander decides how the recon wi I I be done. Described below is how a recon 
is done and what decisions have to be made. Units adapt these procedures to 
fit their own need. 
The first step is to plan the recon. The unit commander indicates areas of priority and determines appLOximate distances between recon checks. Initiallythe recon team conducts checks at 500 meter intervals. They concentrate on areas where chemical agents wi I I collect. Low spots, smal I valleys, and sheltered locations are some examples. 
The recon team uses the ACAA (mounted on the vehicle) to detect vapors and 
M8/M9 detector paper to check Iiquids. If necessary, the team uses the M256 
sampler/detector to check a suspected vapor area. When time is critical, 
sampler/detector are used only when necessary. 
When the team detects chemical agents, they change their procedures. Theymark the area (unless ordered otherwise) then move back to a clean area. Theythen move laterally a predetermined distance and direction (usually 500 meters) then move forward again. This procedure is followed unti I they reach the unit boun~ary or find a clear route through the contamination. 
Recording and reporting recon information. The method the team uses to reportinformation depends on how urgently the information is needed. If time is critical, the information is passed over the radio using the NBC 4 reportformat. The following is a sample NBC 4 report: 
NBC 4 (Chemical) Report 
HOTEL Nerve, V 
QUEBEC LB 195300 Liquid 
SIERRA 201050Z 
If time is not critical, or if radio assets do not permit passing the 
information over the radio, the information is recorded and carried back to 
the unit. 
Monitoring. AI I units use monitoring to determine if a hazard is sti II present. Monitoring can be done on personnel, equipment, or terrain. Basically, it is a recheck to see if contamination, discovered by a recon or detecting an attack, sti I I exists. The M256 detector kit is a primary pieceof equipment used to monitor for chemical agents. If monitoring reveals that the chemical agent is sti I I present on personnel or equipment, then decon operations are conducted. 
121 

Chemical Surveys. Chemical surveys are required when the commander needs deta.i led information on the size of a contaminated area. Unlike radiological surveys, the intensity of the contamination cannot be determined. Therefore,the prime interest is learning how large the contaminated area is and if there are clean areas or routes within the area. 
Reconnaissance elements find_ the contaminated areas. The unit conducting the chemical survey usually knows the general location of the contamination and what type agent to expect. The unit may also know how the agent was delivered. This helps to plan the survey. 
For example, the area contaminated by an artillery attack usually is less than the area contaminated by a spray attack. This informaiton is used to determine the number of recon teams needed and the amount of time needed to conduct the chemical survey. 
Time is a major factor in planning and conducting chemical surveys. The 
reason is the amount of time needed to complete each detection test. The majority of the testing done during a survey is with M8 or M9 detection paper. This is because the primary concern in surveys are persistent Iiquidchemical agents. Periodic tests are done with the M256 detection kit to ensure that only the chemieel agent being tested for with the detection paper
is present. The following chart gives an indication of how long a survey
takes:  
Example:  1/4 kilometer  (250m)  target  radius  - 
Use M256 Kit  for  initial  test  only  16 minutes  
Use Detector paper  for 5 minutes at  four  locations  20 minutes  
Walking  a  total  of approximately 800 meters  24 minutes  
Total  time  for  a  four  man  team  60 minutes  
Time  required  for  total  I km  radius  240 minutes  
NOTE:  If the M256 Kit I km radius.  is  required  to do all  test,  then add  176 minutes  for  

The size of a contaminated area is important in determining the number of teams needed to conduct the survey. The following chart can be used to 
estimate the size of the attack area for planning purposes only. 
122 

TYPE MUNITION ATTACK AREA (radius) 
Artillery, bomblets and mortars  -I km  
Multiple rocket launchers, missiles, bombs, and unknown munitions  -I km  -2 km  
Aircraft spray or rocket spray  2 km  
Techniques.  
Three techniques  are  used  to make a chemical  survey.  They  are  route,  point,  

and area. The actual method used to survey a contaminated area depends on the situation. Routes and specific points may be surveyed if that information ts needed. However, the more common technique is the area survey. 
Route and point survey. These type surveys are conducted if a route or specific point is of operational concern. They are rarely conducted because this information is usually found during reconnaissance operations. If conducted, the survey team goes to a specific point or points along a route and tests for the presence of liquid contamination with M8 or M9 detector paper. 
Area survey. An area survey is the primary method used for conducting a chemical survey. They are used to determine how large an area is contaminated. This information is used to determine whether to bypass the contaminated area or to cross through the area. Area surveys can also be used to find relatively clean ar~s within the contaminated area. This includes clean routes through the contaminated area. 
If ~he agent identified by the detector kit is also detectable with M8 or M9 paper,· then all subsequent tests are performed with detector paper. This procedure wi I I reduce the amount of time required to perform the area survey. 
The control party provides each survey team with an overlay of the area to be surveyed. It wi II show the area to be surveyed and initial test points for each survey team. Each team member tests with the detector kit at the initial testing point. Tests are taken every 200 meters for agent with detector paper (if agent reacts with the paper) unti I each team member has come within 200 meters of attack center. AI I team members wi I I exit the area on the route used by the vehicle operator. 
123 

If only one survey team is used, the survey team proceeds to the next sector 
and.repeats the procedures. If more than one team is used, the control party
identifies team starting points (SP). 
Recording and Reporting Procedures. 
Results of a chemical surve~ are recorded. The important information is the 
type agent, location where=i t was detected, and the type test taken. 
The method used to report the results of a chemical survey depends on the 
situation. Since chemical surveys take so much time to conduct, the 
information is usually radioed back to the control party. If time is 
essential, the information can be radioed back to the control party using an 
NBC 4 (Chemical) report. 
Heading of the NBC 4 (Chemical) Report 
The heading of the NBC 4 (Chemical) report consists of the following
information: 
Precedence. The precedenc~ for the NBC 4 (Chemical) report is normally
IMMEDIATE, however, this r-eport may be downgraded as required or by SOP. 
PREPARE AND SUBMIT NBC 4 REPORT 
CONDITIONS 
Given the type of agent, height of burst, location (6-digit coordinate) where sample(s) were taken, description of the samples, the date/time contamination was initially detected, GTA 3-6-3 (revised lAW Ed. 5), STANAG 2103, paper, and penci I. 
STANDARDS 
Prepare an NBC 4 (CB) report and submit it to your supervisor lAW the 
peiformance measures outlined below. 
124 
PERFORMANCE  MEASURES:  
I. Prepare  an  NBC  4 report.  
LETTER  MEANING  EXAMPLE  
PRECEDENCE  IMMEDIATE  
DATE/TIME (LOCAL OR  ZULU  TIME,  STATE  WHICH)  061917Z  
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION  UNCLASSIFIED  
FROM  T6R67  
TO  S4M43  
TYPE OF  REPORT  NBC 4 (CB)  
H  TYPE OF  AGENT,  HEIGHT OF  BURST  NERVE  (V)  
AIRBURST  
a  LOCATION WH&AE  SAMPLE(S)  WERE  TAKEN  AND  FS  135648  
DETAILS OF  THE  SAMPLE  GROUND  SAMPLE  
s  DATE/TIME CONTAMINATION WAS DETECTED  INITIALLY  210735 (LOCAL)  
a.  Write down  the  type of agent and,  if  known,height  of  burst  as  I ine  
HOTEL  (i.e., airburst,  or  ground burst).  Use M8  paper  or  M256  to  determine  

type of agent. 
b. 
Write down location (6-digit coordinate), where sample(s) were taken and detai Is (descriptions~of the sample as I ine QUEBEC in report (i.e., ground sample, vegetation sample, etc.) 

c. 
Write down the date and time on I ine SIERRA in the report. The time can be either ZULU or Local. You must indicate which one is used. 


NOTE 
Lines HOTEL, QUEBEC, and SIERRA may be used as many times as necessary in the same report. 
2. Submit NBC 4 report to your supervisor. 
REFERENCE: 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-4004 

125 

Date/Time. The date and time that the message is sent can be shown in either local or ZULU time; however, it must be stated which time is used. 
Security Classification. Normally, the NBC 4 (Chemical) report is UNCLASSIFIED; however, grid locations may require encryption when sent by unsecure means. 
From. This I ine contains the designation of the survey team/unit submitting the report. 
To. This I ine contains the designation of the unit or units to which the report is being sent. 
Body of the NBC 4 (Chemical) Report 
The report  information contained is as follows:'  in each  I ine of  the body of  the NBC 4 (Chemical)  
LINE  ITEM  MEANING  
HOTEL  This I ine identifies the agent employed.  type of ch emical  
QUEBEC  This I ine is used to give the location where sample(s) were taken and detai Is (descriptions) of the samples (i.e., I iquid ground sample, vapor sample).  
SIERRA  The date and time the contamination initially detected, in either local time, is entered in this I ine.  was or ZULU  

When prepared for tele/electronic transmission a typical NBC 4 (Chemical) rep~rt wi I I appear as follows: 
NBC 4 (Chemical) Report Precedence: IMMEDIATE Date/Time: 211900Z Security C I ass if i ca t.i on: UNCLASSIFIED From: S3RI6 To: S3RI6 Type of Report: NBC 4 (Chemical) HOTEL: Nerve -V SIERRA: 210730Z 
126 

When submitting by tactical FM it may sound I ike: 
S3RI6 THIS IS S3R29 NBC 4 (Chemical) HOTEL: Blister-H QUEBEC: LB 625436 SIERRA: 21 1615Z 
PLOT NBC 5 (CHEMICAL) REPORT 
CONDITIONS 
Given an NBC 5 (Chemical) report, map with overlay material, greasepenci I, protractor, and the requirement to plot NBC 5 (Chemical) report in accordance with FM 3-3. 
STANDARDS 
I. Coordinates from NBC s;(Chemical) report are plotted on map/overlay lAW performance measures. 
2. Marginal data reflects at a minumum the following: Line ALPHA, Line DELTA, Line FOXTROT, and Line HOTEL And the scale of the map used. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
I. Accurately interpret NBC 5 (Chemical) report. 
2. 
Grid Coordinates are plptted on map/overlay within 200 meters. 

3. 
Marginal information is posted on overlay. 


REFERENCES 

FM 3-3 
STP 3-54E2, SM TASK 031-506-2006 (TBP) 

127 

PLOTTING AN NBC 5 (CHEMICAL) REPORT 
Contaminated Area Overlays 
Recons, monitoring, and surveys locate contaminated areas. Once located, the coordinates of contaminated areas are plotted as an overlay on the situation map. Units use the contamination overlay to plan operations. Commanders determine routes, unit posr-tions, and plan tactical operations based on where 
the contamination is located. If unable to avoid the area, commanders. determine routes of least contamination and determine what protection is 
required. They also choose locations for individual and unit decontamination on the other side of the contaminated area. 
When NBC 4 reports or survey data are consolidated and placed on the NBC 5 
report, it shows the areas of actual contamination. Any command level that collects NBC 4 reports may prepare and send an NBC 5. Each level wi I I use the NBC 5 overlay when planning an operation. Also, when an NBC 5 report is 
received, the receiving unit should remove alI NBC 1-4 data from the situation map. If a unit continues to operate in the same area, periodic surveys should be conducted and the NBC 5 adjusted accordingly. 
Heading of NBC 5 (Chemicai~Report 
The heading of the message wi I I consist of the following information in this order: 
Precedence. The dissemination precedence assigned to NBC 5 (Chemical) reports wi I I normally be IMMEDIATE, however, it may be downgraded as required or by SOP. 
Date/Time. Date and time the message is sent. It may be given in local or ZULU time, but it must be indicated which time is used (e.g. 280730Z or 280730 Local). 
Security Classification. Normally the message wi I I be UNCLASSIFIED. 
From.· The designation of the agency sending the message. 
To. The unit or units that are to receive the message. 
Type of Report. NBC 5 (Chemical). 
128 

Body of NBC 5 (Chemical) Report 
The information to be entered in the body of the message is as follows: 
Line Item 	Meaning 
ALFA 	The strike serial number assigned by the NBCC upon receipt of the initial NBC I (Chemical) Report for the attack. 
Line Item 	Meaning 
DELTA 	The date and time of the attack in either Local or ZULU time. It must be indicated which time used. 
HOTEL 	The type of chemical agent employed. 
SIERRA 	The date and time the contamination was initially detected. This time may be either local or ZULU time, but the time used must be shown. 
XRAY A series of coordinates taken from the situation map along the contour outlining the contaminated area. There is no specific number of coordinates to be used. However, there should be a sufficient number to insure that when the NBC 5 (Chemical) report is posted by the subordinate unit, the contour can be drawn as accurately as possible. When the series of coordinates form a closed ring, the last coordinate should he the same as the first. 
A properly prepared NBC 5 (Chemical) report is shown below. 
Precedence: IMMEDIATE 
Time: 181340Z Security Classification: UNCLASSIFIED From: E34ZI9 To: W5R03 Type of Report: NBC 5 (CHEMCIAL). ALFA: 3AD002 
129 

DELTA: 
HOTEL: 
SIERRA: 
XRAY: 

180527Z NERVE 
180645Z EG038924 EG044923 EG045922 EG041918 EG039919 EG037921 EG038924 
ADVISE THE COMMANDER/SUPERVISE THE CROSSING OF A CONTAMINATED AREA CONDITITONS 
Given a situation where soldiers are wearing the appropriate field uniform and carrying their assigned protective masks and overgarments (to include protective gloves and footwear covers), an area designated as being contaminated, a vehicle with an M8 automatic chemical agent alarm, an operational ABC-MI I decontamination apparatus, an M256 chemical agent detector kit per soldier, a map of the operational area, sandbags, chemical agent detector paper, material to protect exposed equipment. 
STANDARDS 
I. Advise the commander-and supervise the correct performance of the before-crossing procedures appropriate for the type of contamination present. 
2. 
Advise the commander and supervise the correct performance of the during-crossing procedures appropriate for the type of contamination present. 

3. 
Advise the commander and supervise the correct performance of the after-crossing procedures appropriate for the type of contamination present. 


REFERENCES 
FM 21-3, 	Task 031-506-2054 Task 031-503-300~ 
130 

Crossing a Contaminated Area 
By-passing a contaminated area is the perferred method of operations. You wi 1 I not need to wear complete protective clothing, or expend valuable time or resources on decontamination, but you may need to temporarily mask if a downwind vapor hazard exists. Your soldiers wi II be more psychologically
prepared to fight. They wi I~ not fear chemicals that otherwise would be 
1 ingering on their vehicles~and equipment. Avoiding contamination is simpler
and safer than going through contamination; however, the mission may perclude
this option. 
The ememy wants you to become preoccupied with contamination, hoping that you
wi I I either stop your mission to decontaminate or avoid using terrain or 
faci Iities that are contaminated. To maintain your freedom of action you con 
perform some of the following selected actions before entering a contaminated 
area: separate, encapsulate, cover, and move. If you are already
contaminated you must make decisions whether or not to move and how to go
about it. 
Separate 
Leave nonessential equipment and personnel behind. If this equipment cannot 
be protected from contamination it may present a hazard later. If yourmission includes going into a contaminated area and returning, you mightconsider leaving the decontaminaiton team behind. They could then make 
preparations to decontaminate your unit when you return. 
Encapsulate 
You must prevent NBC contamination from contaminating alI of your equipment.Anything carried on the outside of a vehicle wi II become contaminated. Consider placing vital equipment inside combat vehicles, shelters, and plasticbags or protect exposed equipment with wrappings or covers. 
Encapsulate personnel in MOPP gear or collective shelters. The collective protection systems in combat vehicles needs to be activated~ to entering 
a contaminated area. 
Cover 
Tarps, plastic bags, and other containers may be used to cover equipment.When equipment must be carried across a contaminated area in a an open truck, a canvas tarp wi I I reduce the amount of decontamination necessary later. If the equipment is left in its original containers (such as ammo cans), this mayfurther reduce or eliminate decontamination requirements. A protective coat of earth may also ease your decomtamination work after crossing a contaminated area. The earth wi I I more-Leadi ly absorb the contamination minimizing
absorption of the chemical agent into the paint. 
131 

Move 
Take immediate action to determine the type of hazard and its persistency. If 
the hazard is nonpersistent (blood or nonpersistent nerve agent), the unit 
continues its mission in place--the hazard wi I I disappear quickly. If the hazard is persistent (nuclear fallout, suspected biological agent, or Iiquidchemical agent), the unit maintains ful I protection and takes actions to limit further exposure to the ha~ard, and continues the mission. Simultaneously,the commander analyzes the unit's situation to determine if immediate 
relocation to clean alternate location is necessary or possible. Primary
considerations are given to: 
-The area contaminated (i.e., given in the Chemical Downwind Hazard Prediction, the NBC 3 (Chemical) and/or NBC 5 (Chemical) report). 
-The current tactical situation. 
-The protection offered by present position. 
-The increased exposure to the hazard that would be caused by relocation. 
-The possibi Iity of-further NBC attack. 
-The degree of decon required. 
-The subsequent impact of continuing to fight in partial or ful I 
protection. 
If the decision is made to remain in place, the contamination hazard must be 
minimized or avoided to the maximum extent possible. 
Preparation to relocate is-started as soon as possible, if the contamination problem cannot be easily O+-quickly resolved. Movement to a clean, alternate position may involve considerable movement distances depending on the unit's 
mission, the tactical situation, and terrain feature. During relocation, every. effort is made to avoid further exposure to the. contamination hazard. 
. 
Select a route or path through the contaminated area that provides freedom of maneuver and minimizes contact with contamination. You must always move tactically. You wi I I have difficulty locating snipers and booby traps,because your vision is hampered by wearing protective ~ask. Do not abandon tactics because you are in a contaminated area. · 
132 

Unit reconnaissance personnel should be ahead of your unit checking for clean paths or areas. If required to cross a contaminated area, minimize contact by avoiding vegetation such as smal I trees, brush, and tal I grass. The faster you can get across, the shorter wi I I be your contact with contamination and the less chance that it wi I I be absorbed into your equipment. Also, consider decontaminating a path. Setting the contaminated path on fire creates an immediate vapor hazard but wJ I I reduce the contact hazard. Engineers can reduce the contact hazard cry using earthmoving equipment to clear a path. The hazard on hard surfaces can be reduced by flushing them with water or covering them with clean material such as earth. Decontamination units are also capable of I imited decontamination of hard surfaces. 
Even with these methods, there wi I I sti I I be a vapor hazard near the 
decontaminated area. These methods have drawbacks because they are time 
consuming and require equipment and supplies not organic to a unit. 
Upon clearing the contaminated area, decontamination is performed, as mission allows, to include requesting additional decon support if required. Unit continues mission while maintaining readiness to react to additional conventional or NBC attacks. 
DETECtiON METHODS FOR BIOLOGICAL AGENTS 
The detection of biological agent attack is a requirement of an adequate defense system. Of primary concern is detection of biological agent aerosols which offer the most effective method of dissemination. Unlike nuclear weapons and chemical agents, biological agents are I iving. They are not detectable with the five physical senses. 
Detection can be subdivided into phases that provide information upon which maximum individual and collective protective measures can be taken. These phases are as follows: 
-Rapid warning to indicate that an att~ck is taking place, 
Sampling to provide the material necessary for identification and, in sdme cases, to help determine the extent of contamination, 
-Identification to identify the agent and help determine proper therapy
for exposed personnel, and 
-Epidemiology to determine the extent of agent effect throughout a unit or geographical area. 
133 

Rapid Warning. Rapid warning requires the use of some type of automatic devise (or devices) to give an immediate indication that biological agents have been used. A devise of this nature must be extremely sensitive to detect very smal I amounts of agent, and rei iable in order to reduce the possibi I ity of false alarms. Currently, the US Army inventory does not possess such a device, although several prototypes are in various stages of research and development. However, a warning may be provided by other means, such as the pattern of established warfare or recognition of the delivery system used. These could give the commander an indication that an attack is in progress. 
Pattern of Established Warfare. After biological agents have been employed 
several times, a definite pattern of usage could materialize. The time of 
attack, methods of dissemination, munitions, or the stage of the operation in 
which the agents are employed might be similar. This information wi II not 
give definite proof that a biological attack is ocurring; however, if the 
suspected action closely paral leis previous known attacks, a warning could be 
given. 
Intelligence. Intelligence can yield information useful in predicting a 
biological attack. 
-Strategic intel IigeA£e could give the commander an estimate of the enemy's overall capabilities, limitations, and probable intentions for the employment of biological agents. 
-Combat intelligence could give the commander an estimate of the enemy's battlefield readiness to employ biological agents. 
-Technical and medical intel I igence also have application. Technical intelligence could enable evaluation of the protective equipment of an enemy and determination of its avai labi I ity of forces. Medical intel I igence might provide information concerning the status of enemy preventive medicine capabi I ities, medical treatment capabi I ities, and preparations being made in medical and related areas which might indicate imminence of attack with biological agents. For example, the extent of an enemy's immunization program might be analyzed by methods which include serum analysis (determination of antibody content in POWs and examination of captured immunization records). 
Sampling. The purpose of sampling is to aid in the identification of an agent by obtaining a large number of viable microorganisms relatively free from 
interfering materials. Sampling wi I I be accomplished by individuals trained 
in sampling procedures so that uniformity wi I I exist in the samples and the sampli ing data forwarded to identification personnel. Sampling must not be done indiscriminately but wi I I be performed only after some indication that an attack has taken place. The US Army standard A sampling kit is the M34 CBR Agent Sampling Kit. 
134 

Methods of collecting suspected material vary with its nature and source; that is,· I iving or dead tissue, body secretions, water, and material from surfaces of alI kinds. Sampling also varies with the method of agent release, such as aerosols from spray devices or bombs. If the agent is released as an aerosol, every effort should be made to obtain a swab sample as near the point of release as possible. The number, as wei I as the viabi I ity of the microorganisms in an aerosoJ, wi I I decrease progressively with the passage of time and with increasing cMstance from the point of release. 
Samples of vegetation, water, and other material on which the agent has impacted may be of value in helping confirm the identity of the agent even though the samples contain interfering contamination and yield a smaller number of microorganisms than were present in the original aerosol. Such samples should be taken as soon after release and as near the point of release as possible. Vegetation, water, and other solid and I iquid samples are collected by placing contaminated portions of each in sterile containers. Samples from contaminated surfaces may be obtained by rubbing the surfaces with a sterile, moistened cotton swab and then placing the swab in a sterile, capped container. 
Samples should be sent to )he nearest designated laboratory for identification by the fastest method ava~able. 
Identification. The identification of microorganisms is a difficult and time-consuming process. The methods used are generally dependent upon obtaining living organisms by sampling. 
The identification phase of detection is accomplished to determine which of the possible antipersonnel agents was used in the attack. Identification can aid in the following: 
-Confirming that an attack has taken place. 
-Determining the proper therapy to combat agent effects on exposedpersonnel. 
~Estimating the expected number and type of casualities in the command. 
-Determining the time-to-casualties if the time of the attack is known. 
-Evaluating an enemy's biological capability. 
Laboratory procedures are used to establish or confirm the identity of a microorganism. 
135 

Epidemiology. Epidemiology is the study of the community aspects of disease 
and-is employed particulary during epidemics or sudden outbreaks of disease. 
Epidemiology is the least desirable phase in determining that a biological
attack has taken place from the standpoint of time; however, at the present
time, it is the most positive. A considerable amount of time may be consumed 
before significant information would be obtained. It is, therefore, limited 
as a source of information upon which prompt defensive measures can be based. 
When a large number of cas~s of a disease suddenly appear within an area, an 
investigation is conducted to determine the cause. If alI natural causes for 
the outbreak can be ruled out, an assumption can be made that a biological
attack has occurred. Initial biological attacks would probably be detected by
epidemiological findings of the Army Medical Service or the Air Force Medical 
Service. 
USE THE NBC MARKING SET 
CONDITIONS 
Given a situation requiring the marking of a contaminated area, and an NBC 
Marking Set. 
STANDARDS 
Select the correct marker, fi I I it out completely, and emplace the marker in accordance with the performance measures listed below: 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
I. Emplace on object. 
2. 
Mount on mounting stake_ 

3. 
Emplace as part of large area marking requirement. 


USE NBC MARKING SET 
The NBC marking set is a recent addition to the chemical defense equipment
inventory. It was originally invented by the Germans and subsequentlypurchased by the US Government, i.e., the (12) in the National Stock Number,NSN 9908-12-124-5955. Blow is a description and location of the majorcomponents of the set, itself. AI I major components can be reordered. Don't discard the set. AI I stock numbers for replacement parts are found on the 
inside of the set under rol Is of flags. Like the M256 Chemical Detection Kit,
the NBC Marking Set is issued at squad level. 
136 
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 
Use carrying straps to wear marking set so it 	is comfortable for you.
Generally it is best to wear set on front when 	working alone and back when
on 
working in teams. 
Front wear. Loop top carryLng strap around shoulders. Make sure ribbon 
container is at bottom as shown. Unhook bottom carrying strap and loop aroundwaist. Rehook bottom strap to carrying cantainer. Adjust straps so set is snug. 
Back wear. Put arms through carrying straps as shown below. Make sure crayons are at top. Adjust straps so set is snug. 
FLAG CONTAINERS 	RIBBON CONTAINER 
Each container holds 20 Marking flags: 	Holds 13 separate rol Is of yellow marking ribbon. 
20 white flags for marking nuclear contamination. Ribbon used to provide a way 
to hang flags between poles or 20 blue flags for marki~ biological other objectscontamination. 
20 yellow flags for marking chemical 
contamination. 

CARRYING CONTAINER 
Holds alI individual parts of set. 
Carrying straps can be 
adjusted for front or 
back wear. 

MOUNTING STAKES 48 stakes stored in bottom of carrying container 
Used to make poles for hangingflags and attaching marking ribbon. 
CRAYONS 
Red crayons used to mark 
information on flags. 

137 

Mark Radiologically Contaminated Area 
Place signs on alI probable routes leading into contaminated area at the point where the dose rate reaches I rad per hour measured at I meter above the ground. When the dose rate is above I rad per hour or when a CB haz~:d as 
located, signs showing the actual dose rate or agent are placed on alI 
probable routes leading intQ the contaminated area at the boundary. 
Secure the signs above the ground, right-angled apex downward, on 
wire-boundary fences, trees, rocks, or poles, or by putting the apex into the ground. This latter method should not be used if the other methods can be used, as the signs can be obscured by grass and other undergrowth, and they can be knocked down. The front side of signs are posted facing away from the area being marked. When signs are posted within a contaminated area, the sign wi II face away from the area of higher dose rate, or higher concentration, if 
this can be determined. 
For marking contaminated areas, the following information is put on each sign: 
DOSE RATE 
DATE AND TIME OF READING ATOM 
DATE AND TIME OF BURST 
Mark a Chemically Contaminated Area 
-=-::--1 1 in. (28 CM)~ 
AGENT BL-1 STER (HD) \· 
C::0.S
DATE -22 SEPT '· <?',... 
/).,
TIME -IOOOOZ 
~0 
('.
'1.. 
:/ 
~ 
"'-.' 
138 
Mark an Area of Biolog.!..._ca
;· ,~I~C~on~t!.!a:::.:m_i_n_a_ti on 
··:-..
ANTHRAX
AGENT -23 SEPT DATE -1200Z
TIME 
lllustrat ion of Marking Contaminated Areas Using 
NOTE 
. side flag
Flags.ma~ ha~;/~p~~t fla~l~lot
contain~ . f stake and p
"th point o 
WI t slowly.

t lag ou 
I. from Container: 
FLAG SLOT 
crayon from side ting set. 
M k required
3 ar · on 
. into rma t I on 
on neck of flag 
with crayon. 
to holder. 

4 . Attach t lag t 0 ObJ.ect. 
139 
WARNING 
Be careful when using mounting stakes. Stakes could tear C-B protective clothing. 
2. 	Remove at least three stakes to make a pole. 
NOTE 
Do not use more than four stakes together. Pole Bends too easily with five stakes. 
stake access latch. 
3. Stick first stake next to object or marked.  in ground area to be  
NOTE  
You may  need  to  pound  first  

stake into-ground using a rock or other oE'Ject. This wi II damage stake but wi II start a a hole in which to place an undamaged stake. Keep damaged stake to use as a tool for starting holes for other stakes. 
140 
4. 	Add two stakes to first stake. For 5. Pul I out flag and mark with crayon 
more height, such as in bushy areas, as shown in example 1, steps 1-3. 
add one more stake. 

\
\ 
\ 
\ 
\ 
l 
I 
NOTE 
Make sure lettering on flag-faces away from contaminated object or area~ 
6. 	Fold and attach flag to pole using 7. Tuck bottom tip of flag into slit using s I it at top of f I ag. of mounting stake. 
141 
1. Make up and ground. 
WARNING Be careful when using mounting stakes. Stakes could tear C-B protective clothing. 
NOTES 
This i I lustration shows marked off area when fin i i shed. 
Use natural or man made objects such as trees or fences as poles if these are available. 
place pole in 2. Lay two next to  extra stakes pole. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each pole you  
need  to  surround  
contaminated  area.  
NOTE  
Poles should be about  5 to 6 feet  apart.  

142 
4. 	Make guy lines for each pole as follows: 
NOTE 
Ribbon may rol I back inside 
container. Use point of stake 
to reach inside opening and 

pul I ribbon back out. 
a. 	Tie end of one ribbon rol I 
to one of the stakes left out 
for use as a peg. Do not tear 
off ribbon yet. 

GUY 
POLE 
EXIP.A
£TA7 (PEG) 
\t 
b. 	Stick peg in ground c. Keep pu I I i ng out d. Loop ribbon around 
about I 1/2 to 2 feet enough ribbon to pole once and keep 
from pole. reach top of pole ~ul ling out enough

-rl bbon to reach about
and s I ide ribbon into slit at top I 1/2 to 2 feet on 
of pole. 	opposite side. 
143 
e. 	
Tear ribbon with hands and 
tie to second extra stake 


f. 	
Stick stake in ground. 


5. 	Connect each pole with ribbon as follows: 
NOTE 
end 	of 
1 lr
1L!L ,-c 
a. 	Pu I I out r i bbon and s I i p end b. ~eep pul 1 1ng out ribbon and into slit at top of first pole connecf~each pole by slidingand tie a knot. Do not tear off ribbon into slit and making
ribbon from rol I y~t. 	one keep around pole. 
144 


c. 	When you have reached last pole 6. Pull out flag and mark withtear off ribbon with hands and 
crayon as shown in example 1,
tie 	to pole. steps 1 thru 3. 
Make sure lettering on flag
faces away from contaminated
area. 
'• 	Attach flag to stretched cut 8. Fold flag from its bottomribbon. 
tip to top of printed trinangle,this will keep flag from curling. 
145 
CONDUCTING UNMASKING PROCEDURES 
CONDITIONS 
Assume that you are the senior ranking soldier in a group of soldiers. You 
and the soldiers are in mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP) level r. Chemical agents may have been used. An M256 chemical agent detector kit may or may not be available. 
STANDARDS 
The initiation of unmasking procedures is performed in the proper sequence and in accordance with FM 3-4. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
I. Conduct unmasking procedures. 
-Refer to FM 3-4, Chapter 5 when a detector kit is available. 
-Refer to FM 3-4, Chapter 5 when detector kit is not available. 
2. Completes appropriate unmasking procedure withrn 45_minutes. 
REFERENCES: 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-3002 
CONDUCT UNMASKING PROCEDURES 
The protective mask not only must be put on in time, it must also fit and function properly. In combat, platoons and companies must have rigorous mask 
inspections at least weekly and should check mask functiqning occasionallywith CS agent. This can be done quickly and easily in an~assembly area byhaving the men mask and stand in the cloud from a CS grenade. 
Although your protective equipment wi I I provide effective protection againstchemical agents, maintaining a high MOPP (mission oriented protective posture)reduces the efficiency of the unit and its abi I ity to perform its mission. In hot weather the heat stress caused by wearing protective equipment,particularly the protective mask, can cause heat casualties. Thus, it is important that the MOPP be reduced as soon as it is safe to do so. 
146 

Unmasking must be careful and deliberate. This is especially true today because modern toxic chemical agents, such as nerve agents, ki I I or 
incapacitate in very diluted amounts. Unmasking should not be considered unti I alI visible signs of the chemical agent have disappeared. Even then, units should wait for a buffer period of time before beginning the unmasking procedure. This buffer period is important because chemical vapors can be trapped in clothing or tentage fabric and can be given off for several hours after the attack. 
The procedure to be followed in determining when it is safe for troops to unmask depends on whether an M256 Chemical Detector Kit is available. 
NOTE Initiating unmasking procedures is a command decision After a chemical attack, troops do not unmask unti I authorized by the commander or ranking individual present. 
You wi I I be required to use the following precedures to advise your unit commander when to unmask. 
UNMASKING PROCEDURE WITH A CHEMCIAL DETECTOR KIT AVAILABLE 
Unmasking procedure. If an M256 Chemical Detector Kit-is_~vai lable, it should be used to determine the presence or absence of chemicaL agents. 
When the detector kit indicates the absence of chemical agents, the procedure used to verify that agents are not present, before allowing troops to unmask, 
is as follows: 
Step I. Select two or three soldiers and examine them to make certain they exhibit no chemical agent symptoms, particularly pinpointing (contraction) of the pupi Is, indicating exposure to nerve agents. This examination should be conducted in a shaded area, since bright light wi I I cause contraction of the pupi Is, which could be misinterpreted as a nerve agent &y~ptom. 
Step 2. If the selected soldiers exhibit chemical agent symptoms, administer first aid. Select and examine substitutes unti I you have two or three who exhibit no chemical agent symptoms. 
Step 3. Have the selected persons unmask in a shaded area. Examine them for chemical agent sysmptoms for five minutes. If symptoms appear, have them remask immediately and administer appropriate first aid. 
Step 4. After five minutes have elapsed and no symptoms appear, have the soldiers remask. Examine them continually for ten minutes in a shaded area. 
If no symptoms appear, advise the unit commander that it is safe for the 
remainder of the troops to unmask. 
147 

UNMASKING PROCEDURE, CHEMICAL DETECTOR KIT NOT AVAILABLE 
If a chemical detector kit is not avai !able, use the following procedure to determine if it is safe to unmask. 
Step I. Select two or three soldiers and check them, in a shaded area, to be sure they exhibit no chemical agent symptoms. 
Step 2. Have the selected soldiers take a deep breath arnihold it, then break 
the seal on their masks for 15.seconds, keeping their eyes open. After the 15 second exposure, have them reseal and clear their masks. 
Step 3. Examine the selected soldiers, in a shaded area, for ten minutes. If chemical agent symptoms appear, administer first aid and advise the commander that the troops should remain masked. If no symptoms appear, proceed to the next step. 
Step 4. Have the same soldiers again break the seals of their masks, take two or three normal breaths, then reseal and clear their masks. 
Step 5. Examine the soldiers as before, in a shaded area, for another ten minute period. If no symptoms appear, proceed to the next step. 
Step 6. Have the same soldiers unmask for a period of five minutes and remask. Examine them for chemical agent symptoms and remask. 
Step 7. If symptoms appear, have them remask immediately, administer first 
aid, and advise the commander to have the troops remain masked. If no 
symptoms appear, continue to examine the soldiers for another ten minute 
period, if they sti I I do not exhibit symptoms, advise the commander that the 
remainder of the troops may unmask. However, alI troops should remain alert 
particularly for the appearance of any chemical agent symptoms. 
You wi I I be required to advise the unit commander regard~ the safety of 
allowing the troops to unmask after exposure to chemical agents. Remember, 
unmasking is a command decision. If command guidance is not avai table, the 
decision to unmask is made by the ranking person present. 
148 
SUPERVISE PARTIAL DECONTAMINATION 

I. GENERAL: In this lesson you wi II learn the operational concept of emergency and partial decontamination. The discussion of partialdecontamination wi I I be I imited to two techniques; personal wipedown and operator spraydown. Discussion of partial decontamination wi II be further expanded later. The procedures you wi I I learn are completed by the individual and meant only to permit survival and limited sustainment for the individual and individually assigned equipment. These operational G&ncepts are the least costly methods of decontamination in both time and resources. 
2. TASKS: This lesson contains one task. 
Decontaminate using ABC-MI I Decontamination Apparatus. 
3. REFERENCES: 
FM 3-5 
FM 21-2, Task 031-503-1007 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-2002 
TM 3-4230-204-12&P 
4. LEARNING AIDS: 
ABC-MI I Decontamination Apparatus 
M58AI Skin Decon Kit 
UNIT DECONTAMINATION 
This lesson was rewritten lAW the new decontamiation fieJd manual, FM 3-5. This manual, FM 3-5, has defined and clarified the process of nuclear, 
biological, and chemical decontamination. It shows how contaminated forces 
survive, sustain, or restore their combat potential when contaminated. 
FM 3-5 makes fundamental change in the emphasis of decontamination. It emphasizes decontaminating just enough to keep fighting, rather than enough to make a contamination-free environment. This means most decon wi I I support the partial decon concept, the point of which is to sustain the fight. It will be done in or very near the area of operation with decon squads from divisional corps chemical companies reinforcing the decon effort of contaminated units. 
Other important changes in the overal I decontamination concept include: 
-A chemica I pI a toon w i I I be required to support det-a i I ed equipment de con operations. Previous doctrine stated that a squad would-support this size decon operation. Battalion-size units wi I I require the support of a ful I chemical equipment as wei I as that to be fielded in the near future. 
149 

MI2AI Power-driven Decon Apparatus. 
XMI7 SANATOR. 
XMI8 Diesel-powered Decon Apparatus. 
XMI6 Jet Exhaust Decon System. 

-The term MOPP gear has been adopted for what has been cal led the chemical protective ensemble. It includes alI of the things necessary for 
soldier  to  assume  a  protective posture:  a  
Chemical  protective suit  (overgarment).  
Chemical  protective  footwear  covers  (overboots).  
Chemical  protective gloves (rubber gloves).  
Protective mask  (field,  tank,  or  aviation versions).  
Protective mask hood.  
Chemical  first aid antidotes.  
Skin decon kit.  
Detector paper.  
-The shower many reasons for  requirement in personnel this. Some are:  decon has been dropped.  There  were  

I. Research has shown that showering may be ineffective or even 
detrimental. Some agents are so lethal that you must sh~er within minutes of getting them on you skin or you become a casualty. Some jesearch shows thatshowering wi I I even speed an agent's penetration of the skin. 
2. New MOPP gear undressing procedures have been developed. When done properly, they allow Iittle or no agent transfer. This eliminates the
need for showering to remove agents from the skin. 
3. The Army has replaced impregnated undergarments with chemical 
protective suits (overgarments). This has eliminated the need for a shower to remove the irritating compounds that the undergarments leave on the skin. 
150 

-The slurry pit has been deleted from the equipment decon station. The new procedure cal Is for a more th~rough initial wash. This is followed by the application of a decontaminant over the entire outer surface, including the undercarriage. This change eliminates the logistic burden of a slurry pit. 
-Interior decon has been added as an additional step in the equipment decon operation. The need exists to remove agent inside the vehicle as wei I as outside. The procedures given in FM 3-5 use currently available equipment. These procedures wi I I be modified when fortReoming interior decon systems, such as the XMI5 hot air interior decon system, have been fielded. 
-Aviation decon procedures have been developed. They use the functional areas of Army aviation as the primary determining factor for the type and extent of decon. Refer to FM 3-5 for detai Is on aviation decontamination. 
Contamination from an NBC attack shouldn't be thought of as an "insurmountable problem". On the modern integrated battlefield, soldiers wi I I have to deal with this contamination in order to fight and win. In the event of NBC contamination, commanders wi I I have to adjust their combat operation, the sam~ way as they do for other factors such as bad weather or shift in enemy forces. 
During the escalation of future conflicts with the WARSAW Pact countries, contamination is a distinct possibi I ity. Therefore, with ihis in mind, you must assume that as soon as NBC attacks have been initiated, your combat potential lessens. 
Anyone who has ever worn MOPP gear knows that it is hot and uncomfortable and that it reduces job performance. While most everyone knew that the gear would have some effect on a unit's combat performance, no one knew just how much. 
A new Army study is changing that. Initial results have come in from the chemical and nuclear environment field test (CANE I). Although the results are not conclusive, the following trends were revealed: 
151 

-A mechanized infantry platoon attack took twice as long when in a chemical environment. All infantry attacks wi II probably take longer in a chemical environment. 
-More soldiers were required to inflict the same damage on an enemy in a chemical as opposed to a conventional attack. It took at least a four~to-one superiority compared to a three-to-one superiority to guarantee a 50 percent chance of success. 
-Casualties increased. Infantry soldiers were at least 15 percent more 
I ikely to be ki I led in an assault. 

-Command and control difficulties increased. Confusion contributed to this. Someone assumed control only 20 percent of the time on a platoon leader's death instead of 80 percent in conventional combat. 
-Some weapons and weapon systems seemed less effective. With both attackers and defenders in MOPP gear, the following facts were noted: 
-Ml6 ki I Is down by 25 percent. 
-LAW and DRAGON ki I Is reduced 75 percent. 
-Machine gun ki I Is remained the same. 
-Arti I lery ki I Is appeared to be twice as effective. 
-Fighting forces may not be able to operate effectively in MOPP 4 for much more than 72 hours. 
-Severe dehydration effected over 17 percent of infantry soldiers while 83 percent of remainder were close to dehydration (although they were unaware of this). 
Consider being in a contaminated area whether it be contaminated with radiological, biological, or chem~cal hazards. You as the individual are confronted with the possibi I ity of having to decontaminate yourself and individual equipment to continue your mission successfully. Placing yourself in a leader role compounds these thoughts even further having now to decontaminate your vehicles and crew served weapons. As you progress up the leadership chain, the problem remains the same, however, the time and resources to be gathered to decontaminate escalates significantly. Therefore, the decision to decontaminate must be made within the realm of the tactical situation. The tactical S'ituation, of course, will dictate how much you as an individual and leader can decontaminate or adjust the MOPP level. 
152 

There are certain principles that must be followed when thinking of decontamination. The more decon you do, the more expensive it is in resources, manpower, materials, and time. Those same resources are used to fight the enemy, so commanders must expend these resources wisely. The best way to conserve those resources is by following these basic principles: 
-Decon as soon as possible. The sooner you decontaminate, the sooner you can reduce your MOPP. 
Decon only what is necessary. If you're expecting to survive and win, don't waste your valuable time and resources decontaminating everything. 
-Decon as far forward as possible. Don't truck your contaminated personnel and equipment out of your operational area. If at all possible, bring the decon assets to the unit. 
-Decontaminate by priority. This principle, although last in the decon concept, is highly important. The best way to set your priorities is to decon the important things first and less important things last. 
Choosing what techniques use for decontamination should be a tactical decision. There are seven standard decon techniques that progressively help 
restore units combat potential. The more techniques you ~se to decon, the more you enhance your combat potential. On todays modern battlefield, decon assets wi I I be in great demand. Your commanders should plan for decon operations and concentrate their decon assets where they can best support the battle. Commanders should take into consideration what levels of decon exist. With the implementation of new decon equipment, the commander wi I I have to choose if he/she can rely on company decon assets, needs decon assistance from battalion level, or undergo ful I scale decontamination operations supported by divisional chemical company. Commanders wi I I also 
have to consider the cost and time requirements. As far be necessary to examine the concepts of decontamination. emergency, partial, or complete.  as cost goes, it will Those concepts being  
NBC OPERATIONAL CONCEPT  DECON TECHNIQUES  
EMERGENCY  
Survival of combat potential (individual soldiers)  Skin Decon  

153 

PARTIAL  
Sustainment of combat potential  Personal  Wipedown  
of  the contaminated  force  Operator's Spraydown  
by allowing  it  to continue  MOPP Gear Exchange  
the battle  Vehicle Washdown  
COMPLETE  
Restoration of combat potential  Detailed Troop Decon  
of  the force by eliminating  Detailed Equipment Decon  
the need  to  use MOPP 3 or  4  
DECONTAMINANTS  
A decontaminant  is anything  that  is used  to  reduce  the hazard  from NBC agents 

to an acceptable level. The three types are: standard, natural, and nonstandard decontaminants. 
Standard Decontaminants: STB and DS2. 
WARNING 
STB and DS2 should never be stored together. Mixing the two wi I I cause a fire. 
Decontaminating agent, STB (Supertropical Bleach). Decontaminating agent,
STB, is commonly referred to as supertropical bleach, or bleach. Supertropical bleach is a mixture of cholorinated Iime aod calcium oxide 1n a white powder form. When manufactured, it contains about ~0% available chlorine, which give it a characteristic pungent oder. STB is corrosive to most metals and injurious to most fabrics. A protective mask and rubber 
gloves must be worn when dryhandl ing bleach. 
154 
STB decontaminates mustard, lewisite and nerve agents by converting them into 
harmless or less toxic compounds. Ful I strength STB reacts violently with 
I iquid mustard and usually produces sufficient heat to cause a flame. STB may
be applied directly to surfaces contaminated with Iiquid mustard by diluting
the mixture with water. Mixing STB with water or earth faci I itates its distribution and reduces the temperature resulting from its reaction with liquid mustard. STB does not react with I iquid chemical agents after theyhave been absorbed into the ground or other porous mateJials because it cannot come into contact with the agent. However, as long as BfB retains its chlorine content, it serves to seal the chemical agents or to neutralize the vapors as they rise from the contaminated surface. Since STB decomposes, the covering should be renewed at least every 24 hours. If the seal is broken byabrasion, the vapors wi I I again become a hazard, and the STB covering must be renewed. 
STB is used to decontaminate rubber, terrain, canvas, wood, or other types of 
materials. Bleach mixtures (dry mix and slurry) do not decontaminate mustard HD effectively at temperatures below I4°C (57°F), the freezing point of HD mustard. If camouflaged properly, STB can be left on most surfaces after . use. However, STB should be rinsed from metal surfaces soon after application
to avoid damage to the metal. The metal surfaces should then be oiled or 
greased to prevent corrosion. However, STB must never be used to 
decontaminate ammunition. On wood or other porous surfaces, several applications of STB may be necessary as determined by testing. When testinghas determined that decontamination is adequate, wooden surfaces may be 
flushed with water to remove slurry. 
-Slurry. There are two types of STB slurry, one for applications by hand and the other for application by a Power Driven Decontaminating Apparatus(PDDA). When swabs, brushes, or brooms are used to apply slurry, it is best to mix equal parts (by weight) of STB and water. For example, one drum of STB (50 pounds) mixed with 6 gal Ions of water (48 pounds) would make an effective slurry. 
~Dry Mix. Dry mix consists of STB mixed thoroughly with dry earth, sand, or ashes. The proportions by volume are 2 parts (2 shovelfuls) of bleach to 3 parts (3 shovelfuls) of earth, sand, or ashes. Dry mix is used to decontaminate chemical contaminants that are washed from vehicles and equipment. It is also used to decontaminate the soles and heels of boots. 
Decontaminating Agent DS2. DS2 is a clear solution consisting of 70% diethylenetriamine, 28% ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, and 2% sodium hydroxide. It is a general purpose decontaminant. DS2 is degraded by water and carbon dioxide in the air. A partially used container should not be kept
for further use after 24 hours. 
155 

-DS2 is avai !able in I 1/3-quart cans and 5-gal lon drums in ready-to-use solutions. The I 1/3 quart cans are fi II ing the ABC-Mil, I 1/2-quart portable decontaminating apparatus. DS2 can be applied with the Ml I apparatus, brooms, brushes, or swabs. The solution is effective at temperatures from -27° C to 53° C (-15° F to 125° F). 
-DS2 reacts with nerve agents (GA, GB, GO, and VX) and blister agents (HD, HL, L) to reduce their hazard effectively within 5 minutes after application. With sufficient contact time (up to 30 minrrtes) it is effective against alI known war chemical agents. DS2 can be applied by scrubbing with a stiff bristle brush. 
-Cautions for DS2 use. It is not corrosive to most metals, but corrodes aluminum, cadmium, tin, and zinc after prolonged contact. It removes and softens new paint, and may discolor old paint. It wi II soften leather and damage woolen fabric. Although DS2 can be used on some plastics and rubber, it should not be used on any item containing polycarbonates such as crash helmets and aircraft canopies. DS2 should not be used to decontaminate the protective masks because of possible damage to the mylar diaphragm in the voicemitter assembly. 
Decontaminating Apparatus, Portable: 14 Liters, Ml3 DAP. The Ml3 is designed to dispense standard chemical agent decontaminating sorutlon, DS2. The DAP consists of an accessory container, a disposable decontaminant container, a manual in-I ine pump, a hose, two want sections, and an attachable, disposable brush. A new brush wi I I be issued each time a new decontaminant container is obtained. The Ml3 weighs no more than 60 pounds when fi I led with DS2. It is 
to be vehicle mounted, man~portable, manually operated, and easily maintained. It is designed to fit in the standard fuel/water can mounting bracket. According to current proposed changes to the basic of issue plan (BOIP) for the Mil, the Ml3 DAP will replace the Mil on a one-for-one basis in all units except Armor units and in selected applications. The DAP wi II be used by crews of tactial vehicles and self-propel led/towed arti I lery for the 
remove! of chemical agent contamination. The item wi I I~ issued on the basis of one DAPper tactical/combat vehicle, including construction equipment and crew served weapons larger than 60 caliber. Fielding is scheduled for September 1985. 
Natural decontamination of biological agents. The use of the natural decontaminants, weather, water, earth and fire are effective against biological contaminants. Weathering is the simplest method of decontaminantion and shou,ld be used whenever practical. Elements of weather that are effective in decontamination include low humidity, rain and sunlight. 
156 

-The killing of microorganisms through dehydration and exposure to sunlight (ultraviolet rays) are the principal means by which weathering accomplishes decontamination. The germicidal effects of ultraviolet and infrared rays in sunlight wi I I ki I I most biological agents within one day. The rate at which microorganisms dry out (dehydrate) depends upon the moisture content of the air. Although some biological agents (spores) are not affected by low humidity or periods of dry weather, it aids in reducing most types of biological contamination. 
-Rainfal I wi I I wash many microorganisms from objects. The wetting of the terrain by rainfal I may prevent the formation of secondary aerosols, however, it may cause the leaching of spores into soi I. Washing or flushing a contaminated surface with water removes much of the biological agent. The runoff from this operation must be controlled carefully and treated as such. Soap added to water used in washing contaminated surfaces aids in removing the agent. 
-Covering biological contamination with earth is an expedient method of decontamination and is normally used in the disposal of water items used in the decontamination process. 
-Fire is a rapid, simple, and effective means of d~contaminating biological agents. Burning must be handled with care to avoid creating a secondary aerosol hazard caused by thermal currents carrying the agent aloft. 
Natural decontamination of chemical agents. Evaporation and decomposition of chemical agents are the principal means by which weather gradually accomplishes chemical decontamination. The time necessary for decontamination by weathering is cal led. the persistency of the chemical agent. The persistency of an agent is difficult to predict. Lack of time, unfavorable weather conditions, or proximity of contamination to unprotected personnel may require a faster method of decontamination. 
-Elements of weather that affect the persistency of chemical agents are temperature, wind, humidity, rain, and sun I ight. 
-High temperatures promote evaporation and hasten the dispersal of chemical agents in the air. The persistency of I iquid chemical agents on the ground decreases as the temperature rises. 
-Aeration aids in decontamination. High winds disperse the vapors of the chemical agents rapidly and dilute their concentration. 
-Moisture tends to break down chemical agents, however, most chemical 
agents break down very slowly. Heavy rain or long duration aids in decontamination by removing chemical agents mechanically. A concentration of chemical agents may, however, build up in drainage areas-~reating a 
contamination hazard. 
157 
-Sandy soi I wi I I tend to absorb the agent and thus increase the persistency. 
-The shortest persistency on the ground is on non-porous, hard, smooth surfaces such as paved roads. 
-The amount and type of vegetation in a given area wi I I affect presistency of chemical agent. Chemical agents tend to cQI lect on vegetation increasing the contact hazard. Decontamination of vegetated areas is more difficult than on open areas. 
-Earth is used to seal in contamination and as an absorbent for Iiquid contamination. A covering of about 10 centimeters (4 inches) of earth gives protection as long as the earth is not disturbed and the chemical agent is exposed. Earth used as a seal or cover becomes contaminated and must be treated as contaminated waste. 
-Fire vaporizes or burns I iquid chemical agents. Fire is a rapid, simple and effective means of decontaminating large quantities of chemical agents that might be encountered in disposal or demi Iitarization operations. Some chemical agents are combustible and upon burning are converted in relatively harmless products. Troops adjacent to the burning site must be warned of the impending action to avoid friendly casulties. 
INDIVIDUAL SURVIVAL AND INDIVIDUAL SUSTAINMENT DECONTAMINATION 
Individual Survival Decontamination. Every soldier in the Army is required to know how to decontaminate his or her skin when contaminated with a I iquid chemical agent. Considerable cost has been invested to acquire individual decontamination kits per soldier and to develop training Iiterature and programs to ensure this training is received. 
Chemical 
-If chemical agents contact your skin because you dfd not wear protective gear or it was damaged, you must take immediate action to decon yourself. This immediate action must be started within I minute of becoming contaminated because chemicals, especially nerve agents, are rapidly absorbed by the skin 
and can ki I I in minutes. 
158 
NONSTANDARD DECONTAMINANTS SUMMARY OF COMERICAL PRODUCTS FOR USE AS FIELD EXPEDIENT DECONTAMINANTS 
PRODUCT MIXTURE RATIO 
Caustic soda 10% by weight or lye (sodium (10 lbs. lye 
dydroxide) 
Household 
bleach 
(Sodium Hypochlorite 5%) 
HTH (swimming pool chlorine) 
Household amonia 
(Amonium hydroxide 5%) 
Washing soda 
(Sodium carbonate) and Baking soda (Sodium bicarbonate) 90 lbs water 
Full strength or d i I ute as needed; read 
label 
Not more than lb. HTH in 2 lbs. Water (30% solution) 
Full strength 
I0% so Iut ion -10 lbs. soda to 12 gallons of water 
TIME OF CONTACT 

WITH AGENT  EFFECTIVE ON  
5-15 minutes depending on substrate  G agents, 61ood agents, ON~  

5-15 minutes V agent Blister or longer agents depends on strength of solution 
5 minutes, V-nerve agents more or less Blister agents depending on concentration 
5-25 minutes G agents or longer 
5-30 minutes G agents, ON if possible use as a laundry agent 
COMMENTS 
Mixing process generated 
considerable heat; so I uti on 
is highly 
corrosive to skin fabrics, 
non-ferrous metals 
Causes burns and des trays some ' fabrics full strength; read Iabe I , eas i Iy obtained good a II around 
Very corrosive to sprayers, metals, skin. Clean thoroughly after use 
Special amonia mask needed slow acting, use if Iye not available 
Good for fabrics best way to decon ON 
159 

Line (Calcium oxide)  As much as wi II dissolve in water or  Use slurry as a wash or rinse  G agents  Weak decontaminant, be.tter than plain water  
spr ink I e on  so I uti on  but  not  much  
dry  

GUNK Full strength 	Use as a All Holds agent in solvent on so I u t i on un t i I 
o i I , grease natural forces etc., where decon it; use water doesn't decon on help so I uti on 
Hot soap water See label or As long as All skin Excellent for (any soap or as needed possible exposures skin, clothing detergent) Nerve agents any unwieldy 
object or surface. Does 
Iitt I e neutralizing, but flushes agent away. 
Inexpensive. 
-The M258AI skin decon kit provides the best means of skin decon. Instruction for its use are on the outside of the kit. The kit can be used in a temperature range of oo Celsius (32° Fahrenheit) to 43° Celsius (I 10° Fahrenheit). The solutions in the kit are caustic. Keep them out of eyes, wounds, or mouth. Use water to wash toxic agent or decon solution out of eyes or wounds and seek medical treatment. Fami Iiarize yourself with the operating instructions for the kit. If you need to use it at night, you wi II not be able to read the instructions. Although you canngj see I iquid contamination in the dark, you may suspect it and you should decon as a precautionary measure. The packets in the kit have identifying tabs so you can feel for them in the dark. (Packet #I has a 1/4 x 1/4 inch tab on the top of the packet; whereas Packet #2 has no tab at alI). 
-If you do not have a skin decon kit, chemical contamination may be pinch-blotted from the skin with any cloth and the area flushed with water from your canteen. Pinch-blotting is better than rubbing because it does not spread the contamination. Soap, if available, should be used to wash the agent from the skin. In the field, washing with soap and water is the next best method for decontaminating toxic agents if M258AI decon kits are not ava i I ab I e. 
160 
BEST  
START  DONE  
TYPE  TIME*  BY  TECHNIQUE  GAINS MADE  
INDIVIDUAL  BEFORE  INDIVIDUAL  SKIN DECON  Keeps you a I i ve  

Personnel Decontamination Kit. The M258AI Personnel Decontamination Kit is a 
recent modification of the M258 Skin Decontaminating Kit. It also is used in 
chemical decontamination. The M258AI kit is easier to use and can be used to decontaminate the interior of the protective mask and the face, as wei I as other skin and I imited equipment decontamination. For training, a modi tied version of the kit, cal led the M58AI kit, is used. The training kit contains alcohol instead of decontaminants. 
The M258AI kit is enclosed in a rectangular, plastic container. Instructions 
for using the kit are on the front. A metal clip and strap are attached to 
the back of the container for faste~ing the kit to the D-ring of the protective mask carrier, or to some other location on fhe--soldier's clothing. The lid snaps on and off. Inside are six metal I ic packets containing decontaminating solutions. The packets marked "I" contain a paper pad saturated with decontaminant. The packets marked "2" hold a dry paper pad and a nylon screen envelope containing three glass ampules. Before this metal I ic packet is opened for use, it is squeezed to break the glass ampules, which then saturate the decontaminating pad. This prepares the decontaminant for use. In the decontamination procedure, the skin is first wiped with the Number I pad and then with the Number 2 pad. 
161 

Decontaminating eyes, face, and other skin areas. If your eyes and face 
become contaminated, you must first obtain overhead cover before proceeding 
with decontamination procedures. It is imperative that nerve agents (or 
blister agents) in contact with the eyes or skin be neutralized or removed 
immediately if you are to avoid becoming a casualty. 
Decontaminate the eyes 
Step I. Remove helmet and loosen cap on canteen. While under cover, take a deep breath and hold it. Remove your mask and hood. 
Step 2. Looking upward, while continuing to hold your breath, flip open cap on canteen and flush your eye(s) repeatedly with generous amounts of water. If possible, ti It your head at an angle so as not to let the water run onto your face or clothing. If you are unable to keep your eye(s) open during the flushing process, use your uncontaminated fingers to Iift the eyelids and complete the process. 
NOTE 
To flush right eye, ti It head back and slightly to the right To flush left eye, ti It head back and sli]hty to the left 
Step 3. Put on, reseal, clear, and check your mask. Secure canteen cap. 
Decontaminate the face 
Step I . Open decontamination kit and remove one DECON I WIPE packet. 
Step 2. and remove  Fold packet on solid moistened wipe.  I ine marked BEND and  FOLD.  Tear open quickly  
Step 3. Decontaminate your hands.  
Step 4.  Take a deep breath and hold  it,  close your  eyes,  and  Iift hood and  

mask. Pul I the hood and mask far enough away from the face so that you are able to touch your nose with the moistened wipe. 
WARNING 
Both DECON I and DECON 2 packets contain a poisonous and caustic solution which can permanently damage the eyes. DO NOT use pads on the eyes, mouth, or open wounds. 
162 
Step 5. With eyes closed, continue to hold your breath and using the same 
wipe used· in steps 3 and ~. quickly wipe your face and neck. Make sure alI 
facial indentations are wiped (around nose, ears, and chin). 
Step 6. Continue holding your breath and quickly wipe the inside of the mask that touches your face. 
Step 7. Drop the used wipe to the ground and put on, reseal, clear, and 
check your mask. 
Step 8. Open decontamination kit and remove one DECON 2 WIPE packet. Crush 
inclosed glass ampules between thumb and fingers, or smash ampules with palm
of hand. 

Step 9. Fold packet on solid line marked CRUSH and BEND. Quickly tear openpacket and remove moistened wipe. Let the crushed glass ampules fal I to the ground. 
Step 10. Repeat steps 3, 4, 5, and 6, above. 
Step I I. Fasten hood and put on helmet. 
Decontaminate other skin areas 
Step I . Open decontamination kit and remove one DECON I packet. 
Step 2. Quickly remove moistened wipe from packet, retaining the emptypacket. 
CAUTION 
Immediately remove any Iiquid or thickened contamination. 
If large droplets or thick I iquid agent a~ar on the skin, 
use the edge of the empty packet and caref~l ly scrape off the 
agent. Let the packet drop to the ground. 
Step 3. Using the wipe from the packet, pinch droplets from the skin and 
wipe area carefully for I minute. Drop used wipe to the ground. 
Step 4. Open decontamination kit and remove one DECON 2 packet. Crush inclosed glass ampules between thumb and fingers or smash with palm of hand. 
Step 5. Fold packet on solid I ine marked CRUSH and BEND. Quickly tear open
packet an dremove moistened wipe. Let the crushed glass ampules fal I to the ground. 
163 
Step 6. Thoroughly wipe the contaminated areas for 2 to 3 minutes. Drop used wipe to the ground. 
CAUTION 
AI I discarded wipes and discarded packets used to remove 
the chemical agent should either be buried or disposed 
of in such a way as to avoid further contamination. DO 
NOT BURN contaminated waste. The vapors ire caustic and 
poison hazard. 
Biological 
-You wi I I most I ikely not know when or where biological contamination exists. However, if you know or suspect toxins or other biological agents are present, remove the contamination with M258AI towelettes using the same procedures for the chemical agent decon. 
-No currently fielded means of detecting biological agents exists; you probably wi I I not know immediately when you have become contaminated. Fortunately, most biological agents, even toxins, pose-their primary threat through inhalation or ingestion. The skin is an effecti~e barrier against most biological agents providing there are no cuts in the skin. 
-The unit surgeon knows the types and normal levels of natural infection for the area of operations. The surgeon monitors these levels. If a given disease reaches a high level, the unit surgeon decides whether or not a deliberate biological attack has occurred. For those reasons, no decon is required immediately. 
-The best biological defense is to take action before you are attacked. Keep immunizations up to date, observe basic sanitary precautions, and keep skin breaks covered. Treat minor cuts and abrasions by 6rdinary first aid measures. Iodine, Zephi ran, or Merthiolate are suitable. Washing with soap and water removes nearly all biological agents from the skin. If possible, frequent showering or bathing lessens chances of infection and disease. A I .5 percent sodium hypoochlorite (household bleach) solution is also an effective biological decontaminant. 
Individual Sustainment Decon Techniques. There are two individual sustainment decon techniques--personal wipedown and operator's spraydown. 
These techniques do two things for you: 
-Reduces the contamination hazards on you and the surfaces you touch to do your mission. 
164 

-Keeps contamination from seeping into your individual equipment as wei I as those surfaces you touch to do your mission. 
BEST  
START  DONE  
TYPE  TIME*  BY  TECHNIQUE  GAINS MADE  
INDIVIDUAL  WITHIN 15  INDIVIDUAL  PERSONNEL WIPEDOWNr  Stop agent  
SUSTAINMENT  MINUTES  or crew  ----------------- from  
penetrating  
OPERATOR'S SPRAYDOWN  

-Individual sustainment techniques are most effecitve when done within 15 minutes after being contaminated. Starting these techniques later is not as effective; contamination --especially chemical agents--wi I I have begun soaking into equipment and wi I I be little affected by these techniques. By reducing the contamination hazards on yourself and in your immediate work area you reduce the chance of your skin touching chemical or biological contamination if you tear a glove or rip a sleeve. 
Personal Wipedown 
The protective overgarment is designed to provide at least 6 hours of protection after becoming contaminated with chemical agents. However, the MOPP gear and handgrips of individual weapons also tend to absorb these chemicals. Once absorbed, they may present a vapor hazard for days. To 
reduce this penetration and vapor hazard, decon individual equipment using 
towelettes from the M258AI kit. The individual equipment you must decon 
includes: 
-Gloves 
-Hood and Mask 
-Weapon 
-Helmet 
Do not attempt to decon chemical agents on your overgarment. This wi II provide little if any extra protection and you probably wi I I not have enough M258AI towelettes to decon your suit. 
165 

When using the M258AI personal decon kit on the protective mask-lenses, reverse the order of the decon wipe. Use decon wipe 2 first, jol lowed by decon wipe I. This technique is just as effective but does not leave a powdery film on the outserts (lenses). Decon wipe I is primarily effective against G-type nerve agents. Its contents are caustic to the skin, but leave no film when dry. Decon 2 is primarily effective against VX-type nerve agents and blister agents. Its contents are less caustic to the skin; in fact, they may help neutralize some of the caustic compounds in decon wipe I. When M258AI towelettes are not available, field expedient mefflods such as washing with soap and water are also effective. 
Operator's Spraydown. After you have wiped yourself down and your personal equipment, you must continue your mission. This wi I I frequently involve operating a vehicle, a crew-served weapon, or some other piece of equipment. To ensure that you do not pick up contamination from these ·items, you must decon those surfaces you or your crew touch while operating the ·equipment. 
This decon is cal led the operator's spraydown. 
Chemical. Decon those surfaces you must touch to do your job. Use an onboarp portable decon apparatus (such as Ml I or Ml3). This apparatus should be fi I led with decontaminant as soon as you are directed to go into any level of mission-oriented protective posture (MOPP). Spray DS2 onto those surfaces.you must touch to do your mission. Scrub the DS2 into the surface with brushes, wait 30 minutes if mission permits, then wash or wipe off. If the decon apparatus is not available, use decontaminating solution No. 2 (DS2) or super tropical bleach (STB) applied from bulk containers, or use the nonstandard decontaminants. 
Biological. Hot, soapy water is the preferred decontaminant for biological 
contamination. Apply with brushes and scrub the surface wei I. Rinse surface after scrubbing. DS2 or STB are also effective against most known biological contamination; but because of their caustic nature are not preferred. 
The ABC-MI I Decontaminating Apparatus. which wi I I be ca~~d the Ml I apparatus, is used in performing partial decontamination of vehicies and crew-served weapons contaminated by chemical agents. The Ml I apparatus resembles a carbon dioxide fire extinguisher. It has a canister that is fi I led with I 1/3 quarts of DS2 decontaminating agent which is released, under pressure, as a spray. To understand the function of the Ml I apparatus, you must be able to describe it purpose, c~pabi Iities, I imitations, and components. You also need to understand the characteristics of Decontamination Solution 2, cal led DS2. 
NOTE 
The protective mask and gloves should be worn when hand I ing DS2 while fi I I ing the appratus. 
166 

The Ml I apparatus is used to partially decontaminate vehicles and crew-served weapons, such as trucks, tanks, armored personnel carriers, howitzers, self-propel led arti I lery, and machine guns. It is used to decontaminate parts such as the steering wheel, gearshift lever, seats, pedals, dashboard, levers, gasoline caps, and tools. The apparatus is carried on vehicles and is held in place by a mounting bracket. It is used to spray surfaces that might be contacted by persons entering, leaving, orperating, servicing, or repairing the vehicle. 
The Ml I apparatus is not intended for total decontamination. Rather, it is 
used to decontaminate those parts of vehicles and equipment that the operator 
might touch. 
Capabilities 
The decontamination capabilities of the Ml I apparatus are as follows: 
-It covers approximately 135 square feet with one fi I ling of the canister. 
-It sprays up to a range of 6 to 8 feet. 
-It operates in temperatures as low as -25° F (-31° C). 
-It can be used by an individual with I imited training. 
One fi I ling of the Ml I apparatus is sufficient for the partial decontamination of the steering wheel, gearshift lever, pedals, and dashboard of two 1/4-ton trucks. 
Limitations 
The I imitations of the Ml I apparatus are as follows: 
-The apparatus must not be used to decontaminate i~viduals, because the DS2 blisters skin and can cause blindness. 
-A protective mask and gloves must be worn by personnel hand Iing or using the apparatus when fi I led with DS2. 
-The Ml I apparatus wi I I not be used to spray hot surfaces, such as hot engines. DS2 is a combustible I iquid with a flash point of 175° F (79.5° C). 
-The contents of a ful I container can be discharged in about 30 seconds of continuous spraying. 
-Only equipment surfaces sprayed with the DS2 wi I I be effectively decontaminated. DS2 must be removed after 30 minutes of-~ontact to prevent corrosion and damage. 
167 

Description of the Ml I Apparatus 
The mounting bracket and hardware are used to hold the Ml I apparatus in place
in a vehicle. There are two types of mounting brackets. The older model uses a metal strap to hold the container. The newer model uses a nylon strap. The spray head assembly is attached to the container assembly, which is fi I led with DS2 decontaminating agent. One of the nitrogen-fi I led cylinder is mounted in the spray head assembly; the other cylinder i.s attached to the mounting bracket. The nameplate is attached to the container. Two types of 
nameplates have been used. One type is a metal band which circles the apparatus and is secured with a metal clasp. The other type is an aluminum 
foi I type with adhesive backing. Both types provide essentially the same 
information. 
The spray head assembly can be unscrewed from the container assembly in order 
to refill the container with DS2. In addition, the nitrogen cylinder in the spray head assembly can be removed and replaced after each use of the Ml I apparatus. 
COMPONENTS OF M11 
DECONTAMINATING APPARATUS. 
NITROGEN·FILLED CYLINDERS 
SPRAY 
HEAD 
ASSEMBLY 

MOUNTING BRACKET 
ly 0 in ::::_-===::-:. =---=== the 
---·--
------· -
----- 
0  0  
------------- CONTAINER  
0  ASSEMBLY  the  
ower  
cks  
e  of  

168 

Operate the ABC-MI I Decontaminating Apparatus 
To operate the Ml I apparatus correctly, you must be able to: -Prepare the Ml I apparatus for operation. -Fi I I the apparatus 
Instal I a nitrogen cylinder in the apparatus. 
-Instal I a safety seal wire. 
-Pressurize the apparatus. 
-Operate the apparatus. 
-Operate the apparatus in training. 

Prepare the Ml I Apparatus for Operation. To prepare the Ml I apparatus for operation you should perform the following steps: 
Step I. Remove the apparatus from the mounting bracket. 
Step 2. Check that the apparatus has been fi I led with DS2. If it has not 
been fi I led, perform the steps for fi I I ing it. 

Step 3. Check that a nitrogen-fi I led cylinder is in place in the spray head assembly. If it is not, perform the steps for instal Iing a new nitrogen cy I i nder. 
Step 4. Check that the safety seal wire is not broken. If it has been 
broken, proceed to the steps for fi I I ing the apparatus. 
Step 5. If alI checks are okay, proceed to pressurize tbe apparatus. 

WARNING The protective mask and gloves should be worn when hand IingDS2 while fi I I ing the apparatus. 
Fi II the Apparatus. To fi II the apparatus, perform the following steps: Step I. Check that the safety seal wire is unbroken. NOTE If the safety seal wire has been broken, the apparatus mayhave been pressurized. If so, any remaining pressure must be emptied by operating the apparatus. Step 2. Unscrew the spray head from the container. 
169 
Step 3. Unscrew the drain plug bolt and washer from the top of the container. 
UNSCREW THE DRAIN PLUG BOLT AND WASHER FROM THE TOP OF THE CONTAINER. 
L---~-----J 

Step 4. Empty the container in an area designated as safe by the unit commander. 
Step 5. Invert the container and Iightly tap it against another object to remove any foreign material from inside the container. 
Step 6. Reinstal I the drain plug bolt and washer using Iight pressure on a smal I wrench to make a tight joint without damaging the copper washer. 
Step 7. Pour contents of a I 1/3-quart can of DS2 into the container throughthe opening in the top. 
NOTE 
If fi II ing from a larger container, pour in DS2 to the 
level of the yellow I ine on the container marked FULL 
LINE. The end of the container neck inside the container 
body should be used as guide since it is at the same 
level as the yellow fi II Iine. 
170 


Step 8. Ensure that the preformed packing in the neck of the container is in good condition. 
Step 9. Screw the spray head firmly into the opening in the container. 
Instal I a Nitrogen Cylinder in the ABC-Mf I Apparatus. To be able to instal I a 
nitrogen cylinder in the ABC-Mf I apparatus you must know the following steps: 

Step I. Remove the captive safety pin. 
Step 2. Push in a handle locking pin (see insert) and lower the handle. 

PREPARE TO INSTALL NITROGEN CYLINDER. 
A B 
REMOVE THE LOWER THE HANDLE 
CAPTIVE SAFETY PIN 

Step 4. Discard the old cylinder. 
Step 5. Ensure that the performed packing between the spray head and nitrogencylinder is in good condition. 
Step 6. Ensure that the opening for the nitrogen-fi I led cyl indered is clean and free of foreign matter. 
171 

WARNING Place the handle in the lowered position before instal I ing the nitrogen-filled cylinder to prevent premature puncturing of the cylinder and its expulsion from the spray head assembly. NOTE Use care when inserting a new nitrogen-fi I fed cylinder into the spray head to avoid cutting the preformed packing. Step 7. Raise the thumb lever and insert a new nitrogen-fi I led cylinder, 
smal I end down, in the opening in the spray head. The cylinder neck must 
engage the preformed packing. 
Step 8. Release the thumb lever. 
Step 9. Install the captive safety pin. 
Instal I Safety Seal Wire. To instal I the safety seal wire the following steps 

should be used: NOTE If the apparatus has not been fi I led, instal I a safety seal wire. Step I . Thread a safety seal wire through the hole in the handle, through the 
hole in the handle pivot pin, and through the pul I ring of the captive safety 
pin. 
Step 2. Pass the wire through the hole in the lead disk two times. 
Step 3. Pul I the wire tig~t so that the captive safety pin cannot be pulled 

from the spray head body wi~hout breaking the wire. 
Step 4. Crimp the lead di:sk so that the wire cannot be pulled from the holes 

in the lead disk. This wiill ensure that the wire wi II break when the captive 
safety pin is withdrawn. i 
Step 5. Trim off excess safety wire, if desired. 

172 

THREAD THE SAFETY SEAL WIRE. 

II 
I .I 
CRIMP THE LEAD DISK. 
iI 
I 
II 
Pressur1ze the Apparatus. To pressurize the apparatus, use the following steps: 
Step I. Withdraw the captive safety pin. This wi I I break the safety seal wire. 
Step 2. Rest the container on a solid surface. 
Step 3. Slowly raise the handle unti I the locking pin springs out and locks the handle in place. When the handle is raised, the ni trogen-fi lied cylinder 
is punctured, and the container is pressurized. 
173 

RAISE THE HANGLE. 

CAUTION 
Never initially pressurize the container with more than one nitrogen-fi I led cylinder. 
WARNING 
Do NOT use the apparatus if the container--is damaged. 
Do NOT use DS2 decontamination agent to decontaminate personnel. It is irritating to the skin and eyes. If DS2 decontaminat.i.ng agent does get on the skin, blot it off, and rinse with water. 
Wear a protective mask and gloves when using the apparatus to decon tam ina te. · 
Do NOT use the apparatus as a fire extinguisher, it contains combustible I iquid. 
Operate the Apparatus. The procedures for operating the apparatus are as fa I lows: 
Step I. Spray decontaminating agent by depressing the thumb lever. Hold the apparatus upright so that as much Iiquid as possible is forced from the container. 
174 

SPRAY THE DECONTAMINATING AGENT. 
NOTE 
Spray the parts of the vehicles that are most I ikely to be touched or used, such as door handles, steering wheels,controls, seats, dashboard, levers, gasoline caps, and tools. 
Remember that the contents of one ful I container can be 
discharged in about 30 seconds of continuous spraying time. 
175 

Step 2. After the first nitrogen-filled cylinder is expended, shake the container to determine whether it is empty. Use a second nitrogen-filled cylinder to expel any remaining contents. 
NOTE 
In cold weather, more than one nitrogen~illed cylinder may be required to completely empty the contents of the apparatus. 
Place the handle in a lowered position before installing the nitrogen-filled cylinder to prevent premature puncturing of the cylinder and its expulsion out of the spray head assembly. 
Ste~ 3. To use the spare nitrogen-filled cylinder depress the handle locking pin and lower the handle (refer to steps for installing a nitrogen-filled cylinder). 
Step 4. Raise the thumb lever and push the expended cylinder out of the spray head body. Discard it. 
Step 5. Insert the spare nitrogen-filled cylinder in the spray head body, neck down. 
Step 6. Release the thumb lever and repressurize the apparatus (refer to the steps for pressurizing the apparatus). 
Step 7. When the charge is expended, depress the handle locking pin and lower the handle. 
Step 8. If you have completed spraying, reinstall the captive safety pin and replace the apparatus in the mounting bracket. If not, repeat the procedure 
for filling and installing a new nitrogen-filled cylinder, and for pressurizing and operating the apparatus. 
Step 9. Whenever possible, those items that have been sprayed with DS2 should be rinsed with water. Rinsing should not be done until at least 30 minutes after spraying. 
WARNING 
The apparatus may be used in training exercises. However, do NOT use DS2 with the apparatus in such exercise. 
176 

Operate the Apparatus in Training. To operate the apparatus in training use the following steps: 
Step I. To use the apparatus for training, add 0.5 ounces of corrosion inhibitor to the empty container. 
Step 2. Fi I I the container to the yellow fi I 1-1 ine with water, and assemble the spray head to the container. 
Step 3. Operate according to usual operating procedures. 
Step 4. After use, clean the apparatus. 
Step 5. Remove the corrosion-inhibitor mixture from the apparatus by 
throughly flushing the spray head assembly and container with a mixture of water and commerical detergent. 
Step 6. Rinse the apparatus with clean, preferably hot, water. 
Step 7. Remove the rinse water from the container and the spray head assembly with compressed, dry air. Depress the thumb lever and direct the compressed air through the siphon tube to remove the water solutio~ from the valve mechanism. 
DECONTAMINATE EQUIPMENT USING THE ABC-MI I DECONTAMINATION APPARATUS 
CONDITIONS 
In a training environment where you are wearing protective clothing and protective mask and given either a vehicle or equipment contaminated with 
(simulated) chemical agents, an ABC-MI I decontamination apparatus fi I led with enough liquid (i.e., water/corrosion-inhibitor solution or antifreeze) to decontaminate the parts of the vehicle or equipment whi~you touch when you use it, a nitrogen cylinder, a ful I can of liquid to simu-late a 1-1/3 quart can of DS2 decontaminating I iquid, and an adjustable wrench. 
STANDARDS 
All procedures for the decontamination of equipment with the ABC-MI I decontamination apparatus are performed, in proper sequence, wit~out contamininting your skin, the ABC-MI I decontamination apparatus is refi I led. 
177 

PERFORMANCE MEASURES inder is expended, shake the Use a second nitrogen-fi I led 
a. 
Open the clamp and remove the ABC-MI I. 

b. 
Put I out the pin (2). This wi I I break the wire (3). See Figure I. 


c. 
Put the ABC-MI I on a solid surface (l).trSiowlyiraisecthenhandley(2) unti I the pin (3) springs out and locks the handle.enSeeOFigurea2.aratus. 

d. 
Hold the ABC-MI I by the handle. Point itowherenyoufwantitotspray. tPress down the lever (I) with your thumb. See Figuren3.prWarning:puDS2uisnhighlyhe corrosive. Do not spray on personnel. of the spray head assembly. 


I inder depress the handle locking instal ling a nitrogen-fi I led 
J.../ expended cy I i nder out of the spray 
~ I inder in the spray head body, 
urize the apparatus (refer to tne 
s the handle locking pin and lower 
nstal I the captive safety pin and 
e. Spray the liquid over the parts you touchfwhen,usingathehvehicledore equipment. II ed cy I i nder, and for 
f. Wait 30 minutes and rinse the I iquid off with ~r. if you can. 
have been sprayed with DS2 should Refi I I the ABC-MI I with decontaminating I iquido(DS2).i I at least 30 minutes 
a. Unscrew the ABC-M-Il top. Hold right hand. Turn as shown in Figure 4.  top (I)  in  left  hand and  bottom (2)  in  
ra1n1ng exercises.  However,  do  
in such exercise.  

178 
b. (4) as shown in figure 5. Take out theplug 
3 
l\\1~ 
• I 
I I
t::)\\ 1 q 
c. Turn the ABC-MI I upside down. Empty container. 
d. Screw the plug and washer back in. Tighten with the wrench. Make agood seal but do not crush the washer. 
179 
2 
Figure .7 
e. Pour DS2 into the ABC-MI I with the fill line (4). 
4 
f. Look at the sprayhead. See that the packing (I) and threads (2) areokay. Screw sprayhead (3) back into the ABC-MI I (4). 
180 
" "'"'IJ •. 
lt-<-----4 
Figure · _ 
Put 	in nitrogen cylinder. Lift up thumb lever (I) (2). 
z 
b. 	Look into cylinder hole (5). See that it •s clean. 
181 
5 
c. Lift up thumb lever ( I ) and put in nitrogen cy Iinde r (2). Make sure the small end (3) fits into the cylinder hole. 
' 
! /: 
Figure . l2 --It you are not going to use it, tel I maintenance to put in a safety wire. Then put the ABC-Mil in bracket (4) and clamp it down (5). 
182 


Figure· 23. 
REFERENCES FM 21-3, Task 031-503-2002 
183 
UNIT SUSTAINMENT DECONTAMINATION 

Unit sustainment decon is a squad-size (occasionally platoon-sized) operationthat consists of two techniques, the MOPP gear exchange and the vehicle washdown. The MOPP gear exchange is conducted by the contaminated squad and supported by the company supply section which provides decontaminants and new overgarments. The vehicle washdown is supported by the battalion level decon team using their organic power driven decontamination equipment (PDDE) or even supported by a chemical company decon squad. 
The purpose of unit sustainment decon is to sustain the combat potential of a 
contaminated force by limiting the spread of contamination. The benefits 
gained from I imiting contamination spread may allow temporary MOPP reduction. 
The MOPP gear exchange removes nearly alI liquid or solid contamination from 
the soldier and his individual equipment. The vehicle washdown greatly
reduces the transfer hazard on equipment. After unit sustainment decon, soldiers may be able to move away from their equipment to contamination free 
areas and temporarily reduce MOPP levels. 
Unit sustainment should be done as soon as possible. A squad can do both of 
the techniques in about 30-45 minutes as it moves between fighting positions.The vehicle washdown portion is most effective if started within one hour of becoming contaminated. 
Chemical contamination is the most difficult to remove and is usually the most dangerous form of contamination. This lesson focuses on the decon of chemical contamination. The procedures that reduce chemical contamination also reduce biological contamination and remove some radiological contamination. However, the caustic decontaminants used to remove chemical contamination are not needed to reduce the hazards of other kinds of contamination. Therefore, changes in methods and materials wi I I be noted where they wi I I improve the technique when it is used to decon biological and radiological contamination. 
BEST  
START  DONE  
TYPE  TIME  BY  TECHNIQUE  GAINS MADE  
UNIT  WITHIN  Co.  decon  tm  MOPP GEAR  EXCHANGE  Possible  
SUSTAINMENT  6  hours  w/FFE, Bn PDDE Crew,  Temporary re-I ief from MOPP  
or  Chern Co  VEHICLE WASHDOWN  4. Limit  I iquid  
agent spread  

184 
CONDUCT VEHICLE WASHDOWN 

CONDITIONS 

Given a situation with a vehicle contaminated with a simulated chemical agent, alI necessary materials, and a directive to conduct a vehicle washdown. 
STANDARDS 
The student wi I I correctly answer 8 out of 10 questions. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
-AI I vehicle/equipment is buttoned up. AI I access doors, hatches, windows, and other openings are secured prior to washdown. Muzzle covers are placed on alI weapons. 
-Vehicle/equipment washdown is conducted without washing or splashing into uncontaminated areas. The top and undercarriage of alI vehicles are completely washed down. 
-Personnel.· Two soldiers from the battalion decon crew are used to wash down equipment, a third soldier supervises this operatfon_and assists as necessary. 
-Material. 
-One PDDE. 
Liquid detergent to mix in water. 
-Adequate water supply (about 100 gal Ions per vehicle required). 
-Adequate fuel for water heater and pump unit. 

REFERENCE 
FM 3-5 
VEHICLE WASHDOWN 
Vehicle washdown is just that. It is a very si~ple process of washing your vehicle to prevent the spread of contamination and to reduce that hazard from 
NBC contamination. FM 3-5 tel Is us that this procedure is done by the 
battalion decon team using their power-driven decon equipment and hot, soapy 
water. 
Vehicle washdown is supported by battalion. Decon operations are conducted as far forward as possible. 
185 
Vehicle washdown is most effective if started within one hour after becoming
contaminated with each vehicle washed with hot, soapy water for two or three 
minutes. 
Because speed is important and detection is difficult, vehicles are not checked for chemical contamination after vehicle washdown is completed. Only gross contamination is removed. As a result, most partially decontaminated equipment wi I I sti I I remain a hazard caused by vapors tha! are absorbed from the I iquid chemical agent remaining in the paint. The ch~t below demonstrates the persistency of blister agent (HD) on painted surfaces with and without decontamination. 
CARC Chemical Agent Resistant Coating, a polyurethane base paint now beingapplied to some new equipment. 
Persistency of blister agent (HD) at 65° (I8°C) with and without decon. 
CARC surface decon with DS2 
CARC surface weathering only 
Alkyd surface decon with DS2 
Alkyd surface weathering only 
01 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 
Time at which decon starts Vapor or desorption hazard 
Liquid agent transfer hazard 
186 

Chart based on initial liquid agent concentration of 10 grams per square meter. This is based on laboratory data and does not consider the affects of agent action on unpainted surfaces, agent seeping into cracks or under bolt 
heads, which would lengthen the persistency of contamination on actual 
equipment in the field. Lower temperatures would also lengthen times. 
Step I. Vehicle/equipment button up. The purpose of this step is to prevent contamination from being washed or splashed into unconta~inated areas. Close and secure alI access doors, hatches, windows and other~penings prior to washdown. Emplace muzzle covers on weapons. This wi I I be performed by 
equipment crew/operators. 
Step 2. Vehicle/equipment washdown. The purpose of this is to I imit spread 
of contamination, minimize the hazard, and make detailed equipment decon 
easier and faster. Hot, soapy water is sprayed under pressure from the PDDE 
onto equipment surfaces to destroy, neutralize, or remove most of the NBC 
hazards. Unheated, soapy water or plain water may be used if the situation dictates; however, it is less effective than hot, soapy water. Ensure the 
tops of vehicles are washed down. 
Personnel and Material Requirements 
Personnel. Two soldiers from the battalion decon crew, wash down equipment. Tap aprons or wet weather gear are required to be worn aver MOPP gear to keep 
from saturating the overgarment. One additional soldier is required to supervise the operation and assist as necessary. 
Materia I. 
-One PDDE. 
Liquid detergent to mix in water. 
-Adequate fuel for water heater and pump unit. 

UNIT RESTORATION DECONTAMINATIO~ 
There are seven standard decon techniques that progressively help restore combat potential. Each method becomes progressively more costly in terms of manpower, materials, and time. The most critical of expenses in most tactical situations wi II be the time element involved in the decontamination process. Reviewing the four decon principles, demonstrates the criticality of time, e.g., decon as soon as possible, decon as far forward as possible, decon only what is necessary, and decon by priority. The decision to undergo complete decontamination is made when the contaminated unit is essentially combat 
ineffective, a replacement unit is avai fable, or time is avai !able to 
reconsitute the contaminated unit without replacement, and divisional decontamination and logistical assets are avai !able to complete the mission. 
187 

Unit restoration decontamination is the most time and resource consuming decontamination process and uses two decontamination techniques: detailed troop decontamination and detailed equipment decontamination. Restoration decontamination is designed to return a contaminated unit back into fully outfitted ready-to-fight unit. Because this operation is so resource intensive, it is accomplished in the brigade, division, or in some cases, the corps rear area. 
The operation is conducted in two phases: the decontamieation phase and 
reconsitution phase. The decontamination phase is further broken down into preparation, execution, and site clearance. The reconstitution phase takes place after the unit decontaminates, and includes medical, logistical, maintenance, mi Iitary pol ice, and quartermaster support. The division chemical company (platoon can support two companies) is directly responsible for the detailed equipment decontamination process but only provides supervisory support for the detailed personnel decontamination operation. 
TYPE 
UNIT RESTORATION BEST START DONE TIME BY 
When Unit and mission Chern Co allows Decon 
reconsti-Platoon tution 
TECHNIQUE 
DETAILED TROOP DECON 
DETAILED EQUIP-MENT DECON 
GAINS MADE 
Probable long-term MOPP reduction with minimum risks 
It is critical that coordination between the battalion, the chemical unit, and the contaminated unit is compeleted prior to execution of the operation. The decon platoon leader is in charge of the decontaminaiton site and wi I I provide a briefing of the operation to the decontaminated unit at the pre-decon site (staging/holding area). The decon platoon will require c-~pany assets to conduct the operation. These wi I I be specified at the briefing, however, a unit must already have trainined decontamination team to ensure sucess of the operation. 
ESTABLISH DETAILED TROOP DECONTAMINATION OPERATION 
CONDITIONS 
Given a situation or sketch of a detailed troop decontamination operation, penci I and paper. 
STANDARDS 
The student will correctly list, in proper sequence, the-stations for a detailed troop decontamination operation. 
188 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 

STATION #1.  Individual  gear drop  
STATION #2.  Overboot and hood decon  
STATION #3.  Overgarment off  (Removal)  
STATION #4.  Overboots and gloves off  (Removal)  
STATION #5.  Monitor  
STATION #6.  Mask  removal  
STATION #7.  Mask decon point  
STATION #8.  Reissue point  

REFERENCE 
FM 3-5 
DETAILED TROOP DECONTAMINATION OPERATION 
The detailed troop decontamination technique resembles the personnel decontamination operation conducted for unit sustainment. The primary difference is that in detailed troop decontamination masks are removed, decontaminated, and reissued with a new hood and filters. 
Unit restoration decontamination, as started before, is resource intensive. Manpower requirments for the contaminated unit include 13 personnel for the detailed troop decontamination site (five decon team members and eight non-decon team members) and 5 personnel for the detailed· equipment decontaminaiton site (three decon team members and two non-decon team members). 
STATION #1. Individual gear drop. Remove as much contamination as possible from the individual equipment (load-bearing equipment, mask carrier, helmet, and weapons). Gear is deconned by washing and scrubbing with STB slurry and 
rinsed with clear water. Equipment is checked with M8 paper and the M256 chemical detection kit. 
STATION #2. Overboot and hood decon. Neutralize gross contamination on footwear covers and lower trouser legs. Remove gross contamination from hood and mask. For chemical and biological contamination a shuffle pit with STB dry mix is used to kick decontaminant onto boots and lo~r trouser legs. Hoods are cutoff if replaceme~t hoods are available; i~not used the M258AI skin decon kit to decontaminate hoods. 
189 

STATION #3. Overgarment-a~ Remove contaminated overgarments before agent penetrates overgarment material and touches undergarments or skin. 
STATION #4. Overboots and gloves-off. Remove contaminated overboots (footcovers) to Iimi t the spread of contamination. There is a "hot I ine" marked on the ground at this station. It is control line beyond which there should be no I iquid contamination. 
STATION #5. Monitor. Identify contamination on personn~, provide spot decon capabi Iity, and provide medical aid as required. 
STATION #6. Mask Removal. Remove the mask from the soldier without 
contamination, and then take the mask to a mask decon point. As the mask is removed, the soldier holds breath, walks upwind 5 meters, crosses the vapor hot Iine, then resumes breathing. No chemical vapor hazard is expected beyond this hazard contamination control line, if wind direction remains constant. The Automatic Chemical Agent Alarm wi I I be positioned to warn of vapor hazards. 
STATION# 7. Mask decon point. Remove as much contamination from the mask as possible. Mask wi I I be contaminated and sanitized and filters removed. 
STATION# 8. Reissue point. To refurbish the soldier with a complete set of MOPP gear. Individual wi II reassemble mask. Company ·chemical NCO wi II affix new MIOAI fi Iter canisters to M24/M25AI protective masks. Individuals wi I I pick-up individual equipment (load-bearing equipment, mask, carrier, helmet, and weapons). 
Personnel required at each station. The detailed troop decontamination operation requires five company decon team members and eight non-decon team 
members.  
Personnel  
COtHAM INATED  COMPANY  
Decon Team  Non  Decon  
STATION  ATTENDANT'S ACTION  Members  Team Members  
( I )  Gear Drop/Oecon  One person monitors and one person transports individual gear to reissue point.  0  2  
(2)  Boot/Hood Decon  Attendant replenishes decontaimants as required ..  0  
(3)  Remove Suit  None  (Buddy System)  0  0  

190 

(4) Remove Boots None (Buddy System) 0 
and gloves Attendant from station 6 wi II' meet personnel wearing M24/M25AI 
mask to carry canister unti I person's mask is removed at station 6.  
(5)  Man i tor  Attendant checks for decon effectiveness. Medic treats as requ i red.  I*  
(6)  Remove mask  Attendant removes mask and transports to station 7.  0  2  
(7)  Mask Decon Point  Attendant disassembles, clears, checks, and transports mask to station 8.  2  
(8)  Reissue Point  Chemical Sergeant  NCO man  and Supply this station  0  2**  
Sub Total Co Decon Team Chief  4 I  8  
Total  5  8  

Materials required at each station. STATION #1. Individual gear drop. -For all form of contamination: 
-Two 30 gallon containers (one for decontaminanls, one for rinse). 
-Two long-handled brushes (to scrub equipment). 
-Water (for rinse). -For chemical and biological contamination: -Decontaminant (STB slurry). -M8 dector paper and M256 chemical detection kit (for contamination 
check). 
191 

STATION #2. Overboot and hood decon. 
-For alI types of contamination: 
( 
-Cutting tool to remove hoods. 
-For chemical and biological: 
-Ten drums of STB for shuffle pit. 
-One each M258AI decon kit per person. STATION #3. Overgarments-off. Two containers. STATION #4. Overboots and gloves-off. 
-Cutting tool (to remove overboots). 
-Draw a I ine on the ground or use enigneer tape as a hot I ine to separate 
the "dirty" from "clean" areas. Exception to this clean area wi II be the dirty gloves. However, no I iquid agent should be tracked along the ground after the hot I ine. 
-Two containers (one on dirty side of I ine for overboots, one on clean side for gloves. STATION #5. Monitor. -For alI types of contamination: -First aid supplies, including agent antidotes for the medics use. -For chemical/biological contamination: -M8 paper. -Skin decon kits. STATION #6. Mask removal. No materials required. STATION #7. Mask decon point. -Container to discard filter elements and other refuse. -Hot soapy water (for wash). -Sanitizing solution. -Water for mask rinse. 
192 
-Four sponges. 
-One case of paper towels to dry mask during refit process. 
STATION #8. Reissue point. None for station operation. However, alI personnel leaving reissue point should have with them one complete set of MOPP gear prior to arrival in assemply area. Individuals should also have alI 
required components for their masks. A second set of MO~P gear for every assigned individual must be available in the company. Resupply is nessary so that each soldier has two sets of MOPP gear--one with him/her and one stored by his/her company. 
SUPERVISE A DETAILED TROOP CONTAMINATION OPERATION CONDITIONS Given a written situation that requires the supervision of a detailed troop 
decontamination operation, penci I, and paper. STANDARDS The student wi I I correctly answer 8 of the 10 questions.--PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
-Ensures a logical flow of buddy teams through decontamination stations. (A planning chart such as the one on the next page is used to monitor the times each buddy team remains at each station.) 
-Ensures the correct decontamination techniques are used at each station. -Ensures proper sequence as depicted below. 
STATION #1.  Individual  gear drop  
STATION #2.  Overboot and hood decon  
STATION #3.  Overgarment  off  (Removal)  
STATION #4.  Overboots and gloves off  (Removal)  
STATION #5.  Monitor  
STATION #6.  Mask  removal  
STATION #7.  Mask decon point  
STATION #8.  Reissue point  

193 
SUPERVISE A DETAILED TROOP DECONTAMINATION SITE 

Ensure the proper decontamination techniques are used at each station and that alI checks for decontamination are adequate. 
STATION #1 Individual gear drop. Decon gear by washing in decontaminant container and dipping into rinse water container. (Stack decontaminated equipment together.) The station attendant holds detection devices I meter from the pile and checks for residual contamination. If ~ntamination levels exceed nel igible risk, then the equipment should be recycled and deconned again. If the equipment passes the check, it is placed on the clean side of the contamination control point. Depending on the amount of time avai !able, more extensive washing and checking procedures may be useful. This technique 
However, as time becomes available,
outlines the minimum that should be done. 
you may decide to wash equipment longer or let it air outside after washing. 
These methods further reduce the amount of agent vapors desorbing (or 

bleeding) out of pistol belts, mask carriers, helmet covers, and other items. 

Equipment may be put in closed areas and checked for hazardous vapors with the 
M256 chemical detector kits. These additional steps take valuable time. Unit 
commanders must decide if these additional steps are cost effective. 

STATION #2. Overboot and decon. For alI types of con~am~nation a for runoff such as a trench wi II be constructed
contamination control area 
around this station. For chemical/biological contaminant: Individual wi II 
walk into shuffle pit, kick decontaminant onto boots and lower trouser legs, 
and proceed to remove or decontaminate hood. 

-If a replacement hood is available, cut the hood off the mask as follows: Cut off the underarm straps and neck cord of your buddy's hood. 
Pul I the hood inside out over the front of his mask, being careful not to touch your buddy's neck or head. Gather the hood in one hand. Use scissors 
to cut away the hood. Cut as close to the eyelenses, voicemitter, and inlets 
as possible. Make sure nothing is left dangling below t~ bottom of mask. Let your buddy repeat the procedures on you. 
-If a replacement hood is not available, roll the hood as follows: Losen your buddy's neck cord and hood-straps. Use the skin decon kit to 
Grasp the straps on yourdecontaminate the hood. Then decon your own gloves. 
buddy's hood and I i ft the hood straight up off his/her shoulders. Leave the zipper on the hood c I osed. Pu II the hood over the head un t i I most of the back 
of the head is exposed, but do not pull it completely over the face. Attach 
the straps to the velcro patches on the hood. Rol I the hood by starting at 
the chin and working around the mask. Roll it tightly without pulling it off 
the back of the head. Let· your buddy repeat the procedure on you. 
STATION #3. Overgarment-off. This procedure is identical to the procedure used for MOPP gear exchange using the buddy system. 
194 
STATION #4. Overboots and gloves-off. 
-At this station, a "hot line" is marked on the ground. It is a control I ine beyond which there should be no I iquid contamination. Remove your own overboots without help as follows: Cut and remove the laces of the overboots; Stand next to the hot line; remove the first overboot. Pull the boot off; do not kick it off. Put the bootless foot on the clean side of the hot I ine. Put the overboot in a container or pile on the contaminated side of the "hot line". Remove the other overboot in the same way. Remov=e-protective gloves and discard in the container. 
-Attendant from station 6 wi I I meet personnel wearing M24/M25AI masks at this station. The attendant wi II carry the canister for that person unti I the person's mask is removed at station 6. 
STATION #5. Monitor. Check for contamination. Decon areas as required. Administer first aid as r~quired. Presently fielded chemical detection equipment can detect smal I quantities of agent vapor but cannot specifically locate it on personnel. Liquid agent can be detected by detection paper. Symptoms of agent poisoning are the most obvious indication of skin contamination. So, at this step, the medic checks each solider for symptoms. Soldiers processing through this station should report_any damage to their MOPP gear that was identified in station 2. Any areas-identified as contaminated can be treated with a appropriate decontaminant by the station attendant (medic). 
STATION #6. Mask Removal. 
-If hood is sti I I attached to mask, attendant pul Is hood over front of mask, grabs mask by voicemitter cover, and pul Is off soldier. Soldier holds breath as mask is removed, walks upwind 5 meters, crosses the vapor hot I i ne, and then resumes breathing. Station attendant brings mask to station 7, mask decon point. 
--This station has a "vapor hazard" control line, beyond which vapor hazard is not expected, as long as the wind direction and velocity are constant. Position an automatic chemical agent alarm to warn of vapor hazards. The person getting deconned moves straight ahead while his mask, which may sti I I give off vapors, is held on the hot side of the I ine and taken to station 7 where it is deconned. 
STATION #7. Mask decon point. Discard mask hood and filters into marked containers. Remove mask eyelens outserts and decon them. Remove and discard cannisters from M24/M25AI masks. Decon mask and hose. Ensure mask eyelens 
inserts remain inside mask. Wash mask and outserts (and hose on M24· or M25AI) 
in hot, soapy water. Rinse in clean water, dip into sanitizing solution. (Add one tube of mask sanitizing solution [calcium hypochlorite, technical] to one canteen of water. Use four canteens to make one gatJon). Wipe with paper 
towels unti I almost dry. Change each gallon of mask sanitizing solution after every 10 masks. An attendant checks for contamination. If the mask is still contaminated the attendant recycles it for more decon and then decons his gloves. If the mask is not contaminated the attendant must ensure he does not contaminate himself or the reissue point. 
195 

STATION #8. Reissue point. Mask components provided to individual, who and clean outserts in the assembly.
assembles own mask with new filters, hood, 
area. Company chemical NCO wi I I affix cannisters to M24/M25AI hoses. Individuals pick up individual gear and move to assembly area. 
CLEAR THE DETAILED TROOP DECONTAMINATION SITE 
CONDITIONS 
Given a situation or sketch of a detailed troop decontamination operation, penci I, and paper. 
STANDARDS 
The student wi I I correctly answer 8 of the 10 questions. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
I. Pick up alI used supplies and place them in the discard container at 
station 7 (mask decon point). Move the discard, wash, rinse, and sanitizing containers to the sump, empty them, and move them to station I. 
2. 
Take up the vapor agent contamination control Iine a-t station 6 (mask remova I), if engineer type was used, and dispose of it in the sump. 

3. 
Dispose of any used supplies from station 4 (boots and gloves off) in the sump. When conducting chemical/biological decon, empty the station 4 containers in the sump and1move them to station I. Pick up the remaining reusable supplies and equipment. 

4. 
Empty the discard containers from station 4 and 3 in the sump and move 


them to station I. Dispose of any unusable supplies from stations 4 and 3 in 
the sump. Move reusable equipment from these staitons t\l..station I. 
I 
I 
5. If conducting biological decon, move the shovel from station 2 to station 
I. Dispose of any unusable supplies from station 2, into the sump. Move 
reusable supplies and equipment to station I. 

6. Decon alI supplies and equipment collected at station I, using the 
decontaminant and rinse water at station I. Empty the rinse and decon containers from station I in the sump. 
7. Mark entire decon area~ Remove overgarments using the MOPP gear exchange technique and dispose of the overgarments in the sump. Fi II in sump and mark it. Decon equipment used 1 to close down sump, as required. If it is chemical/biological contamjnant, use a skin decon kit. 
196 
8. 
Decon gloves and move (alI equipment and supplies at station I) upwind of the decon area. 

9. 
Remove your footwear covers and gloves which may now be contaminated. Dig a hole and bury them, mark the hole. 


CLEAR THE DETAILED TROOP DECONTAMINATIO~ SITE 
The step for clearing the troop decontamination site are as follows: 
Step I. Pick up alI used supplies and place them in the discard container at station 7 (mask decon point). Move the discard, wash, rinse, and sanitizing containers to the sump, empty them, and move them to station I. 
Step 2. Take up the vapor agent contamination control line at station 6 (mask removal), if (if engineer type was used), and dispose of it in the sump. 
Step 3. Dispose of any used supplies from station 4 (overboots and gloves off) in the sump. When conducting chemical/biological decon, empty the ' station 4 containers in the sump and move them to station I. Pick up the remaining reusable supplies and equipment. 
Step 4. Empty the discard containers from station 4 and 3 in the sump and move then to station I. Dispose of any unusable supplies from station 4 and 3 in the sump. Move reusable equipment from the these stations to station I. 
Step 5. If conducting biological decon, move the shovel from station 2 to station I. Dispose of any unusable supplies from station 2, into the sump. Move reusable supplies and equipment to station I. 
Step 6. Decon alI supplies and equipment collected at station I using the decontaminant and rinse water at station I. Empty the rinse and decon containers from station I in the sump. __ 
Step 7. Mark entire decon area with standard NBC marker. Remove overgarments using the MOPP gear exchange technique and dispose of the overgarments in the sump. Fi II in sump and mark it. Decon equipment used to close down sump, as required. If it is chemical/biological contamination, use the skin decon kit. 
Step 8. Decon gloves and move alI equipment and supplies from station I, upwind of the decon area. 
Step 9. Replace your footwear covers and gloves, which may be contaminated. Dig a hole and bury them. Mark the hole with standard NBC marker. 
197 

PROCESS THROUGH A DETAILED EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION SITE CONDITIONS Given a situation where you are contaminated with a chemical agent and are 
required to process through a detailed equipment decontamination site. List, in writing, the station sequence in which your contaminated vehicle wi I I process through the decontamination site. 
STANDARDS The Iist is 100% accurate. PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
STATION #1.  Primary wash  
STATION #2.  DS2 application  
STATION #3.  Wait  time  
STATION #4.  Rinse  
STATION #5.  Interior decon  
STATION #6.  Check  

PROCESS THROUGH A DETAILED EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION SITE 
General Guidance 
This technique requires a large water supply. Decon site should be set up near a good water source such as public water system, (tire hydrant), river, or large ponds. 
Stations should be 30 to 50 meters apart. 
Soldiers involved with washing, applying decontaminants, and rinsing must wear TAP aprons or wet weather gear to protect their overgarments. 
While in the pre-decon area, or prior to entering the decon site, vehicles and equipment are prepared for decon. Exterior-mounted supplies and equipment susceptible to damage by decontaminants or decon procedures are removed and deconned. 
There are two variations of the detailed equipment decontamination technique. For chemical and biological contamination there are six-stations. Decontamination of radiological contamination wi I I be cUscussed later. 
198 

The SIX stations for chemical or biological contamination are out I ined below. 
STATION #I. Primary wash. This step removes the gross contamination and dirt on the vehicle. This step is similar in purpose and procedure to the wash step (station 2) in the vehicle washdown technique under unit sustainment decontamination. Spray hot, soapy water on the entire vehicle surface, including the undercarriage and engine compartment. Although the under surfaces are difficult to reach, effort should be made tQ remove as much dirt as possible. Most of the contamination wi I I be removed wtih the dirt. Use caution in spraying water on hot engines; do not spray the engine itself, but spray the whole compartment. Engine heat wi I I decon the engine. Clean off all the dirt you can see on the vehicle and you will have satisfactorily accomplished this step. 
STATION #2. DS2 application. DS2 applied to vehicles wi I I decon toxic chemical and biological agents. This step is physically more strenuous than any other, so steps must be taken to prevent exhaustion. Each chemical squad member is paired with a soldier from the contaminated unit to form a "scrub 
team". A second "scrub team" provides rei ief for the first team by alternating with it periodically. The chemical squad leader supervises the 
rotation of scrub teams. The scrub team applies DS2 and scrubs it into the surface of the vehicle. Scrubbing the undercarriage m~y be difficult. Every effort should be made to at least cover the undercarriage-with decontaminant. The teams use the Ml3 decon apparatus (DAP) or any similar device. Alternate methods of applying DS2 are sponge mops, brushes, or brooms. 
STATION #3. Wait Time. DS2 requires 30 minutes to come in contact with agent that has seeped into cracks and crevices. Move vehicles to a concealed holding area. Record the time the vehicle enters the holding area. AI low 30 minutes for the DS2 to neutralize toxic chemical agents. Then move the vehicle to the next station. 
STATION #4. Rinse. For chemical and biological contamination, this step rinses off DS2 and neutralizes agent. 
STATION #5. Interior decon. This step concentrates on deconning the crew compartment and cargo area. It also serves as the driver exchange point. Contaminated drivers dismount the vehicle before the step begins and deconned assistant drivers mount after the step is complete. Vehicle driver opens alI hatches from the inside before leaving the vehicle. The decon platoon enters the crew compartments and cargo areas to run decon checks and do appropriatedecon. After decon crew identifies first contaminated vehicle, hazard transfer wi I I occur when moving to next vehicle unless speci fie decon actions are implemented i.e., shuffle pit before mounting next vehicle. 
199 

STATION #6. Check. This step is the key to detailed decon, which allows the MOPP level to be lowered. As much contamination as possible needs to be 
removed, or the MOPP level wi I! not be lowered. This is the "GO/NO GO" step which tells you if significant contamination is still present. Detection procedures wi II vary depending on the type of contamination. If contamination 
is detected on equipment, the equipment must be recycled through decon. Use M8 or M9 chemical detector paper to blot various dry surfaces on the vehicle. Two soldiers are required from the contaminated unit. One should be the assistant company decon team chief. They use their orga~ detection equipment to determine whether their vehicles are sufficiently deconned or 
require recycle. 
200 

PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS FOR 
DETAILED EQUIPMENT 
DECON STATION 

STEP ATTENDANT'S ACTION DECON CONTAMINATED
SQt:tAD COMPANY 

( I) Wash 	PDDE crew washed equipment 3 0 
(2) 	Apply I Supervisor and 2 Scrub teams 3 2
apply OS 2 

(3) Hold 	Attendant pos i t ions/t i mes equipment 0 I* 
(4) Rinse 	PDDE crew rinses equipment 3 0 
(5) 	Interior I Supervisor and 2 Deconners 3 0
Decon decon interior 

(6) 	Check 2 attendants check decon {) 2*
ef feet i veness 

*Co Decon Team Members Sub Total 12 5 Plus Decon PIt. HQ' s 3 0 
Total 1-5 5 
Decon Pit HQs: 
Provides platoon 	leaders, platoon NCO, driver/radio telephone
operator. 
Contaminated Co: Provides -Assist Co Decon team chief and another company team member tocheck equipment at station 6. -Decon team member to run station 3. -Two non-decon team members to scrub at step 2. 
201 
DETAILED EQUIPMENT DECON PLANNING CHART 

STOP FLOW OF VEHICLES THROUGH DECONTAMINATION STEPS 
Initial Veh I Wash Veh 2 10 min Veh 3 
Veh 4 
Apply Veh I 20 min Veh 2 Veh 3 Veh 4 
Hold Veh I 30 min Veh 2 Veh 3 Veh 4 
Rinse Veh I 5 min Veh 2 Veh 3 Veh 4 
Interior Veh I Decon Veh 2 10 min Veh 3 
Veh 4 
Monitor Veh I 15 min Veh 2 Veh 3 Veh 4 
Elasped Time 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 
202 

EFFORTS TO REDUCE CONTAMINATION 

Natural decontamination of radioactive agents. Aging, removing, and seai 1ng 
are the principle natural decontaminants used to decontaminate radioactive 
agents. 
Radiological contamination isn't affected by weather. Radiation hazards decay at a particular rate depending upon the atomic characterL5tics of specific particles. This process is called aging. It's a practic:a-1 technique for deconning because it requires no labor and reduces the soldier's exposure to radiation. Check the aging progress periodically by monitoring. Consider using aging whenever posible, especially in tactical situations where manpower is of primary importance. 
Removal of radioactive contamination is in most cases the most costly of decontamination procedures. Decontamination of large areas would require engineer assets, whereas moving the earth around fighting positions would only require a shovel. Even when moved the contamination wi I I remain a hazard unti I radiation decays to less than 0.33 cGy(rad)/hr. 
Covering or burying radioactive contamination with earth wi I I act as a shield and reduce the level of radiation. Earth is only a temporary sealant for 
radiological contamination. Terrain such as drainage aitches or collection sumps contaminated with radiation can be effectively sealed with 30 centimeters (12 inches) of earth. Eight centimeters (3 inches) of earth wi I I 
reduce the dose rate by approximately one-half. 
Water can be used to control radioactive dust, contamination on the ground, and prevent the agent from becoming airborne. Boi Iing may help remove some 
radiological contamination by getting the dirt out of the contamiated material, however, it doesn't reduce the radioactivity of contamination, and 
the water wi I I become contaminated. 
Radiological contamination is not affected by the variabt€s that affect chemical contamination. You can derive a general idea of the persistency of 
radiological hazards by taking readings of radiation dose rates. You can also use the "7-10 rule" as a rule-of-thumb to estimate future radiation levels for operational purposes. The 7-10 rule provides only a very general estimate which should be used only for planning purposes. The rate of radioactive decay is proportional over time. So the 7-10 rule means that for every 7 multiples of time, radiation intensity wi I I decrease by a factor of ten. 
203 

The process of individual sustainment for radiological contamination in most 
cases is relatively simple. Radiological contamination can be readily 
detected and located with monitoring equipment. Remove the contamination and 
you remove nearly alI of the hazard. Brush the dust off your load-bearing 
equipment and mask carrier. If you are contaminated with a dry contaminant, 
such as fallout, shake your clothing and gear. Wash exposed areas of your 
skin. Use M258AI towelettes if soap and water are not available. Pay 
particular attention to your hair and fingernails. Avoid breathing the dust 
you shake off. If you were contaminated by wet radiological contaminant you 
must conduct a MOPP gear exchange as soon as possible because brushing or 
shaking wi I I not remove the hazard. Wash gloves and footwear covers if water is available. Wipe off your mask, hood, helmet, and other personal equipment with warm, soapy water. If warm, soapy water is unavailable use rags or damp 
paper towels. Ensure contamination is not spread to clean areas. 
As with the personnel wipedown technique, the operator spraydown technique is as uncomplicated. Operator spraydown may be a misnomer. Operator washdown or operator brushdown is more appropriate for radiological contamination. 
If you are contaminated by fallout, rainout, neutron-induced contamination, or any type of radiological agent, use your monitoring equipment to help locate the radiological agent, used in your work area. Then decon as required. If detection equipment is not ava i I ab I e and you are suspe~ct you are con tam ina ted --decon. 
Radiological contamination can normally be removed by brushing or scraping 
(use brooms or tree branches). Water is effective for flushing away 
radiological contamination. Control the runoff so that any contaminated 
residue wi I I not be spread. Remember, you haven't destroyed the contamination, just moved it. The runoff wi II be hazardous. If you have 
time, brushing or scooping away the top inch of soi I from your fighting position wi II lower the amount of radiological contamination hazard affecting you. 
MOPP GEAR EXCHANGE TECHNIQUE 
Equipment and Personnel Requirements Recapitulation 
For Radiological Decon: Material optional if hot water is available. Use the following items to wash equipment. Otherwise, brush, wipe, or shake off 
radiological contamination. Then follow with the procedures for chemical decon using M258AI towelettes. 
204 

-Three pai Is (approximately 3-gal lon capacity) 
-One can Gl soap or I iquid detergent 
-Water for mask wash and rinse 
-Two sponges 
-Paper towe Is 
Personnel: 
-Two personnel from company decon team or the squad leader and assistant are required to set up and supervise the MOPP gear exchange area. 
VEHICLE WASHDOWN 
Do this procedure the same way for radiological contamination as was done for chemical contamination. The gains made conducting this technique for 
radiological contamination could be greater. 
DETAILED PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION 
When discussing decontamintion of radiological contamination you must consider that radiological contamination alone may not be present. The use of nuclear weapons, under current Soviet doctrine, wi I I probably be used only after alI conventional means (lwhich includes the use of chemical fires) have failed to obtain their objective. If chemical fires are not included initially, then the employment of chemical and nuclear occuring simultaneously to support meeting their objective should be assumed. None of the less, the threat of 
the use of chemical weapons wi I I prompt US forces into some MOPP posture early on. Therefore, the procedures detailed for personnel decontamination wi II assume that protective overgarments, footcovers, and maybe mask, hood, and gloves are worn. In the event that they are not worn, ~e procedures remain essentially the same subsituting current battle dress for overgarments in the procedure. 
Material as required at each station. 
STATION #I: Individual gear drop. Remove as much contamination as possible 
from the individual equipment (load-bearing equipment, mask carrier, helmet, and weapon) . 
a. For all forms of contamination: 
(I) 
Two 30-gal lon containers (one for decontaminants, one for rinse). 

(2) 
Two long-handled brushes (to scrub equipmen.t). 

(3) 
Water (for rinse). 


205 

b.  For  raiological  contamination:  
(I)  Decontaminant  (hot,  soapy water).  
(2)  AN/PDR  27  radiaometer.  
STATION #2:  Overboot and hood decon.  Remove gross contamination from hood  

and mask. For radiological decontamination only a shuffle pit is not required and no footwear decontamination is needed. (This statioa-may be deleted if mask was not worn during the operation. 
a. 	
For alI types of contamination: Cutting tool to remove hoods. 

b. 	
For radiological contamination: 

(I) 	
One container for hot, soapy water with sponge for mask wash. 

(2) 	
One container for rinse water with sponges. 




(3) 
One case paper towels per company. STATION #3. Overgarments off. Two containers. STATION #4. Overboots and gloves off: 

a. 	Cutting tool (to remove overboots). 

b. 
Draw Iine on the ground or use engineer type as a hot I ine to separate the "dirty" from "clean" areas. Exception to this clean area wi II be the dirty gloves. 

c. 
Two containers (one on dirty side on I ine for ovexboots, one on clean side for gloves). 


STATION #5. Monitor. 
a. 	
For alI types of contamination: First aid supplies. 

b. 	
For raiological contamination: Using your company level radiaometer, 


AN/PDR27, you can determine speci tical ly how much radiolog~cal contamination remains. By monitoring decontaminated equipment, you can quickly determine if contamination levels are low enough to present only neg Iigible risks. When neg Iigible risk levels (0.33 cGy [rads] per hour) are reached, no further 
decon is required. 
206 

(I)  AN/PDR27.  
(2)  Two  buckets.  
(3)  Hot, soapy water  for decon.  
(4)  Water  for  rinse.  
(5)  Two sponges.  
STATION #6.  Mask  removal.  No material  required.  (This station may  be  
deleted  if mask  was  not  worn  during  the operation.)  
STATION #7.  Mask decon point.  (This station may  be deleted  is mask  was  not  
worn during  the operation.)  
a.  For alI  types of contamination:  
(I)  Three buckets  (one  for  soapy water,  one  for  rinse water,  one  for  
mask sanitizing solution).  
(2)  One container  to discard  fi Iter elements and other  refuse.  
(3)  Hot, soapy water (for wash).  
(4)  Sanitizing solution.  
(5)  Water  for mask  rinse.  
(6)  Four sponges.  
(7)  One  case  of paper  towels  to dry masks during  refit process.  
STATION #8.  Reissue Point.  Same  as  when  decontaminati~ CB  hazards.  
DETAILED EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION  

General Guidance. The guidance for decontamination of raiological hazards using the detailed equipment decontamination method remains the same as was discussed in Unit 3 when decontaminating chemical and biological agents. 
This technique requires a large water supply. Decon site should be set up near a good water source such as public water system (fi(e hydrant), r1ver, or 
large ponds. 
Station should be 30 to 50 meters apart. 
207 

Soldiers involved with washing, applying decontaminants, and rinsing must wear 
TAP aprons or wet weather gear to protect their overgarments. (Only required when both chemical/biological and radiological contamination occur concurrently). 
While in the pre-decon area or prior to entering the decon site, vehicles and equipment are prepared for decon. Exterior-mounted supplies and equipment susceptible to damage by decontaminants or decon procedures are removed and 
deconned separately. 
There are two variations of the detailed equipment decontamination technique. For chemical and biological contamination there are six steps. 
STATION #I. Primary wash. 
STATION #2. DS2 application. 
STATION #3. Wait time. 
STATION #4. Rinse. 
STATION #5. Interior decon. 
STATION #6. Check 
For radiological contamination only, there are four steps. 
STATION #I. Primary wash. 
STATION #2. Rinse 
STATION #3. Interior decon. 
STATION #4. Check. 
A minimum of two chemical decon squads are required to set up and run the 
detailed equipment decontamination site. 
PROCESS THROUGH A DETAILED EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION SITE 
Vehicles are processed through four stations for radiological contamination. 
STATION #I. Primary wash. This step removes the gross contaimation and dirt 
on the vehicle. This step is similar in purpose and procedure to the wash 
step (Station 2) in the vehitle washdown technique under unit sustainment 
decontamination. Spray hot,i:soapy water on the entire surface including the 
undercarriage and engine compartment. Although the undersurfaces are 
difficult to reach, an effori should be made to remove as much dirt as 
possible. Most of the conta~ination will be removed wit-h--dirt. Use caution 
in spraying water on hot eng~nes; do not spray the engine itself, but spray 
the whole compartment. Cleah offal I the dirt you can see on the vehicle and 
you will have satifactorily kccomplished this step. 
208 

STATION #2. Rinse. For radio active contamination, this step rinses off the soapy water and provides an additional flushing step for removing con tam ina t ion. 
STATION #3. Interior decon. This step concentrates on deconning the crew compartment and cargo area. It also serves as the driver exchange point. Contaminated drivers dismount after the step is complete. Vehicle driver opens alI hatches from the inside before leaving the vehjcle. The decon platoon enters the crew compartments and cargo areas to ~n decon checks and do appropriate decon. After decon crew works on the first contaminated vehicle, hazard transfer may occur when moving to next vehicle unless specific decon actions are implemented. 
STATION #4. Check. This step is key to detailed decon--to remove as much contamination as possible. This step gives you the "go" or "no go" to do that. It tells you if significant contamination is still present. If more than .33 cGy/hr is detected on equipment, the equipment must be recycled through decon. Use the AN/PDR27 radiaometer to check for any radiological contamination present. Two soldiers are required from the contaminated unit., One should be the assistant company decon team chief. They use their organic detection equipment to determine whether their vehicles are sufficiently deconned or require recycle. 
PREPARE FOR NBC ATTACK 
CONDITIONS: 
Given a situation where your unit is performing its mission. Threat forces have either used nuclear, biological, or chemical (NBC) weapons or are likely to do so. You must prepare yourself and your unit in case these weapons are used against you. 
STANDARDS 
Demonstrate your ability to prepare an NBC attack by answering 8 out of 10 multiple-choice questions correctly. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
I. Cover supplies and equipment with plastic sheets. If plastic is not available, use a tarpaulin or other similar material. As a minimum use fo I i age. 
2. 
Keep ammunition in its container as long as you can. Cover exposedammunition. 

3. 
Cover weapons or put under foliage. 

4. 
Keep instruments in their containers when they are not being used. 


209 

5. 
Park vans so the air conditioners are away from prevai I ing winds. Park vehicles in woods. Spread them out and cover them when possible. 

6. 
Cover unsheltered communications equipment. Cover radio headsets and telephone mouthpieces with plastic. 

7. 
Put overhead cover on field latrines. 

8. 
Open food only when ready to eat it. 

9. 
Store unpackaged food in iceboxes. 

10. 
Keep water in sealed containers. 


I I. Dig in supplies and eq~ipment. 
12. 
Pick up loose items. Secure them so they do not become missiles. 

13. 
Turn off alI electronic equipment you do not have to use. Remove power cables and antennas. Keep this equipment inside bunkers and armored vehicles to protect against electromagnetic pulse (EMP). 


REFERENCES 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-3007 
SUPERVISE PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL, SUPPLIES, AND EQUIPMENT 
An explosion, in general, results from the very rapid release of a large amount of energy within a I imited space. This is true for a conventional "high explosive," such as TNT, as wei I as for a nuclear explosion, although 
the energy is produced in different ways. The sudden Iib~ration of energy causes a considerable increase to temperature and pressure, so that alI the materials present are converted into hot, compressed gases. 
Nuclear weapons are similar to those of more conventional types insofar as their destructive action is due mainly to blast or shock. On the other hand, there are several basic differences between nuclear and high-explosive weapons. In the first place, nuclear explosions can be many thousands (or millions) of times more powerful than the largest conventional detonations. Second, a fairly large proportion of the energy in a nuclear explosion is emitted in the form of light and heat, generally referred to as "thermal radiation." It is capable of causing skin burns and starting fires at considerable distances. Third, the nuclear explosion is accompanied by highly penetrating and harmful "initial nuclear explosion are radioactive, emitting radiation over an extended per:iod of time. This is knowrt as "residual nuclear radiation." 
210 

It is because of these fundamental differences between a nuclear and 
conventional explosion that the effects of nuclear weapons require special 
consideration. In this connection, a knowledge and understanding of the 
mechanical and the various radiation phenomena associated with a nuclear 
explosion are of vital importance. 
In the case of conventional explosions, the energy arises from chemical 
reactions involving a rearrangement among the atoms pres~nt in the chemical 
high-explosion material. In a nuclear explosion, howevef, the energy is 
produced as a result of the formation of different atomic nuclei by the 
redistribution of the protons and neutrons within the i interacting nuclei. 
There is a definite equivalence between mass and energy (E = mc 2 ), and when a decrease in mass occurs in a nuclear reaction, there is an accompanying release of a certain amount of energy related to the decrease in mass. Two kinds of nuclear interactions can satisfy the conditions for the production of large amounts of energy in a short time -"fission" and "fusion." 
A fission explosion is a process whereby the nucleus of a heavy element (usually uranium or plutonium) splits into two Iighter elements with the release of a large amount of energy. [The complete fission of I pound of uranium or plutonium releases as much energy as the explosion of 8,000 tons (8 KT) of TNT.] 
In a fusion reaction, a pair of I ight nuclei unite or fuse together to form a nucleus of a heavier atom. A I ight element commonly used as deuterium nuclei combine to form the nucleus of helium, with the release of energy. A fusion reaction can be accomplished by means of very high temperatures and is often 
referred to as a "thermonuclear process." [The fusion of all the nuclei present in I pound of deuterium releases roughly the same amount of energy as 
the explosion of 26,000 tons (26 KT) of TNT.] 
Recognize a Nuclear Attack 
-The effects of a nuclear explosion are many times greater --than the effects of a conventional explosion. To recognize a nuclear attack, you must know what happens when a nuclear explosion occurs. You should know some of the terms and elements related to nuclear hazards. 
A Nuclear Burst. When a nuclear explosion occurs, a tremendous amount of energy is released. This energy is cal led Yield. Yield is measured in kilotons and megatons. A ki laton is the equivalent amount of explosive energy 
released when I ,000 tons of TNT explode. A 20-KT nuclear explosion releases as much explosive energy as 20,000 tons of TNT. A megaton is the equivalent amount of energy released when one mi I I ion tons of TNT explode. A 15-MT nuclear explosion releases as much energy as IS mi I I ion tons of TNT. 
211 

AI I the energy from the nuclear explosion is released within a fraction of a second and within a very smal I area. Everything in that smal I area--the bomb casing, unexploded nuclear fuel, dirt; trees, bui !dings--is heated so hot that it vaporizes or turns into gas. These gases form a highly pressurized, glowing, white hot mass cal led the firebal I. As the firebal I cools, it rises, expands, and generates tremendous turbulence; it causes the familiar mushroom-shaped cloud associated with certain types of nuclear explossions. 
The effect of a nuclear explosion wi I I vary by its height-of burst, which 
refers to whether the explosion was at the surface of the ground, in the air, 
or below ground. An airburst refers to a nuclear explosion high enough above 
the surface of the earth so that the fireball does not touch the ground. An 
airburst will form a white cloud up in the air, but without the "mushroom" 
stem. 
A surface burst explodes on or close to the surface of the earth. The firebal I touches the surface and produces a dark-colored and heavy-looking cloud with a mushroom stem. A subsurface burst is an explosion centered below the surface of the earth or underwater. The force of the explosion may be held underground or break through the surface, depending on the depth of the explosion. If the subsurface burst stays underground, no cloud wi I I be formed; it may feel like an earthquake. 
The location where a nuclear weapon explodes is cal led ground zero. Ground zero is the point on the ground where a surface burst occurs, the point on the ground under an airburst, or the point on the ground above a subsurface burst. 
F i reba II 
As a result of the nuclear explosion, the fission products, bomb casing, and other weapon parts are raised to extremely high temperatures, similar to those in the center of the sun. The maximum temperature attained by these residues is several tens of mi II ions of degrees -compared with a maximum of approximately 5,000° (9,000°F) in a conventional high e~~losive weapon.Because of this great heat, alI the materials are converted into gaseousform. Since the gases, at the instant of explosion, are restricted to the region occupied by the original materials, tremendous pressures wi I I be produced-probably over ami I I ion times the atmospheric pressure. 
Within less than a microsecond (ami I I ionth of a second) of the detonation of 
the weapons, the extremely hot weapon residue radiates large amounts of energy, mainly as X-rays, which are absorbed within a few feet in a sea level atmosphere. This leads to the formation of a hot and highly luminous, spherical mass of air and gaseous weapon residue cal led the "fi rebal I." 
Immediately after its formation, the fireball begins to grow in size while decreasing in brightness. The firebal I produces the basic effect of a nuclear detonation. 
212 

Height of burst. The effects of a nuclear explosion vary with the location of the point of burst in relation to the surface of the earth. 
An airburst is defined as one in which the weapon is exploded 1n the air at such a height that the firebal I does not touch the surface of the earth. An ai rburst usually produces the most damage to mi I i tary targets, but does not produce militarily significant fallout. 
A surface burst is one in which the point of detonation i~below the surface of the earth, or at such a height above the surface that the fi rebal I wi I I touch the earth. The effects from the sur face burst are norma I I y Iess than those of an airburst; it does, however, produce militarily significant fallout. 
A subsurface burst is one in which the point of detonation is below the surface of the earth. Most of the energy wi II, of course, appear as underground effects; however, if the fireball ruptures the surface of the earth, there may be an appreciable escape of the effects. A subsurface burst may not produce fallout; however, if the fireball ruptures the earth, fallout can be expected. 
Basic effects 
Nuclear weapons effects may be categorized as blast (or snack), thermal 
radiation (heat and Iight), and nuclear radiation. Of these, only blast and heat are found in a conventional HE explosion. For a typical airburst, blast comprises 50% of the total energy; thermal radiation, 35%; and nuclear 
rad iat ion , 15% . 
Effects of a Nuclear Attack. Nuclear weapons cause casualties and damage to material through the effects of blast, thermal radiation, nuclear readiation, and electromagnetic pulse (EMP). These effects wi I I vary according to the height of a burst, explosive yield of the weapon, and distance of personnel or material from ground zero. 
Blast. At a fraction of a second after a nuclear detonation, a high-pressure wave develops and moves outward from the fi rebal I. This is the blast wave, and is the cause of most of the destruction accompanying a nuclear burst. The front of the wave travels rapidly away from the fireball, behaving I ike a moving wal I of highly compressed air. As an example of the speed of the blast wave, consider the following: After a lapse of 10 seconds, when the fi rebal I of a !-megaton burst has attained its maximum size, the front of the blast wave has already traveled over 5 kilometers. One effect of the blast wave is called static overpressure. This is the pressure on the human chest to col lapse the lungs. This effect decreases as the distance from ground zero increases. The high-speed winds propel objects, such as tree Iimbs or debris, at great speeds, turning them into potentially lethal missiles. These winds can also physically throw, at great speeds, any individual who is not protected, resulting in casualties. Individuals, both i~ide and outside of a structure, may be injured as a result of blast damage t~ the structure; those inside, by the collapse of the structure and fire; and those outside, by the flying objects carried by the winds. As the blast wave travels outward, it leaves in its wake a lessening of air pressure that acts I ike a vacuum. This effect causes additional destructive winds that rush back toward ground zero to f i I I up the vacuum. 
213 

B I ast ef feet 
Blast is the most destructive nuclear weapon effect. The blast wave is transmitted in alI directions from the point of detonation as the hot gases in the firebal I expand. 
Blast is measured in terms of overpressure; i.e., pressure above atmospheric pressure (14.7 PSI). 
The front of the blast wave (shock front) is a moving wal I of highly compressed air. When the wave breaks away from the fi rebal I, it is traveling at 5 to 7 times the speed of sound. For a I MT burst, the blast wave travels more than 12 miles before its velocity drops to the speed of sound at sea 
I eve I. 
Blast damages both material and personnel. Material targets are damaged by 
the direct effect of the blast wave; while injury to personnel occurs primarily from indirect effects; for example, flying objects or falling structures. 
Blast pressures are of two types: static overpressure and dynamic pressure. 
Static overpressure is the crushing effect exerted by 1ha blast wave at a given location. It causes damage to crushing or diffraction type targets, such as buildings. The damage mechanism is a pressure differential. 
Dynamic pressure is exerted by the strong winds accompanying the blast wave. It causes damage to drag or rol I type targets such as mi Iitary vehicles. 
The passage of the bl.ast wave is characterized by a variation of pressure with time. 
Thermal radiation 
-Thermal radiation is produced when energy from the nuclear detonation is absorbed by the surrounding atmosphere. The weapon residues are vaporized and absorbed by the atmosphere to create a luminescent fi rebal I, the temperature of which is mi I I ions of degrees centigrade. 
Thermal radiation is emitted in two pulses 
The first pulse is of extremely short duration. It is emitted between the 
formation of the fireball and the formation of the shock wave. When the shock wave forms, it is so dense that thermal energy cannot pass through. 
The second thermal pulse is emitted after the shock wave breaks away from the firebal I. The pulse contains most of the thermal energy and is emitted at a 
lower temperature than the first pulse. 
214 

Thermal Radiation .. Thermal radiation is the first effect of a nuclear burst 
that can be seen and felt. It is the combination of heat and I ight resulting 
from the formation of the firebal I. 
Heat. Within less than a millionth of a second of the detonation of a nuclear weapon, the residue radiate great amounts of energy. This leads to the 
formation of the fireball. To an observer 80 kilometers_away, the fireball of a 1-megaton weapon would appear to be many times more brt+l iant than the sun at noon. Although the brightness of the firebal I does not vary greatly with 
the yield of the weapon, the yield does dictate the duration of the firebal I. The heat radiated from the fi rebal I contributes to the overal I damage caused by a nuclear burst by igniting combustibles and thus starting fires in buildings and forests. These fires may spread rapidly among the debris produced by the blast. In addition, this heat is capable of causing skin burns to exposed individuals at great distances from ground zero. The distance to which this effect wi II cause injury, however, is highly dependent on the weather and terrain. During periods of limited visibility, the heat effect wi I I be reduced significantly from what it would have been in clear weather. 
blgb!. The firebal I formed at the instant of a nuclear detonation is a source of extremely bright Iight. This I ight can cause injur-ies_ to individuals in 
the form of temporary or permanent blindness. Temporar~ blindness from a burst during day I ight should be of very short duration and is not an important consideration for individuals other than aircraft crewmen. At night, this 
loss of vision wi II last for longer periods because the eyes have been adapted 
to the dark. Recovery, however, should be completed within 15 minutes. The 
I ight flash can cause permanent injury to the eye due to burns within the eye 
itself, but this is only I ikely to occur in those individuals who happen to be 
looking directly at the fireball at the instant of detonation. 
Effect of Thermal Radiation on the Body 
The radiation can cause flash burns, which are similar to burns received by being in the sun too long. The difference is that flash burns happen very quickly. These burns may be first degree, second degree, or third degree, depending upon how close the soldier is to the nuclear burst. 
Nuclear radiation 
Initial nuclear radiation includes alI the nuclear radiation emitted within minute after the detonation. It comprises 5% of the total bomb enery released, with the radiation of mi Iitary significance consisting of gamma rays. 
Nuclear Radiation. Nuclear radiation is a form of electro-magnetic energy 
that, in sma II doses as used in medicine, can be beneficia I . In massive doses, as in a nuclear explosion, nuclear radiation can ~ause sickness and death. ~ 
215 
Initial Nuclear Radiation. Initial nuclear radiation is that radiation 
emitted within the first minute after detonation. It consists primarily of neutrons and gamma rays. Both of these types of radiation, although different in character, can travel considerable distance through the air and can produceharmful effects in humans. Gamma rays are invisible rays similar to X-rays. These penetrating rays interact with the human body and cause damage to tissues and blood-forming eel Is. The effects of neutrons on the body effects of initial radiation results from the fact that a soldier_may have received a lethal or incapacitating dose of radiation before being a~e to take anyprotective action. 
Initial gamma radiation is produced by two processes. 
Capture of bomb neutrons by atmospheric processes. 
Decay of fission products. 
Neutrons are emitted in both fission and fusion weapons. They are quite
energetic, but are rapidly slowed by collisions with the surrounding media. 
Residiual nuclear radiation comprises about 10% of the total bomb energy and is divided into fallout and neutron induced radiation. 
Fallout consists of a mixture of unfissioned bomb materials (alpha emitters)and fission products (beta, gamma emitters), and soi I elements that have become radioactive (beta, gamma emitters). 
Neutron induced radiation is produced when bomb neutrons strike certain elements in the soi I, inducing them to emit beta and gamma radiation. 
Nuclear radiation is measured in terms of the Gray. One Gray is equal to 100 rads and I rad is equal to the absorption of 100 ergs of energy per gram of absorbing material. Therefore, I rad is equal to I ~centigray (cGy). The term cGy and rad are interchangable. 
Residual Nuclear Radiation. Residual nuclear radiation is that which lasts after the first minute and consists primarily of fa116ut and neutron-induced radiation. The primary hazard of residual radiation results from the creation 
of fallout. 
Fallout. Fallout is produced when material from the earth is drawn into the 
firebal I, vaporized, combined with radioactive material, and condensed to particles which then fall back to which then fall back to earth. The largerparticles fal I back immediately in the vicinity of ground zero. The smaller particles are carried by the winds unti I they gradually settle to the surface of the earth. The contaminated area created by fallout may be very small or may extend over many thousands of square kilometers, and the dose rate may vary from ami Ii tari ly significant level to an extremely-dangerous one for all 
personnel not taking necessary defensive measures. 
216 
Fallout of radioactive material from an airburst is not of military significance unless rain or snow fal Is through the radioactive cloud and 
brings the material to earth. Neutrons from the detonation wi II cause induced radiation in the soi I around ground zero. Except for very high airbursts, wi I I be of concern to
neutron-induced radiation in the area of ground zero both mounted and dismounted personnel who are required to go into or across the area. Radiological monitoring wi I I be required as units pass through such an area so that hazardous levels of radiation can be detected and avoided, if 
possible. 
Induced radiation in a surface burst is present but wi I I be masked by residual 
a is by far its
radiation from fallout. The fallout produced by surface burst 
most dangerous effect in that it can cover thousands of square kilometers with high levels of radioactivity. 
If the firebal I of a subsurface burst breaks through the surface, fallout wi II 
be produced. Thermnal radiation wi II not be a significant hazard since it 
wi II be almost completely absorbed by the soi I. Blast effects wi I I also be 
significantly reduced, but shock waves passing through the ground or water 
wi II extend for I imited distance. The range of the initial nuclear radiation 
wi II be considerably less than from either of the other two types of bursts, 
because this wi II also be absorbed to a great extent by the soi I. However, 
extremely hazardous residual radiation wi II occur in a·nd .around any crater. 
If the f i reba I I does not break the surface, shock waves -w i II pass through the 
ground and cause craters due to settling. 
A secondary hazard which may arise is the neutron-induced radioactivity on the surface of the earth in the immediate vicinity of ground zero. The intensity and extent of the induced radiation field depends on the type of soi I in the area around ground zero, the height of burst, and the type and yield of the weapon. The only significant source of residual radiation from an airburst weapon is induced activity in the soil of a limited circular pattern directly beneath the point of burst. 
The electromegnetic pulse (EMP) is broad-band-width electromagnetic energy pulse of a short duration produced by a nuclear burst. The range of effect is measured in hundreds of kilometers for a high altitude air burst, and tens of kilometers for a surface burst. It does not affect personnel, but damages 
electronic equipment and blanket radio communications systems. Steps to 
counter EMP include: disconnect cables, dismantle or shorten antennas, and 
enclose electronic equipment in metal containers. 
Effect of Nuclear Radiation on the Body 
Initial nuclear radiation and residual radiation, or fallout, do not damage 
material; they damage human tissues. When radiation is absorbed by the body, 
it ki IIs the body's eel Is. How much radiation a soldier can receive and sti I I 
survive depends on such factors as the soldier's weight-]eneral state of 
health, personnal biochemistry, and whether the soldier-has had previous 
exposure to radiation. 
217 

Radiation doses are measured in units cal led cGy(rad). Of soldiers who receive a dose of 0 to 70 cGy(rads), fewer than 5 percent wi I I show early symptoms of radiation poisoning. Of soldiers receiving 800 cGy(rads), almost alI wi I I show symptoms, and fatalities wi I I be above 50 percent within 45 days. 
Symptoms of Radiation Poisoning 
Symptoms of radiation poisoning may occur immediately if-lhe dose received by the soldier was very high. Otherwise, the symptoms wi I I ~pear within a few hours. Depending upon the dosage received, the symptoms may disappear after a short time and not return, or they may return again within a few days, or not 
for several weeks. When the symptoms do than they were initially, and can result  reappear, in death.  they may Radiation symptoms  be  more  severe include:  
-Weakness  
-Nausea  
-Vomiting  or  dry heaving  
-Diarrhea  
-Lethargy (lack of energy)  
-Depression  
-Mental disorientation  
-Shock  
-Coma  

At present there is no cure for radiation sickness; however, the symptoms can be treated. 
218 

METHODS OF PROTECTING PERSONNEL, SUPPLIES, AND EQUIPMENT 

React to a Nuclear Attack 
The enormous and rapid effects of a nuclear burst make it impreative that 
soldiers be able to react quickly. Soldiers must know how to protect themselves against the three casualty-producing effects of the blast wave, thermal radiation, and nuclear radiation. Time is the critical factor in 
protection from a nuclear blast. If the possibility exist-s of a surprise nuclear attack, alI personnel not engaged in any essential activity should remain under cover as much of the time as possible, because the time available for getting under cover wi I I be so short, and exposure to some of the nuclear effects occurs almost simultaneously with the detonation. When given warning, a unit can perform several kinds of protective measures that cannot be done when an attack occurs without warning. 
React When Given No Warning. When no warning has been given of an impending nuclear attack, soldiers must react the instant they see the bright flash of Iight. Depending on the size of the weapon and your distance from the burst, 
your unit may have only seconds to take cover. Defensive actions must be automatic. Heat comes with the bright light of the explosion, and a blast wave follows within seconds. 
Prepare for Fallout. Depending on whether the burst was an airburst, surface burst, or subsurface burst, there may be a Iittle fallout or a lot. As soon 
as the blast wave has passed, alI soldiers should begin preparations to protect themselves, their equipment, and supplies from fallout. Everything 
that can be sealed should be. Every effort should be made to keep fallout out 
of foxholes or other shelters. Hatches, doors, windows, and other openings should be kept closed. Designated individuals begin monitoring using RADIAC instruments so that any fallout arriving in the unit wi I I be detected. RADIAC 
instruments usually used to detect and measure radioactivity include the IMI74 Series Radiaometer, which is used for area monitoring and surveys, and the AN/PDR27 RADIAC Set, which is used for monitoring personae!, food, and 
equipment. When warned of the arrival of fallout, indivrduals take cover and 
remain protected unti I fallout has stopped, or unti I other instructions are 
received. 
Soldiers should attempt to seek shelter in places that provide shielding against the radiation from fallout. Lead, steel, concrete, and earth alI provide protection. Overhead protection is essential. Since earth absorbs 
radiation, the deeper the foxhole, the greater the protection. If fallout arrives when you are out in the open, it is better to enter available shelter with some fallout on you than to remain outside without shielding. 
219 

Remove Fallout. Because fallout is a fine dust, it can be prtially removed by brushing or dusting it off. If you are going to enter a shelter and you have fallout on you, you should remove as much of it as possible before you enter the shelter. The best way to remove fallout, however, is to wash it off. If at alI possible, soldiers should shower, being especially careful to remove fallout dust from their hair, under their nai Is, or in any cuts, scrapes, or open wounds. Clothing should be laundered or exchanged, if possible. Fallout also should be washed, wiped, brushed, or blown offal I ~ersonal equipment. 
CAUTION 
Fallout left in contact with skin causes skin burns similar to first, second, and third degree burns. 
Eat and Drink in Fallout Area. Only food and water that has been stored in sealed containers should be eaten. Before the containers are opened, any 
fallout should be washed or brushed off, the containers should then be monitored. 
Food in open containers should not be eaten because it. is I ikely to be contaminated. Fruits and vegetables with tough skins,:however, can be eaten 
if they can be washed wei I, if the skin can be removed, 2nd if the remaining portion is monitored. 
Clean water is to be provided by the Supply and Service Unit. However, if no uncontaminated water is available, contaminated water can be filtered through a column of earth and used sparingly unti I clean water is provided. 
React When Given Warning. When warned of an impending friendly nuclear attack, units can make defensive preparations that will lessen casualties. 
Prepare Shelter. The best defense against nuclear attack__ is to dig in. Unit defensive positions, which vary from individual foxholes ·to improved defensive positions, should be prepared whenever the tactical situation permits. 
Certain common materials and types of construction wi I I provide good shielding against gamma radiation and neutrons, and wi I I provide protection against the blast and heat of a neclear detonation. Foxholes, natural and man-made shelters, vehicles, and buildings provide defense against nuclear weapons. 
Foxholes. A properly constructed foxhole offers excel lent protection against both initial and residual radiation, because dirt is .a good shielding material. A deep foxhole gives more protection than a shallow one because of ~he greater thickness of the shielding material, and the greater reduction of the initial radiation entering the hole. An overhead covering of earth or other material wi II reduce the amount of thermal and ;inHial nuclear rediation that reaches the individu~l arid wi II also prevent the enterance of fallout. 
220 

This cover must be sturdily constructed to withstand the blast wave. 
Field Shelters. Wei !-constructed fighting positions and bunkers provide 
excellent protection against all the effects of a nuclear detonation. 
Tunnels, caves, and storm drains also provide good shelter unless there is a 
nearby subsurface col lapse of these shelters. Culverts and ditches can be 
used in an emergency, although they offer only partial protection. 
Vehicles. Tanks provide good protection in most situatio~. Lightly armored 
vehicles such as the armored personnel carriers, also give some protection, 
but foxholes offer greater protection. AI I armored vehicles should be 
buttoned up. 
Sui ldings. Sui ldings usually are not strong enough to provide effective 
shelter, but the lowest floor or basement of a reinforced concrete or 
steel framed bui !ding wi II offer good protection from all effects, except the 
blast overpressure, if personnel avoid the areas around windows and other 
openings. 
Prepare Supplies and Equipment. Clothing, supplies, and equipment must be 
secured to prevent them from being blown about by the blast wave and to reduce 
the fire hazard resulting from the intense heat of the explosion. 
Clothing, equipment, and other items issued to individuals should be kept in 
their foxholes, if possible, or in a separate, covered hole. The helmet, weapon, and any individual equipment not being worn should also be placed in 
the foxhole. None of this equipment can be left unsecured because the blast 
wave wi II convert them into lethal missiles. 
Objects such as radios, generators, tools, and gas cans are always secured to minimize the danger of casual ities from flying debris caused by the blast wave. 
Unit supplies, particularly explosives and flammables, should be dispersed within the unit area and protected or shielded. Debris m~st be kept to a 
minimum and not be allowed to collect where a fire hazard·whould be created. 
Food and water supplies should be secured in sealed containers. 
Prepare Electronics Equipment for Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP). Any electronics or communication equipment that is not immediately needed should be turned off or disconnected from power sources. Antennas also should be removed and cables disconnected from the equipment. 
Procedures During and After the Attacks 
Procedures followed by units during and after the attack are the same as procedures for an attack that occurs without warning. Soldiers perform self-aid and first aid measures, where necessary, prepare for fallout, and continue the mission as directed. 
221 

FIRST-AID AND TREATMENT OF CASUALTIES 

The causalty-producing effects of a nuclear explosion are blast, thermal 
radiation, and nuclear radiation. First aid measures are usually I imited to 
treatment for burns caused by thermal radiation and injuries caused by the 
blast wave. NO immediate Iifesaving measures are avai !able for the treatment of radiaiton sickness or blindness caused by the intense Iight. 
BIas t in j u r i es 
Injuries caused by the blast wave which are treatable with first aid measures are usually associated with either the impact of missiles or the physical displacement of the body. The damage caused can range from minor cuts and bruises to broken bones, severe lacerations, and critical damage to vital organs. In all these cases, however, the first aid treatment which is given is the same as that which would be used for any accident victim or convential combat casualty suffering similar injuries. Detailed procedures for the first aid treatment of specific types of injuries are given in FM 21-1 I. 
There are two types of blast effects. 
Direct blast. An effect which starts as the blast wave moves towards you and causes an overpressure. Although our bodies can withsfand a lot of overpressure, 8 psi (pounds per square inch) can rupture_ear drums, 45 to 55 psi wi II cause 50% fatalities due to lung and circulatory collapse, and 55-65 psi brings the probabi I ity of death to 99% of personnel. 
Indirect blast. Injuries result from bui !dings collapsing, glass, pieces of metal, wood, rocks, etc., being thrown about by the winds following the blast wave. In addition, these winds can pick up an individual and hurl his/her body forcibly against solid objects. 
Thermal radiation injuries 
The intense heat generated by a nulear detonation can cause burn injuries directly, by the absoption of the radiant energy by the skin, or indirectly, as the result of fires started by the thermal radiation. The direct burns are often referred to as "flash burns," since they are produced by the flash of thermal radiation from the fireball. The indirect burns are called "flame burn"; they are identical to skin burns caused by any fire. Burns are generally classified according to their severity, in terms of the degree of the injury. 
It has been estimated that thermal effects (burns) were responsible for more than 1/2 of the d~aths and about 3/4 of alI the casualties at Hiroshima and Nagasaki; 150,000 people received burn injuries and of this number 50,000 died. 
222 

The three degrees of burns to the body or skin are: 
-l?t degree burn -redness of skin equivalent to a sunburn. 
-2d degree burn-equivalent to a severe sunburn with blisters. 
-3d degree burn -charring of the flesh. 
First degree burns, sunburn for example, causes only redn~s of the skin. Healing normally occurs without special treatment and no scar formation is 
Ieft. 
Second-degree burns are deeper and more severe, and are characterized by the 
formation of blisters. Severe sunburn with blistering is an example of a second-degree burn. 
In third-degree burns, the ful I thickness of the skin is destroyed. Unless 
skin grafting techniques are employed, there wi I I be scar formation at the site of the injury. The depth of the burn is not the only factor in determining its effect on an individual. The amount of skin area which has been affected is also important. 
Thus, a first-degree burn over the entire body may be more serious than a third-degree burn at one smal I spot. The larger the area burned, the more likely is the appearance of symptoms involving the whole body. Furthermore, there are certain local regions, such as the hands, where most any degree of burn will incapacitate the individual. All burns, however, are treated similarly, as determined by the degree of body coverage, regardless of what caused the burns. The detai Is of first-aid treatment for different degrees of burns are covered in FM 21-1 I. 
Every effort must be made to ensure the number of burn casulties are as few as possible. The material and personnel required in the treatment of one casualty with a 40% coverage of 3d degree burns, accordina to present standards is: 
42 tanks of oxygen 
36 pints of plasma 
40 pints of blood 
-104 pints of fluids 
-2.7 miles of gauze 
3 nurses 
2 physicians 
Great quantities of drugs 
The effects of the "light portion11 of thermal radiation on the eyes fall into fwo main categories: Temporary blindness, and permanent blindness. Concentration of sufficient direct thermal energy, due te the focusing action of the eye lens, can cause the permanent blindness. Thi~-focusing occurs, however, only if the fi reba II is in the field of vision of the individual. When this happens, the damage may be experienced at distances from the explosion which even exceeds those at which the thermal radiation wi I I cause skin burns. 
223 

Temporary blindness can occur in the individuals who are too far from the detonation to suffer permanent injury or who do not view ~he firebal I directly. This blindness results when more thermal energy is received by the ~ retina than is necessary for image perception, but less than is required for • burns. The effect is a localized bleaching of the visual elements, with 1mage persistence, after-image formation, halo, etc. A few seconds to several days may be required for the eye to fully recover its functions. Temporary blindness occurs at greater ranges at night, when the ey~ is adapted to the dark, than in daylight; however, the range of these effeq.t-s is highly dependent on the prevai I ing atmospheric conditions at the time of burst. 
Flash blindness is normally a temporary condition caused by the bri II iant flash produced by a nuclear explosion (many times brighter than the sun). It is not necessary for one to look at the firebal I to develop the condition. It can be reflected from the sky, ground, and other objects. This effect should not last more than a few minutes during day I ight but can last from a few minutes to many hours during the night when the pupi Is are dilated. Therefore, flash blindness can reduce combat effectiveness. 
No matter what the degree of blindness, no first aid treatment is necessary. 
Individuals suffering permanent damage can only be made as comfortable as 
possible and evacuated. Individuals who are temporarily blinded wi II recover 
unaided with the passage of time, but may require soma assistance in taking 
care of themselves unti I their sight returns. 
Retinal burns (eye burns) are more serious and are produced by looking at the fi rebal I. This effect can happen at such great distance from the explosion that thermal radiation wi II not produce a skin burn. This effect is also I ikely to occur at night and more I ikely to occur when using a telescope or binoculars. Eye burns may leave permanent scarring and interfere with vision. 
Nuclear radiation injuries 
The exposure of the human body to nuclear radiation cau~s damage to the eel Is which are the basic structural components of alI parts of the body. This damage is the cause of what is generally called "radiation sickness," the severity of which depends on the radiation dose received. After the individual is exposed, the early symptoms of radiation sickness will appear, usually after a delay of from I to 6 hours. These symptoms may include headache, nausea, vomit'ing, and diarrhea. These early symptoms may then be followed by a latent period during which the symptoms disappear. There are no first aid measures which wi I I help a person who has been exposed to nuclear radiation other than making him as comfortable as possible as he is undergoing the early symptoms. 
_If the radiation dose was relatively small, the symptoms, if any, wi II probably go away and not recur. If the symptoms continue or recur after a 
latent period, the casualty should be sent to medical treatment facilities. 
224 

The response of an individual to nuclear radiation depends upon several factors, some of which are dose, partion of body exposed, duration exposed, prior exposure, and individual variation (phys1cal make-up). First we take up dose. Listed below is a rough guide in predicting the effects of wholebody radiation. (Numbers are in wholebody total dose.) 
200 cGy(rad)-sickness for approximately 5% of personnel. 
500 cGy(rad)-Lethal for approximately 50% of personnel. 
1000 cGy(rad)-Lethal for almost alI personnel. 
During the average Iife time, every human being receives a total of about 10 cGy(rads) (or more) of nuclear radiation over the whole body from natrual sources. 
Area (whole body or localized) 
The injury caused by a certain dose of radiation wi I I depend upon the extent and part of the body that is exposed. Acute exposed dose of 700 cGy(rads) applied to a smal I region of the body may not result in considerable damage. 
If whole body is exposed many organs are affected and recovery is more difficult. 
We can expose a tumor to a dose of 4,000 cGy(rads) of X-Ray radiation. This amount is needed to ki I I the tumor. This dose might even be repeated after a time, without ki I Iing a man. However, the same dose to the whole body would 
readily ki I I the individual. 
Time (acute and chronic). The effects of nuclear rediation on people depend not only on the total dose received but also the rate at which it is received. I,000 cGy(rads) received within a 24 hour period would be fatal if the whole body was exposed, but it would probably not cause death if received more than less evenly over a period of 30 years. When absorption is over a period of time, damage eel Is are replaced by new eel Is by natural recovery. When a large dose is received in a short time, recovery cannot -keep pace with the damage. 
Previous exposure. The damage caused by radiation is cumulative within the body. Refer to FM 3-3 for your operation exposure guide. 
Individual variation. There is a variation in degree of resistance seen in different eel Is, tissues and organs. Extremes of age, (i.e., the very young and old), are physical conditions of considerable importance. Young adults can take readiation better than older adults. The older one gets the less 
rapidly the repair system works. 
225 

PHASES OF RADIATION SICKNESS 

Initial Phase 
a. 
Several hundred (200-300) cGy(rads) received in less than I hour -no immediate reaction. 

b. 
After exposure-normal state for I to 2 hours, ·suddenly Iistless and fatigued, paient becomes quiet, withdrawn, and antisocia~ 

c. 
Five to 8 hours after exposure-upset stomach and loss of appetite,followed by vomiting. 


d. Third day-patient feels wei I. 
Latent Phase 
a. 
3d to 20th day -patient feels wei I, can work. 

b. 
13th to 17th day-loss of hair. 

c. 
20th to 21st day -symptoms erupt again. 


Toxic Phase (Bone marrow depession). The casualty experiences: 
a. 
Feverish fee Ii ng 

b. 
Headache 

c. 
Fatigue 

d. 
Di ff i cuI ty in breathing 

e. 
Short time confined to bed 


Recovery Phase (8 to 14 weeks after exposure). Provided the individual 
receives: 
a. 
Rest 

b. 
Good food 

c. 
Vitamins 

d. 
Iron 


226 
Treatment of radiation sickness 
Our body has the abi Iity to self repair unless extensive damage has been done. Since we cannot halt the actions of radioactivity, the treatment of casualties wi I I be symptomatic. Treatment wi I I be: 
a. 
Rest 

b. 
Fluids 

c. 
Personal hygiene 

d. 
Antibodies 


PREPARE AND SUBMIT NBC 1 (NUCLEAR) REPORT CONDITIONS 
Given: A watch, compass, map, penci I, paper, and format for an NBC I (Nuclear) report. An NBC attack has just occurred. STANDARDS 
In 5 minutes, submit an NBC I (Nuclear) report, reporting as a m1n1mum, I ines D, H, and either Band Cor F. NOTE: the other I ines may be used as required by the situation and the availability of the information. PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
I. Initial NBC I (Nuclear). 
a. 
Measure the time from the "flash" to the "bang." You may use a watch or count slowly I,000 and one, I ,000 and two, etc. 

b. Write down the number of seconds as Iine J. 

c. 
Write down the time on your watch as I ine D. Note whether it is local or ZULU time. 

d. 
Write down the type of burst as Iine H. This should be recorded as "Surface," "Air," or "Unknown." 


(I) 
Surface-if you can see a crater or a thick dense stem from the cloud to the earth. 

(2) 
Air-if you can see that the stem is not connected to the mushroom part of the cloud. 


(3) Unknown -if you do not know. 
227 

20. If you can see the crater, use your map to find out its coordinates. 
Write down the coordinates as I ine F. 

f. 
If you cannot see the crater, use your compass to determine the azimuth to the center of the mushroom cloud. Write down the azimuth as line C. 

g. Write down your location as I ine B. 

h. 
Give or send the report to your supervisor. If -ffie report must be 
transmitted, give it a "Flash" precedence. 



2. Subsequent NBC I (Nuclear). 
a. 
Measure the angular cloud width 5 minutes after the burst. Write down the angle as I ine L. The following items can be used to measure the angle: 

(I) 
Aiming Circle. 

(2) 
BC Scope. 

(3) 
Theodolite. 

(4) 
Compass. 



b. 
Measure the verticle angle from the ground to the top or bottom of the cloud 10 minutes after the burst. Write down the angle as line M. Also write down which was measured, top or bottom. 


c. Add line Lor Mto your initial NBC I. Send or give the entire 
message to your supervisor. If the report must be transmitted, give it an "Immediate" perecedence. 
REFERENCE 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-3005 
228 

PROCESS AN INITIAL NBC 1 (NUCLEAR) REPORT 

The doctrine of the Threat nations places great emphasis on the depth, 
intensity, and destructiveness of the initial nuclear strike. This initial massive attack is viewed as a means to gain surprise, achieve a major penetration, and destroy effective resistance. The objectives and depth of intended operations wi I I dictate the types, yields, and numbers of nuclear warheads employed, but recent Threat studies indicate th~t nuclear weapons, if 
employed, wi II become their primary means of destroying tt5 forces. The wide range of nuclear delivery systems avai table to Threat forces wi II extend the battlefield to the rearmost boundaries of the theater. These systems include 
short and medium range bat listie missiles, rockets, aircraft, and field arti I lery and can deliver warheads with yields ranging from sub-ki Iotan to multimegaton. The first priority for Threat nuclear strikes will be US units with nuclear delivery capabilities. Other targets high on the priority list wi I I be command posts, communications centers, and nuclear munitions storage areas. 
The United States pol icy on the use of weapons is: 
"US use of these weapons wi I I be considered only after alI 
conventional means of warfare have been severeJy tested and 
found inadequate, or in response to the Threaf's -first-use." 
The approval for our initial use of nuclear weapons must come from the President of the United States. This is accomplished through a complex message system requiring a specific action at each level of command. 
With Threat forces doctrine and capabi Iity in mind, it is easy to visualize 
the importance placed on the initial report converting a conventional 
battlefield into a nuclear battlefield. 
This "first use" report, which will probably be initiated at small unit level, 
must be communicated without delay, through the chain ot~ommand to the Theater Commander who wi II then communicate with the Army Chief of Staff. The Chief of Staff wi II then communicate through channels unti I eventually the 
President is notified. If a decision to retaliate is made, the authority must return through basically the same channels, therefore, time wi I I be extremely critical. A FLASH precedence wi I I be used by alI levels of command in forwarding the first use report. It cannot be emphasized enough that at no level will this report be delayed. Immediately upon receipt, it should be retransmitted to the next higher headquarters. 
229 

DESIGNATED OBSERVER SYSTEM 
It is unlikely that any unit wi II be in a posit ion to obtain all the nuclear 
burst data. Units should gather as much data as possible. Although alI units must know to gather and use observed data, notal I units should submit reports. A unit must know when it is required to report. A designated
observer reporting system determines which observing units wi I I report data tohigher headquarters. Designated observer reporting units not only gather data for their own direct use but also report through specifi~ channels for command-wide use. AI I data is reported to and evaluated by the Nuclear,Biological, and Chemical Center (NBCC) in the division Tactical Operations
Center (TOC). The evaluated data is returned to the field in various 
informational and instructional reports. 
Equally as important as unit knowing when it is required to report, is that a
unit know when it is NOT to report. The nondesignated observer units gather
information for their own use. Unnecessary reporting hinders the flow of 
information, overloads communications channel causing serious disruption to 
other neccessary command communications, survival, and mission accomplish
ment. Without management, data of various degrees of rei iabi Iity are sent to 
the NBCC. Less rei iable information competes with much better data. 
The success of a command in rapidly gathering accurate d~ta about enemy
nuclear attacks is directly related to the abi Iity to organize the flow of data. Management is the key. The NBCC has the responsibl ity to keep alI 
units informed on attacks using the collected data. The NBCC directs the entire effort, changing, and modifying tactical information before an attack 
as needed. 
This section discusses the design and arragement of a designated observer system. Guidance is provided to individuals, unit NBC defense team, and the NBCC. 
The system applies only to reports about enemy nuclear ~acks, NOT chemical 
or biological. Only designated observers are needed for nuclear reporting
because nuclear attacks are widely visible whereas chemical and biologicalattacks are not. Observers can be eliminated in the Nuclear Reporting Systemwhere there are many who ca.n see and report. In the biological/chemicar 
areas, where there are few who would know of localized attacks, observers must report. The system described herein is used by all levels of command down toand including company, battery, and troop level. 
230 

The designated observer system provides the essential data for the preparationof radiological hazard location predictions and nuclear assessments. The 
system provides raw observer data using a standard report format. The 
Division Field SOP speci ties the precedence the message wi I I have, as wei I as 
the primary and alternate means of communication. Most of the time, only the 
first nuclear burst in theater needs to be reported with FLASH precedence.
Designated observers are selected to provide total coverage of the entire area of operations/interest. This coverage requires a judiciqus selection of ground and aerial observers from the units located within-or overlooking the 
area according to capabi Iities, mission, and expected survivabi Iity. It 
should be noted that an observer is a unit, not a person. Unit commanders 
determine the methods of gathering data within their units according to the 
training and organization of their NBC Defense Teams. 
Selection of ground units for the designated observer reporting system is 
based on many factors. Some of these factors are as follows: 
Battlefield location 
-Organic angle-measuring equipment 
-Communications nets available 
-Mission (current and future) interference 
Expected enemy action (routes) and targeting (friendly vulnerabi Iityanalysis) 
Training and experience 
Inherent rei iabi Iity of unit personnel 
Field arti Ilery or air defense arti I lery units are normally designated as opposed to units assigned on attack missions or other units I ike mi Iitarypolicy or transportation. These arti Ilery units are usually the best-qualified units for observer designation because of their equipment
capabi Iities. These units possess organic angle-measuring equipment which is 
ideal for nuclear burst survei Ilance. The equipment is in constant use,making a high level of training and rei iabi lity of measurements inevitable. The equipment items are Iisted in order of preference as~ol lows: 
-Aiming Circle, M2 
-Battery Command (BC) Scopes, M65 or M43 
Theodolites, Tl6 or T2 
Pocket Transit; Compass, M2 
In choosing designated ground observers, select unit with this equipment. 
231 

Any other type of unit (such as a mortar platoon) which has this or similar 
quality equipment may also be considered for observer designation. One 

additional type of equipment which should be considered radar.
is Many radar devices have the capabi Iity to depict a nuclear cloud on their scopes. Air defense arti I lery radar, direct coordination should be made with units 
possessing the radar. The NBCC should also coordinate withal I units having
photographic capabi Iities. These units should photograph alI nuclear attack clouds and the damage caused by the attack, if possible;~ This intel Iigence is invaluable in post strike analysis, damage assessment, ann recovery
operations. The knowledge is also needed for comparison of yield estimation field procedures to actual results. Any film or photographs of an attack are 
provided to the G2. 
NUCLEAR BURST OBSERVER'S REPORT (NBC 1) 
The nuclear burst observer's report, the NBC I, is used to report enemynuclear strike data determined by designated observer reporting units to the 
NBCC. The NBC I report is not used for friendly strikes. Advanced warning of friendly strikes is providea-in the STRIKWARN/NUCWARN. The NBC I reportformat conforms to North Atlantic Treaty Organization Standardization 
Agreement (NATO STANAG) 2103/ATP45. Only the portion of STANAG 2103/ATP45concerning the NBC I nuclear report format is shown here. Using the NBC I format, data from designated observer reporting units fa~be sent rapidly and 
briefly, to the NBCC. The NBC I report is not used as attack notification. It does not serve any purpose in nuclear release procedures or authentication 
systems. The primary purpose of the NBC I report is to send nuclear burst data from the designated observer reporting unit to the evaluating
headquarters. The report may also be used to provide data from one NBCC to another. NBC I reports are not routinely passed to corp or higher NBCC. Precedence of the NBC I is determined by the NBCC and follows procedures
included in the Division Field SOP. 
The Iine items of the 	NBC I report are explained below. 
LINE ITEM 	MEANING 
ALFA 	Strike serial Number (if known). The strike serial number is assigned by the NBCC at the division tactical operations center responsible for the area where the attack occurs. Target numbers may be used for friendly attacks. 
BRAVO 	Position of the observer UTM or place. If the place name is given, the center of that place is assumed as the plotted location of GZ. Data must be encrypted or sent secure (OPSEC considerations, not specificallyNBC.) This I ine is required on alI reports from ground observers. 
232 

CHARLIE 	Direction measured clockwise from grid, true, or 
magnetic North of the attack from observer (state 
which). Report in mi Is or degrees (state which). 
This I ine is not required when FOXTROT (actual) is 
reported. 

DELTA 	Date and time of detonation. ReRort as ZULU or local (state which). 
FOXTROT 	When ACTUAL ground zero location is reported, line 
item CHARLIE may then be omitted. 

GOLF 	Means of delivery, if known. 
HOTEL 	Type of burst--air, surface, or unknown (state which) . Inc Iude height of burst , i f known . This I i ne item must always be reported. 
JULIET 	Flash-to-bang time (in seconds). 
KILO 	Crater present or absent. Include diameter (in 
meters), if known. 

LIMA 	Nuclear burst angular cloud width measured at 5 
minutes after burst (H + 5). Report in mi Is or 
degrees (state which). Do not report if data are 
obtained more than 5 minutes after burst. 
MIKE 	Stabi I ized cloud-top angle and/or cloud-bottom angle (state which) or cloud-top height and/or cloud-bottom height (state which). Measure at H + 10 minutes. Report in mi Is, degrees, meters, or feet (state which). 
PAPA 	For radar purpose only. Reported· as PA or PB (see 
be low): 

PAPA BRAVO--Effective downwind direction (direction the wind is blowing). Report in degrees or mi Is (state which). 
Reporting Formatting Instructions 
NBC I reports are formatted by unit NBC defense teams. This procedure ensures 
that the content of the report is known to the commander or commander's 
representative. The procedure also assures the report meets format 
instructions from higher headquarters and is correct. 
233 

Selected individuals identified by unit SOP submit raw data to the unit NBC 
defense team. The unit SOP also includes specific observations to be made. 
These identified individuals need not use the NBC I report format or 
individual line items of the Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Warning and 
Reporting System (NBCWRS) to pass their data to the NBC Defense team, as this 
wi I I be done by them. The NBC defense team determines the date/time of 
attack, flash-to-bang time, i I lumination time, means of delivery, and type of 
burst. Data on azimuth to attack from the observer, obseJver location, and 
cloud width at H + 5 minutes or cloud-top/bottom angle af-H + 10 minutes are 
determined by persons qualified to operate the unit's organic measuring
equipment. If special angle measuring equipment is not available in the unit, 
some measurements can be taken carefully using the lensatic compass (azimuth 
to the attack) and binoculars (cloud width). 
Data are reported over internal radio or wire nets, presented in person, or even shouted from one location to another. The NBC I report format is not required under these circumstances. If there are any questions concerning the reported data, they are resolved at this time. 
The unit NBC Defense team puts raw data into the NBC I format for transmission. AI I data observations are sent in a single, complete NBC report. Data wi I I not intentionally be divided into two reports (for example: an initial and subsequent or follow-up reporfsL-Normal reaction to stress of nuclear warfare and personal survival of a burst should allow time for collection of data, which wi I I probably result in one report beingsufficient. However, additional reports can be sent if necessary, such as new data concerning actual GZ location or the presence/absence of a crater. Sending alI avai !able data in one report is desirable, to reduce the number of reports. This procedure ensures the best reports receive first consideration at the NBCC. Electromagnetic pulse (EMP), blackout, .and an active enemyelectronic walfare (EW) threat wi I I also take a tal I on our communications systems. 
Individual units may have forms or worksheets to be used~hen recording NBC I reports. See the individual unit SOP for details on spec-ific unit use. The use of these forms is not normally required when equipment operations and unit NBC defense team personnel are wei I trained. Units that use these forms or worksheets must ensure that the form design does not hamper or restrict collection or reporting data. Remember, these aids cannot substitute for proper traini-ng . 
.Special Instructions 
AI I reports from ground observers must contain I ine items BRAVO and CHARLIE or BRAVO and FOXTROT. 
Line item MIKE data is measured and transmitted only when data for I ine item 
LIMA cannot be determined. 
Transmit only those line items of the format for which data are available. The word UNKNOWN is used only with I ine item HOTEL. 
234 

Nuclear Burst Report Precedence 
The NBCC wi I I provide guidance on the precedence of an NBC I report in the Division Field SOP on the designated observer reporting system. This guidance should be based on intel I igence estimates, historical use of nuclear weapons by the enemy, effect on evaluation and warnings if report is delayed, communication nets, and other local factors. No direct statement on precedence for an NBC I is given here. Any precedence (fJash, immediate, priority, or routine) can be used according to the need f~ the information. Normally, FLASH precedence is used for the first burst reported in the theater (or for what is perceived as the. first burst). Once alI units are aware of the change from conventional to special weapons or because of the density of use, the procedure may be reduced on future reports. 
Communication Means 
The NBCC wi I I specify to designated observers which communication means (nets) are to be used for NBC I reports. Secondary and tertiary methods are also identified. The NBCC must coordinate with the signal officer and each "owner" of the nets. Intermediate headquaters do not delay the transmission of NBC I reports from designated obersver reporting units. 
Example Nuclear Burst Oberserver Reports (NBC I) 
The example nuclear burst observer report shown in this section follow the NBC 
I format and reporting instructions. AI I observer locations are encoded to simulate clear text transmissions. The example does not I imit the variety of 
reports. the line  Further, users of the NBC I are not confined solely items in the example. Other I ine items may be added  to at  the use of the user's  
discretion.  
PRECEDENCE (lAW Unit SOP) DATE/TIME OF MESSAGE (Time  zone  JAW  SOP  or  OPORD/OPLAN)  
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION  (lAW SOP,  usually unclassifi~)  
FROM  
TO  
TYPE OF  REPORT  
EXAMPLE:  Report  sent  by  a  designated observer  reporting unit  
PRECEDENCE  (JAW SOP)  
101200 ZULU  
UNCLASSIFIED  
FROM R2F69  
TO H7B85  
NBC  I NUCLEAR  

BRAVO ROMEO ALFA GOLF HOTEL MIKE XRAY~IMA KILO ECHO ALFA CHARLIE 190 MILS GRID DELTA 101145 ZULU HOTEL SURFACE JULIET 60 LIMA 445 MILS 
235 

Nuclear Burst Cloud Measurements 
Measurements of the nuclear burst cloud are taken at H + 5 minutes or H + 10 minutes. A designated observer reporting unit prossessing organicangle-measuring equipment wi I I take measurements and report the results to the unit NBC defense team. The team formats the results into an NBC I report.The report is sent over the specified communication nets with pre-establishedprecedence. If the unit is not a designated observer, i! will still construct the report for its own use. The unit wi I I not send the ieport unless specifically asked to do so by the NBCC. 
Input data for yield estimation are determined at unit level by specifically
appointed and trained individuals. These individuals operate the organic
optical angle-measuring equipment. Unit SOPs detai I the duties and 
circumstances concerning when and how measurements are to be taken. 
From the standpoint of accuracy, a Iist of measurements to aid in SOP 
development (in order of decreasing reliability) is provided as follows: 
-Nuclear burst angular cloud width at H + 5 minutes 
-Stabilized cloud-top or bottom height at H + 10 minutes 
Stabi Iized cloud-top or bottom angle at H + 10 minutes 

Nuclear Burst Angular Cloud Width 
Width of the nuclear burst cloud is the angular dimension in mi Is-or degreesof the nuclear burst cloud diameter. This measurement, made at H + 5 minutes, is taken by the optical equipment operator. Specifically, the operator wi I I measure the azimuth by reading the degrees from each side of the cloud. This procedure wi I I be referred to when taught in the classroom or in the field by,"assign an azimuth to the left side of the cloud and an azimuth to the rightside of the cloud." The difference between the numerical values of these azimuths is the angular cloud width. This measurement is made for nuclear clouds resulting from air or surface bursts. 
All units have some ability to take this measurement. The preferred measuringinstrument is the lensatic compass if optical angle-measuring equipment is not available. The optical angle measuring equipment is the most accurate. Binoculars and similar visual aids are the least accurate. 
Stabilized Cloud-Bottom or Cloud-top Angle 
The cloud-bottom angle measurement is the vertical angle in mi Is or degreesmeasured from ground zero level (or ground level if ground zero level is not discernible) to the point of intersection of the stabi I ized cloud and the stem. Measurement is made at H + 10 minutes. 
The cloud-top angle measurement is a vertical angle in ~Is or degreesmeasured from ground zero level (or ground level) to the top (or tengent) of 
the stabl i I ized cloud. This measurement is made at H + 10 minutes. 
236 
Cloud-bottom and cloud-top angle measurements have less inherent rei iabi I ity 
than cloud width measured at H + 5 minutes. Cloud-bottom or top angle 
measurements are not taken for air bursts. Most units in the field cannot 
take cloud-bottom or cloud-top angle measurements; therefore, these field 
units are not normally designated as observer reporting units. The lensatic 
compass is not capable of this measurement. The BC Periscope wi I I make these measurements, as wei I as measure cloud width. 
Equipment Operators Procedures 
Determine the observer position--UTM coordinates or place name. This 
location is entered as I ine item BRAVO. Line item BRAVO is required on alI 
reports from ground observers. 
If ground zero cannot be observed, measure the azimuth from observer to the center of the stem or nuclear burst cloud. This datum is entered as I ine item CHARLIE. If ground zero can be observed, determine the UTM coordinates or place name and enter as I ine item FOXTROT (actual). Line item CHARLIE is then omitted. 
Measure the angular width of the cloud 5 minutes after the detonation. This data is entered as I ine item LIMA. If the angular width cannot be measured, designated observer units measure the cloud-bottom or cloud-top angle at 10 minutes after the detonation. Nondesignated units with angle-measuring equipment can also take this measurement for their own use. This datum is 
entered as line item MIKE. 
During hours of darkness or poor visibi Iity, the procedures below should be followed. 
Drop to the ground at the flash, and estimate the duration of iII imination by counting as previously described. Continue counting unti I you hear the bang 
(arrival of the blast wave) for the flash-to-bang time. Enter i I lumination 
time as line item ECHO and flash-to-bang time as I ine it~ JULIET. 
If possible, measure the azimuth to the stem of the nuclear burst cloud as soon as possible. This datum is entered as I ine item CHARLIE. 
Enter datum for Iine items BRAVO, DELTA, and HOTEL. 
The individual specifically tasked to take cloud measurements report this data and other data specified in the SOP to the unit NBC defense team. If the unit is a designated observer reporting unit, the team wi II format the data into an NBC I report. The report is transmitted per SOP to the NBCC. If the unit 1s not a designated observer, the same procedures apply, except the report is not sent but is kept for the unit's own internal use. 
Each unit, designated and nondesignated, uses the data~ locate GZ and estimate the yield. GZ and yi~ld are used to make a simp I i fied tal lout prediction. This prediction is used unti I the NBC 2 report is received. The NBC 2 report provides more accurate ground zero and yield data. Therefore, the simplified prediction is then remade. Receipt of an NBC 3 (Detailed Fallout Prediction) report supercedes alI simplified predictions. 
237 

Operators of the angle-measuring equipment should be extensively trained in their nuclear cloud survei I lance duties. 
The SOP must provide clear instructions concerning which measurements are to be taken, who is to take them, how they are to be taken, when they are to be taken, and how these and other data are to be reported to the unit NBC defense team. 
PREPARE SIMPLIFIED FALLOUT PREDICTION 
CONDITIONS 
You are in a field environment. The area in which you are located has been designated as a tactical operation center (TOC). You are given an NBC 2 (Nuclear) report; a current effective Downwind Message (EDM); GTA 3-6-3; a map; an area predictor, radiological fallout, M5A2, NSN 6665-00-106-9595; a grease penci I; a hair I ine or straightedge; a compass; and a protractor. 
STANDARDS +I. Ground zero (GZ) is determined and plotted on the map within+ 200 meters. 
2. The correct EDM I ine is selected. 
NOTE: 	If the EDM I ine consists of three digits, steps 3-6 are completed. If the EDM I ine consists of six or eight digits, steps 7-15 are completed. 
3. 
A circle with a radius equivalent to the EDM I ine is drawn around GZ on the predictor within+ 200 meters and labeled as ZONE I. 

4. 
A circle with a radius twice the size of ZONE I is fj;:.awn with+ 200 meters on the predictor and labeled as ZONE II. 

5. 
Marginal information, including date/time of attack, location of GZ, and scale of predictor, is entered on the predictor. 

6. 
GZ on the predictor is placed over the GZ coordinates on the map. 

7. 
The correct cloud radius semicircle is selected. 


NOTE: 	Step 8 is performed onlv if the EDM I ine consists of nine digits. 
8. 
The pre-printed radial I ines are expanded equally on each side to the total degrees of the EDM I ine within+ 2 degrees. 

9. 
The downwind distance of ZONE I is determined, marked on the predictor within + 200 meters and labeled as ZONE I. 


238 

10. The ZONE I distance is doubled, marked on the predictor within+ 200 meters, and labeled as ZONE I I. 
II. Tangent I ines are drawn on the predictor from the cloud radius semicircle to the intersection of ZONE I with predictor radial Iines. 
12. Time-of-arrival arcs, H + I and H + 2, are drawn on the predictor within 
+ 200 meters and labeled. 
13. Marginal information including time of burst and location of GZ is written on the predictor. 
14. Grid north (GN) is determined, marked within± 2 degree on the predictor, and labeled as GN. 
15. The predictor is placed over the map and oriented. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 

I. Locates GZ. 
a. Determines GZ location from line FOXTROT of NBC 2 report. 
b. Plots location of GZ on map. 
2. Selects appropriate EDM I ine. ~ a. Determines weapon yield from I ine NOVEMBER of NBC 2 report. 
b. Uses 	yield to determine I ine on GTA 3-6-3. 
NOTE: 	If the EDM Iine consists of three digits, measures 3-6 are completed. If the EDM I ine consists of six or nine digits, measures 7-15 are completed. 
3. Draws and labels ZONE I circle. 
a. Determines radius of ZONE circle from three digit EDM I ine. 
b. Draws circle around GZ on predictor. 
c. Labels circle as ZONE I. 
4. Draws and labels ZONE I I. 
a. Determines radius of ZONE I I circle by doubling the radius of ZONE 
b. Draws ZONE I I circle around GZ and ZONE I. 
c. Labels circle as ZONE I I. 
239 
5. Enters marginal information on predictor. 
a. 
Includes date/time of attack. 

b. 
Includes location of GZ. 

c. 
Includes scale of perdictor. 


6. 
Places GZ on the predictor over the GZ coordinates _oB-the map. 

7. 
Selects the cloud radius semicircle on the predictor that correspondswith the EDM line. 


NOTE: 	Performance measure 8 is performed~ if the EDM I ine consists of nine digits. 
8. Expands per-printed radial I ines. 
a. Determines total degrees of expansion from last two digits of EDM 
line~ 
b. Expands lines equally to total degree stated. 
9. Marks and labels ZONE I. 
a. Determines the effective wind speed from the EDM line. 
b. Uses wind speed and yield to find downwind distance of ZONE I on nomogram located on predictor. 
10. Marks and labels ZONE II. 
a. 
Determines ZONE I I distance by doubling the distance of ZONE I. 

b. 
Marks ZONE I I on predictor with solid arc. 

c. 
Labels area as ZONE II. 


I I. Draws tangent I ines on predictor. 

a. Begins lines at cloud radius semicircle ends. 

b. 
Extends I ines to ZONE I distance intersection with predictor radial I i nes. 


240 

12. Draws time-of-arrival arcs on predictor. 
a. 
Determines effective wind speed from EDM I ine. 

b. 
Draws dashed arc equivalent to wind speed. 

c. 
Labels arc area as H + I. 

d. 
Doubles H + I arc distance. 

e. 
Draws dashed arc at doubled H + I distance. 

f. 
Labels arc area asH+ 2. 


13. Enters marginal information in predictor. 
a. 
Includes time-of-burst. 

b. 
Includes location of GZ. 


14. Marks and labels GN on predictor. 
a. 
Determines effective downwind direction from EOM_Iine. 

b. 
Locates direction on azimuth dial of predictor. 

c. 
Draws a line from GZ through the direction on dial. 

d. 
Label as GN. 


15. Orients predictor to map. 
a. Determines map and predictor scales to be the same. 
map.
b. Places GZ of predictor over GZ coordinates on -
c. Rotates predictor unti I GN Iine on predictor points toward GN on map. REFERENCE FM 3-22 
EVALUATION OF NUCLEAR BURST DATA 
Data Evaluation 
Data evaluation consists of locating ground zero and estimating yield. This evaluation is performed at two levels, unit and NBC Collection Center (NBCC). Unit level is any level other than NBC Collection Center. The distinction is made between the two levels because of the data and the personnel available to make an evaluation of ground zero and yield. 
241 

Unit level techiques are designed to provide rapid evaluation. AI I estimations of GZ location or yield developed at unit level are interim data. They are used QQly at this level. Unit level data are never transmitted to higher headquarters or the NBCC 1n the NBC 2 report format. 
NBCC level techniques are based on the comparison of data from many sources. Because of the avai labi Iity of sufficient, diverse, rei iable reports and a sufficient staff to perform calculations, only the NBCC-gevelops the NBC 2 report. The NBC 2 report contains the yield and GZ loca±+on to be used by the entire command. This report also contains other useful data. 
Unit Level Procedures 
Unit level procedures for locating GZ and estimating yield are much less complicated than NBCC level procedures. Unit level is defined as any level that does not have an organic NBCC. At unit level emphasis is placed on speed of the calculation rather than accuracy. The NBC 2 report is usually relied on, but it may not be received from the NBCC because reporting is heavily depenaent on radio nets. The integrated battlefield and electro-magnetic pulse (EMP) wi I I pose serious communication problems to use these nets. Additional problems wi I I be caused by unit dispersion which is essential for survival. Other problems wi I I be caused by requirement to change frequencies and cal I signs several times daily. AI I these problems, £oupled with an aggressive enemy electronic warfare program, wi I I delay-message traffic. The "unit" level cannot produce an NBC 2 because this level has neither the diverse rei iable data necessary nor the staff and materials to make the calculations. However, an independent means of calculation is used unti I the official NBC 2 report data reaches this level. This independent means is discussed in this section. 
The procedures in this section apply to alI units whether they be designated as reporting observers or not. All units follow these procedures to get immediate information for their own quick tactical planning. These procedures are usually not used at NBCC level where more data are a~i lable. 
Location of Ground Zero 
At unit level, GZ is located in a one of two ways. For smal I yield weapons, direct observation may provide actual GZ location. Units do not reconnoiter for the GZ location. Polar plot is the other GZ location method used at unit level. Commanders at unit level are interested in obtaining a "gross fix" on GZ location. One of these methods wi II enable rapid evaluation of the burst 
to estimate the situation. The NBC defense team does the calculations. 
242 

Methods of Locating GZ 
Using the reported information, the location of GZ can be determined byseveral different methods. GZ wi I I normally be determined by the intersection of azimuths from two or more observation points reporting on the same nuclear 
burst. are:  Other methods also  can  be used.  The different methods of  locating GZ  
Intersection of  two  azimuths  
Intersection of  more  than  two  azimuths  
- One observer  location with azimuth and  flash-to-bang distance  
Intersection of  two  flash-to-bang distances  
Intersection of  an  azimuth and  a  flash-to-bang distance  

Intersection of two azimuths. To determine the location of GZ using this method, the position of the observers and the azimuths from their position are plotted on the situation map. GZ is determined to be the point of the mapwhere the two azimuths intersect. 
EXAMPLE: Observer A's position is reported as coordinates 105240 with an azimuth to the nuclear cloud of 35° Grid. Ovserver 8, located at coordinates 157220, reported a measured azimuth of 340° Grid. To determine the location of ground zero, follow the step-by-step procedures. 
Step I: Plot observer A's location at coordinates 105240. 
Step 2: From observer A's location draw a I i ne on an azimuth of 35° Grid. 
Step 3: Plot observer B's location at coordinates 157220. 
-

Step 4: From observer B's location draw a I i ne on an azimuth o f 340o G r Id . Where the I ines intersect at coordinates 133280 is determined to be ground zero. 
243 

tr..JTERSECTIOr~ OF DNO AZ!r\~UTHS. 
I I I
I I
30 	30 lJS~Grid
I
29 	29 I
20 28 v/ 
27 27 

/
25 	26 
_j
25 vi ' I 25 -~/
2~ (:. 24 

22 __j I 	A
23 	23
22

I
·21 ·-	21
10 11121J1415 15 	10 11~12~3141516' I 
~ --· 
STEP~ 	STEP 2 
3o~1_1 I 1_1 ~· •' ·' '=]± j_ I I I~ ~· • I ·' +-i_j
--__ s_rnfl
.2 ~ j_j_l_l_jf-W -	30 3~.Q~Grid -.:.S ·Grid 
19 B_j__l' f_J ·~-
L]
ZG j_l_l_l__,6_1~-~~rr ZG .. jJd_I 
I [] l_j__jJ:._j I • ~ 

17 _~jji)j_LOCATJ01-( _
Ul '{ or GZ
2G -2G l"7t---1 -~--L:l I\ IJ=tj I

~~ ~-i71/-:_l~ ~g--	:--~-<~~ 
25 -i-:r-"i-r-:---:3=:1-
J · 
I \1 I I
24 -~21 :
~~ Jtd-i-::E~-i :==-	=:}, I l I _j=
22 _1_1_1-1-i_j,_/]~_J-	13 ~_j__j 11.1 1u-1
.-1 I I I I Ir-.1 I I 	~~ I ,j-:-llr.ll-1 I _
L 10 I 1 1Z I3 l(. 1G IG \ 11_ 1_ 1Q 11 12 13 14 15 IG 1111 
~·IC:P 3 	ST[:f' 4 
-~
----~-----~~.&..-~
244 
Intersection of more than two azimuths. When available, more than two 
azimuths can be used to more accurately locate GZ. This is accomplished by plotting the observer's locations and reported azimuth on the situation map. GZ is then located in the center of the triangle formed by the intersecting 
azimuths. 
INTERSECTION OF MORE THAN TY..JO AZIr/i UTH S. 
30 
29~-__.__........._ 

2G 
Z7 
2G 
25 
24 
23 
22 

21 ~~~~~~~~-4~·~-
One observer reporting azimuth and flash-to-bang time (Polar Plot). To determine the location of GZ when only one designated observer has reported an azimuth and flash-to-bang time, plot the observer's location and reported azimuth. The flash-to-bang time must then be converted to a distance to GZ using the appropriate nomogram. Using the yield estimation nomogram, locate the reported flash-to-bang time on the center scale. Reading on the other side of the same scale, determine the distance to GZ. This procedure is used in the company, battalion, and brigade headquarters to plot ground zero. EXAMPLE: Flash-to-bang time is 20 seconds, distance to ground zero is 7 km. The distance to GZ can also be determined by multiplying the flash-to-bang time by 0.35. EXAMPLE: 20 X .35 = 7 km. 
After determining the distance to GZ measure that distance on the Graphic Scale (1000 meters per kilometer) and transfer it to the azimuth line, measuring from the observer's ·location. 
245 

Of~E OBSERVER AZ!~;\UTH AND FLASH·T()-
8/-\NG TIME. 
20• Grid 
30 -!--
2g -!-' I .' lI I-I 
U±.
• I ) I 
I
EXAMPLE: Observer A (coordinates I15225) reported a measured azimuth of a·
nuclear cloud as 20° Grid. 1 
1
of 20 seconds. The same observer reported a flash-to-bang time
After plot:ting the observer's l.ocati.on and azimuth, the
distance to GZ was determi~ed to be 7 km. When plotted on a map, GZ isdetemined to be at 138289.' 
Two or more observers reporting flash-to-bang time. To determine the locationof GZ when two or more observers report their location and both report a
flash-to-bang time but no azimuth, plot the observer,s' locations on. the map.
You then determine the distance to GZ based on the flash-to-bang time using
the nomogram or the mathem~tical method. 
Using a drawing compass or a piece
of string, measure the disrance to GZ on the Graphic Sea-l~ of the map.each observer location dra~ an arc at the computed distances. GZ is From
considered to be at the point where the arcs intersect. 
246 
YIELD ESTIMATION 

Commanders at unit level need only an approximate yield value. This yield value is used to enter the broad yield groups of the effective downwind message. The data for the appropriate yield group of this message are used to make simplified fallout predictions. 
Unit level work conditions are so varied that use of nomograms may be impossible. While the NBC defense team can carry or ma~~ain field manuals or field circular~ for a I imited period of time, the team may not be able to do so over an extended period of time. The M4AI yield calculator can also be used by the NBC defense team to determine yield. With practice, the calculator is as accurate as the nomograms used by the NBCC but more durable and convenient to use. The M4AI calculator is designed to provide rapid yield 
estimation based on any parameter other than cloud-top or cloud-bottom height. This calculator is a part of the M28AI RADIAC Calculator Set, NSN 6665-00-130-3616. 
Instructions for use of the M4AI calculator are on the instruction card in the set. This card has an additional purpose of providing check problems. Upon ' receipt of the calculator, the user should solve the sample problems on the instruction card. If the calculator wi II not solve the sample problems to within the specified tolerance, the calculator must be~destroyed and a new one obtained. Complete operating instructions are contained in TM 3-6665-303-10. 
There are two situations of which the unit NBC defense teams should be aware when using the M4AI calculator. The calculator is essentially a round nomogram with a fixed hair I ine. At times, the yield pointer may go off-scale on either the high or low end of the yield scale. Seemingly erroneous answers could be read. Fami Iiarity with the calculator and an appreciation for the size of a nuclear cloud in relation to the observer-GZ distance (flash-to-bang time) wi I I eliminate these operator problems. Such problems should only occur in training situations. In the field an off-scale large or smal I yield should be apparent from the data and visual observation of the-cloud. 
For example, assume a nuclear cloud is 20 mi Is wide. Flash-to-bang time was 10 seconds. In effect, this is a smal I cloud very close to the observer indicating a smal I yield. While the calculator apparently shows a yield of 1000 KT, the actual yield is off the low end of the scale and less than 0.02 KT. In actuality, the reporting observer could not have survived a I MT yield to make the calculation. Conversely, a nuclear cloud-to angle of 80 degrees with a flash-to-bang time of 120 seconds is a large cloud very far away. This time the calculator could be read as a yield of less than 0.01 KT (which 
probably could not have been observed) but the actual yield is greater than 10,000 MT (off the high end of the scale). 
The M4AI calculator provides a rapid yiel~ estimation method. The durabi I i ty, size, ease of operation of the calculator make it a sui{able method of rapid yield estimation. 
247 

The GZ location and estimated yield calculated at unit level are used to create a simplified fallout prediction. Upon receipt of the NBC 2 report from the NBCC the original simplified fallout prediction is revised using the new data. When the NBC 3 report is received, alI simplified fallout predicitions are superseded. This approach allows the unit commander to make estimates and decisions based on the best available information at the time. 
In this lesson, however, you wi I I learn to use a nomogram to calculate weaponsyield. Training to use nomograms for weapon yields wi I~ more apparentlater when you learn to use other nomograms to make additional calculations for operating in a radiologically contaminated area. 
CALCULATE NUCLEAR WEAPONS YIELD 
Estimation of the yield of a nuclear weapon can be a critical factor in the decisions made by a commander. The estimated yield is based upon nuclear burst data submitted by reporting units. The accuracy of nuclear burst data wi I I dictate the rei iabi I ity of the yield estimate. Reporting units mayprovide different elements of the nuclear burst data. Therefore, several methods of yield estimation have been developed. Yield estimation is based on development of nuclear clouds. For yield estimation purposes, nuclear cloud development has three stages. The firebal I stage begins at the instant of detonation. It wi I I continue unti I the cloud of explosion products ceases to radiate a brilliant light. As this brilliant light fades into dull glow, the cloud (low air/surface burst). Severe turbulence and rapid growth in heightand width are characteristics of this stage of development. This stage lasts unti I the cloud stabi I izes in height (4 to 14 minutes after detonation). When taking cloud measurements, it is accomplished at H ~ 5 minutes or H + 10 minutes, with Has time of detonation. When the cloud ceases to grow in height, the stahl ized cloud stage begins. This stage continues as long as the cloud is detectable. Nuclear burst cloud measurements or parameters have been correlated with yield and are presented in nomograms, each of which is an independent means of determining as estimated yield. ~ 
Nuclear Cloud Parameters (Listed in Order of Decreasing Reliability) 
If any of the following combinations of nuclear burst parameters are known an estimated yield can be determined from nomograms. 
Distance to ground 'zero (or flash-to-bang time) and nuclear burst angular cloud width (H + 5 minutes) 
:; I 
Stabi I ized cloud-top or cloud-bottom height (H + 10 minutes) 
Distance to ground zero (or flash-to-bang time) and stabilized cloud-top or cloud-bottom angle (H + 10 minutes)
248 

Nuclear Burst Angular Cloud Width. The Nuclear Burst Angular Cloud Widthnomogram is used to determine yield from nuclear burst angular cloud widthmeasurement and distance to ground zero (or flash-to-bang time). The righthand scale is the nuclear burst angular cloud width in mi Is or degrees, the
center scale is the flash-to-bang time in seconds and the distance in
kilometers to ground zero, and the left hand scale is the yield in kilotons
(KT). 
YIELD ESIIf~:':A.TION (FLJ.:.SH·TO·B/-d~G
TIL~E OR DIST.~.J~CE TO GROUf~D ZERO
Vt=RSUS r~UCLEAR BURST ~RGUU.R
CLOUD \•\'lOTH AT 5 r~II~UTES AFT~R
DETONATIOFX). 
NUCLEAR BURST ANGULARCLOUD WIDTH (5 MINUTES) 
(~ILST !DEGi=iEES) 
' o.s 
700 --2000
6002
~00 ~ 
400 ~
__,.._. 1000 JOO ....J
r-600 -----700
200 -J-·600 ::)--soc
~
:;-•oo
:r
~ 300 u;
::. ·: =t-za 
0 70--200 wa: 60 ---E u0 N ~~ t:_ UJ
"'::): (/)
0 40 --..;.
z 5= 100 w
::;) :E &O_J_
0 30 ;::
60
c ....r-70 _L
7C 
,_ 60
0 
100 --t
~
uz ... . .r r--1,....__ , < 10 J JO ....r-
,....__ ....
.a (') 8 ::::::r 6
c: .6 a :::L ...1:
1-7---20
I-~ 6 J-9
,....__ .. _I
s -c..--,...
.3 • -::s__

.2 10
f _,_
) a7 =.i
....J 
c 
.I c 6
.c.e l_ 
,_ 
.(.()

E L 
.';.~ 
.c.. 
--;: I .C3 .. .:;_-
L
~---
Cl 
-~..: 
37 
~-------------------------------------------------------------------------~~------~ 

RAOIOACTIVE CLOUD AND STEf.1 PARAf.1ETERS (ST~BILIZED f:.T K + 10 f~INUTES). 
o..oue>ecTTOY Tli.IE OF F.&.LL 
YlELO tCLOUO toTTOI.I)

HEIGHT 
10l w_j__'ol FT 
HOURS
~b 
-='=-t-.01
-==== 
fil:: 
:=f :10 lOCI
IC--="' 

" 10 
M--::;::t.l 
t•-·· 
.. 70
~~I u~" 
4'0~.. 
.: ~ 
,,_:E-co 
10"=-= 
J:: 
.... ,, --=
-u 
,_t_
·-
.,...::{: 
,,~-... 
,.
.~1 
·~ 
1)
c:c::!..= 
cc~ 
•• 00
<CI-=-_c
f
10
~± " 
C)-.....:.
00-.:
oo--..,
r-----•O 
~~~)&
•o-f 
:i~ ""\ 
•-=::->a 
.~ •-f._,,
-;ot 
'~ 
--· 
_j__,
:!~ :f.. -;,, T:cr 
==·.o 
....;-c~ 
7-~· 
..,
u-
r--o•
·-t.
tJ--.J_~
r
<:--lu
1 
L•l-
..l .. 
-~-<-•1 
250 

Place a hair I ine from the point of the right hand scale, representing the 
nuclear burst angular cloud width at 5 minutes after detonation, through the 
point on the center scale representing flash-to-bang time and distance to 
ground zero. At the point of intersection of the hair I ine and the left hand 
scale, read the yield. 
For example the data determined by an observer indicated a flash-to-bang time of 50 seconds and a nuclear burst angular cloud width of~OO mi Is. To 
estimate the corresponding yield by using the nomogram, _cOflnect 200 mi Is on 
the right hand scale and 50 seconds on the center scale with a hair I ine; at 
the point of intersection of the hair I ine and the left hand scale, read a yield of about 13 KT. 
Stabi I ized Cloud-Top Height or Cloud-Bottom Height. If cloud width or angles 
cannot be measured, the use of tactical aircraft may be justified for measuring the cloud-top or cloud-bottom height. Measurements (in thousands 
(103) of meters or feet above the surface of the ground) should be made ata approximately 10 minutes after the burst. The radioactive cloud and stem parameters nomogram is used to correlate these measurements with yield. 
EXAMPLE: A pi lot flying an observation plane measures the stabilized cloud-top height of a nuclear cloud as 38,000 feet. By placing a hairline or straightedge on the 38,000 ft mark of the cloud-top height _scale (figures ori the scale are shown in thousands of feet or meters) and ~urning the hair I ine unti I it is at the same point on both yield scales, you determine the yield to be 30 KT. 
Stabi I ized Cloud-Top Angle or Cloud-Bottom Angle. The yield estimation (flash-to-bang time versus stabi I ized cloud-top angle or stabilized cloud-bottom angle) nomogram is used to determine yield from distance-to-ground zero measurements. The right hand scale gives the flash-to-bang time in seconds on the left side and distance in kilometers to ground zero on the right side. The center scale is the cloud-top angle or cloud-bottom angle, measured in mi Is on the left of the ~ale and in degrees o the right of the scale. The left hand scale is actual:li two scales. On the left of the left hand scale are Iisted the yields to be read when using the stabl ized cloud-bottom angle measurements and on the right is the yield when using cloud-top angle measurements. 
Place a hair I ine through the point on the right hand scale representing distance-to-ground zero, or flash-to-bang time, and through a point in the center scale representing either the cloud-top angle measurement or the cloud-bottom angle measurement. At the point of intersection of the hair I ine and the left hand scale, read the yield. If a cloud-top angle measurement is used on the center scale, read the yield on the right side of the left hand scale entitled "Yield (Cloud Top)." If a cloud-bottom angle measurement is used, read the yield on the left side of the left hand scale entitled "Yield (Cloud Bottom)." 
251 

For example, an observer reports a flash-to-bang time of 120 seconds, angle tocloud top of 300 mi Is. Place a hairline from 120 seconds on theflash-to-bang time scale through 300 mi Is on the left side of the anglescale; the yield is read as 50 KT on the right side (cloud top) of the yieldscale. The observer may have reported a cloud-bottom angle of 200 mi Is. Inthis case, place the hairline from 120 seconds on the flash-to-bang time scale
through 200 mi Is on the left side of the angle of the yield scale; the yield
is read at 60 KT. It is emphasized that these yield calculations are fieldestimates. 
YIELD EST!rliATION (FLASH·T0.8ANGTlr!:E VERSUS STABILIZED CLOUD-TOPANGLE OR STABILIZED CLOUD-80TTOr;.q
A~GLE). 
l 
$ 
' 
3 
•o • 
Vi $ 
w _._ s
w
c:: 20~ 7 a 0w a 
a Vi 0
::;:)
0 z0 
~J q 
..J 0c::
u 0u Nw 
w 40-1:-
Ill 0zw ::;:) 
:::E 20 0a:·
C) 
....0 
ll. ~ w
uz
~t
0 0....
..J ·:.o --<
w ....0 ...
): -L •o Ill
w c
..J
0 
&0 
~ =-t~ 60 
.20 
=-t·=70 .10 
.04 ....r
-~ :l
(,.JO 3_ ]ClJ
.Oi 
.1>4 -::r-J :lO 
'OO .ClJ !.:Y.)~~ ")?
.C1 
.01 
·=1: 
Resolved Yield 
AI I of the yield estimation techniques result in approximate yields.
Occasions wi I I arise when the data from several observers concerning a single
attack wi II not result in the same yield. In this case, the arithmetic 
average of the yields is used, which also, is an estimated yield. 
The actual yield to be reported to the field units is t~med the resolved yield. To determine the resolved yield, the NBCC mainta1~ a summary of enemynuclear capabilities. This summary may reflect order of battle, deliveryunits, and known yields. These data are determined form G2 and other intelligence sources. 
In using the summary, the NBCC compares the estimated yield (or average
estimated yield) with known enemy yields. This estimated yield wi II indicate which known enemy yield actually detonated. Ideally, only this resolved yieldis reported to field units in the NBC 2 report. The resolved yield is also the basis for detailed tal lout prediction (NBC 3 report). 
The NBC 2 Report 
The NBC 2 report contains the evaluated nuclear burst -data. The report is created only by the NBCC and presents the detailed evafuatiDn of alI raw data. These raw data are automatically submitted by desjgnated observer units each time the enemy attacks with nuclear weapons. 
Precedence of the NBC 2 report is established by the NBCC. Since precedence
is based on urgency, an NBC 2 report may have one precedence when the 
recipient is in a danger zone and another when a unit is not in an affected area. 
NBC 2 report are created for alI burst--air, surface, and unknown. When type of burst is reported as surface or unknown, fallout predictions are made. 
The format for the NBC 2 report is shown below. Line jtems may be repeated as many times as necessary to summarize alI attack data into a single report.Users are not restricted to the I ine items shown. Other I ine items may be added as appropriate. 
PRECEDENCE (Deterlmined by NBCC)
DATE/TIME OF MESSAGE 
CLASSIFICATION (Normally unclassifed) 
FROM (Class sign or destination of headquarters of NBCC)
TO (Determined by NBCC based on immediate operational needs)
NBC 2 NUCLEAR REPORT 
253 

ALFA  Strike Serial Number  
DELTA  Date/Time of  tha Attack  (ZULU  or  local)  
FOXTROT  Location of attack--UTM estimated, state which)  or  place (actual  or  
HOTEL  Type of Burst--air, surface, O!_unknown (statewhich). Include height of burst,:-rf known.  
NOVEMBER  Estimated Yield (KT)  

The NBCC establishes the communication means for the NBC 2 report. The reportis sent to alI affected subordinate units immediately. Unaffected units receive the report later. Each NBC 2 report must also be sent to higherheadquarters NBCC and adjacent headquarters NBCC. This allows planning for 
future missions or boundary changes. 
Additional data may be received after the NBC 2 report is sent. If this data changes the yield of GZ location, a new NBC 2 report is sent. The same strike serial number and date/time of attack are used. 
To understand the NBC 2 (Nuclear) Report, you must know what is contained in
each I ine of the report format. 
Precedence. The NBC 2 (Nuclear) Report is normally transmitted using an 
IMMEDIATE precedence. 
Date/time (Local and ZULU). The date and time the report is sent, local or ZULU time must be designated. NATO forces operating in a NATO area should useonly ZULU time on these reports. For instance, 'I :30 pm ZULU time on the 18th of the month would be shown as 181330Z. The month and year are not shown. 
Security Classification. Normally the security classification wi II beUNCLASSIFIED. 
' 
From. This Iine identifies what unit is sending the message. 
To. This line identifies the agencies to which the report is being sent. 
Type of Report. This Iine identifies the report as an NBC 2 (Nuclear) Report. 
LINE ITEM MEANING 
ALFA This I ine contains the strike serial number assigned 
to the attack. AI I future NBC (Nuclear) reportspertaining to that attack wi II sh.Qw the same strike se ria I number. 
254 

DELTA  Date and time of detonation shown in time. Local or ZULU must be shown.  local  or  ZULU  
FOXTROT  Location of the attack can be shown either as a place or by grid coordinates. It can be shown as actual or estimated. This must be specified. (EXAMPLE: NY492837 Estimated). This location is calculated from observer information on the NB~ (Nuclear) Reports.  
GOLF  Means of delivery, I ine.  if known,  should be shown  in  this  
HOTEL  Type of burst-air, surface, this I ine.  or  unknown is shown  on  
NOVEMBER  After calculating the estimated yield from observer data, it is entered on this line.  the  

DEFECTIVE DOWNWIND MESSAGE 
Use of a simplified fallout predictor requires knowledge-of the effective wind speed and downwind direction. This information is prepared by the NBCC as an Effective Downwind Message and is transmitted to subordinate and adjacent units each time new upper air wind data are received. The latest Effective Downwind Message should always be used. Effective Downwind Messages more than 
12 hours old should not be used for tal lout prediction. 
The Effective Downwind Message consists of line ZULU, which represents the date and time which the winds were measured, and I ines ALFA through GOLF. Lines ALFA through GOLF normally contain six digits, the first three digits 
representing the direction the wind is blowing toward in degees, and the last 
three digits represent the wind speed in kilometers per bGur. 
Effective Downwind Message 
ZULU 301200Z ALFA 318027 BRAVO 302027 CHARLIE 289025 DELTA 284025 ECHO 276025 FOXTROT 269027 GOLF 263029 
255 

T~e wind information in Iines ALFA through GOLF is to be used for nuclear, calculations for bursts within a yield group. The example below shows the yield groups as they pertain to each I ine of the Effective Downwind Message. 
Nuclear yield groups 
ALFA 0-2 KT 
BRAVO over 2 KT th ro-5 KT CHARLIE over 5 KT thru 30 KT DELTA over 30 KT thru 100 KT ECHO over 100 KT thru 300 KT FOXTROT over 300 KT thru !000 KT GOLF over I MT thru 3 MT 
Therefore, if there was a nuclear detonation with a 4 KT yield, the wind information in I ine BRAVO would be used to make the fallout prediction. This Iimitation would preclude a precise simplified fallout prediction using wind information calculated specifically for a 4 KT yield. The NBC 3 (Nuclear) Report prepared by the NBCC would, however, be based on calculations for a 4 KT yield. 
Under certain weather conditions, an Effective Downwind Message may be prepared that wi I I show only three digits in one or more I ines, or a number in parentheses following the six digits in a line. (Example below.) 
Effective Downwind Message showing special cases. 
ZULU 301200Z ALFA 004 BRAVO 006 CHARLIE 273038 DELTA 269036 (60)ECHO 255037 FOXTROT 263037 GOLF 263029 
In these special cases, the three digits (I ines AFLA and BRAVO), represent the downwind wind distance to ZONE I. The numbers in parentheses represent an angle greater than the standard 40 degrees, to which the radial I ines of the fallout predictor must be expanded. As in the case of Iine DELTA, the angle between the radial I ines must be expanded to 60 degrees (30 degrees on each side of the reference Iine). 
256 

AREA PREDICTOR, RADIOLOGICAL FALLOUT M5A2 

The Area Predictor, Radiological Fallout M5A2, is a transparent device. It is used to outline the zones of hazard resulting form surface or near surface nuclear bursts for preselected yield groups. The M5A2 fallout predictor is composed of two simplified predictors. It also has a n~ogram for determiningthe downwind distance to ZONE I. One simplified predictcir is drawn to a scale 
of I :50,000, with five preselected yield groups (A, 8, C, D, E). The other predictor is drawn to a scale of I :250,000 with six preselected yield groups(A, 8, C, D, E, F). Each simplified predictor consists of three major parts. 
I. An azimuth dial for orienting the predictor to the map. 
2. Semicircle depicting st~bi I ized cloud radius drawn around ground 2ero. 
3. A map scale calibrated in kilometers along two radial lines extendingfrom ground zero at an angle of 40° from each other. 
257 

AREA PREDICTOR, RADIOLOGICAL 
FALLOUT ff.SA2 • 
• ~fflfffl '-..,. ••••••. ~••• .: 
o •-••• I • .._ •••• 
t 
.,,~
~ , II•'l. 
,,,.........._... 

[a . 
.. 
I 
.:7.-=-~~--·-·~ 
258 
PREPARE SIMPLIFIED FALLOUT PREDICTION 

The simplified fallout prediction method is designed for use by smal I unit commanders. It is used to make an immediate estimate of the location of the potential fallout hazard. It is used while waiting for a detailed fallout prediction message, NBC 3 (Nuclear) Report. The simp Iified prediction method 
requires nuclear burst information, a current effective__:downwind message, and a simplified fallout predictor. 
To draw a fallout prediction, you must do the following: 
-Gather required information. 
Identify the prediction. 
-Determine wind direction and speed. 
Determine downwind distance of ZONE I and ZONE II. 
-Draw tangent lines. 
-Draw time-of-arrival arcs. 
-Orient the predictor. 
Gather Required Information. Normally, the nuclear burst information grvrng the date/time of the burst, location of ground zero, and estimated yield wi II be taken from the NBC 2 (Nuclear) Report. 
Identify the Prediction. The prediction is identified by recording as a minimum the location of ground zero and the date/time of burst on the predictor. 
Determine Wind Direction and Speed. The effective downwind direction and speed are taken from the appropriate yield group I ine of the effective downwind message. The wind direction is used to orient the predictor to the map. The wind speed is used to determine the downwind distance of ZONE I and 
the time of arrival arcs. 
Determine Downwind Distance of ZONE I and ZONE I I. The downwind distance of ZONE I is determined from the nomogram on the M5A2 fallout predictor. This determination is made by placing a hair I ine or straightedge on the point of the left scale representnig the wind speed and the point on the right scale 
representing the estimated or actual yield of the weapon (not the yield group). The downwind distance of ZONE I is the point where the hairline or straightedge crosses the center scale. Wkhen this point is between two numbers on the scale, you must determine the ZONE I dis~nce as accurately as possible by average/interpolation. As in the example below the yield is 40 KT and the wind speed is 35 kmph. The hairline crosses the center scale at the 40 km point, therefore the ZONE I downwind distance is determined to be 40 km. The downwind distance of ZONE II is twice that of ZONE I. Arcs are drawn 
259 

between the two radial I ines at the respective downwind distances using ground zero as the center point. Labe I· ZONE I and ZONE II. 
Draw Tangent Lines. Tangents are drawn from the cloud radius semicircle for 
the yield group selected, to the point where the radial lines intersect with 
the arc representing the downwind distance to ZONE I. 
Draw Time-of-Arrival Arcs. Time-of-Arrival arcs are drawn as a dashed I ine between the radial lines (or tangents if between ground-me and ZONE I arc)using the effective wind speed as the downwind distance for H + I, etc, through ZONE II. These arcs are labeled along the radial I ine a H + I, H + 2, etc. 
Orient the Predictor. The predictor is oriented to the map by placing the predictor ground zero over the actual or assumed ground zero on the map. The predictor is then rotated unti I the effective wind direction in degrees on the azimuth dial is pointed toward grid north. You may find it easier to orient the predictor by drawing a I ine from ground zero through the point of the azimuth dial at the wind direction. Label the I ine as grid north (GN). The map and prediction must be of the same scale; in this case I :250,000. 
Identify the prediction by adding the coordinates of ground zero and the date and time of burst. 
260 

rt 
ZOt~E I 00\'Jf~V.'If\D DISTAf..!CE f~OL~CGRAr.~ ON Tf--!E L~St..2 FALLOUT
! PhEDICTION. ZONE IDOWNWIND DISTANCESURHCE BURSTKm 
IE~!=ECii'JE 
WI~O S?EED !<rn;:~h t'~
120 
. 100

I~
' 
70 
~ 
•O
ra I
J? 
20
•a
16
,. 
12 
10 
a
I 
f. 5¢ I lf 
!
I .• \ 
.l 
.H .2
If ,IS I
L __,lii('T 
~ ..
rr -..., -~~_.--f
1 :C'-s
I'
t .:s 
I r·.C4 
,I :J
~I
'r -c:~ ~·
I I
.:, ,.._, I~ :: cJ l
":":..·.-=~~=--=--~·.:":""-_;.· ----.;,.._-:._,_ 
261 
r--------------------------------------~-----------------
l~~----~----------~---z_o__r~_E__I_A_·r_\_o__z_o__N_·E_-_'_'-________~~--~, 
t
l-{ 
U1 
z 
a 
\..., 
I ~~ 
<I 
• o------c
.;: \· 
.:....-·~.-_....,., .... _.-____ .._,._ -------~_____.
...._ _..,. ...._ •• ---..... --·-... ----·-.._....,.......... ~~---=---=
262 
~----------------------------------~------------~ 
1 TAr~GEr~T ur~E::s. j 
1··-=--.~---__J 
I 
I 
I 
w 
z I
0 
1'1 
.a h 
c:
0-------=
l .; 
' ....., 
·c, t-t ·<?) 
~ 
I 
•c:4 ·I 
I ' 
I [
i 
! i 
~ 
I 
--:-:·_~.,~ ~c-·
-·-:-·-·· 
•• -.-···..... • ......--...-~..-··~·..... .....-~.,.:a,.·.~"'".-~------.•,.._·:~·_,..,... ._--..:..r,:.._-_,._-_.• .•• r..r.:.-·---··-'· 
263 

~ 
TRACE PERir~~ETER. ,]f-------~. 

I
J 
I 
I. 
l I 
I
t 
t i I 
.,.. . ·-· ....... ~~ .. ~···· .... -..... -.... ·-·--·-.~-·-·---·-------·-----,... --~-----·---·..:.-.-,·~z..:..-.... :..-:.. 

264 

~----------------------------------------~----------~----------~~ 

Ttr..'.E OF ARRIVAL ARCS. 
I 
l•
I 
I 

I 
I I 
. 

l 
·I 
I 
~ 
i 
i 
i 
I 
l 
! 
,,.._ 
-.. .:.-·.·•.).'.·-~ ~···-~ .-....-:....: ....-.,.._...• --.~~ ~--...,.--.. ··------·------__ 
265 
ORIENTATIQ£._J Llr~E. 
~~ 
. c:l •
;0:I-------
..n '
~ r-'i 
A-: --... 
266 
Special Fallout Prediction Cases 
Overlapping contamination. It is probable under nuclear warfare conditions
there wi I I be occasions when a fallout prediction wi I I overlap an area in
which contamination already exists. Similarly, there wi II be cases whenfallout predictions wi II overlap each other. Use the following rule fordeterming the relative hazard when two more fallout predictions overlap: "the
hazard classification of an area where predicted fallout-hazard zones overlapshould be only that of the higher classification involve~' That is, anoverlap area involving Zone I should be designated ZONE I, and an overlap areainvolving nothing more hazardous than Zone I I should be designated ZONE II. 
The above rule is useful only for a matter of serveral hours after thebursts. The extent of contamination should be determined as soon as possible
from monitoring and survey reports. When bursts are separated by several
hours, the pattern already on the ground must be considered in conjunction
with the fallout prediction of the later burst. 
Very low winds. The situation may arise when the effective wind speed cannotbe reliably defined for a particular yield; i.e., when the effective windspeed drops below 8 kilometers per hour. When this occurs, the winds areeither llght and variable or are constantly changing direction, or both. In
such cases, fallout may occur at almost any location a~ound ground zero. Onlythree digits wi I I appear on the Iine of the effective downwind message forthat yield group. See I ines ALFA AND BRAVO in the next example. 
267 
ZOI~E·~~IIi IIIIUJIIll\11~. ZONE II 223 
J
EFFECTl\'E DOVt"h!V..!Ir-..!D ffiESSf..GE. 
EFFECTIVE DOVINV.'li~D f.'iESSAG!:: 
ZULU 3012002 
P.LFA · 004 
8RAVO 006 

Cf-if..P.LIE 273038 
DC::LTA 26~036 (G0").ECt-:0 2GG037 
FO)~Ir.OT 2G:)037 

Effective Downwind Message 
ZULU 301200Z ALFA 004 BRAVO 006 CHARLIE 273038 DELTA 269036 (60) ECHO 299037 FOXTROT 263037 
268 

269 

FALLOUT PREDICTION PLOT FOR VERY LOW WINDS 
FALLOUT PREDICTIOf.J PLOT FOR VERY LOV/ V·.'l NDS. 
The three digits represent the ZONE I downwind distance in kilometers. A circle of this radius drawn around ground zero wi I I define ZONE I. A second circle of twice this radius wi I I define ZONE II. Time of arrival of fallout wi I I have no meaning in this case and wi I I not be represented on the prediction plot. 
Expanded radial I ines. There wi I I be instances when the angle between the two radial lines is greater than 40 degrees. In these instances, the effective downwind message wi II indicate, besides the particular I ine of the message, the greater angle for the applicable yield group. 
In case of I ine DELTA, the predicted area of fallout wi I I be 30 degrees on each side of the effective downwind direction of 269 degrees. 
EXPANDED RADIAL LINES 
270 

Times of Arrival. 
The downwind drstance to which fallout wi I I extend in specified periods of 
time can be estimated by multiplying the effective wind speed by the time of 
interest expressed in hours after the burst. Time-of-arrival arcs representing the expected downwind extent of fallout prediction. Time of arrival of tal lout at a speci fie distance from ground zero can be estimated by dividing that distance by the effective wind speed. 
time of arrival (hr) = distance from GZ (km) effective wind speed (kmph) 
For operational purposes, the following rules of thumb may be applied to the actual arrival of fallout: 
The actual arrival of fallout may occur as early as one-half the estimated time of arrival. This is, if the estimated time of arrival of fallout isH+ 4 hours, actual arrival of fallout may occur as early asH+ 2 hours. 
If actual arrival of fallout has not occured at twice the estimated arrival time, or 12 hours, whichever is earlier, then it may be assumed that the area wi II not receive fallout. That is, if the esfimated time of arrival of fallout in an area is H + 4 hours and fallout has not-occurred as H + 8 hours, then it may be assumed that the area wi I I not recieve fallout. 
PLOT NBC 3 (NUCLEAR) REPORT 
CONDITIONS 
You are given an NBC 3 (Nuclear) report, an area map, overlay paper or acetate, penci Is or grease penci Is, a straightedge, a pr~ractor, and GTA 3-6-3. 
STANDARDS 
I. For an NBC 3 (Nuclear) report with I ine ZULU (8 digits), the following measures are performed. 
a.  Ground  zero  (GZ)  is plotted and  labeled  on  the overlay.  
b.  The grid north (GN)  I ine  is drawn and  labeled  on  the overlay.  
c.  The  left and  right  radial  lines  are  plotted within+  two  degrees.  
d.  Zones  I and  II  are  plotted within+ 200 meters and 400 meters,  

respecitively, and labeled. · 
271 

e. 
Time of arrival arcs are drawn within+ 200 meters and labeled. 

f. 
Cloud radius is drawn around GZ within+ 200 meters tolerance. 


g. 
Tangent I ines are drawn from the outer edge of the cloud radius to the Zone I arc intersection. 

h. 
Marginal information is written on plot and incJlldes map scale, date/time of burst, and GZ grid coordinates. 


1. The overlay is oriented to the map. GZ is oriented to within 200 meters of actual GZ. 
J. The completed plot is shown to supervisor. 
2. For an NBC 3 (Nuclear) report with I ine ZULU (3 digits), the following measures are performed. 
a. GZ is plotted and labeled on the overlay. 
b. 
Zones I and I I are plotted within+ 200 meters and 400 meters respectively, and labeled. 

c. 
Marginal information is written on plot and includes map scale; date/time of burst, and GZ grid coordinates. 

d. 
The overlay is oriented to the map. GZ is oriented to within 200 meters of actual GZ. 


e. The completed plot is shown to supervisor. 
REFERENCE FM 3-3 
272 

FALLOUT FUNDAMENTALS 

On 22 January 1954, a tuna fishing boat set out from Japan with 23 crew members. By I March, it was about 100 miles north-east of Bikini Atoll in the South Pacific. Early on the morning of I March, the deck watch saw a great flare of I ight to the east followed by a huge glowing balI of fire which rose above the horizon. The other crew members came on deck-and stared in amazement. Seven or eight minutes later, the boat was r~ed by the sound of an explosion. The frightened fishermen began pul I ing in their nets, but before they could finish, a gray-white ash or dust began settling out of the sky onto the boat. It fel I on the deck and the fisherman. The fisherman saw it, but not knowing what it was, they ignored it in their haste to get away. Two weeks later, the boat reached Japan:-By this time, every man on the boat was desperately sick; alI were hospitalized and one man eventually died. Those Japanese fishermen were the world's first casualties from fallout, fallout from a United States multimegaton, surface, nuclear detonation on Bikini Atoll. 
In 1954, Iittle was known about fallout; we now know it can ki I I men and disrupt mi Iitary operations in areas far outside the zone of blast and heat from a nuclear explosion. The Japanese sai Iars were not injured by the blast of the nuclear explosion, they were not injured by the~ heat, they were injured by radioactive fallout, which is the subject of this lesson. 
FALLOUT FORMATION, MOVEMENT, AND APPEARANCE 
~ 	Fallout formation. Nuclear weapons can be defined as air bursts, surface 
IJ 	bursts, or subsurface bursts. Of these three, air bursts produce no militarily significant fallout. Only surface bursts, and to a lesser extent subsurface bursts, have the two ingredients which are needed to produce mi I i tari ly significant fallout. These two ingredients are: 
-Fission fragments or, in other words, the leftover:$-or ashes of the nuclear fission process of the nuclear explosion itself. 
-Dirt, which is sucked into the fireball from the crater of the surface or subsurface nuclear detonation. 
Militarily significant fallout will be produced only if the white-hot nuclear fireball. touches the ground -in other words, in a surface burst or a shallow subsurface burst. The fireball is very hot (millions of degrees Fahrenheit), and it rises· rapidly into the air since hot air always rises. In the rapidly 
rising fireball, if it has touched the ground, are the two ingredients of fallout -the fission fragments of the nuclear explosion and tons of dirt scooped out of the crater. 
As it rises tens of thousands of feet into the air, the-l}ot fireball begins to cool form the typical mushroom shape. When this happens, the very tiny fission fragments become attached to the much larger dirt particles. Eventually, the mushroom cloud ceases to rise; at this time, the dirt particles, with the fission fragments attached to them, begin to sift back to earth as radioactive fallout. 
273 

Fallout Movement and Deposition on the Ground 
·The fat lout particles are blown by the winds as they fal I; generally they land in an irregular, sausage-shaped area on the ground downwind from ground zero. The larger particles fall faster and land nearer the ground zero. The smaller and Iighter particles fall to the ground further downwind so that there is a gradual lessening of the amount of fallout (and therefore the radiation hazard) in areas further downwind fromthe ground zero. ~ 
The winds which determine which way and how far the fallout particles wi II 
not the surface winds which we feel on the ground. The mushroom

travel are 
cloud can carry fallout particles up to 100,0000 feet into the air (up to 20 
miles high). For this reason, it is the winds high above the earth-the 
"winds aloft" -which largely determine where the fallout particles wi II hit 
the ground, not the winds close to the earth's surface. 

The fal Iing of the fallout particles back to earth takes time-it does not 
happen instantly after a surface nuclear explosion. Generally, the fallout 
particles begin hitting the ground within a few minutes near the ground zero 

but may not reach the ground for hours in areas many miles downwind. If you 
are downwind from a surface nuclear explosion, the further away you are the 
longer it wi I I be before the fallout particles begin reaching the ground in 
your area. 

People in the downwind area of a fallout-producing nuclear explosion wi I I 
usually see the fallout particles as they begin reaching the ground. It wi II probably be I ike being in a dust storm with the fallout particles looking I ike dust, ashes, or grains of sand. The arrival of the fallout particles wi II 
a
begin slowly; then they wi II arrive faster and faster for period of time 
which can last from minutes to several hours. Eventually, the arrival of the fallout particles wi I I slow down and then stop as the mushroom cloud blows over. 
Even from smal I, tactical-size nuclear weapons, the area-~ontaminated with fallout can be very large. Fallout from a nuclear explo~ion can cause casualties and disrupt mi Iitary operations in an area many times larger than 
the area damaged by the blast and heat of the nuclear explosion itself. The drawings below compare the size of a nuclear weapon's blast and heat damage area to the size of the fallout area for the same yield nuclear weapon. 
Notice the enormously gre~ter area which can be affected by radioactive 
fa Ilout. 

274 

20 KT SUFRACE BURST 
REGION OF COMPLETE DESTRUCTION 
WIND DIRECTION 
REGION OF LIGHT DAMAGE AND SOME FIRES  SCALE  IN MILES  
1 MT  LIMIT OF SIGNIFICANT FALLOUT CONTAMINATION SURFACE BURST  
REGION OF LIGHT DAMAGE AND SOME FIRES  WIND DIRECTION  
SCALE  IN MILES  
REGION OF COMPLETE DESTRUCTION  LIMIT OF S-IGNIFICANT FALLOUT CONTAMINATION  

275 

At some point in time after a nuclear detonation the NBCC at division or separate brigade wi I I have accumulated enough accurate data to construct a detailed fallout prediction. The prediction wi II be more accurate than the simplified fallout prediction constructed at unit level. Because unit level commanders require the most accurate assessment of the situation in order to plan and then maneuver, the NBCC wi I I disseminate the detailed fallout prediction as an NBC 3 (Nuclear) Report. To plot an NBC 3 (Nuclear) Report follow the steps provided below: 
Plot  an NBC  3  (Nuclear) Report  
Step #I.  Use  the  correct  map  scale.  NBC  3  (Nuclear) Report  
A NUOI6 D 150700Z F PA 484104 y 00700110 z 00900601  

Step #2. Lay overlay paper on the map and tape it in-place. 
Step #3. Obtain ground zero (I ine F of the NBC 3 report) and plot it on the overlay paper. Label it GZ 
A NUOI6 D 150700Z F PA 484104 y 007000110 z 00900601 
Step #4. Draw and label grid north from GZ; label it GN as shown below. 
Step #5. Obtain the azimuth of left and right radial I ine from I ine YANKEE of the NBC 3 report. Draw the radial I ines at the azimuths measured from grid north (70° and I 10°) as shown below. 
A NUOI6 D 150700Z F PA 484104 y 00700110 z 00900601 
NOTE: Line Y may be given in mi Is. In this case divide-the sets of numbers given in mi Is by 17.8 to fi~d the number of degrees. 
276 

Step #6. Obtain the cloud radius from I ine ZULU of the NBC 3 report. Draw it as shown below. Use GZ as the center of the radius. Cloud radius is the last 2 digits of line Z. 
A NUOI6 D 150700Z F PA 484104 Y 00700HO z 00900601 
Step #7. Obtain the downwind distance of Zone I from the 4th, 5th and 6th digits of line ZULU. Draw as shown above, GZ is used as center to draw the Zone I arcs. As in simplified prediction Zone II is found by doubling Zone I. 
Step #8. Obtain the wind speed from the 1st, 2d, and 3d digits of line Z this wi I I be the H + I line. Draw it as shown below using broken I ine. Label it H 
+ I on both sides. Time of arrival arcs are not drawn past Z I I. 
A NUOI6 D 150700Z.. F PA 484104 y 00700110 z 00900601 
A NUOI6 D 150700Z F PA 484104 
Map Scale I :50,000 
Step #9. Draw lines to connect the cloud radius to Zone~ boundary line as shown above. 
Step #10. Erase all excess I ines and write the marginal information near prediction as shown. 
Plot NBC 3 (Nuclear Report-Circular Plot) 
EXAMPLE: NBC 3 (Nuclear) Report 
A NUOI6 
D 180800Z 
F PA 511031 
z 002 

277 

There are only 3 digits in IineZ. The 3 digits are the raidal distance of Zone I . Zone II is found by doub I i ng Zone I . In this case Zone I has a radial distance of 2 km. Zone I I has a radial distance of 4 km. When plotting, always use the scale of the map that you are posting on. The NBC 3 report is plotted as shown below. 
A NUOI6 
D 180100Z F PA 511031 
7-0NE. I 

An NBC 3 (Nuclear) Report is an immediate warning of expected contamination or detailed fallout prediction. Like any prediction it is a best guess of where the contamination from a surface burst wi II fall. In order to accurately assess the actual area of contamination, the NBCC must be provided Radiological ~onitoring and survey data. The NBCC wi I I collect this data and construct a contamination overlay depicting the area of actual contamination. To disseminate the overlay the NBCC wi I I format an NBC 5 (Nuclear) Report. This report, when plotted at unit level, wi II give the commander a graphical depiction of the actual area of contamination. 
278 

279 

PREPARE CHEMICAL DOWNWIND HAZARD PREDICTION 
CONDITIONS Given operations map, overlay material, grease penci I, straight edge, 
compass (or string), protractor, GTA 3-6-3 (revised lAW Ed.5, STANAG 2103)
Chemical Downwind Message (COM), and NBC 1 or 2 (ChemicaJJ report(s). 
STANDARDS 
Downwind hazard predictions are plotted in accordance with FM 3-3 and are within the tolerance specified in the performance measures. PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 
Appropriate attack type and case determined with 100% accuracy. 

2. 
Downwind hazard predictions are plotted in accordance with FM 3-3 and are within the tolerance specified below. -AI I distances wi I I be plotted within+ 200 meter~ of actual distances. -Attack radius wi II be plotted within + 200 meters of actual distance. -Lateral limits will be plotted within.± 2° of actual angle. 


REFERENCES FM 3-3 STP 3-54E2, SM, TASK 031-506-2005 (TBP) 
CROSS A CHEMICALLY CONTAMINATED AR&~ 
Determining Type of Attack 
The prediction of downwind chemical hazard areas depends on how long the agentis effective, the wind speed, and--for ground contaminating agents--the size of the attack area. 
For hazard pr_edictions, all agents are classified as either air contaminating agents or ground contaminating agents. 
Air Contaminating Agent (Type A). These are agents which are normally expected to be dispersed as an aerosol or vapor cloud with I i ttle or no contamination on the ground. An example of this type of-~ttack is nonpersistent nerve agent employed upwind of the target. A+r contaminating agents are normally dispersed in ground bursting munitions. Examples are ground bursting artillery shells and multiple rocket launchers. This type of attack is referred to as a "Type A" attack. 
280 

Ground Contaminating Agents (Type B). These agents are normally expected to be dispersed in I iquid form to contaminate surfaces. Examples of this type of attack are persistent nerve and mustard agents. These are referred to as a "Type B" attack. 
Ground Contaminating agents are normally dispersed by aircraft spray tanks, air bursting artillery shells, rockets, missiles, and mines. To predict a downwind hazard area, whether the attack was a Type A OL_Type B, you need the 
following information. 
NBC 1-Observers Initial Report-Giving Basic Data. 
This report is used by the observing unit to give initial data and subsequent follow-up data for an NBC attack. The NBC 1 report is the most widely used message. All units must be completely fami Iiar with the NBC 1 report format and the information contained in the report in order to quickly and accurately prepare and send it to the next higher headquarters. 
NBC 2 -Evaluated Data. 
The NBC 2 report is based on two or more NBC 1 reports. It is used to pass evaluated data down to subordinate units. Normally the Division is the lowest level that would prepare NBC 2 reports, however, Brigaae and Battalion Chemical personnel may prepare the report if they have sufficient data and are not I ikely to receive the report from Division in a timely manner. 
For chemical attacks, the most important use for the NBC 2 report is to define the type and location of attack. Division NBCC prepares the NBC 2 report, assigns it a strike serial number and disseminates it to the appropriate subordinate unit. Each subordinate unit then decides whether to disseminate the' report further. If a unit is not in the attack area, it is not necessary to send a ~SC 2 report to the unit. 
Chemical Downwind Message 
The chemical downwind message (COM) contains alI the weather information needed to calculate a chemical downwind hazard. The COM is very useful because it provides the local wind speed, wind direction, stabi Iity category, and relative humidity in a short concise statement. The COM is prepared by corps and division NBCCs from information obtained through the US Air Force Weather Service, staff weather officer, or the fleet weather service. The COM is issued every 6 hours and is valid for 3 consecutive 2-hour periods. The COM contains the following: 
Date-time group for basic data. The time the first forecast is effective. Adding 2 and 4 hours to this time gives the effective times for the other two 
forecasts. 
Area of validity. The area a'ffected by the COM. It could be a map sheet number, or an area such as Division or Corps. 
281 

Air stability category. Describes the projected air stability. It will be one of seven numbers which correspond to stable; neutral, or unstable conditions. 
Surface air temperature. The average temperature of the air in the forecast area. 
Surface wind speed and direction. The representative wind speed and direction during the forecast period. 
Relative humidity. The average humidity for the forecast period. 
Significant weather phenomena. Refers to any weather conditions that could affect either the distance the cloud trvels or the duration of the agent in 
the hazard area. 
Interpreting the CDM 
Division NBCC is usually the lowest level that would prepare a chemical downwind message. Separate brigades may also be required to prepare a COM when operating independently. 
The Air Force weather station (AWS) is the best source· fo( this information. They can provide weather forecasts for division or corps areas. The next step
is to break it down into three, consecutive, 2-hour increments. Once this is done, the NBCC translates this data into codes and puts them in proper format. Each 1orecast I ine contains 11 digits. The first six digits 
represent the downwind direction and wind speed. The last five digits 
represent the air stabi Iity, temperature, humidity, and significant weather 
phenomena.  The  following  is  a  sample COM.  
CHEMICAL DOWNWIND MESSAGE  
110600Z  
I  CORPS  
w  120010  41471.  
X  125010  41671  
y  130005  51860  
1st  2nd  
MESSAGE CONTENTS  
Time  of  Beginning Forecast  
Area  of  Validity (area that COM  effects)  
Line  w -Represents period of  validity  for  the  f i r s t  two  
Line  X hours (in this case 0600-0800) -Represe~ts period of validity for hours (in this case 0800-1000)  the  second  two  

282 

Line W -120 010 
4 
14 
7 1 
Line Y-Represents period of validity for the third two hours (in this case 1000-1200) 
MEANING OF THE NUMBERS IN LINES W, X, Y. 
First three digits, representative downwind direction. 
Second three digits, representative down~ind speed in km/hr.
First digit in second group of numbers, aif-stabi Iity category.
Second and Third digit, surface air temperature in centigrade.
Fourth digit, humdi ity. 
Fifth digit, significant weather phenomena (cloud cover, snow, 
fog, rain, haze, etc.). 

283 

Field Expedient COM. 
There may be times when a valid COM is not avai !able from the corps or division NBCC. When this happens, estimate the air stability category by observing local meteorological conditions. The most difficult aspect is determining the angle of the sun by observation. Since most units do not have equipment to do this, make the best estimation possible. 
Enter the chart below with the time of day and angle or-S.Un. Then select the applicable sky condition. Read across to where the lines converge and extract the air stabi I i ty category. 
T.A..BLE l STABILITY BASIC CHART 
CONDITION OF  SKY  
TIME OF DAY AND  Less  than  More than  
ANGLE  OF  SUN  half  covered·  half covered  Overcast- 
M  <40- s  s  N  
0  .·- 
R  )4°  and <320 - ·N  - N  N  
N  Alo -··  ~  
I  >32°  and ~40°  u  N  N  
N  · - 
G  )40°  u  u  N  

)46° u u N 
E 
v )35° and <46° u N N
-
E N )12° and <35 ° N N N
-
I N )50 and <12° s N N
-
G 
-(50 s s N 
284 

285 

Once you have obtained the air stability category from the basic chart, enter 
the adjustment chart with that category. Select the appropriate weather and 
terrain condition. Read across to where they intersect and extract the final 
stabi Iity category. 
TABLE 2 
AIR STABILITY CATEGORY 
ADJUSTMENT CHART 

WEATHER AND TERRAIN STABILITY CATEGORY 
FROM 
BASIC CHART 
All eight conditions given below 
must be checked. If more than one 
applies, choose .the most stable 
category. u N s 
Dry to slightly moist surface tl -N s 
Het surface (i.e., after continuous 
rain or dew) N N s

i 
Frozen surface or partly covered
I with snow, frost, or hoarfrost N s s 

Surface completely covered with snow S. s ·s 
Cont ir.uous rainfall N 
Haze or mist (visihility 1-4 km) N N s 
Fog (visibility less than 1 km) N s s 
DoY.'TI\o/ind. speed more than 18 km N N N 
Table II is used for adjustment of the stabi Ii ty catego-r_J found Table I, taking into account influence of surface and weather. 
All eight conditions of terrain and weather listed tn Table II must be checked and, in case of doubt, the most stable category is to be chosen. 
286 

PREPARE A CHEMICAL HAZARD PREDICTION 

Plot Type "A" Case "a"-When effective wind speed is 10 kilometers per hour or less. 
Step 1. Determine location of attack and plot on map or overlay. (If using an overlay don't forget the two reference marks). 
Step 2. Draw a circle with a 1 kilometer radius around ±his point. The area inside this circle is the attack area. 
Step 3. Using the same center, draw a circle with a 10 kilometer radius. The area (between the two circles) is the hazard area. Place the appropriate marginal data (A, D F, &H) on your overlay. 
Plot Type "A" Case "b" -When effective wind speed is mo-t.e than 10 kilometers per hour. 
Step 1. Determine the location of the center of the attack and plot on a map or overlay. If using an overlay, draw a Grid North I ine from this poini and mark the two reference points. 
Step 2. Using this point as the center, draw a circle with one (1) kilometer radius as before. This area inside this circle is the attack area. 
287 

Step 3. From the valid Chemical Downwind Message (COM), or from locally
obtained weather information, determine ~he air stabi Iity category, downwind direction, and wind speed. To determine the air stabi Iity category when a 
valid COM is not available: 
a. 
Enter The Air Stabi Iity Category Basic Chart with time of day and sun elevation angle to obtain stability category. 

b. 
With category obtained in the Basic Chart, enter~he Air Stabi I ityCategory Adjustment Chart, and obtain the "adjusted stabi Iity category". Use this result as the air stabi Iity category. · 


St~p 4. From the center of the attack area draw a I ine to represent the wind direction. 
Step 5. Enter the Downwind Distance of Hazard Area Table with the appropriateair stabi Iity category and the means of delivery to find the maximum downwind distance of the hazard area. Plot this distance from the center of the attack area on the I ine representing the effective downwind direction. At this point, draw a I ine perpendicular to, and across the downwind direction Iine. This I ine is the maximum downwind hazard distance I ine. 
288 

Step 6. Mark a point two times the radius back (180° ) from the center of the attack area along the downwind direction I ine. Starting from this point,draw a Iine 30 degrees on each side of the downwind direction I ine. This line wi I I be tangent to the attack area. Extend the I ine to intersect with the maximum downwind hazard I ine. 
I 12 
I I I I 
Step 7. You now have the plot drawn. The area inside ~his plot, but outside the attack area is the hazard· area. Place the approprLare marginal data (A,D,F, &H) on your overlay. 
289 

290 

ST/\BILITY CATEGORY ADJUSU!ENT 
TAELE 2 

I 
AIR STABILI'rY CATEGORY ADJUSnl:ENT CHART 
'.ffiATHER M'"D TERRAIN STABILITY CATEGORY FROM BASIC CHART 
All eight conditions given below 
~-.:.st be checked. If more than one 
applies, choose the most stable 

category. u N s 
Dry to slightly noist surface -tJ -N s 
\·let surface (i.e., after continuous rain or dew) N N s 
I 
Frozen surface or partly covered with snow, frost, or hoarfrost N s s 
,..
Surface co:-:2pletely covered •li th sno._. .s. s .:::.
I I
I 
I C~!1t ir,•..:o~s rainfc.ll N
i 

I 
Hc.ze or ::-:.is t (visibility 1-4 km) N N s
I I
,.-
I Fra
-, (visibility less thaH 1 km) N s s 
I I . -I 
I 
D c ~-:-:-.·~· i.!1d sp:o:~ more t~-:;.n 18 km N N N 
Table II is used for adjustment of the stabi Ii ty category found from Table I, taking into account influences of surface and weather. 
AI I eight conditions of terrain and weather Iisted in Table I I must be 
checked, and, in case of doubt, the most stable category is to be chosen. 

291 


TYPE "A" ATTACK 
DOWNWIND DISTANCE OF HAZARD AREA 
TABLE 3 
Distance from center of at tack area Means of Delivery along downw-ind a:xis, w-hen the air stability category is: 
u N s Artillery, Bomblets, and l-1ortars 10 km 30 km 50 km -
Multiple Rocket Launchers, 
Missiles, Bombs, and 
Unknow-n Munitions 	15 km 30"km 50 km
• 
NOTE: 	When no information is available on the nature-of the munitions used in the attack, use the figures given for multiple focket launchers, missiles and bombs. 
Type "B" Case "a" -Radius of the attack area is 1 kilometer or less and the wind speed is greater than 10 kilometers per hour. The plot for a Type "B" attack Case "a" is drawn the same as the plot for a Type "A" attack Case "b" EXCEPT the maximum downwind hazard distance for a Type "B" attack is always 10 kilometers. Therefore, the air stabi I i ty category does not need to be considered. The daily, mean, surface air temperature must be known to determine the probable duration of the hazard (the probable time after contamination that personnel in the area might safely unrn~sk). Enter Table 4, with the daily, mean, surface air temperature and find the probable duration of the hazard in the attack area and the hazard area. 
PROBABLE TIME AFTER GROUND CONTAMINATION AT WHICH OCCUPANTS MAY SAFELY REMOVE 
MASKS 
TYPE "B" ATTACK 
TABLE 4 
Daily Mean Surface Air Within Attack Area Withiq Hazird Area Temperature (number of days) (number of days) 
<Oo -	l0°C (32-50°F) 3 to 10 days 2 to 6 days 
11°-	20°C (51-68°F) 2 to 4 days 1 to 2 days 
21° -)30°C (69-86°F) up to 2 days up to 1 day 
292 
NOTE: 	Tests for presence of chemical agent contamination and/or proper
unmasking procedures ~ust always be used before unmasking after 

a 
chemical attack or in any area where a chemical agent hazard might
exist. 
NOTES: 	1. The estimates assume ground contamination densities of up to 10 g/m.
2. In making hazard estimates, vapor has been considered to be the determining factor within the attack area as wei I as in _the downwind hazard 
area. The duration of hazard from contact with bare sk8r is, however,difficult to predict. The duration can only be determined by the use of chemical agent detection or confirmation devices. 
3. When temperatures are consistently low, the duration of 
contamination may be longer than indicated in the Table. The absence of vapors does not preclude the presence of contamination. 
4. Daily, mean, surface air temperature may be obtained from the local 
meteorology (MET) officers. 
Step 1. Determine the location of the center of the attack and plot on a map 
or overlay. If using an overlay, draw a grid north line from this point and,
mark the two reference points. 
Step 2. Using this point as the center, draw a circle with a one (1) kilometer 
radius 	as with a Type "A" case "b". The area inside this circle is 
the attack 
area. 
G.,_
; 
Step 3. From the center of the attack area, extend a line to represent the 
downwind direction. 
293 


Step 4. At this point draw a line perpendicular to and across the downwind direction I ine 10 kilometers from the center of the attack area. Use the correct scale when using an overlay. 
10 KILOJ.~~E?S 
Step 5. Mark a point two times the radius back (180° ) from the center of the attack area along the downwind direction Iine. Starting from this point, draw a I ine 30 degrees on each side of the downwind direction I ine. This I ine wi II be tangent to the attack area. Extend the I ine to intersect with the maximum downwind hazard line. 
I. 
r: 

I. 

I 
I 
I 
I 
I 
I 
I 


Step 6. You now have the plot drawn. The area inside this plot, but outside the attack area is the hazard area. Place marginal data for the attack (A,D,F, &H) on the overlay. 
Plot Type "8" Case "b" -Radius of the attack area is more than 1 kilometer, but less than 2 kilometers and the wind speed is greater than 10 kilometers per hour. For a Type "B" Case "b" attack, a circle with_a 2 kilometer radius is drawn to represent the attack area. Everything else rs the same as for a Type "B" Case "a". 
Step 1. Determine the location of the center of the attack and plot on a map or overlay. If using an overlay, draw a Grid North I ine from this point and mark the two reference points. 
Step 2. Using this point as the center, draw a circle with a two (2) kilometer radius. The area inside the circle is the attack area. 
Step 3. From the center of the attack area draw a line to represent the downwind direction. 
Step 4. At this point draw a line perpendicular to and across the downwind direct ion I ine 10 kilometers from the center to the attach area. Use the correct scale when using an overlay. 
295 

Step 5. Mark a point two times the radius back (180°) from the center of 
the attack ar~a along the downwind direction I ine. Starting from this point, draw a I ine 30 degrees on each side of the downwind direction I ine. This I ine wi II be tangent to the attack area. Extend the Iine to intersect with the maximum downwind hazard Iine. Remember, for this case, the radius of the attack area is 2 kilometers, therefore, your tangent reference point is 4 kilometers from the center of the attack . 
.... ··
2 .x: r 
Step 6. You now have the plot drawn. The area inside DQis plot but outside the attack area is the hazard area. Place marginal data~(A,D,F, & H) for the attack on the overlay. 
296 

297 

Plot Type "B" Case "c" -Radius of the attack area is 2 or more kilometers and the wind speed is greater than 10 kilometers per hour. 
Step 1. Plot the extreme edges of the attack area on a map or overlay. If an overlay is used a Grid North I ine must be dran from the most downwind of these two points, and two reference points established. 
NOTE: If the attack is a spray attack, the extreme edges wi II be the beginning and end of the spray(s). If the attack is from several artilleryunits, two or more NBC 1 or NBC 2 reports may have to be used. 
Step 2. Using these two points as centers draw two circles (one at each point) with a 1 kilometer radius. 
G 
Step 3. From the center of these two areas, draw in the downwind direction 
Ii nes. 
298 

Step 4. Measure the 10 kilometer downwind hazard distance along the downwind direction Iine from the center of the most downwind circle~ Draw a Iine at 
this point, perpendicular, to the downwind direction I ine. This is the maximum downwind hazard distance I ine. 
Gf.-------=------1 
10 KIT. 
Step 5. Draw a line to connect the back of the two circles. This I ine should be tangent to the outer most portion~the back side of each circle. 
299 


Step 6. Draw the tangents (radial I ines) to the outer edge of each circle. 
These Iines are 30 degrees from a point ·two times the radius upwind along the 

downwind direction Iines as before. 
The area inside ~is plot but outsideYou now have the plot drawn.
Step 7. Place marginal data (A,D,F,&H) for the
the attack area is the hazard area.
attack on the overlay. 
300 
Type "8" less.  case  "d"  -The effective wind speed  is  10 kilometers per hour  or  
Step 1.  Determine the center of  the attack  area.  
Step 2. attack.  Draw a 10 kilometer circle around the attack area usingThe area inside this circle is the hazard. The size of  the center of the attack  

area wi I I be undetermined unti I survey or reconnaissance data are available. ,............-· 
Step 3. You now have the plot drawn. The area inside_ this plot but outside 
the attack area is the hazard attack on the overlay.  area.  Place marginal  data (A,D,F,&H)  for  the  
SUMMARY  
TYPE A ATTACK-Disseminating  an  air contaminating agent.  
CASE  "A"-When  effective wind speed  is 10 kilometers per hour  or  less.  

CASE "8" -When effective wind speed is more than 10 kilometers per hour. SPECIAL NOTE: Assume Type "A" attack unless it is known--to be a Type "8". TYPE 8 ATTACK-Disseminating a ground contaminating agent. 
CASE "A" -Radius of the attack area is 1 kilometer or less and the wind speed is greater than 10 kilometers per hour. CASE "8" -Radius of the attack area is more than 1 but less than 2 kilometers and the wind speed is greater than 10 kilometers per hour. CASE "C" -Radius of the attack area is 2 or more kilometers and the wind speed is greater than 10 kilometers per hour. CASE "D" -When the wind speed is 10 kilometers pe! hour or less . 
..... 
SPECIAL NOTE: When the size of the attack area is unknawn assume a Type "8" Case "b" attack. 
301 

Simpl i tied Hazard Prediction 
The simp! ified hazard prediction provides subordinate units a quick and easy
method to determine whether or not they are in a chemical donwwind hazard 
area. Since Type A attacks present the greatest hazard, the simplified
procedures are based on that type of attack. It is valid unti I an NBC 3 
report is received from higher headquarters. 
AI I that is needed for a unit to make a simplified predicf1on 1s a chemical downwind message and a simp! ified template. The template can be made out of acetate, overlay paper, or plastic. 
Procedures: 
Step 1. Extract the wind speed from the COM. If it 1s less than 10 km/hr, use the circular potion of the prediction. If it is greater than 10 km/hr
follow the remaining steps. 
Step 2. Extract the wind direction from the COM. Mark that direction on the compass circle of the template. 
Step 3. Extract the air stabi Iity code from the COM then use this code (U, N, or S) to determine the downwind distance. 
Step 4. Place the template on the map with the attack center of the prediction over the actual attack center, and rotate the predictor unti I the downwind direction is pointing toward grid north. 
Step 5. Draw the downwind I ine perpendicular to the downwind direction usingthe distance obtained in Step 3. 
Adjusted Hazard Prediction 
The methods previously discussed are based on the assump~ion that the environmental conditions would not change. When changes in weather occur, the downwind hazard prediction no longer applies. An adjusted NBC 3 report may be sent to units/instal lations in the new hazard area if the recalculation time and transmission time sti I I allow a timely warning. Units no longer in the hazard area wi I I also be notified. 
Significant weather changes are: 
0 Change 1n air stabi Iity category. 
0 Change in downwind direction by 30 degrees or more. 
0 Change 1n the downwind speed to either above or below 10 km/hr. 
302 

Recalculation Procedure 
The first step is to determine the geographical center of the front I ine of the traveling cloud at the time the new data becomes available. This distance is calculated by multiplying the original wind speed by two times the length of time (hours) since the attack. The center of the cloud front is then considered to be the new center of attack area. Once the new center of attack is determined, the downwind hazard area is determined us-tng the procedures out I ined for that type of attack. 
Time of arrival 
The earliest an agent can be expected to arrive at a location is determined by
dividing the distance from the attack center by twice the wind speed. For example if you are 10 km from the attack center and the wind speed is 5 km/hr, the earliest the agent cloud would arrive at your location would be 1 hour. 
10 kilometers (2 X 5 kilometers/hour) = 1 hour 
303 

~1.-.11\.'i  of  llcllvcry  
!.rL illcry, nor.1blcts, aud ~:ort.1r5 :toal t 1 p lc Rocket Launchc rs, :t i:; s llcs, Oor.1bs, .1nd 1111k11ovn I tun! t Ions  
w 0 .l>o  

SHIPLinl~O CltEmCAL DO\IN\HNO HAZARD PREDICTOR 
lllstnncc· from ct•ntcr of :~tt.1ck area nlodG downwind ax!:;, when the air stnbllity catcgury is: 
u N s 
10 km JO km 50 km 
15 km JO km 50 kn• 
180 °
25 30 35 
270 ° 
l.fd 
Not to s-cale 
fliillllll.. 
PLOT NBC 3 (CHEMICAL) REPORT 
CONDITIONS 
Given NBC 3 (Chemical) report, map with overlay material, grease penci I 
and protractor with the requirement to plot NBC 3 (Chemical) reports. 
STANDARDS 

NBC 3 Chemical Reports are plotted in accordance with FM 3-3 and are 
within tolerances specified in the performance measures. Marginal data 
reflects at a minimum the following: Line ALPHA, DELTA, FOXTROT, HOTEL, and 
scale of the map used. 

PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 
Accurately interpret NBC 3 (Chemical) report. 

2. 
Grid coordinates are plotted on map/overlay within 200 meters. 

3. 
Grid coordinates are connected. 

4. 
Radius of circular 	plots is plotted on map/overlay within+ 200 meters. 

5. 
Marginal information is posted on overlay. REFERENCES FM 3-3 


STP 	3-54E2, SM, TASK 031-506-2003 (TBP) PLOTTING AN NBC 3 (CHEMICAL REPORT Because of the potential casualty-producing effects of chemical agents, it is critical that alI units within the downwind hazard area be warned as 
rapidly 
as possible of the existing hazard. 
The NBC report used to warn friendly units of an expected or predicted

chemical hazard is the NBC 3 (Chemical) Report. Division NBCC uses the NBC 1 reports and wind information to predict the downwind hazard area. This is disseminated as an NBC 3 report. It is sent to alI unis that are effected by
the hazard. Each unit 	evaluates the NBC 3 and determines which of its 
subordinate units is affected and distributes the report accordingly. Units within the chemical downwind hazard area adjust their MOPP level, if necessary, and ensure that chemical agent alarms are placed sufficiently
upwind to provide adequate warning. 
The NBC 3 report is a prediction which may not be the sa~e as the actual area of contamination. Commanders should use the report whenl considering courses of action. 
305 

Heading of the NBC 3 (Chemical) Report 
The heading of the NBC 3 (Chemical) Report consists of the followinginformation: Precedence. The precedence for the NBC 3 (Chemical) Message is normally
IMMEDIATE, however, this message may be downgraded as required or by SOP. 
Date/Time. The date and time that the message is sent Cafl-be shown in either local or ZULU time; however, it must be stated which time is used. Security Classification. Normally, the NBC 3 (Chemical) Report is 
UNCLASSIFIED. 
From. This I ine contains the designation of the agency preparing the report. 
To. This I ine contains the designation of the unit or units to which the 

message is being sent. 
Type of Reprot. NBC 3 (Chemical) Report wi I I be entered in this I ine. 

Body of the NBC 3 (Chemical) Report 
The information contained in each line of the body of the NBC 3 (Chemical)

Report  is  as  follows:  
Line  Itern  Meaning  
ALFA  This  I ine contains  the strike serial  number  that  was  
assigned to Initial NBC  the attack by the NBCC 1 (Chemical) Report.  upon  receipt of  the  
DELTA  The date and  time of  the attack  in  ~ither  local  or  ZULU  
time  is entered  in  this  Iine.  
FOXTROT  This I ine is used to give the location of the attack. The location ,can be given in a set of map coordinates or as a place, such as the name of a town, bridge,community, ec. Regardless of what method is used to identify the,location of the attack, it must be stated whether the location is the actual location of attack or  
an  estimated  location of attack.  
HOTEL  This  I ine  identities  the  type of  chemical  agent employed.  
PAPA ALPHA  This I ine is either provided as a set of grid coordinates or if the wind speed is 10 km/hr o-r;.._ less, three digitsgiving the radius of the circular plot.  
PAPA  BRAVO  This  I' I ine describes  the duration  that  the hazard  can  be  
expected  on  both  the attack  area  and  hazard  area.  

306 

YANKEE  This I ine provides the downwind direction, four digits, in degrees or mils, and the wind speed, three digits, in kilometers per hour or knots. The units of measure must be stated. This data is required to calculate estimated time of arrival of the agent cloud.  
ZULU ALPHA  This I ine provides the temperature in centigrade, two digits; cloud cover, one digit; sig~ficant weather phenomena, one dig i t; and a i r stab i t:ny, one dig i t.  

When properly prepared, a typical NBC 3 (Chemical) Report wi I I appear as fo I I ows: 
NBC 3 (CHEMICAL) REPORT 
Precedence: IMMEDIATE Date/Time: 211900Z Security Classification: UNCLASSIFIED From: R2T07 To: N3B15 Type of Report: NBC 3 (CHEMICAL) ALFA: 81D001 DELTA: 211800Z FOXTROT: NV873315 ACTUAL HOTEL: NERVE PAPA ALPHA: NV873320 
NV892338 NV892260 NV873310 
PAPA BRAVO: 	In attack area-2-4 days. In hazard area -1-2 days. 
YANKEE: 0270° 015 km/hr 
ZULU ALPHA: 	15154 
Plotting an NBC 3 (Chemical) Report 
Step 1. Plot the location of the attack (center of the attack area) from I ine FOXTROT. If using an overlay draw a Grid North I ine and mark two reference pains. 
Step 2. If line PAPA ALPHA contains three digits, for example "010", draw a circle with a 10 kilometer radius, using the above point as the center. 
Step 3. If I ine PAPA ALPHA contains grid coordinates simply plot each coordinate and connect the dots. 
Step 4. Copy the marginal data from the report. 
307 

NBC DEFENSE EQUIPMENT READINESS 

The old concept of a unit "NBC Room" is obsolete. The totally combat ready unit must have NBC equipment (along with appropriate Technical Manuals) issued to the soldier to ensure operator training in the use and maintenance of NBC equipment. 
The time required to issue protective masks, chemical pro~ective clothing, decontaminants, and team equipment is prohibitive to uni~eadiness. Also, supply sergeants must be trained to recognize NBC equipment resupply as an area for which they are responsible. There is no single class of supply denoted as NBC in the current ADMF. One individual and team equipment is 1n the hands of the troops, the majority of repair parts are placed in parts bins as PLL/ASL, leaving only training items for the NBC NCO to contend with. Storage is accomplished lAW appropriate TMs and Regulations. 
NBC readiness is ensured through regular training, SOP, and by keeping NBC equipment accessible, maintained, and resupplied as required. 
Prior to mass issue of alI NBC equipment to individuals or at least in platoon/section consolidated equipment boxes, the commander must ensure alI property accountabi Iity procedures, maintenance procedures, and scheduled maintenance is undersood. AI I first line supervisor must be trained. First 
Iine supervisors are the cornerstone to success to this iype of NBC.equipment readiness program. Once commanders are confident that first I ine supervisors are competent and understand their role in the sustainment of this equipment, 
the old concept of "NBC Room" can be disestablished. 
Maintenance Operations 
Maintenance involves all actions taken to keep material in a serviceable condition. A successful maintenance program is dependent upon the concentrated efforts of all personnel of the unit. Part of your job wi II be 
to ensure that proper maintenance records and procedures-are kept and performed. 
Preventive Maintenance 
Preventive maintenance is the keystone to a good maintenance program. Preventive maintenance includes systematic servicing, inspection, correction of initial failures before damage occurs, detection and correction of abuse, and teaching proper care and use of equipment. Early and thorough preventive maintenance prevents minor shortcomings from becoming major deficiencies which require extensive repair. Preventive maintenance must be scheduled at definite intervals, as the tactical situational lows. You can anticipate periodic announced and unannounced inspections and spot checks to be conducted by company and battalion. You should perform your own checks to ensure the program is working for NBC equipment. 
Preventive maintenance is faci I itated through the use of appropriate maintenance records. These records are a thorough control device for the 
308 

recording of operating condition, maintenance accomplished, and modification of various items of equipment. Maintenance records provide the commander with current information on: 
Equipment operational status 
Results of inspections 
Scheduling of preventive maintenance services 
Keeping proper records permits the selection of equipment which requires the greatest maintenance effort. It also aids in development of priorities for turn-in when replacement items are avai !able, thus enhancing the capabi Iity of the unit to effectively accomplish the mission. 
NBC EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS 
One of the responsibi Iities you wi I I ahve as an NBC Officer or NCO is to main~ 
tain the unit NBC equipment. You wi I I need to maintain certain maintenance · 
forms to keep your equipment operational. DA PAM 738-750 provides you the 
information on prpearing these maintenance forms. The forms you wi I I need_to maintain are: 
a.  DA  Form 2404, Equipment  Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet  
b.  DA  Form 2407,  Maintenance Request  
c.  DA  Form 2408-9,  Equipment  Control  Record  
d.  DD  Form 314,  Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record  

Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet, DA Form 2404.-The purpose of 
the DA Form 2404 is to record equipment faults found durLog the operator's 
inspection, periodic preventive maintenance checks and_services (PMCS), 
inspection of equipment by maintenance activities, diagnostic checkouts, and spot check inspection of equipment. 
When completed by an equipment operator or crew, it is used to report any 
faults that cannot be corrected by the operator or crew and any faults that are corrected by replacing parts. 
When completed by organizational maintenance it is used for recording periodic maintenance services, alI faults found and the corrective actions taken as a result of the inspection. The preparation of this form is fairly simple and may vary with the purpose for which it is being used. 
309 

Maintenance Request, DA Form 2407. The purpose of the DA Form 2407 is to
request maintenance and modification work·order (MWO) support from higher
level maintenance activities. Additional use of this form can be found in DA
Pam 738-750. 
~pment Control Record, DA Form 2408-9. The purpose of the DA Form 2408-9
is to give maintenance managers at all level the means of getting initial
basic equipment acceptance and identification informati0£1 for selected items
in the Army inventory. It also gives the means for upd~ing information on
ownership, location, usage, transfers, gains, losses, overhaul, rebuild, and
disposition. 
Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record, DD Form 314. This form is used torecord scheduled and performed periodic services on equipment. When specifiedby the technical manual, services wi I I be performed by organizationalpersonnel or under the supervision of organizational personnel. One DD Form314 may be initiated for each item of equipment, however, several like itemsmay be scheduled on one 314 if they are scheduled for service on a commondate. 
NBC SUPPLY PROCEDURES 
Undersanding how the supply sysem works can increase the NBC Officer/NCOs
abi I ity to directly influence his/her unit NBC readiness. An individual does
not have to be an expert Supply Officer or NCO. However, he or she must know
the fundamentals of supply procedures to ensure that alI equipment not on-handis on order, and that required repair ~arts are stocked or are routinely
ordered. 
There are two people an NBC Officer/NCO has to become acquainted with in orderto accomplish those supply actions that are required to properly maintain the
unit equipment and supplies. They are the Unit Supply Specialist (Supply
Clerk) and the Prescribed Load List (PLL) Clerk. AR 611-201 describes theduties and tasks that are required for a Supply and PLL~Ierk. Listed below
is an excerpt from that regulation stating those tasks Supply and PLL clerksaccomplish that directly effect supply procedures for NBC Room equipmentprocedures. 
MOS 76Y, Supply Clerk. Prepares request and turn-in documents. Processes
supply requests. Prepares, reviews, and corrects hand receipt property
I istings and annexes. Posts transactions to record of demand. Preparesclothing and equipment records. Prepares abstract of organizational clothing
and equipment. Prepares inventory adjustment document. 
MOS 76C, PLL Clerk. Maintains equipment records and repair parts I ists, andperforms maintenance control duties. Performs PLL/SSL duties in manual andautomated supply systems. Requests initial prescribed load I ist from supportactivity, or develops and submits proposed PLL/SSL usin~catalog data and
technical manuals. ldenti fies repair parts and prepares requests for issue orturn-in. Receives, stores, and issues repair parts. Prepare PLL/SSL changeI istings based on usage records maintained. Uses status cards and reconci Iiation listing to update due-in records. Prepares request for cancellation or
fo II ow-up. 
310 
ARMY MASTER DATA FILE (AMDF) 
The Army Master Data File (AMDF), on microfiche, provides recipients with the 
most commonly used supply management data for more than one mi I I ion stock 
numbered supply items authorized for Army use. 
Botht the Supply Clerk and the PLL Clerk use the Army Master Data File (AMDF) in selecting data for requests for issue and turn-in. The_AMDF is used at alI levels of supply activities for identification and val idatrng data used for preparation of request for issues or turn-in of supplies. The abi I i ty to properly use the AMDF wi I I enhance the NBC Officer and NCOs abi I ity to ensure that the requisitions initiated for NBC readiness are accurate and properly fi I led out. The Code Reference Guide, CDA Pam 18-1, Aug 81 provides instructions and guidance on the use of the AMDF Microfiche File. It contains definitions and explanations of all codes appearing in the microfiche file. 
The system is not designed for NBC Officers and NCOs to be required to fi I I 
out requisitions (DA Form 2765). Instead NBC Officers and NCOs should 
identify shortages, Iist them on a OF, and submit to the commander for 
approval. This Iist then, when approved, is given to the Supply Clerk or PLL 
Clerk and they requisition the equipment or repair parts on aDA Form 2765 or 
2765-1. . 
If you attempt to submit a requisition, you must ensure you do it correctly. Any errors on the DA Form 2765, Request for Issue or Turn-in, wi II invariably cause delays in obtaining required part or supplies. Proper use of the AMDF using CDA Pam 18-1 wi II ensure that your requisitions are completed properly. In either case, on alI requisitions you need to check the National Stock Number (NSN), item description, unit of issue, and price. You might also be prepared to provide the authorization document (CTA or TM with date) depending on what you are ordering. 
PRESCRIBED LOAD LIST (PLL) 
NBC Officers and NCOs should closely inspect for broken or missing parts on their equipment. They should be able to produce document numbers for these parts if required. Those immortal words, "Sir, it's on requisition", just do not carry the same authenticity as a valid document number. By ensuring that parts are on a valid request, we help the system to function properly. The system must know what we need in order to support us. Excess repair parts are a serious problem in many units. Excess parts are generated for many reasons. Units order too many parts, order the wrong part, fai I to install requested parts, scrounge more than they need, and so on. These parts usually sit in wall lockers, desks, CONEXs, or closets in a disorganized heap. 
A tradition has developed that seems to say a unit must ilave large quanti ties of excess parts on hand to do.wel I in maintenance. Yet~those units that do not allow excess parts to accumu.late in every nook and cranny usually have an effective maintenance program. Why? Because they have deve Ioped ski I I at using the supply system and understand that excess parts do not mean effective maintenance. 
311 

MANDATORY PRESCRIBED LOAD LIST (MPL) 

The Army has begun phasing in a program to establish standardized combat 
prescribed load Iists (PLLs) and authorized stockage Iists (ASLs) designed to 
make peacetime demand-supported PLLs and ASLs more "combat ready". The 
program was initiated in response to concern epressed by Army commanders over 
the capability of present PLLs and ASLs to meet combat needs. Since current 
PLLs and ASLs are based mostly on peacetime demands, they 4o not take into 
account increased wearout rates or damage associated with~mbat. 
The intent of the program is to improve repair parts stockage in Army units so 
that equipment can be maintained during combat and to standardize the combat 
PLLs and ASLs of similar units as much as possible. To assist units in the 
task of establishing combat PLLs and ASLs, the Army has pub! ished DA Pamphlet
710-3, which introduces the program, and DA Cirular 700-81-2. The circular 
explains the methods used to determine the makeup of the Iists and establishes 
the program responsibi Iities of the major commands. It also contains a user's 
guide for requisitioning and maintaining combat stockage Iists. 
A mandatory stockage of repair parts needed to perform combat essential 
battlefield maintenance should be in PLL/ASL at alI times. The Army
Standardized Combat PLL/ASL Program improves repair parts stockage in Army
units so that units can continue to operate in combat. ·The-PLL is based on 
peacetime demands that will not support units during war.-To overcome this 
shortage, DA is publishing mandatory parts Iists (MPL) in DA Pamphlets for 
each type unit table of organization and equipmant (TOE). MPLs Iist the 
equipment and repair parts that the unit must stock. Notal I end items found 
on a unit TOE wi I I be provided with an MPL. Only those end items critical to 
the unit's mission wi II be provided in an MPL. In addition to MPL, units wi II 
stock command essential Iist (CEL) parts (i.e., demand suppoted and command 
unique, combat essential repair parts). Units must eliminate combat 
nonessentials. 
Combat PLL (i.e., MPL and CEL) is I imited to 300 Iines. ~f adding the MPL 
i terns pushes the unit tot a I number of on hand I i nes above 300, the PLL w i I I 
have to be purged. The recommended sequence for purging items is to delete 
nonesential items first (Army master data file (ADMF) code G); next, to delete 
deferrable maintenance items (AMDF code J); and finally to eliminate legal and 
safety items (AMDF codes D and E). 
DA has published 49 MPL pamphlets for the Army Standardized Combat PLL/ASL 
program. Twenty-two of these pamphlets were pub Iished 1 March 1983. Another 11 pamphlets were prepared and were scheduled for distribution in August 1983. These 60 pamphlets complete the TOE for Tank and Mechanized Infantry Divisions. Other TOE MPL pamphlets wi I I be completed according to HQDA priority
specifications. 
We've discussed that NBC Officer/NCOs do not have to be -~upply experts in order to ensure NBC readiness. However, it is essentia-Tthey understand how 
the supply system works. We've discussed who to go to when you need equipmentand repair parts. We've discussed where to research your supply management ~ata and the reference you need ~o use the AMDF. We've discussed that the NBC 
312 

Officer/NCO is responsible for ensuring that repa1 r parts are maintained or are on order, but not kept in excess. We've briefly discussed what PLL is and 
that now the Army is implementing a Mandatory PLL for all units. 
Property Accountabi Iity. When you are assigned the duties as an NBC Officer or NCO, your commander may have you sign for alI the NBC equipment assigned to the unit. This equipment costs the military a great deal of money if you should lose it. There are times when you must loan your ~quipment to another person or unit. To ensure accountabi I i ty you wi II need _a:_fJA Form 2062. This form, when.filled out properly, will transfer the responsibility for the item over to the other person or unit who is reeiving it. 
Assuming that the commander decides to issue all unit NBC equipment to the individuals responsible (i.e., squad leaders and platoon sergeants) the use of the DA Form 2062 is critical. Without proper accountability, determining I iabi Iity when equipment is damaged or lost becomes very difficult. 
USE AND MAINTAIN IM93 OR IM147 DOSIMETER 
AND PP1578 CHARGER 

CONDITIONS 
You are given an IM93 or IM147 dosimeter, and a PP1578(*) RADIAC detector charger. The appropriate operator's technical manual (TM) or extract for the dosimeters and charger is available for preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) only. You are also given denatured alcohol; water; mild detergent; brush; Iint-free cloth~ and a I ight source. 
STANDARDS 
1. PMCS is performed on the dosimeter and charger. 
a. 
AI I deficiencies/shortcomings correctable at_operator level are identified and corrected. 

b. 
AI I deficiencies/shortcomings not corrected are reported to the supe rv i so r. 


NOTE: 	Uncorrected deficiencies/shortcomings must be recorded on DA Form 2404 lAW DA Pam 738-750. However, this is not a performance measure of this task. 
2. 
The dosimeter 1s charged to zero. 

3. 
The total dose is determined within the following accuracy: 

a. 
+ 5 rad(cGy) for the IM93. 

b. 
+ rad(cGY) for the IM147. 




313 

PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. Performs PMCS on dosimeter. 
2. Performs PMCS on charger. 
3. Charges the dosimeter to zero. 
4. Reads total dose from the second dosimeter. 
5. Completes task within ten minutes. 
REFERENCES: 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-2001
FM 3-54E1/2, Task 031-505-1013 

UNIT RADIAC EQUIPMENT 
In the event that nuclear warfare on either tactical or strategic scale should
ever be initiated, profici:ency in the use of unit RADIAC-equipment for thedetection and measurement of radiation dosages and dose rates wi II beessential for survival. To read and report radiation dosages you must beproficient with dosimeters. This require a knowledge of their purposes,characeristics, total dose range, procedures for placing dosimeters intooperation, methods of reporting radiation dosages, and the operatorsmaintenance required on dosimeters and chargers. 
Dosimeters are designed to measure the total dose of nuclear radiation (gammarays) received by an individual. 
Dosimeters are a group of: radiacmeters which measure the cumulative shortduration exposure to high(;intensity gamma rays. Gamma radiation is pureenergy which travels through space in a straight I ine at the speed of I ight.Gamma rays are invisible rays similar to X-rays. Gamma rays interact with thehuman body and cause damage to tissues and the blood-forming eel Is. It isthese effects on the body that are of significant concern to the commander.The commander must know the total dose of nuclear radiation received byindividuals in the units. This will permit the commander to more effectivelyemploy the command on the nuclear battlefield. The main source of thisnuclear radiation is fallout. 
Characteristics. 
There are four models of dosimeters: IM9E/PD, IM93/UD,-JM93A/UD, andIM147/PD. The IM9E/PD wil.l not be discussed, they areifrimarily used in
laboratories or areas that produce low levels of radiation. 
314 
IM93/UD and IM93A/UD. These dosimeters are considered the standard tactical 
dosimeters. They are issued on the general basis of two per platoon. The 
readings received at this level form the basis for control! ing the exposure of 
personnel on the nuclear battlefield. 
IM147/PD. This dosimeter is issued to radiological survey and monitoring teams. It permits the teams to determine when the turn-back dose has been reached. The survey/monitoring teams wi II receive more i.&:diation than other soldiers who are not on the team. The total dose for th~team is control led. 
The total dose status of the team is a matter of interest to the Nuclear, 
Biological, Chemical Element (NBCE). It is one of the measures used by the 
NBCE in selecting which unit teams are to perform surveys. 
All models are self-indicating (direct reading) pocket dosimeters. 
They are a hermetically sealed assembly in a metal barrel. 
DOSif/JETER. 
. .-----POCI(ET CLIP 
VIEWif~G Ef~D · -----· 

"--~ . ® 
. 

/ ."" 
CHARGING END 
F.~ETAL BARREL 
Optical System. The optical system consists of an eyepiece lens and an objective lens. The eyepiece lens gives a magnified view of the calibrated scale. The objective lens gives a greatly magni tied vie~of the shadow of the indicating fiber. 
Charging End. Light enters the dosimeter through the charging end and i I luminates the field of view. 
Protective Cap. A protective cap is fitted over the charging end to prevent
foreign matter from entering the charging end. If the cap is made of a clear material which allows I ight to pass through, the dosimeter may be read with the cap on. When the cap is made of any other material, the cap must be 
removed to take a reading. If the protective cap is lost or defective, it must be replaced with clear cellophane tape or similar material. 
Charging Contact. The charging contact allows the dosimeter to be chargedusing a Charger RADIAC Detector. This i tern wi II be ref&red to as a charger
for the remainder of this lesson. 
315 


NOTE 
Some IM93/UD and IM93A/UD dosimeters may have the word RAD instead of the wordROENTGENS stamped on their calibration scale. The term RAD can be substitutedfor ROENTGEN if rad measurements are required. The term cCy(rad) is used inthis lesson. 
CROSS·SECTIOr~AL VIEV.J OF DOSH!iET~R. 
Ct~L!8RATE:D SCALE 
H\DICAT!!~G FIBER\'IEV!tr\G EI~D \ !01\IZATIOI..J CKAr~liBER / SUPPORT \'fiRE
""' .. ~\ ... , ..... \ ... L LcHARGII-!GEr~o
""--\ JC::::JJI~"""""~~g9jU::V
------..,...,..___,.~ ----:-;-P.4aJ~ -~-Jl
./"" . , -.. ··
j·-_, '4 ~~~ 
C\'EPIECE LEI\S 
~ROTC:CTIVE r ·
OBJECTIVE LEI-.!S 
CHt•.RGI!\G COI\T/~CT
OPYIC!\L SYSTEr,'i 
316 
Total Dosage Range. 
The IM93/UD and IM93A/UD have the same scale. These dosimeters wi I I I measurenuclear radiation on a scale from 0 to 600 cGy(rad). The lm147/PD has a
similar scale except it measures from 0 to 50 cGy(rad) only. 
trt.-e 3/U D· ~f.J D ll!i·S 3NUD'
CAUBRATED SCALE. 
IM·93/UD
ROENTGENS 
0 100 200 300 400. 500 500
~+H-~f+H~-{-i+tm+{-H~i·H++l 
lr~~-147/PD CALIBRATED SCALE. 
RADIACI.~ETER IM·147/PD
ROENTGENS 
0 10 20 30 40 50
b~it{-H+\1-m+{++Hi-H1~ 
317 
The total dosage range for each of the three dosimeter models is indicated 
below: 
IM 93 UD 0 to 600 cGy(rad) 
IM 93A UD 0 to 600 cGy(rad) 
IM 147 PO 0 to 50 cGy(rad) 
Charge a Dosimeter. The dosimeter must be cl1arged before it is put to use. 
It also must be charged whenever it becomes discharged because of leakage or 
exposure to radiation. The dosimeter should be charged in a dust-and 
radiation-free area, if possible. When the dosimeter is charged, it should not be subjected to severe shocks, excessive dampness, or high temperatures.Chargers are issued on a basis of one per four dosimeters, but no more than 
five nor less than two, per company-size unit. 
Description. There are two models of the Charger, RADIAC Detector: the PP1578/PD and the PP1578A/PD. The PP1578A/PD charger is the newer model. The difference between the two models is the improved ease of operation of the new model. The Charger, RADIAC Detector wi II be referred to as the charger
throughout this lesson. -
Charger, RADIAC Detector PP1578/PD. The charger consists of mechanical and electrical parts enclosed in a watertight metal case. Mounted on the top of the case is a rotatable charging knob. Also on top of the case is a chargingsocket with a chuck mechanism that secures the dosimeter during charging. A dust cap is secured to the case by a bead chain. (An adapter that permits the charger to be used to charge United Kingdom dosimeters is stored in the carrying case). A circular glass window in the bottom of the case admits I ight to the bottom of the charging socket. This illuminates the calibrated scale of the dosimeter during charging. A cloth carrying case encloses the assembled charger, adapter, and dust cap. Metal hooks on the back of the carrying case permit the charger to be attached to the b~lt of the operator. 
Charger, RADIAC Detector PP1578A/PD. This charger is the newer model and is easier to operate. A charging pedestal is provided instead of a chargingsocket. The chuck mechanism has been eliminated. The charging knob is 
located on the side of the case. A prismatic lens system directs I ight from the window to the bottom of the charging pedestal. The adapter, when not in use, is stored in a separate cylindrical container.-An elastic strap secures 
the adapter container in the carrying case. 
Common Features of Both Chargers. Both charger models have the same control, which is the charging knob. Clockwise rotation of th~ charging knob generates a positive charge. Counterclockwise rotation of the charging knob generates a negative charge. 
318 

CHARGER, RADI~C DETECTOR PP-1578/PD. CARRYlt-.!G CASE 
CAUTION Use the adapter 01~Y when United Kingdom dosimeters are charged. 
· 	CHARGER, RADIAC DETECTOR. PP-1578A/PD. 
~ 
Ct.RRYH~G Ct.SE. 
\\'I r~ oow 
319 

Operating Instructions for Charger PP1578/PD. Because of the differences between the PP1578/PD charger and the PP1578A/PD charger, the procedures for ..preparing and using each charger model are presented separately. ,. 
Pre-operational Procedure. Before the PP1578/PD charger can be operated, the following steps must be performed: 
Step 1. Remove the charger from the carrying case. 
Step 2. Pull the dust cap straight out of the charging socket. 
Step 3. Check to be sure that the charging socket is clean and dry. 
CAUTION 
The dust cap is not airtight or watertight. If water or moisture has collected, or if dust, dirt, or other foreign matter has entered the charging socket, the charging socket must be cleaned and dried thoroughly before use, or the charger wi II not operate properly. 
Step 4. Rotate the chuck counterclockwise to its fully operated position. 
Step 5. If the charger has n6t been used for a considerab~e time (a month or longer), turn the charging knob clockwise a minimum of 10 revolutions to activate the voltage regulator. 
Step 6. See that the charging end and the body of the dosimeter to be charged 
are thoroughly clean and dry. 
Procedure for Installing the Adapter. If United Kingdom dosimeters are beingcharged, the adaper is instal led by following the steps below. 
Step 1. Remove the adapter from the dust cap and make sure that the adapteris clean and dry. 
Step 2. Insert the adapter, larger end down, into the charging socket. Be sure that the adapter seats firmly in the charging socket. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT attempt to charge other types of dosimeter with the adapter
ins ta II ed. 
The center post of the charger will collect static electricity which 
may affect the dosimeter. Operator should ground the center postagainst the side of the fitting, using any metal object, prior to charging a dosimeter. 
320 

Procedure for Charging a Dosimeter. Once the charger has been prepared it is 
used to charge dosimeters, as follows: 
Step 1. Insert the charging end of the dosimeter into the charging socket as far as it wi II go; apply firm pressure straight downward. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT apply too much pressure on the dosimeter,-o.r the 
plastic disk in the charging end of the dosimeter may 
rupture 
Step 2. Hold the dosimeter firmly in the charging socket. Tighten the chuck 
by rotating it clockwise unti I the dosimeter is held securely in the charging 
socket. 
Step 3. Hold the charger, with the dosimeter instal led, so that the window 1s toward a good source of Iight. A good field expedient is a flashlight. 
Step 4. Watch the calibrated scale of the dosimeter. Turn the charging knob clockwise unti I the dosimeter reading is zero (indicating fiber on 0). If the indicating fiber goes to the left of 0, rotate the chargLng knob back and forth or turn counterclockwise unti I a zero reading on the calibrated scale is obtained. 
Step 5. Look into the viewing end of the dosimeter and observe the calibrated scale. If the indicating fiber can be seen, charge the dosimeter in the normal way. If the indicating fiber cannot be seen, proceed as follows: 
a. 
Rotate the charging knob clockwise five ful I revolutions. Then observe whether the indicating fiber is visible. If the indicating fiber can be seen, charge the dosimeter in the normal way. 

b. 
If the indicating fiber sti II cannot be seen, rota-te the charging knob counterclockwise five ful I revolutions. Then observe whether the indicating fiber has appeared. If the indicating fiber can be seen; charge the dosimeter in the normal way. 

c. 
If the indicating fiber cannot be seen, rotate the charging knob counterclockwise an additional five revolutions and again observe whether the indicating fiber has appeared. If the indicating fiber is visible, charge the dosimeter in the normal way. If the indiating fiber is not visible, the dosimeter or the charger is faulty. 


Procedure for Checking Leakage. Instal I the dosimeter on the charger and watch the indicating fiber closely. The permissible leakage discharge rate is too slow to be seen on the dosimeter calibrated scale. If the indicating fiber can be seen to move upscale away from 0, either thE>-_dosimeter or the charger is dirty or faulty. Proceed as follows: -
Step 1. Loosen the chuck, remove the dosimeter from the charging socket, and observe the reading on the do~imeter calibrated scale. 
321 

Step 2. If the indicating fiber can sti II be seen to move, clean the charging end of the dosimeter. Then repeat the charging procedure. If, after the second charging, leakage still is evident, the dosimeter is faulty. 
Step 3. If leakage is evident when the dosimeter is installed in the charger but not when it is removed, clean the charging socket thoroughly. Then repeatthe procedures for charging a dosimeter. 
Step 4. If leakage sti II is evident when the dosimeter-i..Sin he charger but not when it is remvoed, the charger is faulty. However, the charger can sti II be used if it wi I I charge a dosimeter below zero. If leakage is evident onlywhen the dosimeter is in the charger, proceed as follows: 
a. 
Install the dosimeter in the charger. Press down firmly on the dosimeter. Do not tighten the chuck. 

b. 
Turn the charging knob clockwise unti I the indicating fiber is off the scale to the left of 0. 

c. 
Watch the indicating fiber closely. Remove the dosimeter from the charger the instant the indicating fiber reaches 0 on the calibrated scale. 

d. 
If necessary, repeat Steps a through c unti I a zero-reading is obtained after the dosimeter is removed from the charger~ 


Procedure When a Capacitive Jump Occurs. On some dosimeters, particularly low range instruments, an instantaneous partial discharge may occur as the dosimeter is removed from the charger. This partial discharge is called a capacitive jump. After the dosimeter has been charged, loosen the chuck and remove the dosimeter from the charging socket. Then observe the reading on the calibrated scale. If the indicating fiber has .jumped upscale, proceed as fo I lows: 
Step 1. Install the dosimeter in the charger. Turn the-.-;harging knob clockwise unti I the indicating fiber is on the downscate-side of 0 an amount equal to the capacitive jump. 
Step 2. Remove the dosimeter from the charger and observe the reading. 
Step 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until a zero reading is obtained after the dosimeter has been removed from the charger. A ze~o reading on the dosimeter must be obtained afer the dosimeter has been chargedI and checked. · 
! 
NOTE 
After the PP1578/PD charger has been used to charge the dosimeters, the charger is put back into its case. 
322 

Operating lnsructions for Charger PP1578A/PO 
Pre-operational Procedure. Before the PP1578A/PD charger can be operated, it must be prepared according to the steps below: 
a minimum of 10 revolutions to activate the voltage 
Step 1.  Remove  the charger  from  the carrying  case.  
Step 2.  Unscrew  the dust  cap and  I i ft  it off  the charging pedes tal.  
Step 3.  See  that  the charging pedestal  is clean and dry.  
Step 4.  If  the charger has  not  been used  for  a month  or  longer,  turn  the  

charging knob clockwise regulator. 
Step 5. Place the charger on a flat, level surface, such as a bench or table. Face the window of the charger toward a good source of Iight. 
Step 6. See that the charging end and body of the dosimeter are thoroughly lean. 
Procedure for Charging a Dosimeter. After the charger_has been prepared, i.t is used to charge dosimeters according to the following steps: 
Step 1. Place the charging end of the dosimeter over the charging pedestal. Then press the dosimeter straight down onto the charging pedestal. 
CAUTION 
Be sure to press the dosimeter straight down. Do NOT apply too much pressure to the dosimeter, or the plastic disk in the charging end of the dosimeter may rupture. 
Step 2. Hold the charger, with the dosimeter instal led.~o that the window IS toward a good source of Iight. 
Step 3. Watch the calibrated scale of the dosimeter. Turn the charging knob clockwise unti I the dosimeter reading is zero (indicating fiber on 0). If the indicating fiber goes to the left of 0, rotate the charging knob back and forth or turn it counterclockwise unti I a zero reading on the calibrated scale is obtained. 
Step 4. Look into the viewing end of the dosimeter and observe the calibrated scale. If the indicating fiber can be seen, charge the dosimeter in the normal way. If the indicating fiber cannot be seen, proceed as follows: 
a. Rotate the charging knob clockwise five ful I revolutions. Then observe whether the indicating fiber is visible. If th~ indicating fiber can be seen, charge the dosimeter in the normal way. 
323 

b. 
If the indicating fiber sti II cannot be seen, rotate the charging knob counerclockwise five ful I revolutions. Then observe whether the indicatingfiber has appeared. If the indicating fiber can be seen, charge the dosimeter in the normal way. 

c. 
If the indicating fiber sti II cannot be seen, rotate the charging knob counterclockwise an additional five revolutions and again observe whether the indicati'lg fiber has appeared. If the indicating fiber i-~visible, charge in the normal way. If the indicating fiber is not visible.---i1fe dosimeter or the charger is faulty. 


Procedure for Checking Leakage. Instal I the dosimeter on the charger and watch the indicating fiber closely. The permissible leakage discharge rate is too slow to be seen on the dosimeter's calibrated scale. If the indicatingfiber can be seen to move upscale away from 0, either the dosimeter or the charger is dirty or faulty. Proceed as follows: 
Step 1. Remove the dosimeter from the charging pedestal and observe the reading on the dosimeter calibrated scale. 
Step 2. If the indicating fiber can sti I I be seen to move, clean the chargingend of the dosimeter. Then repeat the charging procedure. If, after the second charging, leakage is still evident, the dosimete-r if-faulty. 
Step 3. If leakage is evident when the dosimeter is instal led in the chargerbut not when it is removed, clean the charging pedestal thoroughly. Then 
repeat the procedures for charging a dosimeter. 
Step 4. If leakage sti II is evident when the dosimeter is in the charger but not when it is removed, the charger is faulty. However, the charger can still be used if it will charge a dosimeter below zero. If leakage is evident o·nlywhen the dosimeter is in the charger, proceed as follows: 
a. 
Install the dosimeter in the charger. Press down--firmly on the dosimeter. 

b. 
Turn the charging knob clockwise until the indicating fiber is off the scale to the left of 0. 

c. 
Wath the indicating fiber closely. Remove the dosimeter from the charger the instant the indicating fiber reaches 0 on the calibrated scale. 

d. 
If necessary, repeat steps a through c until a zero reading is obtained after the dosimeter is removed from the charger. 


Procedure When a Capacitive Jump Occurs. On some dosimeters, particularly low 
range instruments, an instantaneous partial discharge may occur as the dosimeer is removed from the charger. This partial discharge is called a capacitive jump. After the dosimeter has been charged, ~emove the dosimeter from the charging socket. Then observe the reading on the calibrated scale. 
If the indicating fiber has jumped upscale, proceed as follows: 
324 

Step 1. Instal I the dosimeter in the charger. Turn the charging knob clockwise unti I the indicating fiber is on the downscale side of 0 an amount equal to the capacitive jump. 
Step 2. Remove the dosimeter from the charger and observe the reading. 
Step 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 unti I a zero reading is obtained after the dosimeter has been removed from the charger. A zero read{ng on the dosimeter must be obained after the dosimeter has been charged and-tnecked. 
NOTE 
After the PP1578A/PD charger has been used, it IS 
replaced in its carrying case. 

Dosimeter Reading. To prevent excessive leakage of charge, dosimeters must be recharged after no more than 2 or 3 days of use (preferably every day). They must also be recharged when the total dose reaches or exceeds 500 cGy(rad) on the scale. Recharging times are normally designated in the unit SOP. 
Procedure for Leakage Testing. The charge that is placed on the dosimeter wi I I gradually leak off even though the dosimeter is n9t exposed to X-rays or gamma rays. This leakage, if excessive, wi I I cause an improper reading on the dosimeter during use. The leakage should not be more than 2 percent of ful 1scale reading per day for a good dosimeter. Check the leakage rate as discussed below and continued on the page following. 
NOTE 
If the dosimeter has not been charged for an extended period of time (or has been stored in an uncharged condition), and is then fully charged, excessive leakage may occur. This excessive leakage is due to insulation soak-in (penetration of part of the charge into the insulation). Do NOTwperform a leakage-rate check on the dosimeter unti I it has been charged to 0 for 5 consecutive days. Ignore the daily leakage that may occur during this period. 
Step 1. Charge the dosimeter to read 0 on the calibrated scale. 
Step 2. Store the dosimeter in an area free of radiation for a 24-hour period. 
Step 3. Note the reading on the calibrated scale of the dosimeter. This reading represents the leakage rate in cGy(rad). 
325 

NOTE If the leakage rate reading for a period of one day is difficult to determine, the charged dosimeter may be allowed to set for several days unti I a readable value can be obtained. When the reading is obtained, divide the total reading by the number of days that the charged dosimeter was allowed to set to obtain the averagadai ly leakage rate. Step 4. If the leakage rate is greater than 12 cGy(rad) per day for the 
IM93/UD or IM9A/UD, or 1 cGy(rad) per day for the IM47/PD, clean the charging 
end of the dosimeter. 
Step 5. Recheck the leakage rate following Steps 1 through 4. If the leakage 

rate is sti I I greater than the values given in Step 4, the dosimeter is 

defective and should be replaced. 
The acceptable leakage rate per day for each of the dosimeter models is as 
fo I lows: 

IM93/UD .....................12 cGy(rad) 
IM93A/UD ....................12 cGy(rad) 
IM47/PD .....................·.1 cGy(rad) 

Perform Operator Maintenance on Dosimeters and Chargers. 
Maintenance of the dosimeter consists of the following: Cleaning and decontamination. Checking leakage rate. Preventive maintenance checks and services. 
Cleaning and Decontamination The following equipment and materials are required for maintenance of the 
dosimeter: RADIAC detector charger. Detergent (commercial type). Denatured alcohol. 
Cleaning. To clean the socket in the charging end of tne dosimeter, proceed as fo I I ows: 
326 

CAUTION 
Do NOT insert sharp objects into the charging end of the dosimeter. Sharp objects wi II damage the interior of the socket and the charging contact. 
Step 1. Remove the protective cap from the dosimeter. 
Step 2. Carefully wash the open ends of the dosimeter ~~a few drops of denatured alcohol. 
CAUTION 
Do NOT blow on the dosimeter and do NOY use a drying cloth. The charging end of the dosimeter must be free of moisture and Iin t. 
Step 3.  Thoroughly dry  the dosimeter by rapidly waving  it  in  the air.  
Step 4.  Replace  the protective cap  on  the dosimeter.  
NOTE  

If the protective cap is lost or defective, it must be replaced by clear eel lophane tape or similar material. 
Decontaminating. To decontaminate the dosimeter and charger, proceed as fo I I ows: 
Step 1. Prepare a solution of detergent and clean water. 
Step 2. Wash the dosimeter thoroughly with a cloth dampened 1n the solution. 
Step 3. Rinse the dosimeter with a cloth dampened in cl~n water. 
Step 4. Wash both ends of the dosimeter with denatured alcohol. 
Leakage Test. Leakage testing wi II be in accordance with procedures out I ined previously. 
Routine Services. Routine services are tasks performed by the operator antime 
they must be done. The tasks involve non-operational care of the equipment. Tasks such as cleaning off dirt, dust, and grease, or replacing a loose protective cap are examples of routine services. Routine services shall be done anytime they are required .. 
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS). The PMCS table is a checklist for the operator in evaluating the dosimeter a~d its readiness condition. Columns in the table identify the items requiring inspection and 
the interal. They provide a procedure and standard for checking, and a standard for determining whether the dosimeter is ready for its mission. 
327 

OPERATOR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND 
SERVJCES (PMCS)•. 
PROCEDURES 
CHECK FOR
ITEM ITEM TO BE INTERVAL AND HAVE REPAIRED

NO. . INSPECTED 
OR ADJUSTED 8 0 A M AS N ECESSAR'f 
NOTE 
Dosimeters should normally be held In a charged condition (standby} prior to use/mission. If dosimeters are not held in standby, perform . leakage test prjor _.to. use. 

1. 	Exces.Sive, X X Read the dosimeter when standby removing it from standby leakage and if reading is con
siderably higher than other ctosimeter readings · perior_m leakage test 

-. 	' 
. 
2. 	
Ability X X Charge dosimeter to 0. to ch:J.iQI;! ' 

NOTE For dosimeters held in standby, perform items 1 and 2 only and return to standby. 


3. 	
Excessive X Read dosimeters during use 


leakage 	to record exposure. When large unexplained readings are recorded, perform· leakage test to 
i . 	verify dosimeter operattQn. 
4. 	Recharge X After use, recharge , 
for stc.ncby '' dosimeter to 0 and place -: i ' in ste.ndby.
' 
FOR READINESS 
·RE?ORTING 
EQUIPMENT 
IS NOT READY/ 
AVAILABLE IF: 

More than 1~ 
of on hand 
dosimeters 
are unable to 
pass leakage 
test 
Unable to charge 
more than 10% 
of on hand do
simeters to 0. 
328 



IM93()/UO and IM147/PD dosimeters wi I I be inspected and calibrated by an ACRC or area support team possessing the AN/UDM/2 Calibration Set, RADIAC at 5-year intervals. 
NOTE 
Perform checks in the order listed: 8-Before, 0-During, 
A-After, and M-Monthly. 
RADIAD Detector Chargers. Maintenance on the charger PP1578/PD consists of 
cleaning the charging socket and adapter. Maintenance of the charger PP1578A/PD consists of cleaning the charging pedestal and adapter. These items are cleaned with detergent and rinsed thoroughly with clean water. as Iittle water as possible.  Use  
CAUTION  
Do  NOT  use  cleaning compound  or  other solvent  type cleaners.  
Air dry the equipment thoroughly.  Do  not  wipe  the adapter,  the  inside of  the  

charging socket, or the outside of the charging pedestal with a cloth or other material that may leave Iint or other residue on the ch~rging surfaces. Such foreign matter would defeat the purpose of cleaning. 
Clean the exterior of the charger with a clean, dry, Iint-free cloth. 
Field Testing. The chargers are field-tested using the following procedures: 
Step 1. Rotate the charging knob clockwise five ful I revolutions. 
Step 2. Instal I a dosimeter in the charging socket of the PP1578/PO, or on 

the charging pedestal of the PP1578A/PO. 
Step 3. Charge the dosimeter. A zero reading ont the do~meter calibrated 

scale should be obtained with no less than one-fourth revolution nor more than 
five revolutions of the charging knob. 
Step 4. Check the performance of the charger and the dosimeter. 

NOTE To keep the maximum number of usable chargers in the field, users wi I I retain those faulty chargers than can charge a dosimeter below zero. 
329 

USE AND MAINTAIN IM174 SERIES RADIACMETER 
CONDITIONS 
Nuclear burst activity has been reported in your area of operations. You are given an IM174 Series Radiacmeter. The appropriate operator's technical manual (TM) or extract for the IM174 series radiacmeter used is avai !able for. preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) only.· {ou are also given appropriate battery or batteries; clean, Iint-free clot~~a soft brush; a stiff brush; fine sandpaper (No. 000); a flat-tip screwdriver (or similar object); a general cleaning solution (if needed). If a cleaning solvent such as trichlorotri fluroethane, is used, you should be in a well-ventilated area. Do not breathe the vapors. You are to monitor your unit's area for possible radiological contamination. 
STANDARDS 
The following procedures are performed in accordance with (lAW) the TM appropriate for the IM174 model used: 
1. 
The appropriate battery or batteries are instal led. 

2. 
PMCS are performed. 


a. 
AI I deficiencies/shortcomings correctable at operator level are identified and corrected. 

b. 
AI I deficiencies/shortcomings not corrected are reported to the supervisor. 


NOTE: 	Uncorrected deficiencies/shortcomings must be recorded on DA Form 2404 lAW DA Pam 738-750. However, this is not a performance measure of this task. 
3. The IM174 Radiacmeter is prepared for use. 
4. 
The designated area is monitored for the presence of radiological contamination. 

5. The dose rate reading is determined and reported to supervisor. 

6. 
The IM174 Radiacmeer is shut down after use. PERFORMANCE MEASURE 


1. Installs battery or batteries 
a. Opens battery compartment and inspects the insiae for s1gns of water leakage, loose terminals, corrosion, and dirt. 
b. Cleans battery compartment, if needed. 
330 

c. 
Checks the battery or batteries for signs of leakage and corrosion. Replaces, if necessasry. 

d. 
If the IM174 is equipped with a Iight, checks the battery/lamp compartment. Replaces lamp, if necessary, lAW TM 11-6665-232-12, paragraph 4-9. 


2. 	Performs PMCS. 
a. 	
Checks instrument for cleanliness. 

b. 	
Inspects instrument for cracked or broken meter glass. 


c. Checks to see that the mechanical action of each knob and switch is smooth and free of external or internal binding and that no looseness is apparent. Checks panel for sticking or bent pointer. 
3. 	Prepares the radiacmeter for use. 
a. 	
Zeroes the instrument. 

b. 	
Performs battery check. 


4. Monitors designated area. 
NOTE: At this point the evaluator wi I I set a reading on the radiacmeter. 

~ 	5. Determines dose rate reading and reports to evaluator. NOTE: This reading must be within+ 10 percent. 
6. 	
Performs shutdown procedures. 

7. 	
Completes the task within 30 minutes. 


REFERENCES 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-3003 

USE AND MAINTAIN IM174-SERIES RADIACMETER 
In order to operate and maintain the IM174 Series Radiacmeter, you must learn 
the use of the IM174 Series Radiacmeter, the procedures for instal ling 
batteries and placing the equipment into operation, and performing operator's 
maintenance. 
Use 	of the IM174 Series Radiacmeter 
The IM174 Series Radiacmeter .is a portable, tactical moni taring and survey instrument designed to measure the dose rate of gamma radiation. It is 
331 
normally issued on the basis of one per platoon-size unit. Once nuclearoperations have started, company/battery/troop units use the IM174 SeriesRadiacmeter to monitor for radiation. When monitoring reports do not provide
sufficient information for evaluation of contaminated areas, a radiological
survey may be directed. The IM174 Series Radiacmeter is the instrument used
to perform radiological surveys which determine the extent and dose rates of
~adiation in the area. 
Instal I Batteries in the IM174 Series Radiacmeter 
In order for you to instal I batteries in the IM174 Series Radiacmeter, you
must be fami I iar with each model and type of radiacmeter and the type of
battery required for each. 
IM1748/PD Single-battery Type Radiacmeter. The IM1748/PD single-battery type
radiacmeter uses one BA 30/U battery. The following procedure is used to
instal I the BA 30/U battery. 
Step 1. Unsnap the snap fasteners and remove the radiacmeter from the
carrying case. 
Step 2. Set the zero control to OFF. 
Step 3. Unscrew the two captive screws holding the battery compartment c~ver;
and remove it. 
Step 4. Insert a BA 30/U (or BA 3030/U for a low temperature operation)battery into the battery compartment following the instructions on the labelto insure that the battery polarity is correct. 
Step 5. Replace the battery compartment cover. Tighten the two captivescrews firmly. 
Step 6. Replace the radiacmeter 1n its carrying case, a~ secure the snapfasteners. 
332 
333 

BATTERY BOARD ASSEMBLY ANDLOCATION OF BATTERY CONTACTS. 
BATFERY CONTACTSFOR BA1391/U 
BATTERY CONTAcTsFOR 8A1006/U. 
BATTERY BOARD 
ASSEMBLY----------~~ 
CAPTIVE SCREW 
Step 6. Using the same procedure given in Step 5, instal I two BA 1391/U
batteries. Carefully insert the two BA 1391/U batteries in their contacts sothat the+ (plus) polarity marking on each battery coincide with the+polarity marking on the battery board assembly. 
Step 7. Carefully position the BA 1396/U batteries on board assembly,ensuring the(+-) polarity markings coincide. 
Step 8. Carefully position the battery cover, which contains the batteryboard assembly. Check the cable which is attached to the battery boardassembly to be sure it is at the rear of the radiacmeter. 
Step 9. 
Secure the battery cover, which contains the batllery board assembly,
to the radiacmeter by tightening the captive screw. 
Step 10. Replace the radiacmeter in its carrying case and secure the snap
fasteners. 
334 
IM174/PD Radiacmeter. The IM174/PD Radiacmeter uses three batteries. Two are BA 1318/U batteries and one is a BA 1288/U battery. The following procedure is used to instal I the batteries. 
Step 1. Unsnap the snap fasteners and remove the radiacmeter from the carrying case. 
Step 2. Loosen the thumbscrew (turn it counterclockwise~ on the battery box, and remove the battery box from the recess in the bottom~over plate of the radiacmeter. Do not place any excess strain on the cable. 
IM:.174/PD WITH BATTERY BOX . REMOVED. 
CAPTIVE SCREW 
THUMBSCREW 
,.__S EJ\LI N G FLANGE 
BATTERY BOX 
Step 3. Press down the lock plate, turn it to the left, and I i ft off the battery box. 
Step 4. Lift the phenolic retaining plate from the battery box. 
Step 5. Examine the battery cavities and clean them, if necessary. 
Step 6. Install battery BA 1288/U. in its cavity in the battery box so that the+ (plus) sign faces the center (threaded shaft). 
335 

Step 7. Instal I each battery BA 1318/U in its respective cavity in the 
battery box; observe the polarity markings on the bottom of the battery box and on each battery. 
Step 8. Replace the phenolic retaining plate on the battery box by orientingthe phenolic retaining plate with the battery box so that the locating pin on the battery box mates with the locating hole on the phenolic retaining plate. 
Step 9. Replace the lock plate by orienting it with the~attery box so that the locating holes and locking holes on the lock plate mate with the locatingpins and the lock plate screws on the battery box. Press down on the lock plate, and turn it to the right until it is secure under the lock plate screws. 
CAUTION 
If the battery box is to be replaced in the radiacmeter without batteries (for shipment or storage), secure the lock plate to the battery box. This wi I I prevent the lock plate and the phenolic retaining plate from slipping off the lock plate screws and becoming damaged. 
Step 10. Wrap the cable around the battery box. Be sure that the cable is wrapped snugly and flush against the sealing flange (no more than one laye~ of cable) of the battery box. 
CAUTION 
. 
Do NOT allow the wrapped cable to slip down into the smaller portion of the recess. The cable might be cut and thereby prevent the radiacmeer from operating when the thumbscrew is tightened. 
Step 11. Carefully replace the battery box in the recess of the bottom cover plate of the radiacmeer. Make sure that the cable is st-LJI in place, and then hand tighten the thumbscrew. Do NOT overtighten the thumbscrew. 
Step 12. Replace the radiacmeter in the carrying case and secure the snapfasteners. 
Operate the IM174 Series Radiacmeter. 
To operate the IM174 Series Radiacmeter, you must know the function of the controls. You must also be able to zero the radiacmeter and check the condition of the batteries. 
IM174A/PD Controls and Panel Meter. Besides the panel meter, the IM174A/PDhas a zero control, function switch, calibration control, and lamp switch. The function of each control is described as follows: 
336 

Zero Control 
o 
When placed at OFF, turns the radiacmeter off. 
Q 
When placed at SET, turns the radiacmeter on and adjusts the meter tozero. 
lM-1 74AIPD CONTROLS AND PANELMETER. 
ZERO COr-ITROL 
PANEL METER 
DO NOT RE~VE CAP 
FUNCTION SWITCH 
CALISRAT!Ori CONTROLREAR VIEW 
FRONT VIEW 
0 
Function switch is spring-loaded. 
o 
When held at ZERO, permits the meter to be adjusted to zero 1n or out
of radiation field. 
0 
When held at CHECK, permits the circuits and batteries to be checked. 
0 
When ready to operate center position (normal operating position),permits intensity dose rates to be measured on the 0-500 cGy(rad)/hr
scale of the meter. 
337 
Step 6.  Release  the  function switch.  The pointer of  the meter should  return  
to 0.  
Step 7.  Unsnap  the carrying  case  snap  fastener  at  the  rear  of  the carrying  

case. Pull the top part of the carrying case over the top of the radiacmeter, and fasten the snap fasteners on the sides and front of the carrying case. 
NOTE 
During operation of the radiacmeter, the radiacmeter should be positioned so 
that the meter face is up and parallel to he ground. Hold the meter waist high and make a 360° turn (circle), recording the highest dose rate reading observed. 
Step 8. Measure the radiation dose by taking the reading indicated on the 0-500 cGy(rad)/hr scale of the meter. Observe the radiation readings 
through the front clear face of the carrying case. 
NOTE 
When the radiacmeter is operated continuously over a period of hours, or when extreme temperature changes are experienced, a smal I d!i ft or change in the zero reading may occur. To correct this action, the operator must readjustthe appropriate control (steps 3 through 6). Measurements taken with the radiacmeter are not accurate unless the zero control is properly adjusted. 
Some radiacmeters do NOT have an instrument Iight, but have a luminescent radioactive dial that permits reading of the meter under low I ight level conditions. Others do not have a radioactive dial, but have an instrument I ight that permits reading of the meter under low I ight level conditions. To operate the instrument Iight, press and hold the lamp switch; the lamp should Iight. When the lamp switch is released, the lamp should go out. 
Step 9. When radiation dose rate readings have been co~eted, turn off the radiacmeter as follows: 
a. 	
Unsnap the snap fasteners on the front and sides of the carrying case. 

b. 	
Push back the top part of the carrying case. 

c. 	
Turn the zero control counterclockwise to OFF. 

d. 	
Pull the top of the carrying case over the top of the radiacmeter, 


and fasten the snap fasteners on the sides and front of the carrying case. 
338 

CAUTION 
When the equipment is not in use, remove the batteries. 
If 	the radiacmeter is equipped with an instrument Iight, 
the battery you remove from the instrument I ight battery compartment should be identified. This battery should not be used for any other purpose, and should be returned 
to 	its respective location when the batterie~ are reinstalled 
in 	the equipment. 
Operation of the IM174A/PD Under Unusual Conditions. The radiacmeter can operate under unusual conditions, such as extreme heat, cold, humidity, and altitude, without special precautionary measures. 
At low temperatures, the batteries used to power the radiacmeter have a shorter Iife than at room temperature. At -50°F, a continuous working Iife of approximately 9 hours can be expected. For a longer period, replace batteries with fresh batteries. 
CAUTION 
When the equipment has been exposed to temperatures below 0°F, allow the equipment to warm up to 0°F; (in a shelter, if necessary) before opening for service or battery change. Failure to observe this caution may result in cracking of the insulation on the battery cable. 
If readings must be taken under the adverse conditions described above, a spare set of batteries should be available. These batteries may be stored 
inside the operator's clothing so that the operator's body wi II supply the heat necessary to keep the batteries at a desirable operating temperature. The batteries may be exchanged with the cold batteries. The cold batteries wi I I recover after warm-up, and may be reused. 
If you plan to operate a single-battery type IM1748/P~ radiacmeter in temperatures below 10°F, a BA 3030/U battery should be instal led. 
IM174/PD Controls and Panel Meter. Besides the panel meter, the IM174/PD has 
a set control, a function is described below.  switch, and a CALIB Control. The function of each  
Set Control.  
0  When  placed  1n OFF  position,  turns  radiacmeter off.  

0 	When turned clockwise (past click), turns radiacmeter ON and adjusts meter to zero (with function switch held at ZERO). 
Function Switch. The function switch has five position~: 
0 	Zero. Spring-loaded position, sets up radiacmeer to permit adjusting (with set control) panel meter to zero in radiation field. 
339 

0 
Check. Sets up radiacmeter to check operation of the ionization chamber. May be used for rough measurement (survey) of lowintensity radiation dose rate on 0.1 to 10 cGy(rad)/hr scale (CHECK position only) of panel meter. 
0 
Read. Sets up radiacmeter for normal operation. Radiation dose rates measured on 0 to 500 cGy(rad)/hr scale of panel meter. 
0 	Elec Cal. Sets up radiacmeter to simulate 500 cGy(rad)/hr radiation dose rate to permit adjusting (with CALIS Control) panel meter to 500 cGy ( rad )/h r . 
PAf-.!EL METER. 
1·500 cGY\r.:Ql/hr
SCALG 
I
FUf\CitOf\ S\\'ITCH 
C.C..LIS?.t..TIOf>! COf~TROL 
Linearity. Spring-loaded position; sets up radi~cmeter to simulate 50 
cGy(rad)/hr radiation dose rate for checking Iineari ty of panel meter at 
medium intensity dose rates. Also checks performance of batteries. 
340 

CALIS Control 
o 	Potentiometer-type control protected by cap; permits operator to adjust panel member to 500 cGy(rad)/hr when function switch is set to ELEC CAL. 
CAUTION 
The calibration control on the left side of t&e front panel (marked OPERATOR DO NOT REMOVE) is used by higher category maintenance personnel only during radiacmeter calibration with a radioactive source. Under no circumstances should the operator or organizational maintenance personnel remove the cap of this calibration control. 
Panel Meter 
Indicates radiation dose rate from 0-500 cGy(rad)/hr on the 0-500 scale with function switch at READ. 
o 
Operations of the IM174/PD Under Usual Conditions. Simp! ified operating instructions are provided on the OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS plate on the rear of the radiacmeter. Detailed operating instructions are ~rov~ded below and continue on the following page. 
NOTE 
During the starting procedure and the operating procedure, the radiacmeter should be zero-adjusted and operated while the meter is in the same plane. For example, if the meter is horizontal with respect to the ground during zero-adjustment, the meter should be kept in a horizontal position during the remainder of the starting and operating procedures. If the plane of the meter is changed, the meter should again be zero-adjusted; otherwise; incorrect readings may be obtained. 
To start the radiacmeter after any shutdown, the following procedures must be performed: 
Step 1. Unsnap the snap fasteners on the front and sides of the carrying case. 
Step 2. Push back the top part of the carrying case, and secure it to the carrying case snap fasteners near the rear of the radiacmeter. 
Step 3. Turn on the radiacmeter by turning the set control clockwise (just past the click) from OFF. AI low at least 2 minutes for the radiacmeter to warm up. 
NOTE 
If time permits, allow 20 minutes for complete warm-up. 
341 

Step 4. Hold the function switch at ZERO, and adjust the SET control unti I the pointer on the panel meter indicates 0. 
Step 5. Release the function switch to the CHECK position. The panel meter pointer should give a sudden kick up-scale and then drop back to 0. 
Step 6. Set the function switch to ELEC CAL. The panel meter pointer should indicate 500 cGy(rad)/hr. 
If the pointer does not indicate 500 cGy(rad)/hr, remove the cap from the CALIS control (on the right-hand side of the front panel) and adjust the control unti I the panel meter pointer indicates 500 cGy(rad)/hr. Replace the cap on the CALIS control. 
----------·--· ADJUST METER TO 500 cGy(RAD)/HR. 
NOTE 
This procedure provides an indication that the radiacmeter is probably calibrated. If a panel meter indication of 500 cGy(rad)/hr cannot be obtained 
by adjusting the CALIS control, change the batteries and repeat the procedures given in Steps 3 through 6. If a panel meter indication of 500 cGy(rad)/hr still cannot be obtained by adjusting the CALIS control-,__the radiacmeter is defective and should be turned in for higher category maintenance. 
Step 7. Hold the function swi tGh in the LINEARITY position. The panel meter pointer would fall within the red mark on the face of the meter. 
342 

NOTE 

If the pointer indicates outside the red mark, change the batteries and repeat the procedures given in steps 3 through 7. 
CAUTION 
Continuous operation over a period of hours OL extreme temperature 
changes may cause a smal I drift or change in the ZERO adjustment or 
in the ELEC CAL calibration. To correct this action, readjust the 
SET control (step 4) and the CAL control (Step 6). 
To operate the radiacmeter after starting it, you perform the following steps: 
Step 1. Set the function switch to READ. The radiation dose rate will be 
indicated on the 0 to 500 cGy(rad)/hr scale of the panel meter. 
Step 2. When the radiation dose rate measurements have been completed, shut down the radiacmeter. 
To stop the operation of the radiacmeter and put it away, you do the fo I lowing: 
Step 1. Turn the SET control to OFF. 
Step 2. Unsnap the carrying case snap fasteners at the rear of the radiacmeter. 
Step 3. Pul I the top of the carrying case over the top of the radiacmeter, and fasten it to the snap fasteners on the front and sides of the carrying 
case. 
NOTE 
If the radiacmeter is not to be kept in use~, -remove the batteries. 
Operation of the IM174/PD Under Unusual Conditions. 
The radiacmeter can operate under unusual conditions, such as extreme heat, cold, humidity, and altitude, without special precautionary measures. At 
temperatures below +35°F, however, the batteries that supply power to the 
radiacmeter have reduced efficiency which may result in unsatisfactory equipment performance. To avoid this condition, proceed as follows: 
Step 1. Loosen the thumbscrew and remove the battery box from the radiacmeter bottom plate cover. 
Step 2. Stretch out the cable connecting the battery b~ to the radiacmeter. 
343 

Step 3. Place the battery box under the operator's clothing so that the body heat wi Ii keep the batteries at a desirable operating temperature. 
Monitoring Techniques Using the IM174 Radiacmeter 
There are two techniques for moni taring dose rate with the IM174 Radiacmeter. They are the direct technique and the indirect technique. 
Direct Technique. The direct determination of ground do~ rate is the simplest and most precise of the monitoring techniques. The unshielded ground (outside) dose rate may be determined directly by standing at the desired location, holding the IM174 radiacmeter waist high in a vertical position (face up), turning with the radiacmeter in a 360° turn (circle), and recording the highest dose rate reading observed. The preferred procedure is to take readings in the open at least 10 meters away from buildings, other large structures, or objects that may shield out a portion of the radiation. 
Indirect Technique. Monitoring Inside Shelters. Within the contaminated area, monitoring wi II normally be performed from within shelters or fortifications. The monitoring reading is obtained by noting the highest dose rate measured by the radiacmeter when it is held in the center of the shelter, one meter above the floor (waist high) and turning in a 360° circle. 
Perform Operator Maintenance on the IM174 Series Radiacmeter 
To perform operator maintenance on the IM174 Series Radiacmeter, you must be able to do the required operator preventive maintenance checks and services. 
Operator's Preventive Maintenance 
Operator' Is preventive maintenance is the systematic care, serv1c1ng, and 
inspection of equipment to prevent the occurrence of trouble, reduce downtime, and assure that the equipment is serviceable. 
Systematic care. Systematic care is essential to the proper upkeep and operation of equipment. The cleaning operations should be performed once a day. However, if the equipment is not used daily, cleaning should be performed before operation, after any extended shutdown, or once a week while equipment is kept in standby condition. 
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services. Preventive maintenance checks and services are made to determine serviceability, that is, to determine that the equipment is in good general (physical) condition, in good operating condition, and Iikely to remain serviceable. 
NOTE 
For frequency of calibration and maintenance calibration-check, refer to TB 43-180. 
344 

Scope of Operator Maintenance 
The maintenance duties assigned to the operator of the IM174 Series 
Radiacmeter are given below. These duties do not require tools or test 
equipment. Operator maintenance duties are
o 
Cleaning the radiacmeter 
o Performing daily preventive checks and serv1ces 
o 
Performing monthly preventive maintenance checks and services 
o 
Troubleshooting 
o 
Replacing the batteries and lamp 
NOTE 
The radiacmeter (except for the instrument Iight) is of sealed construction 
and does not permit the entry of dirt, dust, or moisture. Disassembly of the 
radiacmeter (other than for removal of batteries and cleaning of the battery
compartment) should not be attempted by the operator; a higher category of 
maintenance or repair is required. 
NOTE 
The IM174LA/PD radiacmeter, in limited storage, does not require periodicpreventive maintenance. However, before the radiacmeter is placed into operation, the operator must perform the required daily preventive maintenance checks and services. 
Cleaning. Materials required for cleaning the radiacmeter include: 
o Trichlorotrifluoroethane, Cleaning Compound, Freorr_FGA 

o Cleaning cloth 


o 
Soft brush 
o 
Stiff Brush 
o 
Fine sandpaper (No. 000) 
Procedures for cleaning the radiacmeter are as follows: 
Step 1. Inspect the exterior of the radiacmeter. The exterior surfaces should be free from dust, dirt, grease, and fungus. Dust and loose dirt maybe removed with a clean, soft cloth. 
345 

WARNING 

Adequate ventilation should be provided while using TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE. 
Prolonged breathing of vapor should be avoided. The solvent should not be 
used near heat or open flame; the products of decomposition are toxic and 
irritating. Since TRICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE dissolves natural oi Is, prolonged 
contact with skin should be avoided. When necessary, use gloves which the 
solvent cannot penetrate. If the solvent is taken internally, consult a 
doctor immediately. 
Step 2. Remove grass, fungus, and ground-in dirt from the case; use a cloth 
dampened (not wet) with the cleaning compound. 
Step 3. Remove grease, fungus, and ground-in dirt from the carrying case and the sling assembly; use a stiff brush to remove excess dirt, and apply a cloth dampened (not wet) with trichlorotrifluoroethane. 
CAUTION 
Do 	NOT press on the meter face (glass) when cleaning; the meter may be 
damaged. 
Step 4. Clean the front panel, the meter, and the con~rol-knobs; use a soft, 
clean cloth. If difficulty in removing dirt occurs, dampen the cloth in water. Mild soap may be used to make the cleaning more effective. 
Step 5. Inspect the battery compartment (and the lamp battery compartment if the radiacmeter contains an instrument Iight). The compartment should be free of dirt, rust, corrosion, and fungus. 
o Remove rust and corrosion from the battery contacts with fine sandpaper. 
o 
Remove dust and loose dirt from the compartment wi~ a soft brush. 
o 
Remove fungus and ground-in dirt from the battery compartment with a cloth dampened (not wet) with trichlorotri fluoroethane. 
Daily Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 
Preventive maintenance checks and services of the IM174 Series Radiacmeter assist operators in determining and maintaining serviceabi Iity of the equipment. 
The following charts specify checks and services that must be accomplisheddaily under the following conditions: 
0 	Before operation, and after any extended shutdown._ 
0 	Once a week while the equipment is kept in a standby (ready for 
immediate use) condition 

346 

o 
When the equipment is initially instal led (received) 
The following charts indicate what to inspect, how to inspect, and what thenormal conditions are. 
If a defect cannot be remedied by the operator, ahigher category of maintenance or repair is required. Note any deficiencieswhich cannot be correcsted on DA Form 2404, and turn the radiacmeter into
organizational maintenance. 
O?erator's daily preventive caintenance checks ~,dservices chart for the 1M-174A/PD radiacmeter. 
Sequence Item t~.be
Num:,er Inspected Procedures 

1 lH-174A/PD 	Clean· equipent. 
-='-c
2 Het<:!r glass 	lnspect for cracked or brokenmeter glass. 
3 Controls and 
~~ile ~aking operational checkindicators (iteWJ 4), observe that cecha
nical action of each.knob ands~itch ~s snooth and free ofexternal or int~rr.al binding.Al!o, check meter f~r stickingor bent pointer. 
~OTE 
Knobs that require frequenttightening should have setsc=e~sre?laced. 
4 OpcratioT'\ Check operation of equip~e~t.
-'---. .. . 
347 
~----------~----------------~-------------------------·----------------., 
Sequence 
1\u:=~er 
1 
2 
3 
4 
5 
6 
O?erator's daily preventive ~ai~tenance checks and services chart for the IM-174/PD radiacneter. 
~-Item to be 
"'-Inspected 
IM-174/PD 
Meter glass 

Controls and 
ino icator. 

Carryi~g case 
SET control 
F11nction s'Witch ·c:nd SET control 
·Procedures 
Clean equipoent. 
Inspect for cracked or broken oeter glass. 
1·7hile oaking operating checks, (sequences 4 through 12), chec~ to see that cechanic3l action of e~ch control LS s~ooth and free of external or internal binding and that no looseness is apparent. Also, check panel met.er for sticki~g or bent po;nter. 
NOTE 
Knobs that require frequent 
tightening should have set
scre'Ws replaced. 

O?ERATING CHECKS 
Release sn~p fasteners on front and sides cf carryLng case, Push back top of car~ing case, and secure it to snap fasteners at rear of radiacrr.eter. 
Rotate SET co~trol clock'Wise from O?Fj p~nel oeter pointer ::loves to~ard high end of scale. (If ti~e pe~its, allo'W 20 ~inute 'Wa~u?.) 
Hold function Switch at Z~~O, ~nd cdjust SET cc~trol until p~nel c~ter pointer indicates 0. 
~-------~--~-~--------~------------------~-----------------------------------~ 

348 

(continued). Ope_rator' s daily ·p::-eve;;tive ::.ainter:.a:-~ce 
checks  and  services chart  
Sequence  ·r tem  to be  
'Nuober  Inspected  
7  Function s....,itch  
8  Func t io'n  s....,i t ch  
and  CPJ..IB  
•L·.;..,  c~~m trol  
9  Function svitch  
10  Function svitch  
11  SET control  
12  Carrying  case  

for the IH-174/?D rc;diacrneter_ 
Procedures 
Release function s~~ich to CHZCK; panel meter pointer kicks up-scale a~d then drops 
)ack to 0. 
Set function s....,itch to ELEC C.~ and adjust CALIB control 
~ntil panel weter pointer indicates 500 cGy(rad)/hr. 
Hold function s~itch at LIN:::ARITY; panel meter pointe! should indicate within red mark ( 50 cGy(rad)(hr + 5). 
Release function s~~tch to 
READ; panel meter pointer 
should indicate 0 (if no 
radiation is present). 

Rotate SET control to OFF. 
Unsnap fasteners, pull top of carryLng case over top of radiacmeter, and secure snap fasteners. 
349 

USE AND MAINTAIN AN/PDR 27 RADIAC SET 
CONDITIONS 
You are given a complete AN/PDR27 RADIAC Set. The appropriate operator's
technical manual (TM) or extract for the AN/PDR27 model used is avai !able for preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS) only. You are also given a bucket of water; soft, cl~an, lint-free cloths; appropriate batteries; and a screwdriver. Personnel, equipment, and supplies that are suspected to be radiologically contaminated are present. 
STANDARDS 
The following is performed in accordance with the TM appropriate for the AN/PDR 27 model used. 
1. PMCS are performed. 
a. 
AI I deficiencies/shortcomings correctable at operator level are 
identified and corrected. 


b. 
AI I deficiencies/shortcomings not corrected are reported to the supervisor. 


NOTE 
Uncorrected, deficiencies/shortcomings must be recorded on DA Form 2404 in accordance with (lAW) DA Pam 738-750. However, this is not a performance measure of this task. 
2. 
The AN/PDR 27 RADIAC Set is prepared for use. 

3. 
Personnel, equipment, and supplies are monitored so that the probe does NOT touch iterns being man ilored. 


4., The presence of radiological contamination is determined. 
5. 
The type (beta, gamma, or beta/gamma) of radiation present is identified. 

6. 
The dose rate reading for gamma is determined and reported to supervisor. PERFORMANCE MEASURES 


1. 
Performs PMCS. 

2. 
Prepares the RADIAC Set for use. 

3. 
Monitors personnel, eqtl;ipment, and supplies. 

4. 
Do~s not touch the probe to the object being monitored. 


350 

5. 
Determine if radiological contamination is present. 

6. 
Identifies the type of radiation, if present. 

7. 
Determines the dose rate reading. 

8. 
Completes the task within 30 minutes. REFERENCES FM 21-3, Task 031-505-3009 


351 

USE AND MAINTAIN AN/PDR27 RADIAC SET 

The AN/PDR 27 RADIAC Set is a portable, battery-operated radiation detector and indicator designed to detect beta and measure gamma radiation. 
It contains a low-range dose-rate Geiger-Mueller (G-M) type instrument used for monitoring personnel, food, and equipment. It is issued on the basis of one per divisional company~size combat, combat support, combat service support unit, and as required for medical, maintenance and bath units, and water supply points. 
Capab i I i t i es 
The AN/PDR 27 RADIAC LSet is a low-range dose-rate instrument which detects and measures up to 500 mi I I irads per hour of gamma radiation and can detect the presence of beta radiation. 
Four ranges of sensitivity are provided within the operating capabilities of the AN/PLDR 27 RADIAC Set. The four sensitivity ranges are: 0.5, 5, 50, and 500 mi I I irad per hour. 
The two higher (less sensijjve) ranges use a G-M tube which is contained in the smaller cylinder of the probe. Only high-intensity gamma radiation can be measured on these two ranges. 
The larger cylinder of the probe contains a different G-M tube, which can detect low-intensity gamma radiation. This tube is used on the two lower (more sensitive) ranges. When the removable beta shield is moved away from the window on the end of the probe, beta-plus-gamma radiation can be detected. 
-i35TA SHIELD IN OPEN POSITIO.N. 
Sf..~t..LL CYLINDER 
352 

Characteristics 
When you are issued an AN/PDR27 RADIAC Set it wi I I consist of the following: Radiacmeter RADIAC Detector (Probe) 
Headset 
Radioactive test sample 
Harness 

COf\~PONENTS or-THE. Ar-:/PDR·27 RADIAC SET. 
__;_...__··..::..-,'. ;..1.. ; :, ~ .. '_;,:....:.. \
Qf -.. -. 
C/.RF;YI !~G> • -
C/.:..S~ 

-------------------------------------------------~----~ 
353 
Radiacmeter. The radiacmeter includes a housing made of two aluminum castings. The _top casting, or panel, supports alI of the electronic circuitry and includes a separate sealed battery compartment. The bottom casting acts as a cover which encloses the electronic circuitry and the battery compartment. 
The radiacmeter is powered by six BA 30 batteries. 
Mounted on the panel is an indicating meter, a range switch, a push-button switch, and headset jack. ~lhe carrying handle provides space for stowing the detector cable when the detector is placed into its mounting wei I. 
354 

· -.... !"'\ PANEL.
RAD l.t.C fvi E I c:.:-, 
HEADSET
J!.. C~ 
D["i"T.CTOR..r F,Q U ~-I [ I\..1.:1,.,. \''r.LL
l ~ 
_.. --~....... 

355 
The indicating meter is placed behind a sealed glass window for waterproofing.
It has five movable scales which are mechanically coupled to the range switch
so that the scale corresponding to the switch position is presented. 
RADIAC Detector. 
The RADIAC detector is a probe consisting of a type JAN-5979
Geiger-Mueller tube and a type JAN-5980 Geiger-Mueller tube, each enclosed in
its own cylindrical metal hqysing. 
The two housings are clamped together into
one unit. A movable metal~hield normally covers the mica window of the
larger tube. 
When the shieia is over the window, beta radiation is excludedfrom the tube. 
The shield can be swung aside when beta-plus-gamma radiationreadings are desired. 
CAUTION 
Since the mica window is only 0.0005 inches thick, it is extremely
fragile. 
Do not touch the window under any circumstances, as
damage to the tube wi I I result. Do not rely upon the guard ring
to protect the mica window. The guard ring openings are large
enough so that sharp objects may pierce the window. 

Electrical connections for bath G-M tubes are made at the ends of the housingswhere the shielded cables ~ss through waterproof packing glands to the tube
electrodes. 
Th.e probe cable is flexible and kink-proof and is normally coiledin the space in the top of the handle. 
Headset. 
The headset provides the operator with sound indications of
radiation intensity when plugged ,into the jack on the panel.
designed to be worn inside a batt:le helmet. The headset is 

Radioactive Test Sample MLX 7338. 
The radioactive test sample consists of analuminum tube holding a capsule containing five mi I Iicuries of Krypton 85
gas. The tube is flattened at one end for hand Iing. 
The Krypton 85, as
shielded by its holder, provides a gamma radiation source that permits theoperator to check the operiti~g condition of the RADlAC set. 
RADIOACTIVE TEST SAri.PLE. 
·.• 
356 
WARNING 

Krypton 85 is a gas which is radioactive, emitting beta and gamma radiation. In this test sample, the shielding permits only the gamma radiation to escape. Krypton is chemically inert. If the test sample is damaged so that the capsule leaks, remove the sample to the opeQ_or to a well-ventilated area. Flush the air from the spaces oi_ rooms where the test sample has been stored. If the sample is examined with a RADIAC Set AN/PDR 27 or other equally sensitive set and is found to be free of radioactivity, the gas has escaped and the aluminum rod is harmless. 
Harness. The shoulder harness, an adjustable strap made of nonabsorbent plastic, is used for carrying the radiacmeter during operation. Clip fasteners on each end of the strap snap into holes in small projections on the radiacmeter panel. 
Carrying Case: The carrying case houses alI the other units of the RADIAC Set. It is splash-proof and is equipped with a welded-on carrying handle. The case is aluminum and can readily be decontaminated. Compartments to carry a spare set of batteries a$ wei I as alI the other components are provided in the case. 
357 

PREPARE THE AN/PDR27 RADIAC SET FOR USE 
In order to prepare the AN/POR 27 RADIAC Set for use, you must be able to
instal I the batteries and to check the operation of the radiacmeter with and

without the use of the radioactive test sample. 
Battery Installation 
Batteries must be instal led In the RADIAC Set before the set can be operated.

In addition, one set of spare batteries should be placed into the carryingcase. These batteries are to be used as field spares. When instal I ingbatteries, perform the following steps: 
Step 1. Use BA 30, BA 3030 or commercial 0 size. 
Step 2. Place spare batteries in the spare battery compartment of the
carrying case. 
Step 3. Remove the radiacmeter from the carrying case. Fully loosen the onecaptive screw securing the front of the handle to the turret of the panel.They loosen the two outer screws securing the cover of the battery compartment
to the panel. Lift the ha~1e which removes the cover and the battery holdertop. 
LIFT HAf-..!DLE AND BATTERYCOMPARTfl!iEf~T COVER. 
r -~·::;s ~~-·. 
1.:::::[~~.
-=-~~
.. ~·---~~---:::. .. 
Step 4. Insert the bateries· in the battery compartment, observing thepolarities indicated on the insulator at the bottom of the compartment. 
358 
PREPARE THE AN/PDR27 RADIAC SET FOR USE 
In order to prepare the AN/PDR 27 RADIAC Set for use, you must be able toinstal I the batteries and to check the operation of the radiacmeter with and
without the use of the radioactive test sample. 
Battery Installation 
Batteries must be instal led in the RADIAC Set before the set can be operated.
In addition, one set of spare batteries should be placed into the carryingcase. These batteries are to be used as field spares. 
When instal ling
batteries, perform the following steps: 
Step 1. Use BA 30, BA 3030 or commercial D size. 
Step 2. 
Place spare batteries in the spare battery compartment of the
carrying case. 
Step 3. Remove the radiacmeter from the carrying case. 
Fully loosen the one
captive screw securing the front of the handle to the turret of the panel.
Then loosen the two outer screws securing the cover of the battery compartment

to the panel. 
top. Lift the haoole which removes the cover and the battery holder 

LIFT HAf'.!DLE Af~ D BAITERVCOMPART,MEf~T COVER. 
Step 4. 
Insert the batteries in the battery compartment, observing thepolarities indicated on the insulator at the bottom of the compartment. 
359 
Step 5. Replace the battery-holder top and cover, observing that the rubberbumpers are I ined up with the spaces at the center, and tighten the two cover-(
attaching screws. Screws must be tightened equally, or the rubber gasket may
be damaged. Tighten the screw at the front end of the handle. 

_ 
CAUTIONJ 
Do not use excessive fQrce in tightening screws. Breakage may result. 
Pre-operational Checks 
To check the RADIAC Set before placing it in operation, the procedure to
follow depends on whether or not a radioactive test sample is available. 

Check, Using Radioactive Test Sample. If a radioactive test sample isavailable, follow the procedures Iisted below. 
WARNING 
Steps 4 through 9 involve handling the radioactive test sample.
Hold the sample by the:f~attened end. Perform the work as
rapidly as possible teaavoid unnecessary exposure. Replace the
sample promptly ~n the carrying case. 

Step 1. Remove the radiacmeter from the carrying case. 
Step 2. Turn the range switch to BAT COND. The meter should read to theright of the halfway mark indicator on the meter. 
Step 3. Turn the range switch to 500. The meter reading should be zero. 
Step 4. Remove the radioactive test sample from the carrying case. 
Step 5. Place the active -1purple) end of the test sample flat against thesmaller cylinder of the probe~ A meter reading wi thi:n scale Iimi ts should be
obs.erved. 
PLACE TEST SAr\"PLE AGAI h!ST SMALL'CYLINDER• 
.-:,..----Sf!..l:-LL CY'Lit-.!DER 
-----RADIO.L.CTIVC:TEST SAf!. PLE(/,CTI\'E EI~D) 
---------------------~,_..,_..,.,.
__ =_ ---::...~.........~:"":.·--.--:....
360 
Step 6. Turn the range switch to 50. Place the active end of the test sampleas in Step 5. A meter reading within the scale I imits should be observed. 
Step 7. Turn the range switch to 5. Place the active end of the test sampleabout one inch from the larger cylinder of the probe. A meter reading withinthe scale I imits should be observed. 
PLACE TEST SAIViPLE ONE INCHFROf-/1 LARGE CYLINDER. 
LARGE CYLINDER 
Step 8. Turn the range switch to 0.5. Place the active end of the testsample about 6 inches from th~ larger cylinder of the probe. A meter-r8adingwithin the scale I imits should be observed. Placing the sample close to theprobe should make the meter indicate at the top of the scale. 
Step 9: Replace the test sample in the carrying case. 
Step 10. Turn the range switch to OFF. 
When the meter readings within the scale I imits are observed, the RADIAC Set
is in proper operating condition. If the pointer does not move, theradiacmeter should be turned in for repair. 
NOTE 
Since the half-life of~rypton 85 is approximately 10 years, the
readings produced by th~ sample wi I I gradually decsl ine to half
their previous value each 10-year period. The sample is usable as
long as it wi I I produce the minumum readings. 

361 
Check Without Radioactive Test Sample. 
If the test sample is not available,fol ~ow the procedures discussed below. 
This test depends on using natural background radiation. A radiation source
other than the Radioactive Test Sample may be used if avai lable.l 
Step 1. Turn the range swLtch to 0.5. Connect the headset. Listen for
clicks. Observe the meter~~losely. The meter pointer wi I I swing irregularly
at the low end of the scale whenever a click or a group of clicks is heard. 
Step 2, Turn the range switch to 5.0. The meter pointer swing wi I I be
greastly reduced from Step 1, but the clicks in the headset wi I I continue at
the .same rate. 
If the pointer swings and clicks are heard at irregular
intervals, then the two low-range positions are in operation, including the
G-M tube in the large cylinder. 
Step 3. 
To test the upper range, turn the switch to the 50 position. Listen
carefully for clicks. The clicks wi I I be as slow as one per minute or one per2 minutes. Generally, there wi I I be no movement of the pointer. 
Step 4. If a radium-dial watch or other radioactive source is available,
place it close to the pro~ and try all switch positions. To obtain the
largest possible reading, turn to the 0.5 position, open the beta shield on
the probe, and hold the source at the open end. There should be a swing of
the meter pointer and clicks in the headset. 
Preparation for Use 
To start the AN/PDR 27 RADIAC Set, perform the following steps: 
Step 1. Remove the radiacmeter harness and headset from the carrying case. 
Step 2. Attach clips on tRe ~arness through the carrying holes in each end of
the radiacmeter panel. 
Step 3. Place one arm through the opening, slip the harness over the head,and arrange the assembly so that the radiacmeter is on the left side of the
body and the strap is over the right shoulder. 
Step 4. Lengthen or shorten the adjustable shoulder strap of the harness for
a comfortable fit. 
Step 5. When sound indications are desired, put on the headset and connectits plug to the jack on the radiacmeter panel. 
Step 6. 
Turn the range s~tch to BAT COND and observe the meter indication.
If the pointer rests at t~_.right of the center line in the area markedBATTERY on the movable dial, the batteries are in operating condition. If thepointer is to the left of the center Iine, the batteries are exhausted.
Replace alI batteries in the radiacmeter. 
362 
CHECK CONDITION OF BATT ~RIES. 
Operating Procedures 
After preparing the AN/PDR 27 RADIAC Set for use as previously instructed,perform the fotlowing steps: 
Step 1. Open the beta shi~d~ Listen for clicks in the headset or observethe meter reading while ap~oaching the radioactive object or area. In a weakradiation field, it is necessary to use the headset, because the clicks can beheard clearly, even when the movement of the meter pointer is very smal I. 
363 
Step 2. Determine the background reading before taking any readings. Do this
by turning away from the contaminated subject. At 180°, the body of the
person wi I I shield the instrument from the contamination. This wi I I give a
more accurate reading than if the person turned a complete circle. When·
making the reading, the electronic saturation causes the needle to fluctuate
slightly. The person taking the reading wi I I make a visual average from the
lowest to the highest readigg. Usually there wi I I not be a big difference. 
NOTE 
Contamination is any reading that is twice the reading of
background radiation obtained in a contamination free
environment. 
Step 3. Turn the range switch to a lower (more sensitive) range whenever themeter reading is less than five divisions; turn it to a higher (less sensitive)
range if the meter pointer approaches the high end of the scale. 
Step 4. When using the headset for searching for a radioactive object, startwith the range switch at 0.5. If the clicks increase to a steady noise, turn
to a higher scale. 
Step 5. When it is desired to locate a radioactive object or the center of a
radioactive area, move the radiacmeter in the direction that produces an
increase in the meter reading or in the frequency of the clicks in the
headset. Continue moving in this direction unti I the point of maximum
radiation intensity is found. 
Step 6. If the object or area to be investigated is relatively inaccessible,
remove the radiac detector from its mounting wei I and pass the detector probeback and forth over the area. 
Step 7. When the radiation from an object or area is extremely weak, bring
the detector probe within a7 few inches of the object to obtain the largest
possible indication on the meter or the loudest sound in the headset. Acloser approach is necessary because radiation intensity decreases rapidly
with distance. 
Step 8. To determine the type of radiation, perform the following steps: 
a. Turn the range switch to 0.5. 
b. Remove the RADIAC detectof from its mounting wei I. Swing open thebeta shield on the end of the large cylinder of the probe. 
c. Point the exposed end of the probe at the object, and slowly move itunti I a readable meter indlcation is obtained. Remember this reading. 
d.· Close the beta shield over the end of the probe. Monitor the sameobject again. Compare this reading to the earlier reading. 
364 
e. If you had a reading with the beta shield open, but no reading when the-shield was closed over the end of the probe, beta radiation is present. 
~ f. If you had a higher reading when the beta shield was open than when · the shield was closed, both beta and gamma radiation are present. 
b. If you had the sam~or lower reading when the beta shield was closed,only gamma radiation is present. 
Step 9. If the equipment has been used continuously for more than 1000 hours,check the condition of the batteries in the radiacmeter by turning the rangeswitch to BAT COND. When the meter pointer rests to the left of the center line--not in the area marked BATTERY replace alI batteries. 
Step 10. Stop the equipment by turning the range selector switch to OFF. Remove the harness and headset from the radiacmeter, place the RADIAC detector probe into its mounting well, and stow all items in the carrying case. 
Emergency Operating Procedures 
If one of the major components of the radiacmeter is replaced, the radiacmeter wi I I probably be out of c~ ibration. Even though the radiacmeter may be 
inaccurate with respect to absolute intensity, it wi II sti II be usable to 
indicate relative intensity within any one scale position. 
This means that it is possible to recognize in which of two locations the intensity is higher, even though the actual intensities are in error. If readings are taken in the two locations on the same scale position, the higher
reading correctly represents the higher intensity. 
PERSONNEL, EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND WATER 
Personnel, equipment, food~ and water are Iikely to be radiologically
contaminated and should be monitored following a nuclear attack or the completion of fallout in a unit area. The purpose of monitoring is to determine decontamination requirements and also to determine if supplies of food and water must be destroyed. Acceptable or safe levels of remainingradioactive contamination should be established by the commander on recommendations of the medical officer. In the absence of specificguidelines, a dose-rate reading as close to background (the environmental 
reading) as practical wi I I be considered acceptable. 
Monitoring of Personnel 
When operational areas are contaminated, personnel monitoring stations should be established as soon as_practicable at the lowest unit level having the AN/PDR 27 RADIAC Set. AI !=-personnel leaving the contaminated areas should be monitored. Personnel who are contaminated wi I I be required to decontaminate 
themselves, except those physically disabled. Personnel monitoring is performed to detect contamination on the body. Proper monitoring of personnel 
365 

consists of complete and careful checking of those parts of the body and clothing most susceptible to contamination. 
The procedures for personnel monitoring are as follows: 
Step 1. Turn the range switch to 500. 
Step 2. The soldier shoul~s~and straight with feet spread apart about 30 centimeters (1 foot). Arms should be extended to the side with palms up and 
fingers straight. 
Step 3. The probe must be held perpendicular to the surface being monitored. 
Step 4. The end of the probe should have the beta shield open and should be held 2 to 3 centimeters (about 1 inch) from the soldier's hand. Monitor both hands. If Iittle or no radiation is detected, go to the scale where there is a reading. If no reading is shown on the 0.5 scale, continue to use that scale. 
Step 5. Do not contaminate the probe by touching it to the surface being
monitored.  Move  the probe along  the surface with  a slow steady motion.  
Step 6. soldier  Move the probe over both hands and arms to the shoulders. Have turn palms down. Move the probe over the back of both hands and  the arms.  
Step 7. Move the probe over the front of the body. Start ha i r, forehead, nose, Iips, neck, body, knees, and ank Ies.  at  the head.  Check  
Step 8.  Going  from head  to  foot,  monitor  the back of  the soldier.  
Step 9.  Have  the soldier  raise each  foot;  check soles.  

Step 10. If no radiation-w(!,_f detected, tell the soldier. If radiation is detected, have the soldier decontaminate. Tel I your supervisor of the contamination that was found. 
Monitoring of Equipment 
Equipment that has been exposed to radiation or that has been in a contaminated area must be monitored. This should be performed at a material monitoring station as near the contaminated area as possible. Equipment that is found to be contaminated should remain within a restricted area unti I the contamination either is removed or has decayed to background level. In general, care should be taken when monitoring equipment to pay particularattention to those surfaces where the contamination is most Iikely to occur,such as the wheels, tires, and undersides of vehicles and aircraft; and greasysurfaces, floors, and stePS. Before an attempt is made to recover or evacuate 
contaminated equipment, ;a eneck should be made to determine the practicabi Iityof this action. If the contamination is such that it exceeds the capabilitiesof any unit to decontami~ate the equipment to permit recovery and evacuation, 
366 

the location should be notged. This informatiion should be forwarded to the 
next ·higher headquarters so that advice and assistance on decontamination or 
disposal may be obtained. 

The probe window of the radiacmeter should be held about 2 to 3 centimeters (1inch) from the surface being monitored for beta-gamma contamination. The range switch should be at the 500 scale. The probe should be moved along the surface with a slow, steady-~otion and held perpendicular to the surface beingmonitored. If little or no radiation is shown, go to the next lower scale. If no radiation is shown on the 0.5 scale, continue to use that scale. Tel I your supervisor when you find radioactive contamination. 
Monitoring of Food 
Except in rare cases of induced radiation, rations in cans or other sealed containers are not in danger of radiological contamination. As the contamination wi II normally be I imited to the outer surface of the sealed containers, decontamination is accomplished by removing the contamination from the outer-surface. This may be done by removing the outer packaging or bywashing or scrubbing the containers under running water. Under no condition should sealed containers be:opened unti I they have been decontaminated and the effectiveness of decontami~tion established. 
Food not protected in sealed containers must be suspected of contamination unti I monitored. All food should be removed from the contaminated area to a clean area. Potatoes and hard-skinned fruits and vegetables can be decontaminated by washing or scrubbing them under running water, followed bythe peeling or scraping and washing again. Running water, if a creek or stream, should be checked for contamination, especially since the water source may be in a GZ or fallout area. AI I visible dirt should be brushed from meats and fish; washing is not recommended. Meat or fish should be monitored with the probe opena nd held approximately 1 centimeter (about 1/2 inch) from the surface of the food. If the [eading exceeds background, then the food should be decontaminated if possib1e·. A thin layer of meat can be removed and the food remonitored. A reduction in dose rate would indicate that the contamination was confined to the surface of the food. The cutting away process can be continued, within practical limits, until the dose-rate readingis acceptable. If the dose rate is within acceptable limits initially or after the outer layer or layers have been removed, the food can be safelyconsumed. As prepared food in open containers wi I I probably be contamined, it should be disposed of by burial or as otherwise determined by designatedmedical personnel. Radiologically contaminatd wash water and trimmings should be similarly disposed of. 
Any food that has been exposed to radiological contamination must be carefullymonitored before and after decontamination. Foods in which radioactivity has been induced can only be ~contaminated by aging. Careful monitoring wi I I determine the progress of ~adioactive d~cay during aging. 
367 

Monitoring of Water 
Water that has been 1n a contaminated area or is suspected of being
contaminated should be monitored and declared safe before it is used for
drinking by personnel. 
Decontamination of water is__an engineer responsibility. Determination of the
potability and approval of~ater is a responsibi Iity of the surgeon for Army
units. 
Radioactive contaminants in water are not affected by boi Iing or by other
water-treatment methods designed for chemical or biological decontamination. 
PERFORM OPERATOR MAINTENANCE
ON THE AN/PDR 27 RADIAC SET 

In order to perform operator maintenance on the AN/PDR 27 RADIAC Set, you mustbe able to do the required operator preventive maintenance checks and services. 
Operator Preventive Maintenance 
Operator preventive ~aintenance is the systematic care, servicing, andinspection of equipment to prevent the occurrence of trouble, reduce downtime,and ensure that the equipment is serviceable. 
Systematic Care. Systematic care is essential to the proper upkeep andoperation of equipment. The cleaning procedures should be performed once aday. If the equipment is not used daily, the cleaning procedure must beperformed before operation, ~fter any extended shutdown, or once a week while
the equipment is kept in standby condition. 
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services. Preventive maintenance checks andservices are made to determine combat serviceabi I ity; that is, to determinethat the equipment is in good general (physical) condition, in good operatingcondition, and likely to remain combat serviceable. 
Scope of Operator Maintenance 
Maintenance service and inspection of the AN/PDR 27 RADIAC Set is requireddaily. In addition to the routine daily services and inspection, theequipment should be reinspected and serviced immediately before going on amission and as soon after completion of the mission. as possible. Themaintenance duties assigned to the operator of the RADIAC set are I istedbelow. The duties do not require tools or test equ~pment other than thoseissued with the set. Operator maintenance duties are: 
Cleaning the RADIAC s~_. 
Performing daily preventive maintenance checks and services. 
Performing repairs and replacing parts. 
368 
Cleaning the RADIAC Set. Materials required for cleaning the RADIAC Set are: 
Cleaning cloth. 
Cleaning compound (National Stock No. 7930-00-395-0542) 
Procedures for Cleaning th~-RADIAC Set. Procedures for cleaning the RADIAC
Set are discussed below. 
Radiacmeter and Carrying Case. Clean the exposed exterior surfaces of the
radiacmeter and the carrying case as follows: 
Step 1. Remove dust; moisture, and loose dirt with a clean, dry cloth. 
WARNING 
Cleaning compound is flammable and its fumes are toxic.
Provide adequate ventilation; do not use near a flame. 
Step 2. Remove fungus and ground-in dirt with a cloth dampened (not wet) withcleaning compound; dry thoroughly. 
CAUTION 
Do not press on the meter face; the meter may become damaged. 
Step 3. Clean the meter face with a soft, clean cloth. If the dirt isdifficult to remove, dampen (do not wet) the cloth with water; if necessary,
use mild soap. 
Battery Compartment. Remove alI traces of dirt, grease, or corrosion from thebatteries, battery compartment, and contacts with a clean cloth dampened (notwet) with cleaning compoun~_~ry thoroughly. 
Daily Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 
The daily maintenance service and inspection chart out I ines inspections to bemade each day. These inspections are made to determine combat serviceabi I ity.To assist the operators in determining and maintaining combat serviceabi I ity,the chart indicates what to inspect, how to inspecst, and what the normalconditions are. If the defect cannot be remedied by the operator, higherechelon maintenance or repair is required. The operator should note anydeficiencies which cannot be corr~cted on DA Form 2404 and turn it in toorganizational maintenance. 
369 
·_-
OPERATOR'S DAILY PREVENTIVEf..'.Aif-.!TENANCE CHECI~S ANDSERViCES CHART FOR THE t-.N/PDR·27 RADIAC SET. 
SEQU=:!--!CE l ITET!i T-0"-BE
T....!O. tf-.!SPECTED PROCEDURE

, 	I 
Completeness See that equipment is complete. 
2 Meter glass Inspect for cracked or broken meter glass. 
3 Cleanliness Exterior surfaces must be clean and dry,
free of grease, dirt, rust, corrosion, andfungus. 
i4 Controls While making operating checks (item 6}.observe that mechanical action of each·
• 
control is smooth, ar.d free of bindingand that no looseness is apparent. Alsocheck panel meter for sticking or bentpointer. 
5 Test sample 	lnspecf the test sample for deformc:.tions,cracks, or splits that may cc:.use lec:.kage.If sample is damaged, discard it. {( 
. 	Hold the sample only long enough to makathe inspection to c:.void unnecessary exposure. 
6 Opera!ion Perform the procedures given in Lesson· 4/Learning Event 2 for checking the radiacset using the radicz.cti,ve test ~c:.mple. 
Performing Repairs and Replacing Parts 
Performing repairs and replacing parts (when necessary) are discussed in thefollowing paragraphs. 
Repairs. No repairs (other than battery replacement) of the RADIAC set areauthorized the operator. 
.
NOTE: 
Test sample must Oi turned-in lAW 	local pol icy as prescribed by local
Radiation Protection Officer, usually the Division Chemical Officer. 
370 
Parts Replacement. Only the batteries are replaceable by the operator. To 
check battery condition, turn the range switch to BAT COND. The pointer on 
the meter should read to the right of the center I ine, in the area marked 
battery, on the meter scale. If the meter reading is low, the ~atteries are 
weak and should be replaced. If the batteries are 18 months old or older, 
they should be replaced regardless of their test reading. Battery eel Is 
usually have slightly di ffe~ent voltages when tested individually at any time during normal I i fe. Howevei, since alI eel Is have approximately equal amounts 
of energy drain when connect~d in series, they wi I I be in the same condition 
unless some of the eel Is have been recently replaced. Therefore, whenever 
battery replacement is necessary, replace the complete set of BA 30/U
batteries. Battery Iife wi I I vary depending upon how much the i I lumination 
lamp is used, but should last for approximately 100 hours of continuous operation. 
When a Geiger-Mueller Tube is replaced, the AN/PDR 27 Radiacmeter must be recal ibrated. 
SUPERVISE RADIATION MONITORING 
CONDITIONS 
Given a situatio~ when you are required to supervise radiation monitoringin a field environment provide trained operators with serviceable IM 174-series Radiacmesters, DA Form 1971-R, penci Is, unit SOP, and a map of the area. 
STANDARDS 
1. 
The type of monitoring (periodic or continuous) is determined. 

2. 
The location and specified time for readings to be taken is determined and explained to the operators: 


3~ Operators are given proper equipment and forms. 
4. 
Operators perform PMCS and preoperational checks on the IM 174-Series Radiacmeter. 

5. 
The appropriate monitoring technique (direct or indirect) is determined. 

6. 
AI I readings are taken and recorded on DA Form 1971-R. 

7. 
Operators are spot checked to ensure proper use of equipment. 

8. 
Operators report readings to supervisor. 


371 

RADIOLOGICAL MONITORING 
There are two procedures used to locate and measure radiation. These
procedures are: radiological monitoring and surveying. It is very important
that a commander knows the location and intensity of radiation in an area so
that tactical operations can be planned. Because radiation cannot be detected
by human senses, the commander must rely on monitoring and survey teams to
provide this information. 
The Need for Radiation Monitoring. Fallout is a hazard that may go unnoticedunti 1 it is too 1ate. Although fallout particles are normally visible as theytal 1 to the ground, they may be brought down in rain drops during a rain stormand thus be unnoticed. After the fallout particles are on the ground, theywi I I become mixed with the dust and dirt common to a battlefield and not be
detected by troops who move into the area later. To avoid entering or
operating in radiation areas by mistake without knowing that a radiation
hazard exists, the Army required a procedure known as "radiological
monitoring". This is a procedure which units use to warn themselves if they
are in radiation areas. 
Definition. Radiological mon_itoring is the act of detecting the presence of
radiation and measuring it-with RADIAC instruments. The RADIAC instrument
used in monitoring radiologically contaminated areas is the survey meter
(IM174 or IM174A). In nuclear combat, monitoring is a routine duty performed
wherever the unit happens to be. For instance if a platoon or company is in
convoy on a road and the assistant driver of one of the lead vehicles has an
IM174A radiacmeter in his/her lap, he/she is monitoring the unit's route ofmarch for the presence of gamma radiation. Similarly, if a member of a
reconnaissance patrol takes along an IM174 radiacmeter which is used inaddition to the members' normal duties, he/she is monitoring the patrol's
route. In a nuclear war, companies (and platoons, sections or teams if they
are operating at considerable distance from the company headquarters) monitorfor radiation. This is possible becsause the IM174A radiacmeter is avai !able
down to platoon level. 
Radiological Monitors. 
Radiologcal monitoring is basically a simple act. A soldier turns on the
IM174A, waits for the radiacmeter to warm up, makes a radiation reading and
reports the data to the senior individual present. Any soldier can perform
radiological monitoring with about 4 minutes instruction on how to operate theradiacmeter and to whom to give the information. Operations of the IM174A ismade easier because of the clear-operating instructions printed on the
radiacmeter itself. 
Units are required to a~point or designate two or more ind~viduals to operateeach radiacmeter and to pBrform radiological monitoring (AR 220-58). Thepersonnel so designated ~e ~,called "Moni taring Teams" and receive specialtraining in chemical and ni.tdear defense procedures. 
372 
Types of Monitoring 
Periodic Monitoring. In a nuclear war, platoons and companies initially check their area for radiation whenever they move into a new position. If no radiation is detected, an occasional or periodic check of the area for radiation is performed after that. This periodic check assures the unit commander that the position~are remaining clear of a gamma radiation hazard. The unit SOP should speci fr_when periodic monitoring is to be done. As a minimum the position should be monitored for radiation at least once every hour. The monitor checks the platoon or company CP area and may check other areas as directed. 
Continuous Monitoring. Continuous monitoring is a continuous check for radiation in the units area of operations or along a route of march. The individual with the IM174A must have the radiacmeter turned on at alI times. The user does not have to continually look at the meter, but should glance at it frequently and keep the senior officer or NCO aware of the radiation hazard that may exist or whenever the unit is moving into a new area where the radiation situation is unknown. Continuous monitoring should begin in alI units down to platoon or section level in the following situations: 
o 
When a fallout warnrng (NBC 3 report) is received. 
o After a nuclear burst has been seen, heard, or reported. 
o 
When ordered by the unit commander. 
o When the unit is moving. 

o During any reconnaissasnce or patrol activities. 

o When radiation above 1 cGy(rad)/Hr is detected by periodic monitoring. 


Units discontinue continuous monitoring on orders from higher headquarters, when the dose rates fal I below 1 cGy(rad)/hr (except for units on the move), or w~en ordered by the commander. 
Radiation Monitoring Techniques 
Direct Monitoring. This is the simplest monitoring technique and is used to obtain outside radiation intensity readings. The monitor walks to the area of 
interest, holds the IM174A at waist height, turns slowly in a 360° circle, and notes the highegst intensity· indicated on the meter. (Holding the meter at waist level approximates the dose rate received by a standing man). The 
readings should be taken in open areas at least 10 meters (30 feet) from vehicles, buildings or other large objects. In cities, readings should be 
taken in intersections o~in the middle of a street. 
Indirect Monitoring. Often it is desirable or necessary to take monitoring readings inside vehicles or buildings. This may be because of the desire not to expose the monitor to high outside radiation intensities. If monitoring is 
373 

done inside a structure or vehicle, the radiation dose rate must be clearly
identified as being obtained inside the structure or vehicle. Furthermore, the structure or vehicle should be described and/or its correlation factor should accompany the inside dose rate reading. 
COMPUTE CORRELATION FACTORS CONDITIONS 
Given aDA Form 1971-R with inside (shielded) and outside (unshielded)dose rate readings entered on the form. You are also g1ven a pencil and paper. STANDARDS Correlation factors are computed with 100% accuracy. PERFORMANCE MEASURES Computes Correlation Factor (CF) 
a.  Identifies OD and  1-e.  
b.  Divides OD  by  ID  (CF  = OD)  
ID  
c.  Shows CF work  1n  remarks block of data sheet.  
d.  Enters  the CF  in appropriate block.  
e.  Completes  the  task within 2 minutes.  

REFERENCES 
FM 3-3 TF 3-3569 TEC LESSON 931-171-0314-F 
Correlation Factor Data. AI I monitoring reports, except those made using the direct technique, must include correlation factor information so that the shielded dose rates can be converted to ground (outside) dose rates. To accomplish this procedure, monitors report shielded (inside) dose rates and the type of structure or vehi~le in which the reading was taken. Trained NBC specialists at company and higher headquarters convert inside (shielded) to outside (unshielded) dose rates. 
Some structures and vehic~s have predetermined correlation factors. Inside dose rates are converted tb ·outside dose rates by multiplying the inside dose rate by the correlation facto~. 
Inside Dose Rate X CF =Outside Dose Rate 
374 

For example, a monitor located in the rear top part of the turret of the M60 
tan~ reports a reading of 	20 rad/hr. The correlation factor is 25. 
20(D) X 25(CF) = 500(0D) 
However, some monitors may be located in vehicles or structures that do not 
have predetermined correlat~n factors. These factors must be computed.
Trained specialists at com~ny level determine if new correlation factors are 
needed. 
The following procedures are used to determine an unknown correlation factor: 
Step 1. Obtain one dose rate reading inside the shelter by turning a ful I 
circle and recording the highest reading. If a vehicle is used, take the 
reading from the position 	where the meter wi II be located. 
Step 2. Obtain another dose rate reading about 10 meters outside of the 
shelter/vehicle. This reading should be taken within 3 minutes of the inside 
reading for accuracy. 
Step 3. The correlation factor is then computer by the following equation: 
CF = Outside Dose Rate 
Inside Dose Rate 
Step 4. For example, a company monitor is located in an open front shelter dug into the side of a hi I I. A nuclear burst occurs several kilometers away.About 30 minutes later the monitor detects the arrival of fallout. After the 
completion of fallout, the operator takes a dose-rate reading of 2 rad/hr with the survey meter at the center of the shelter and a reading of 10 rad/hroutside. Returning to the shelter, he/she reports the following: 
Inside Dose~R~te (ID) -2 rad/hrOutside (ground) Dose Rate (OD) = 10 rad/hrThe correlation factor is then determined as follows: 
Correlation Factor (CF) = 	OD = 10 rad/hr = 5 TB 5 rad/h r 
Round CF to the nearest hundredth. 
375 

VEHICLES 
AHD STI\UCTUR£5 

VIHIClES 
MoO li.NI( 
M481.2 !ANI( 
MII~APC 
MI07 SP GUN 
MIOB SP HOW. 

MI09 SP HOW. 
M577 COIIIMANO POST CAHIER 
MSSI ARMORED RECON/A&N ASSAUlT VJ:HIClE 
Mll4 RfCCN VEH•ClE 
1/,116 C A·R C 0 VEHIClE 
MS& RECOVER T VEHIClE 

HUCKS 
"1/-'·TON "l/4-TON "2-1/2-TON "4-TON TO 7-TON 
STRUCTURES •• 
J.\ulristorr Building 
UPPER FLOOR 
lOWER FlOOR 
fror.ae House 
FIRST FlOOR 
BASEMENT 

Heiler, Un~cr~rour.d 
3-fOOT IARTH COVER 
FOXHOlES 

SURVEY METER lOCATIOH IHSIDE V~HICL£ 
lVRREl-REAR lOP l V ~ Rrt-F R 0 PH CHASSIS-NEAR ORIVER 
IVR~El-REAR lOP IVRHT-REAR &OllOM CHI.SSIS-NEAR ORIVa 
OIRECILT IN FRONT OF ColVER ON FRONT Wl.ll NII.R FIRST SOUAO M[M!ER ON l!FlFACINC FORWI.RO
1 
NE.I.R ORIVIR, lEFt SlOE 
N[tR ORIV(R1 lEFl SlOE R£t.R1 RICHT SlOE.: 
Ntt.R ORIVER1 !EFj_SIOt REI.R1 RIGHT SlOE 
NEAR O~IVER1 RICHT SlOE REAR, lEFT S I 0 E 
. 
NEAR ORIVER, RIC HT SlOE 
COMh",ANOER POSITION 
PI.SSENCER PO~IliON 
COMMI.NOER POSitiON 
I 
CCF.F.EL!.TIOH FACTO:< 
2 s 53 23 
27 
• 
5 

•
s 


3.o 
3.1> 
6.0 I
3.~ 
2.] 
3. s 
3.4 
3. 2 
2.5 
• b 
2.2 
1.9 
b.9 
1.3 
1.7 
1.7 
'2 
100 
10 
10 
so co 
10 
*The survey meter shobld be held in a vertical position (face up) by the monitor who is positioned in the assisant driver's seat. ** The survey meter should be held in the center of the shelter, 1 meter 
above the floor. 
376 

COLLECT AND REPORT TOTAL RADIATION DOSE 

CONDITIONS 
Given two dosimeter readings (collected from two of your platoon soldiers 
while performing the same activities as the platoon in the field) paper, 
pencil, and the requirement.=-=t-o report the total radiation dose. 
STANDARDS 
The readings from the dosimeters are averaged and rounded to the nearest 10 cGy(rad)/hr and reported to the company daily, in accordance with the unit SOP. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 
Adds the dosimeter readings. 

2. 
Divides the total of the readings by the total number of readings. 

3. 
Rounds the figure to the nearest 10 cGy(rad)/hr 

4. 
Reports the total radi~ion dose. 


REFERENCES 
FM 21-3, Task 031-503-4003 
SAFETY AND SECURITY PRECAUTIONS 
AI I nuclear radiation, even in smal I doses, has some harmful effect on the body and should be avoided whenever it is possible to do so without 
interfering with military-operations. 
Radiation exposure should be control led to the maximum extent possible, consistent with the mission. On occasion, this may tend to restrict operat'ion, but if exposure control is ignored, the results could be disastrous. The establishment and use of operation exposure guides wi I I aid 
the commander in keeping radiation exposures at a minimum and thus assist in accomplishment of the assigned mission. 
Operation Exposure Guide 
The commander responsible for the radiological survey wi I I establish an operation exposure guide for the survey party. The operation exposure guide wi I I b expressed as a numerical value. The degree-of-risk concept provides guidance to the commander-in establishing an operation exposure guide. There are three degrees of risk:~ hegl igible, moderate, and emergency. The 
radiation aspects of degrees of risk are discussed later. 
377 

Data From Tactical Dosimeters 
The IM93( )IUD tactical dosimeter is issued on the general basis of two per 
platoon or the smallest operation unit of interest. The platoon-size unit is 
the optimum size on which to maintain the radiation status. Processing of dosimetry information at the various echelons of division is described below. 
The tacstical dosimeters wi_U be read daily or more often if the situation 
dictates. 
The net reading of the two platoon dosimeters wi I I be averaged, rounded off to the nearest 10 rad, and reported to company. If there is reason to believe that the reading from one dosimeter is not representative of the platoon (forexample, the person carrying the dosimeter was shielded or operating away from the platoon), then only the reading from the one representative dosimeter should be reported. An alternate unit dosimeter wearer is assigned for each dosimeter, so that the unit dosimeter may remain with the platoon when the primary wearer leaves the platoon area. The platoon reports to company only the "net" reading, that is, the amount accumulated since the last reading. In other words, the person reading the instrument makes a note of the reading each time the dosimeter is read; the next time the dosimeter is read, only the difference between the two :readings is reported. The readings can be jotteddown in a pocket notebook,-and kept unti I the next reading; no permanent record need to be kep.t. Dosimeters are read and the readings reported before recharging the dosimeter. In this case the next reported reading (after the recharging) is the total reading. If the individual with the dosimeter is evacuated or transferred to another unit, the dosimeter stays with the platoon. 
The platoon readings are reported by radio or telephone daily (or when the situation permits) by company to the S3 at battalion or similar-size unit as 
part of an established operational type report required by unit SOP, exceptwhen units are exposed to relatively high doses (that is, established operation exposure guide has been exceeded). In the latter case, reports should be processed withou~ qelay. The unit SOP wi II specify the time and method of routinely reading and transmitting this information to the next higher headquarters. 
In some cases, elements of one unit are attached to another unit. For example, elements of a tank battalion are attached to another battalion or to another brigade. The radiation status of these units is kept by the unit to which they are attached. When units return to their parent unit, the parentunit is informed of their unit radiation exposure history and current status. 
If the parent organization desires to know the radiation status of its detached un.its, it contacts the M~adquarters of the unit to which they are attached. 
Radiation Exposure Records 
The operation exposure gurae concept requires that radiation exposure records be maintained on alI units. The most realistic unit exposure data are based on readings obtained at the platoon level becsause companies are often so deployed that the platoons may not be located in areas of equal radiation dose 
rates or remain in these areas for I ike periods of time. 
378 

Reporting Procedures 
Unit radiation exposure records are normally maintained at battalion and higher level. Since this concept calls for platoon radiation exposure information and the company does not have the capabi Iity to properly evaluate these records, battalion wi II maintain radiation exposure records down to and including the organic and attached platoon. Reports on the radiation exposure status of smal I units are n~t normally forwarded higher than battalion. Battalion wi II forward to brigade and division its own radiation status, based on the radiation status or organic and attached companies. The table below wi II serve as a guide for the determination of the battalion radiation status. This information wi I I assist both the division commander and the brigade commander in establishing operation exposure guides, degrees of risk, and composition of task forces for missions requiring further radiation exposure. 
Neg Iigible Risk. Not more than 2.5 percesnt of the troops receiving a negligible risk dose wi II experience vomiting. This dose wi II cause no casualties. 
Moderate Risk. Not more than 5 percent of the troops receiving a moderate risk dose w i I I experience vomiting. This dose w i I I cause no casua It i es. 
Emergency Risk. Not more than 5 percent of the troops receiving a emergency risk dose wi II b casualties; however, occurrence of vomiting may be higher. An emergency risk should be accepted only when it is absolutely necessary. It should be exceeded only in extremely rate situations that might loosely be called "disaster" situations. No attempt is made to define disaster situations. The commander must determine these extremely rare situations and decide which criteria are appropriate to use in attempting to prevent overexposure. 
The command can estal ish an operation exposure guide using the degree-of-risk exposure chart. When doingJt~is, the commander must consider the radiation status of the individuals on the survey party. Party member may come from different platoons within a company, or different companies within a battalion. Each party member could easily have different total past cumulative dose. When this is the case, you would use the possible exposure criteria for a single operastion column. If the total past cumulative dose is known, then the secon6 column would be used. 
Establishing an Operations/Exposure Guide When the Total Cumulative Dose is NOT Known. A company commander plans to conduct a survey in a radiologically contaminated.area. The survey pady members come from different platoons within the company. The survey party's total cumulative dose is unknown. The commander wi I I accept a moderate risk. What operation exposure guide wi I I the commander establish for this survey operation? 
Step 1. You do NOT know th"e total cumulative dose of the survey party. 
Step 2. You know the commander does not want to exceed a moderate risk. 
379 

Step 3. You determine from the degree-of-risk exposure chart that an RS-1 
unit·can receive an additional dose of up to 30 cGy(rad) before exceeding a 
moderate risk. 
Step 4. Based on the information above, the company commander established an 
exposure guide of no more than 30 cGy(rad) for the survey party in this 
operation. 
Establishing an Operational Exposure Guide When the Total Cumulative Dose is 
Known. A company commander plans to conduct a ground survey in a 
radiologically contaminated area. A moderate risk wi I I be acceptable. The 
survey party members alI come from the same unit which has a total cumulative 
dose of 20s cGy(rad). What operation exposure guide wi II the commander 
establish for this survey operation. 
Step 1. You know the total cumulative dose of the susrvey party is 20 cGy ( rad). 
Step 2. You know the commander wi I I accept a moderate risk. 
Step 3. Subtract the known total cumulative dose of 20 cGy(rad) from the RS-0 criterion for the desired ~egree of risk. In this example, the moderate risk dose is 70 cGy(rad). 
Step 4. The answer from Step 3 is 50 cGy(rad). This means that the surveyparty can receive an additional dose of up to 50 cGy(rad) before exceeding a moderate risk. 
Step 5. Base on the above information, the company commander established an operation exposure guide of no more than 50 cGy(rad) for the survey party 1n this operation. 
An operation exposure guidj tor nuclear radiation is specified by the commander who ordered the survey. The control party wi I I calculate and furnish turn-back dose rates and the turn-back dose for each ground surveyparty,. 
Turn-Back Dose Rate. The turn-back dose rate (Rtb) for a ground surveyparty read on the IM174A radiacmeter is calculated as follows: 
Rtb = 2 XOEG X speed 
distance 

where: 
Rtb =Turn-back dose rate. 
OEG =Operation Exposo;e Guide. 
speed= The speed at which the survey party wi II travel. 
380 

distance= The distance the survey party wi II travel inside the fallout pattern (derived from a fallout prediction plot if no better information is available). 
If the survey party encounters the turn-back dose rate, the party wi II, if at alI possible, continue with the survey to determine if the dose rate is 
increasing or decreasing. )A the dose rate decreases, then the survey continues. If the dose rate _increases, the survey team wi II leave the fallout area by the same route used to enter it, unless instructed otherwise. 
381 

NUCLEAR RADIATION DEGREE-OF·RISKEXPOSURE. 
POSSIBLE EXPOSURE CRITERIA FOR A
TOTAL=PAST
RADIATION SINGLE OPERATION'WHICH WILL NOT
CU~ULAiiVE
STATUS RESULT IN EXCEEDING THE DOSE
DOSE3
CATEGORY1 •2 CRITERIA FOR THE STATED DEGREE OF
cGy{rad) RISK4 •5 cGy(rad) 
Negligible Risk: ~ 50 
RS-0 units No exposure Moderate Risk: ~ 70 
Emergency Risk: ~ 150 
Negligible Risk: 10
~
Greater than 0,
RS-1 units but less than or Moderate Risk: -=< 30
equal to 7.0 

Emergency Risk: ~ 110 
Greater than 70 Any further exposure is considered to exceedRS-2 units ~but less than or a negligible or moderate risk. Emergencyequal to 150 Risk: ~ 40 
· AIL further exposure will exceed theRS-3 units Greater than 150 emergency ~isk. 
1 Categories are based on previous exposure to radiation.
J ·~
2 Reclassificati0n of units from one radiation status category to a less serious one
is made by the commander upon advice of the surgeon after observing-the actualstate of health of the exposed personnel. 
3 AII exposures to radiation are considered total body and simply additive. Noallowance is made for body recovery from radiation injury. 
4 Rjsk levels are graduated within each status category to provide more stringentcriteria as the total radiation dose accumulated becomes more serious. The exposurecriteria given for RS-1 and RS-2 units should be used ONLY when the numerical valueof a unit's total past cumulative dose is ur~KNOWN. Otherwise, the criterion for thedesired degree of risk should be obtained by SUBTRACTING the numerical valt.:e ofthe unit's dose from the RS·O CRITERION for the desired degree of risk. 
5 Each of the deg.r.ees of risk can be applied to radiation hazards resulting fromenemy or friendly we2-oons: or both, and from initial nuclear radiation resulting fromplcnned friendly supporting fir,es. 
382 
The following is an example of how you would calculate a turn-back dose rate. 
The commander has established an Operation Exposure Guide(OEG) of 10 cGy(rad)
for a ground 	survey mission. The speed at which the survey party wi I I travel 
is 15 kmph. The distance the survey party wi II travel inside the fallout pattern is 5 km. What is the turn-back dose rate? 
Rtb 2 X OEG x speed distance 
Rtb = 2 X 10 	X 15 = 300 5 5 
R~b = 60 cGy(rad)/hr 
·rurn-Back Dose. The turn-back dose (Dtb) read on the IM93 or IM147 is calculated as follows: 
Dtb = Turn-back dose. 
If the turn-back dose is encountered by the survey party and the dose rate is increasing as the party travels forward, the party wi II immediately leave the fallout area by the same rcrate used to enter it, unless instructed otherwise. If the dose rate is decreasing as the party moves ahead, the survey party wi I I continue to perform its mission along the assigned route. 
The following is an example of how you would calculate a turn-back dose. The 
security procedures for the reporting of data established by 
commander has established an Operation Exposure Guide a survey mission. What is the turn-back dose?  (OEG)  of 30 cGy(rad)  for  
Dtb  =  OEG  
2  
LDtb  = 30  
2  
D~b  = 15 cGy(rad)  
Security  
Radiological  survey  information  is of  intel I igence value  to  the enemy.  Proper  

are the unit SOP. For example, the unit SOP may require that location coordinates be encoded. The more detailed the briefing of the survey parties, the more easily security can be maintained. 
383 

PREPARE AND SUBMIT NBC 4 REPORTS 
CONDITIONS 
Given a simulated situation in which a nuclear attack has occurred and monitoring/survey data which must be reported. You are given GTA 3-6-3 revised lAW Ed 5 STANAG 2103~-paper, penci I, a means of communication, and monitoring/survey data. 
STANDARDS 
1 . The type of report being sent is reported. 
2. 
The location where the dose rate reading was taken is reported as I i ne Q. 

3. 
The dose rate reading is reported as Iine R. 

4. 
The date/time of reading is reported as I ine s. 

5. 
The completed report is submitted. PERFORMANCE MEASURES 


1. 
Reports the type of report being sent (NBC 4 Nuclear). 

2. 
Reports the location where the dose rate reading was taken (six digitcoordinates as a minimum) as I ine Q (QUEBEC). 

3. 
Reports the dose rate reading as I ine R (ROMEO). 


NOTE: If the dose rate reading were not taken in the open, the conditions under which they were taken must be reported on I ine R following the dose rate. For example, if the; ~e~ding was taken inside a vehicle, report the typeof vehicle. Words, such as INITIAL, INCREASING, PEAK, SUMMARY, VERIFICATION, SPECIAL, SERIES, or DECREASING~ are also reported on I ine R when appropriate. 
I I 
4. 
Re'ports the date/time bf the reading as I ine S (SIERRA) (Includes whether local or ZULU). 

NOTE: Letter items 0, R, and S may be repeated as often as necessary. 

5. 
Submit the completed report. 


NBC 4 (NUCLEAR REPORTS 
The primary purposes of monitoring are to allow warning of alI personnel of the arrival or presence o~ radiological hazard and to provide a basis for prompt action by the commaNder to minimize the hazard. Warning is provided when the monitor detects the presence of a radiological hazard and this information is reported to the next higher headquarters. 
384 

Format For Monitoring Report 
The format for monitoring reports follows the format established in the International Standardization Agreements (STANAG 2103 --The NBC Warning and Reporting System). Within this reporting system, the NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report is used to report radiation dose rate measurements. 
To prepare an NBC 4 (Nuclear~ Report, you must understand: 
o 
The NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report format. 
o 
The information entered in each I ine of the NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report. 
The NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report consists of the heading and I ines QUEBEC, ROMEO, 
and SIERRA in the body of the message. 
The heading of the NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report consists of the following 

information. 
Precedence. The precedence for the NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report message is 

IMMEDIATE for the initial report, all other reports wi II be transmitted PRIORITY unless otherwise cMrected. Date/Time. The date and time of the message can be sent in either local or 
ZULU time; however, it must be stated which time 1s used. 
Security Classification. Radiological monitoring information is of 

intel I igence value to the enemy. Proper security procedures for the reporting 
of data are established by the unit SOP. 
From. This I ine contains the designation of the agency preparing the report. 
To. This line contains the_,d~signation of the unit or units to whom the 

message is being sent. 
Type of Report. NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report wi I I be entered in this line. 
The information contained in each I ine of the body of the NBC 4 (Nuclear) 

Report  is  as  follows.  
LINE  ITEM  MEANING  
QUEBEC  This I ine contains the location where the reading was taken. Under certain conditions, the unit SOP may require that this I ine be encoded.  
ROMEO  -Ihis I ine contains the dose rate, cGy(rad)/hr. ~·rds "initial", "increasing", "peak", or "decreasing" may be added. Correlation factor information should be included if shielded dose readings are reported.  The rate  

385 

SIERRA  This I ine contains the date/time the reading was taken. The date and time of the reading can be sent in either local or ZULU time; however, it must be stated which time is used. Usually, NATO forces operating in NATO theater wi I I use ZULU time.  
The  complete  format  for  an~BC 4 (Nuclear) Report  is below  I ines QUEBEC,  

ROMEO, and SIERRA may be repeated as often as necessary. 
NBC 4 (NUCLEAR) REPORT FORMAT 
Precedence Date/time Security classification From To NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report QUEBEC (location of reading) ROMEO (Dose rate cGy(rad)/hr) SIER~ (date/time of reading) 
When properly prepared, a typical NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report wi I I appear as follows. One example shows I ines QUEBEC, ROMEO, and SIERRA only once.· The other example shows these I ines being repeated. 
NBC 4 (NUCLEAR) REPORT 
Preced~n~e: IMMEDIATE Date/time: 201745Z Security ~lassification: UNCLASSIFIED From: Q7R06 To: E4Z03 NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report QUEBEC: LB123987 ROMEO: 35 Initial SIERRA: 201735Z 
386 

NBC 4 (NUCLEAR REPORT) 
Precedence: IMMEDIATE Date/time: 161405Z Security classification: From: ~T03 To: N3B..15 NBC 4 (Nuclear) Report QUEBEC: TU054066j ROMEO: 50 shielded (M113 APC) SIERRA: 161310Z QUEBEC: TU05606B ROMEO: 70 peak SIERRA: 161350Z 
AUTOMATIC REPORTS 
AI I units in the contaminated area submit certain monitoring reports automatically. These are-1nitial, peak, and special reports. These reports provide the minimum essential information for warning, hazard evaluation, and survey planning. Reports are sent through specified channels to reach the NBCC. Nondivisional and corps units in a division area submit reports to the division NBCC. 
The purpose of automatic reports is to prevent overloading of communications. Through the use of automatic reports, units are obi igated, not I imited, to certain types of reports. This procedure also ensures that only meaningful data are reported. 
Initial Report 
During continuous monitoring, the monitor takes readings outside unti I the dose rate reaches 1 cGy(rad)/hr. When this level is reached, the monitor notes'the time and moves inside. The dose rate and time of reading are 
reported to the unit NBC defense team. The NBC team warns and alerts alI unit personnel of the arrival of fallout. The team formats this information into an NBC 4 initial report. The word INITIAL is placed on I ine item ROMEO to alert the NBCC to the value of this report. 
Intermediate headquarters screen and evaluate the initial NBC 4 report, if the hazard has already been reported, the precedence of the report is reduced. The report may be eliminated if several reports covering the same area have already been submitted. I 
EXAMPLE: NBC 4 INITIAt Report. 
A unit detects arrival of fallout. 
387 

PRECEDENCE 
DATE/TIME OF REPORT 
CLASSIFICATION 
FROM 
TO 
NBC 4 REPORT 
QUEBEC AY 123456 
ROMEO 1 I N I T I AL 
SIERRA 021200 ZULU 

Peak ·Report 
When fallout is complete, the dose rate wi II level off and begin to decrease. At this time, the CF data are obtained. It is also at this time when the peakreading is evident. The information is forwarded to the unit NBC defense team. The team formats the data in an NBC 4 peak report and sends the report up through the chain of command to the NBCC. The word PEAK is placed on line item ROMEO with dose rate reading. 
Intermediate headquarters do not screen these peak reports. These data are extremely important to the NBCC. The reports must not be delayed. 
NOTE: 
NBC 4 reports that report dose rates on I ine item ROMEO followed by the words increasing and decreasing are never sent unless specifically
requested. It is logical to assume that the dose rate at a unit that sent an initial NBC 4 report wi II increase. Further, it is logical to assume that the dose rate wi II increase to a peak and then decrease. The 
computations used to normalize (convert to H + 1) the peak dose rate also converts any decreasing dose rate at that location to the same H + 1 dose rate. From this it can be seen that unsolicited increasing and decreasing reports clutter the repgr~ing channels with useless information. Increasing and decreasing reports are used; however, this is left to NBCC 
_SOP, special request, and instructions. 
EX~MPLE: NBC 4 PEAK Report 
Fallout has reached peak and begun to decay. 
PRECEDENCE 
DATE/TIME OF REPORT 
CLASSIFICATION 
FROM 
TO 
NBC 4 REPORT 
QUEBEC AY 123456 
ROMEO 10 PEAK 
SIERRA 02130 ZULU 

388 

Special Reports 
The NBCC SOP and other standing instructions may establish the requirement for special NBC 4 reports. These special reports are for evaluation byintermediate commanders who require special information as well as by the 
NBCC. Their purpose is to invite command attention to areas or conditions of serious concern. Since the)}Perational situation, unit radiation status, and similar considerations determine the criteria for these special reports, they are not specified here. As an example, aMi Iitary Pol ice unit may be required 
to change refugee routes based on contamination reaching a certain level of a road junction. The report on this radiation level is a special report. 
Repotts of this type may be required when the ground dose rate goes above a 
specified value. They may also be required when the dose rate increases after it has decreased. In this case, the word OVERLAPPING could be used on I ine item ROMEO. Special reports may be required after a specific period of time if the unit remains in the area. 
EXAMPLE: 
The radiation exposure status (RS) of several subordinate units has 
approached a lefvel warranting serious concern. The RS 1 and RS 2 units may be exposed to .dose rates of 10 cGy(rad)/hr or higher. This exposure over a period of hours wi I I exceed negligible risk for RS 1 units and the operational exposure guidance established by the commander and result in 
the units being classified in higher RS categories. Thus, special NBC 4 reports wi II be required when the ground dose rate goes above 10 cGy(rad)/hr. 
EXAMPLES: -NBC SPECIAL Report 
PRECEDENCE 
.DATE/TIME OF REPORT 
CLASSIFICATION 
FROM 
TO 
NBC 4 REPORT 
QUEBEC AY 456123 
ROMEO 20 SPECIAL 
SIERRA 081200 ZULU 

Use of two words on I ine item ROMEO 
389 

PRECEDENCE 
DATE/TIME OF REPORT 
CLASSIFICATION 
FROM 
TO 
NBC 4 REPORT 
QUEBEC AY 456123 
ROMEO 20 SPECIAL INCR~SING 
SIERRA 081200 ZULU 
Directed Reports 
Selected units in the contaminated area wi I I be directed to submit NBC 4 
reports. These reports are required by the NBCC to properly evaluate a 
radiological contamination hazard. These reports permit determination of the decay rate of fallout and the projected time of validity. They also allow determination of the soi I type present in induced areas. These reports are 
used to determine H hour when it is not known. 
The rei iabi Iity of each of these calculations is directly related to the 
precision of the measurement of the dose rate readings. The length of the 
time interval over which t~ readings were taken is also critical. Continual development of information depends upon this data. If there is an error in 
the decay-rate calculation, there is a similar or corresponding error in the dose calculations. 
The locations at which these readings are taken are carefully selected by the NBCC. Close coordination with the G3 is required. Selection is based upon
the following factors. 
-How long the unit is likely to remain in the area. 
-The status of trainin~ of the unit. 
-Comparison of typica.l sol I, vegetation, and terrain present across the entire area with the proposed monitoring location. 
' 
-The tactical situation. 
There are three types of directed reports. These are series, summary, and 
verification reports. The.NBCC SOP establishes instructions for report
frequency, precedence, reporting procedures, communication channels, and monitor or unit defense team, the -name means dose rate reading taken in accordance with a specific procedure. The words serve the NBCC as a brief name when asking for the desired report. 
Series Report 
A series report consists of dose rate readings taken even 30 minutes for 2 1/2hours followed by hourly reports. This report begins after a peak dose rate is noted at the monitor's location. The NBCC wi II speci tical ly direct selected units to send these reports. 
390 

The units selected to submit series reports receive this tasking through oper-ations channels. The SOP is referenced, and the request must specifically ask for series reports. This request is passed, ultimately, to the unit monitors. The request for series reports means to the monitor that he must take dose rate readings at 30 minutes intervals (as previously discussed). The readings are recorded on DA LForm 1971-R. However, in this case, each reading and time o reading_~re reported to the unit NBC defense team. The location must remain const~t. The monitor continues the procedure unti I told to stop. The instrument should be rezeroed before each reading. 
The unit NBC defense team formats the data into the NBC 4 report. The word SERIES is used in I ine item ROMEO. In accordance with the NBCC SOP, the reports may be sent one at a time or held unti I several have been collected and then reported. Intermediate headquarters do not screen or delay these reports. The reports are needed at the NBCC for fallout decay rate and other calculations. 
EXAMPLE: NBC 4 SERIES PRECEDENCE DATE/TIME OF REPORT CLASSIFICATION FROM TO NBC 4 REPORT ALFA 3A001 QUEBEC AY 654321 ROMEO 40 SERIES SIERRA 121400 ZULU 
Summary Reports 
Summary reports show the radiation situation in unit areas of responsibi I ity. 
For summary reports, the d~se~ rates at locations selected by the originating 
unit are reported. The time~~ach reading was taken is also given. AI I dose 
rates must be reported as outiide ground dose rates. I 
Tasking of units to submit the summary report may be upon direction or as 
required by the NBC SOP at a specified time (for example H + 24 or H + 48 
hours after burst). In either case, the unit must understand that it is 
required to submit NBC 4 summary reports. The unit NBC defense team wi I I direct unit monitors to take dose rate readings at several location within 
their subunit boundaries. 
The unit monitors take dose-rate readings at locations specified by the control party or at locations of their choosings. The location, dose rate, and time of reading are recorded on DA Form 1971-R. The form is returned to 
the NBC defense team. 
The NBC 4 summary report is -created by the unit NBC defense team. The SUMMARY is used with I ine item ROMEO. The tam ensures that the report covers the area adequately. The report is sent to the NBCC through intermediate 
391 

headquarters. At these headquarters additional data from other sources
added if available. However, reports are not delayed for this purpose. IS 
EXAMPLE: NBC 4 SUMMARY Report 
Line Q, RandS are repeated as necessary to show area's contamination. 
PRECEDENCE
DATE/TIME OF REPORT
CLASSIFICATION
FROM
TO
NBC 4 REPORT
QUEBEC AY 411210
ROMEO 8 SUMMARY
SIERRA 141200 ZULU
QUEBEC AY 420220
ROMEO 10 SUMMARY
SIERRA 141205 ZULU 
Verification Reports 
The verification report is a unit's response to a direct request from theNBCC. In this case the NBBC needs data at a specified location near or in the
unit's area. The request may be based upon a lack of data from that area.Then NBCC may also request rechecking of an unusually high dose rate. (TheNBCC understands that the previous dose rate wi I I not sti I I exist because
radioactive decay has taken place). Finally, the NBCC may requestconfirmation of the location of a zero dose-rate area. 
A unit tasked with submitting a verification report receives specific
instructions. Instructions include exact location for reading, reason for therequest, and detai Is about~o~munications. 
A unit monitor tasked to perfo~m this monitoring uses the direct technique totake the reading whenever possible. The monitor records alI data on DA Form
1971-R. The form is turned into the unit NBC defense team when the mission iscompleted. 
The team formats the NBC 4 report. The word VERIFICATION is added to I ine
item ROMEO. Intermediate headquarters do not screen verification reports.They are passed without delay to the NBCC. 
392 
EXAMPLES: NBC 4 VERIFICATION Report 
• PRECEDENCE
I' DATE/TIME OF REPORT CLASSIFICATION FROM TO NBC 4 REPORT QUEBEC AY 990800 ROMEO 300 VERIFICATION SIERRA 011300 ZULU 
A unit confirms no contamination 
PRECEDENCE 
DATE/TIME OF REPORT 
CLASSIFICATION 
FROM 
TO 
NBC 4 REPORT 
QUEBEC AY 666666 
ROMEO ZERO VERIFICATION 
SIERRA 112000 ZULU 

Submit NBC 4 (Nuclear) Reports 
One of the most valuable of the NBC 4 (Nuclear) Reports is the contact report. It is submitted whenever an initial ground dose rate of 1 cGy(rad)/hr 
or more is detected. Units wi I I submit contact reports wih an IMMEDIATE precedence by the quickest means available. These reports provide the basis for issuing fallout and contaminated area warnings throughout the command. Special automatic and other reports are submitted with the highest precedenceconsistent with other communi~ation and operational requirements. The unit SOP also may establish the ~means of communication and precsedence for the NBC 4 (Nuc Iear) Report . 
The urgency of the battlefield situation wi I I, in most cases, dictate how the report wi I I be submitted. Methods of submitting an NBC 4 (Nuclear) Reportinclude: 
o 
Field radio 
o 
Field telephone 
o 
Radioteletype communications (RATT) 
o Courier 
393 

Field Radio Method. The field radio, using the G3/S3 operations net or theG2/S2 intel I igence net, is an excel lent means for submitting NBC 4 (Nuclear)Reports. You must consider other battlefield operations in progress at that time, and the impact of "tying-up" the net for the period required for transmitting the message. With this means of transmission, it is possible totransmit the message to a large number of units in a single transmission. 
SUPERVISE RADIOLOGICAL SURVEY 
CONDITIONS 
You-are given a situation where a trained survey party is available with 
operational IM174 and IM93 radiacmeters, a watch, a mode of transportation,
and a means of communication. You are able to provide to the survey party DAForm 1971-1-R, penci Is, unit SOP, a map of the area to be surveyed, overlays,and marking signs. 
STANDARDS 
1. 
The type of survey is deiermined in accordance with (lAW) FM 3-3. 

2. 
The technique of survey is determined lAW FM 3-3. 

3. 
Survey team is briefed on survey mission. 

4. 
The turn-back dose rate and dose are issued. 

5. 
Location for obtaining correlation factor (CF) data is determined. 

6. 
Operator is given proper equipment and forms. 

7. 
Operator performs PMCS and preoperational checks on the radiacmeters. 

8. 
Means of reporting and fime to report are determined and issued. 

9. 
Collected data are reported to supervisor. 


REFERENCES 
FM 3-3 
RADIOLOGICA~ RECONNAISSANCE AND SURVEYS 
There are two techniques used by units to acquire:the level of radiation in a contaminated area, radiological reconnaissance and radiological surveys.Radiological reconnaissanc;e provides the commander with only an out I ine look 
at the contaminated area.~normal ly high I ighting only the boundary and its 
level.of contamination. A'radiological survey on the other hand provides the 
commander an in-depth picture of the contaminated 'area, depicting "hot" spotsand uncontaminated areas. Because using the survey technique is so timeconsuming, let's look at radiological reconnaissance first. 
394 

Radiological reconnaissance is conducted to determine the type, extent, and 
intensity (dose rate) of radiological contamination. The reconnaissance mission may be performed on the ground or in the air. 
The reconnaissance team is normally briefed on their mission. This briefing 
includes: type of reconnaissasnce to be used; mission objective; and the current situation in the ar~.a. Normal reconnaissance briefing techniques are used plus guidance on part~ular actions to take in event of discovering a 
radiological contaminated hazard. 
Radiological reconnaissance is performed by scouts during normal 
reconnaissance missions. The results of radiological reconnaissance are placed on a contamination plot. In keeping with the normal understanding of "reconnaissance", reconnaissance teams initially report and may submit subsequent reports on certain aspects about the radiological contamination 
found. However, they do not become significantly engaged to provide detailed 
information. This is more properly the subject of survey operations which wi II be discussed later. 
Ground Radiological Reconnaissance (GRR) 
Ground radiological reconn~_s,sance (GRR) is the act of detecting the presence of radiation and measuring it with RADIAC instruments before a unit moves into or through an area. The location wi I I be reported but may not be marked on the ground depending upon type of reconnaissance and possible benefit such marking would provide the enemy. The RADIAC instrument used in GRR is the IM174 Series RADIAC meter. No special organization is required for GRR. AI I units appoint and train teams to conduct GRR. GRR teams wi I I normally be the first elements to detect contamination. GRR is included in normal intel I igence and reconnaissance activities, and provides the following: 
-Warning of a hazard that otherwise might go undetected. Thus, GRR alerts units when they contact a contaminated area. 
-Information to the unif commander about the extent or size of the hazard just contacted. 
-Information to the unit commander about the location of clean or uncontaminated area. 
-Information about routes which can be used to avoid the contaminated area. If total avoidance cannot be accomplished, GRR may be able to determine the lowest dose-rate route to be used while crossing the area. 
Conditions for GRR 
Nuclear weapons may be use~on the integrated battlefield at any time. This wi II produce exsensive fall~uf"or more localized neutron-induced contamination areas ..Any enemy with the ability to use nuclear weapons also has the ability to use radiological agents or materials which could be distributed on the battlefield, without indicators such as nuclear burst, to create additional 
395 

contamination hazards. Even the total use of air bursts without military
significant fallout can cause residual contamination "hot-spots" at distant 
locations through rainout and washout. Because of the constant threat, alI 
units upon initial deployment, wi I I conduct GRR. Thus, GRR is conducted 
during tactical operations, patrols, and alI unit movements. 
Essentially, GRR actions a~~ the same as those used in continuous on-the-move 
monitoring. The survey insjrument is continually observed. Readings may be 
taken by the direct or indirect technique dependent on the level of radiation 
hazard and the need for protective shielding for GRR personnel. 
Limitations of GRR 
When a mission is given to conduct an area, zone, or route reconnaissance, the 
anticipated hazards are considered. Avoidance techniques and methods for complete protection from enemy action, minefields, and chemically contamianted areas exist. However, since radiation presents a penetrating hazard, the onlycomplete protection from radiological contamination is avoidance of the area entirely. At this stage of reconnaissance, when radiological hazards are 
initially located, there is no indication of the maximum dose rate that may be found. The process of determining the highest dose rate may be lethal to the GRR team. The GRR team ca~ol conduct detailed assessment of the 
contamination. Keeping in mind the fact, that the GRR teams must also locate other contaminated areas during other operations. These teams must have 
a 
very low dose I imit or operational exposure guide (OEG). The arbitrary
setting of a high OEG wi I I result in loss of the team. These Iimitations 
restrict the GRR team to locating only the outer I imit of the contaminated 
area. lndepth reconnaissance of the area for terrain trafficabi Ii ty, enemyactivity, obstacles, chemical contamination, etc. must stop if a low dose 
Iimit is to be maintained. GRR is similar to finding one's way through an unfamiliar room in the dark. 
GRR Techniques 
In reconnaissance the most desirable information is the location of uncontaminated areas.· Reconnaissance is rarely concerned with the determination of the dose rates inside contaminated areas. This task is left to radiological survey. 
Dose rates found during GRR are usually of secondary value. The location of the contaminated area perimeters is of principal value and importance. These perimeters are more valuable than the dose rates in the area becsause the 
perimeter location allows units to avoid the hazard completely. 
When a GRR team discovers contamination, the team notifies the commander through the unit NBC defense team. The GRR team reports the location of 
contamination, the dose ra~, and the time the dose rate was measured. The NBC 4 report format can be~se·d to report these data. When contamination is 
initially detected and repoited, the word CONTACt is used with the dose rate on Iine item ROMEO. The word INITIAL is not associated with this dose rate. 
396 

The in-and-out process is used by the GRR team after the initial discovery. 
The 1eam enters an area. Upon detecting a dose rate in the area, the team 
notes the reading, time, and location. The team withdraws to an 
uncontaminated area. A report is rendered to alert the main body or unit. The team flanks the contamination repeating the in-and-out process within the 
team's assigned area or zone. 
Marking Areas 
GRR teams mark the outer boundaries of the contamination unless told not to do so. In some cases, this may provide benefit to the enemy about troop movements. NATO markers are erected only at logical points of entry facing away from the contamination. Data are not normally recorded on the signs due to time Iimitations and in keeping with the expeditious nature of reconnaissance operations. 
Attack Indicators 
While reconnoitering for a radiological hazard, the team surveys the surroundings for indications of the reason for its existence and additional damage or obstacle indications. Some indicators are as follows: 
o Arrival and settling of dust-I ike particles 

o Tree blowdown 


o 
Scorching on one side of an object 
o Overturned objects 
o 
Evidence of treetop fires 
o Dead ani rna Is and bi-rds 

o Rain or snow after an airburst occurs 


Washout (Rainout) 
The washing out of radiological fallout particles from the air can vastly affect GRR operations. If the washout is caused by rain, the resulting contamination wi I I collect in low areas, sreams, ponds, and rivers, creating hot-spots. However, large sti II bodies of water wi II allow heavier fallout particles to settle and provide shielding. If snow causes the rainout, the area wi I I initially be evenly blanketed. Heavy snowfal I may shield indications and readings of radiation levels, but it will eventually melt and the result wi II be the same as that caused by rain. 
A rainout area can be larg~r·lhan a fallout area when given the same size attack employed as a surfac~ burst. There is no satisfactory rainout prediction system. Essentially, predictions involve determining when it wi II rain, how much it wi II rain, and how large the raindrops (sleet, hai I, or 
397 

snow) wi I I be. Rai~out can cause significant hot spot(s) in an otherwise normal fallout pattern. The GRR team should be aware of the potential for 
rainout and its effects on the mission. 
Aerial Radiological Reconnaissance (ARR) 
If the operational situati~n-or time does not permit time-consuming ground radiological reconnaissanc~~ ~erial radiological reconnaissance (ARR) is used. An ARR team consists of a pi lot and a monitor. 
Aerial radiologicsal reconnaissance is a simplified aerial survey. ARR wi I I provide the minimum, essential information needed for contamination avoidance. This minimum inforamtion is the outer I imits of the area and dose rates at points or along a roue of operational interest. If conditions permit, dose rates at the location of highest contaminations are obtained. 
It may be that a single unit wi I I not be in a position to completely assess an area, even by aerial means. Radiological agents wi I I be I imited to localized areas, but fallout (as wei I as rainout and washout) wi I I cover extensive areas. Due to these conditions, ARR is control led by the NBCC as a centralized operation. This control allows greater flexibi Iity in moving the aerial teams to areas wherti'Jallout is complete. It also eases coordination across unit boundaries and provides the data to the organization best equipped to convert, plot, and disseminate the results. 
The techniques for conducting ARR are the same as those for detailed radiological surveys with the following exceptions: 
o 
The ARR team selects the checkpoints, routes, and course legs when they arrive over the area. The NBCC preplans only the general area over which the ARR is conducted. 
o The ARR provides rela_Jil.(_ely little detail, covering only those parts of the contaminated area which are of immediate operational concern. Other portions of the area can wait unti I detailed aerial and ground surveys are conducted. 
o 
A debriefing is held by the NBCCs centralized control party after ARR is completed. 
o Data from the ARR team may be relayed to the control party as it is determined. Loss of security is traded for timely data flow. Electronic warfare threat is always considered when electing this course of action. 
Upon arrival over the fallout area, the ARR locates the edge of the contaminated area. The altitude and airspeed used are determined by the pi lot. Once the edge is latated, the team determines checkpoints which can be identified in the air and on ..the map. These checkpoints are used for route, course leg, and point techniques. An additional technique may be available to the ARR team. This technique involves flying from a known point along a compass heading while maintaining a constant airspeed. The airspeed and 
398 

duration of the flight in seconds are noted and reported to the NBCC. These data are recorded on DA Form 1971-1-R and allow plotting at the NBCC. AI I course legs and routes are kept as short as possible. The most important data concerns the edge of the area rather than the interior. Detailed survey later determines interior dose rates. 
Since, in most cases, ARR is conducted at or ahead of the forward edge of the 
battle area (FEBA), carefnJ _air defense arti I lery (ADA) planning must be 
conducted to prevent high losses. Aerial security, fire support, and a host 
of other measures must be rapidly considered and coordinated. 
The point technique permits nap-of-the-earth flight at appropriate speeds with evasive maneuvers which wi I I minimize ADA threat during ARR. Modifying the technique to allow shielded readings from the aircraft is recommended. The ARR team must provide several air-ground correlation factor (AGCF) data readings. AI I shielded readings must be taken from the same height as the aerial portion of the AGCF data. 
Under hostile ADA conditions, route and course leg techniques are not 
recommended because of their unique signature. 
The ARR is best accompl isned if there are several teams flying in sectors rather than a single team. This minimizes loss of data and provides the data quickly. However, it increases resource (aircraft) requirements. 
There are other planning factors for ARR. Knowledge, such as that from any
unit monitoring reports, about the suspected contaminated area can help
determine the size or hazard of the area to be reconned. 
A fallout prediction helps delineate the reconnaissance area. Several ARR 
teams working opposite sides of the area predicted to receive fallout can 
quickly locate the perimeters of the actual fallout hazard. 
Night vision devices extend ARR capabi Iities. Reconnaissance should be delayed during precipitation and high winds. These conditions tend to change a contamination pattern. 
A~R in areas with few or no landmarks for checkpoint identification wi I I be d~fficult. Probably, the quickest way to identify a location in arctic,
desert, or jungle areas is to mark the spot on the ground by dropping ale, ashes, paint or a similar substance from the helicopter. Several radio fixes may be needed to correlate the ground location to a map. 
Fallout must be complete in the area before ARR can begin. Peak monitoring 
reports, if any exist from units that happen to be in the contaminated area, may indicate when tal lout is complete in an area. Otherwise, the expectedarrival times and completU)n times for tal lout must be used to indicate appropriate times for aeri~l ~econnaissance. 
The status of training of the ARR team must also be considered. The best source of ARR teams is the aviation unit which supplies the aircraft. In 
399 

general, ARR teams must be better trained than survey teams. ARR teams are essentially autonomous. They must understand all facets of the operation and be capable of independent and innovative action to accomplish their mission. 
The previous dose of the ARR teams is another factor. An OEG is set by the commander. The ARR team carries an IM147/PD dosimeter which is checked 
frequently to ensure that the_operational exposure guidance (OEG) is not exceeded. Other type dosim&ters are unacceptable because of their large scale. The large-scale dosim~ters are graduated by 20 cGy(rad) increments. The large scale prevents accurate determination of the dose. Usually the OEG given an ARR team wi I I be around 10 cGy(Rad). A turn-back dose or dose rate 
is not normally calculated for the aerial reconnaissance team. Because of the maneuverabi I i ty of the he Iicopter, the team can immediately remove itself from a high dose rate area if necessary. However, if aerial reconnaissance is to be conducted in the vicinity of a hostile fire zone, the aerial reconnaissance 
team should be provided this information in case they are forced down in a contaminated area. 
RECONNAISSANCE AT NIGHT AND DURING OTHER PERIODS OF REDUCED VISIBILITY 
NBC reconnaissance elements:conduct operations at night just as they do during the day. However, the rate 6f coverage is less at night. This is due to an increase in navigatiorial difficulties; a reduction in visual observation; and during sustained operations, a decline in human endurance. As a general rule, routes can be searched just as wei I at night as in the day, although not as quickly. When conducting a zone reconnaissance, zones should be narrowed since command and control is more difficult at night. When performing an area reconnaissance at night or during other periods of reduced visibility, the commander should allow more time to accomplish the mission. 
I I lumination flares, passive night vision devices, survei I lance radars, and other night observation devices offset the problems of darkness to a large degree. When i I lumination~flares are used, they must be placed behind the enemy to silhouette them agai~st the Iight. Since the enemy also uses night observation devices and places great emphasis on I imited visibi Iity concealment--during reduced visibi Iity just as they do during good visibi Iity. They must also use dismounted reconnaissance techniques to prevent unnecessary vehicle losses. At night or in fog, the location of moving vehicles is easy to pinpoint by sound. 
RADIOLOGICAL SURVEYS 
When a commander requires detailed information of a radiation hazard area a radiological survey may be conducted using either a ground survey or an aerial survey. Both types of sur~eys wi I I be discussed. A radiological survey is performed by a group compr=sed of a control party and one or more survey parties. The survey party ~ay be organized within the company/troop/battery NBC team. The NBC reconnaissasnce unit also is capable of conducting radiological surveys. The material covered wi I I apply to both NBC reconnaissance units and unit radiological survey parties. 
400 

In order for you to prepare the transportation and team equipment for radiological surveys, you must be familiar with the type of transportation to be used and the items of equipment required to conduct a radiological survey. 
You also must be able to inspect or check the operation of these items to ensure that alI are serviceable prior to conducting the survey. 
Equipment Requirements For Radiological Surveys 
The following items of equipment are required to conduct radiological surveys: 
o 	IM174 Series Radiacmeter 
1M93 or IM147 Dosimeter 


o 	FM radio set 

o 	Watch 

o 	Maps of the area 

o 	Radiological contamination markers 


DA 	Forms 1971-R and 1971-1-R
o 
o 	T ranspo rtat ion -
A supervisor responsible for preparations for conducting radiological surveys must ensure that alI required equipment is available and operational. 
IM174 Series Radiacmeter. Simplified operating instructions are provided on 
the operating instructions plate at the rear of the operating controls. 
FM 	Radio Set. Depending on the radio assets of the unit at the time of the 
survey, the radio could either be vehicular-mounted or manpacked. 
NOTE 
If 	the radio set is vehicular-mounted, turn off the radio 
before starting or stopping the vehicle engine. 
If 	the radio set is for manpack operation, open the battery 
bdox to make sure that a battery is instal led and that the 
battery power connector is not damaged. 
Turn on the radio, check to see if the correct frequency is set, and perform a radio check. Check to see if current Communications Electronics Operation Instructions (CEOI) are a~ilable, and the proper cal I sign is being used. 
Watch.· A watch wi II be required to determine the time at which the survey readings are taken. Check to see if the time on the watch is correct. 
401 

Maps. Check to see if the maps of the land areas to be surveyed are avdai lable in sufficient quantity for the survey mission. 
DA Forms 1971-R and 1971-1-R. The DA Form 1971-R is used when a ground radiological survey is conducted using the point technique. Use of DA Fjorm1971-R was discussed in Unit 4. TheDA Form 1971-1-R is used when an aerial survey is conducted or whe~-a ground survey is conducted using the route technique. Prior to condu~!i~g a survey, you should check to see that the correct form is available in a sufficient qua~tity to complete the mission. 
Local reproduction of these radiological data sheets is authorized. You should also check for penci Is and clip board or other suitable writingsurfaces. 
Fi I ling in the DA Form 1971-1-R Radiological Data Sheet Route Technique or Course Leg Technique. The definitions shown below correspond to the numbers on the 1971-1-R. A completed 1971-1-R is found later. 
1. 
Radiological Data Sheet: State the type of survey, Ground or Air. 

2. 
Date: Date the survey was taken. 

3. 
Page Number: Number of page. 

4. 
Number of Pages: How many pages you have. 

5. 
Survey Party Designation: The name of survey party code name. 

6. 
Monitor: Your name. 

7. 
Map Used: Name, number, and scale of map sheet. 

8. 
Aircraft or Vehicle T~pe: Type of vehicle or aircraft used for survey. 

9. 
Instrument Type: Instrument used on survey such as IM174A/PD. 

10. 	
Route or Course Leg: The route or course leg designation. 

11. 	
Time At Sdtart of Leg or Route: Define as local or ZULU time. 

12. 	
Time Route Completed (Ground) or Survey Height1 (Air): The time youc?mpleted the route, if!conducting a ground survey. The height of the arrcraft during an aeriil sujvey (i.e., 200ft). 

13. 	
Distance or time interval used to take a reading. 

14. 	
Reading Numbers are lP numerical order 1-2-3-4 etc. 

15. 	
Dose Rate (cGy(rad)/hr): How much radiation was present. 

16. 	
Do Not Use: Section is for·control party use only. 


402 

17. 	
Remarks Section: The remarks block is to be used by the monitor in . providing any add i t iona I info rma t ion. 

18. 	
Location: Location where the readings were taken for CF. 

19. 	
Height (feet) Air only: Height aircraft was flying when reading was taken. 

20. 	
Dose Rate (cGy(rad)/hr) ·Inside/Air: What the dose rate was while in the air. 

21. 	
Dose Rate (cGy(rad)/hr) Outside/Ground: The reading that was taken on -the ground. 

22. 	
To get your Correlation Factor Data divide outside dose (OD) by the inside dose (ID). 


After completing the date sheet(s) forward it (them) to the control party. 
403 

r:~~O:..CG!C!..!... D:JA ~""'.!...'"J' 1 
;::::;:.r.: -;::::-::Ic-E m CJ:.,r;sE ~ 1 ~nc-v:: 
(G...~.Lr-1 .!..:..-ic.l S:1:n:y) (F'M 3-12) 

~C"tr,J.Y ?::::rt l--::J!ITTCR 
L.!.::ilG~~:i'Im S (Print nt.::'~)
~!:..::;:':_.:;::D,:-;l]:::::S3~·~-------:-------,-,..;:;:;

lli~::CtW 'f (X{ 
7 Y!:-iiCLE nn: 
~----------------------~+------~~-r-----~--~------~--~ 
!UJ!l: o~ cc-.E.s: ur; D:Sicrv.nm 10 E1{;.1 ...... 
e
.... ~--------! ... 
Cl c: 
11 . 8 0 u 
:1.7 
5 
5 
7 7 
I
t---+-:~-t-:1---h·-7-:1---!--1 
lTI~:i or ctc.:-t crl c top co re~rtcl IlO l
ro:-e!:Ch r'OL'tC Or' torti<T.l of rc-.rte 10 10 ~lct.cd ct cnri d.~ by Grou::rl Cu:-t"6""JJ--+----+----4---{----'-!----+--ll-+I--I--Ir c ro-.1to io do~ in pc:-ts. uso a 11 ll e::::~c...-Qte colu:::J for c::..::h part. 
I 
Z::n ~~J"i' tr-7";. fu:-cc:1trol pc.rty uso o:lly. l2 l2 12 
~--~-~---~~-~~~-x_o_C?.~r~L~~~~~~~~~~~~~_?ux_-~-_~_~w-·__~-~~·--+---r-~~----~~__,IIL::L___jl'l~--
l'r'.:.ICL-u r:r::e:..PJ.n 1 I I -·· IJ.n ~sm:.:.tjo:.m:.-ruj" ~...:;·~ . 
H. I g
w_"'-_,,..._l.:~·:-'r_c.-...:..~t_).J.i--2·-o(_rt:.i_J/_P.._-_)--2_-~-4--~..l!. I 1151 I
.. -"':--+----li--1--11.......;<,511

-cr.:.y l..IR G!"D..:> ?. 2 1~ 
6

.1. 8 J 53 I___...... -+-I-------~---;-1.,._lGJ~-1~1 I 17 
----1-------i 
,.___I I I ~---r.-1~ 1 
lB
I I I ~~~_j l1el I_ 
~ I 19 . [~--I llr·\1 ) D!. FO!~r: IS7l·l·P.. 1 J/.1\ G3 Rc:r>!c.cc!:. 0/,20.:::1 1P71-l-R, 1 1-:.ov 5G, t:l:..!ch !I; CJ::alctof Crl'. 404 
R';.!):!:C':..o::; IC.U D/JA :::-:.:::-:r 
rc-..rr: ·"-u;-~.:IC:E E ~--·= --~-=::..;:~..;:r-:!: 
(G...-run:i c..rrl L-icl S:.J..-v~y) (FM 3-12) 
S\,"h\T.Y Pi2TY 
Lf.:::; 1 C R:':I' I CL-i BR!l vo--rwo 

l:.:J) 	l.S:) 
(}£RMitN Y SHE£1 5'31 ~ :1: £0.QO..Q 
R0Jrt: c:-: 7.:""s--....:.....::;:; o-:srct\Anm 
TIC 	/...T ST/J\T G? -8: '? ~ 
-. 
P:l.S:zSf~-~~~round) 
DISTJ..!::::TI G;.-;:ll,...., ;!;,_=-';".!..-~ 
~£?.:3 
1/M£ OF (JuR>T-0730 
lTir:c~ of ctc:t c:;rl stop 2-o ro-portcl fa:-ecch roLrto ~r ~io:1 or I""O"..lto ~ls~d ct coc t by t;r0u::rl Gl..l:"t"EiJ' rr ll I'O'..!tf3 1C dOXJ in pcr"tC 1 U!:C a c:~~te ~1~ for ~h part. 
2::o 	r::rr tB::. rc.-co:1trol pcrty \!!!!! o:Ur. 
-~=-<-·;:;:-;:;:..-m \'1:--rrc:u: CQ::i.._{CU',.!TQi
rLwm n:SA r.D3::! rJ:TI:
1-r..:.IG.::-U' 
{~/hr-)
{ret)
UXJ.Ticr.: c;-2/:.iR II3Dr/ j_ OJ1'S1-p;.'
c::x fiT( G?..:ll:> [P11 I 5 I 1q 
~=:=3 
§ 
~~~ 
1 
? 
:s 
<, 
5 
6
,, 

5 
9 10 
11 
12 
15 
H. 
1~ 
16 17 
I _j I1GI 

Dk..t""'E -19f!711Y 19CZJf 
1..::::nrrrrn 
(P;-i nt nt::n:)) SSG 
\~~ie:~r£·r:~ ~ 113 
...... 
R~-J";; 
~ 
o95o .... 8 
Cl t..
o>..
!1010 !::."d 
0 
~fJ
I100II.ET~ ::::>~ 
Q 
__ ..... 
~ 
"'
§~~ ~>.. 
~ 
~f-:l.:::::.
8& ~g 8~-g
I.. 	I.. 
11  I 1  
12.  I 2  
11  3  
11  ~I  
10  5  

PAS: !0. },"). 0? 
Pt.C!:3 j_

1 
Jo£ Fl]iNklDS'TRi r..----. :T Tt'?!; _L/V\ -1i41-/l_ffJ!2._ 
...... 	,.... 
e 	0 
l..o 
..... 	... 
c 	c 
8 	0 
(.) 
t..-t..
&~ 0>.. 
!:!.'d 
j
go0 (@ c 0 
t) .-g
::s 
r~
~~ 
'"' B£
(:1 ~[S$.
9 u<.
\
8~ . cu::: 1: 8~
f::!@ 
I 
-
IJ·:~ 
~~,U

I -~1 I 
J 5 
q 6~61 I s ~,l_j 
J 7 s I l B I~ 6 ~ I I ~1 
10 IlO
~ 
!: ll 	ll 
I
~ 12 I 121 I 1-f 1.:3 ~ 
l{
11-	1~1 I 
3 I lSI r 1 15 1 I 3 llGI I
'=f=l 
1 	11 17 1 -~~ I I ~~~~1oj-l 
I 
--I 	I jts _j lrt I 1 1~11 
Dl. 	F'u;·.:: 1S'il-1-P., 1 .J/.1\ 63 
F:c()l~ccs Df. Pc!.::l H71-l-R, 1 I~o\' ~G. d-Jch J..r.; v:;::olc.(c. CL7 ~·..{.5 
405 
Transportation. Ground radiological surveys are normally peTformed by
personnel mounted in wheeled or tracked vehicles. The radiological
information can also be obtained by personnel on foot; however, because of the
high radiation doses to personnel, foot surveys should b conducsted only under
exceptional circumstances. Armored vehicles reduce the dose received by
personnel and wi I I be used whenever possible. Ground surveys lack the speed
and flexibility of an aeriaL_survey. Ground radiological surveys result in
higher radiation doses to p~Jsonnel, place a larger load on communications
faci Iities, and require diversion of more personnel and equipment from the
mission. However, a ground survey is independent of weather conditions, can
be conducted at night, and provides more accurate information than an aerial
survey. AI I echelons can perform ground surveys within their areas of
responsibi Iity, using regularly assigned personnel and equipment. 
Sandbags placed on the floor and along the sides and rear of the surveyvehicle wi I I provide additional shielding to the survey party. As you performbefoere-operation checks on the vehicles in accordance with the appropriatetechnical manual, you should also check the placement of sandbags to ensurethe greatest possible shielding is available to the survey party. 
Light fixed-wing aircraft or helicopters are satisfactory for conducting
aerial surveys; however, because of the slow speeds required, helicopters are
the most desirable. 
INFORMATION TO BE INCLUDED INN SURVEY PARTY BRIEFINGS 
Normally, survey parties are briefed by the officer or NCO in charge of thecontrol party. This briefing may be centralized or conducted on an individualbasis, and may vary in detai I from an area assignment to specific route and
point assignments for each survey party. 
Basically, more general assignments
faci Iitate the initiation of the survey, whereas the more specific assignments
reduce security, communicationm, and interpretation difficulties. The degree
of the detai I of the briefing depends upon the time.avai lable to plan the
survey, the feasibi Iity of a centralized briefing, and the status of training
of su~vey party personnel. 
Briefing Guidance for Survey Parties 
Survey parties wi I I be briefed, providing guidance in the following areas. I 
Purpose. This wi I I be to determine the presence and the level of falloutactivity of induced radiation near ground zero, in a specified area, along a
route, at a specific location, or any combination of these. 
Start Time and Completion Time. The times during which the survey wi I I beconducted wi I I be given. 
Conduct of the Survey. The data on surveys may be summarized as an overlay ora marked map by the control party. For ground surveys, the route to be
followed and the locations at which readings wi I I be taken or the distancebetween readings wi I I be given. 
406 
Radiation Safety Precautions. Based on the operaion exposure guideestatJiished by the commander, the control party would calculate and furnish to the survey parties the following: 
o 
The turn-back dose rate at which the survey party wi I I immediately
leave the fallout area by the same route they used to enter the area. 
o 	The turn-back dose at~hich the party wi II immediately leave the fallout area by the safest (lowest dose rate) route. 
Recording Limitations. The minimum dose rate below which no record wi I I be 
kept should be stated. 
Communications. The method by which the survey data are to be communicated to the control party can vary. Data may be reported either at the time of recording or in the form of a summary table or record. In addition, the reporting method and destination to which the uncorrected results of the survey are to be sent wi II be g1ven. 
Current Situation. This wi I I cover the friendly and enemy situations as they
exist at th time of the bri~f~ng. 
Special Instructions._ Special instructions on conducting the survey mayinclude such items as: 
o 	The method in which certain dose rate readings which depart from the normal procedures (for example, the determination of correlation factors) are to be made. 

o 	Marking of contaminated areas, if required. 


o 
Security precautions to be taken if the survey is to be undertaken 1n 
or over a dangerous ~rea, such as a ground survey into Threat-held 
terrain. 
o 
If the ground survey is to be conducted as part of a reconnaissance 'mission, the enemy situation, type of reconnaissance, and movement technique to be used should be covered. 
Guidance for the Aerial Survey Party 
The control party planning the aerial survey may not be completely fami Iiar with the suvey area or the current, tactical operational situation that exists there. However, the control party has ready access to the latest information 
available to the headquarters conducting the survey and provides guidance to the survey party at the briefing. In addition to information about the contaminated area, the control party provides the detailed aerial survey partywith the identification ortlle course legs or routes to be flown, the tentative survey height, and the approximate time periods during which groupsof the course legs or routes are to be flown. The control party also mayfurnish the survey party with the operation exposure guide, turn-back dose,
and turn-back dose rate. 
407 

Survey Party Determinations. The aerial survey determines as applicable: 
o 	The actual height above ground at which each course leg or route is to be flown. 
o 
The ground speed for each course leg or route. 
o 	The direction of flig1Lt for each course leg or route. 
o 
The locations for determining air-ground correlation factor data. 
o 	The time intervals between readings. 

o 	Whether to delay the flight of a particular course leg or route. 


Guidance. As a guide to the survey party in making the determination discussed above, the tactical, operation, and weather conditions existing at the time of the survey and the dose condition of the survey party should be weighted against the following factors: 
o 
The slower the aircraft-speed and the shorter the time interval between readings, the more a~urate the results. 
-
o 
The unrel iabi Iity of survey data obtained at heights of more than 150 meters above the ground. A height of 60 meters is considered optimum. 
o 
The slow response time of the IM174 Series Radiacmester reduces rei iabi Iity of the data obtained at ground speeds above 53 knots (98 kmph). 
o 	The combination of ground speed and reading time interval should be selected so that the ground distance between .readings is not more than 500 meters. For incr~a~ed plotting accuracy, at. least 10 readings
between check points are desirable. 
o 
Air-ground correlation factor data should be taken where aerial and ground dose rates can be read most accurately on the survey meter (forexample, in the dose rate range of 5 to 10 cGy(rad)/hr). 
With the guidance and procedures out I ined, aerial surveys provide the control _party with adequate and sufficiently reliable data. ,Generally, the dose ratedetermined by aerial survey varies from the true do~e rate at the groundlocation because of survey meter errors, pilot errors, monitoring errors, 
errors due to contamination of aircraft at touchdown· for ground reading, andoveral I system errors. 
408 

PLOT NBC 5 (NUCLEAR) REPORT 
CONDITIONS 
You are given an NBC 5 (Nuclear) Report, an area map covered with overlay 
paper, a protractor, GTA 3-6-3, and colored penci Is (red, green, blue, and 
black). 
STANDARDS 
1. 
Grid coordinates are plotted within 200 meters of the reported locations. 

2. 
Contour I ines are drawn with the appropriate colors and labeled. 

3. 
Dose rates are entered along each contour I ine. 

4. 
Marginal data are recorded, including strike serial number, date/time of attack, and map scale. 


PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 
Plots coordinates fro~ ine U (Uniform) on the map overlay. 

2. 
Connects these points using the red penci I. 

3. 
Labels this line as the 1000 rad/hr contour I ine. 

4. 
Plots coordinates from I ine V (Victor) on the map overlay. 

5. 
Connects these points using the green penci I. 

6. 
Labels this I ine as the 300 rad/hr contour line. 

7. 
Plots coordinates from lihe W(Whiskey) on the map overlay. 

8. 
Connects these points using the blue penci I. 

9. 
Labels this line as the 100 rad/hr contour I ine. 

10. 
Plots coordinates from Iine X (Xray) on the map overlay. 

11. 
Connects these points using the black penci I. 

12. 
Labels this Iine as the 20 rad/hr contour Iine. 

13. 
Enters dose rate readings along each contour Iine. 

14. 
Records marginal data ~n-map overlay. REFERENCES FM 3-3 


409 

NBC 5 (NUCLEAR) REPORT 
Report used to locate the area of chemical, biologJcal, or radiological
contamination or hazard. The NBC 5 (Nuclear) Report used to locate 
radiological contamination is discussed below. 

The report is best sent as a trace or overlay if time and distance permit. 
When the contamination arises from a single threat or unidentified nuclear burst, the dose rate always refrs to H t1 hour, and the leter TANGO is used. When there have been several nuclear detonations at different times or on different days an no single H + 1 hour is possible, the dose rates are 
reported as a specified item using letter item OSCAR. Letter items OSCAR andTANGO are, therefore, alternatives and cannot both be used in the same report. 
It is not necessary or even desirable to report alI four of the contours ofdifferent dose rates. Four are given to provide flexibility. 
When a contour closes to form a complete ring, the first coordinate 1s 
reported at the end. 
Colors used for plotting a1Td when sending the report as a trace, are as 
to Ilows: 
Red for 1,000 cGy(rad)/hr. 
Green for 300 cGy(rad)/hr. 
Blue· for 100 cGy( rad)/hr. 
Black for 20 cGy(rad)/hr. (NATO uses 30 cGy(rad)/hr). 
Contour lines are to be annotated with the dose rates. 
When requested, decay rates ar~ to be transmitted according to letter item R. 
Users'of NBC 5 (Nuclear) reports are not confined solely to the use of the letter items shown in the example; other letter items may be added a theusers' discretion. 
Plot NBC 5 (Nuclear) Report 
The NBC 5 (Nuclear) Report may contain I ines: 
ALPHA NU 007 
DELTA 170800Z 
FOXTROT NB 51463.} 
TANGO 170900Z -

UNIFORM 
VICTOR 
WHISKEY 
XRAY 

410 

Lines U, V, W, and X will list grid coordinates. When plotted and connected, the~ wi I I be contour I ines. the meaning of these I ines are identified on GTA 3-6-2 and are shown below. 
U = 1,000 cGy(rad)/hr contour line V = 300 cGy(rad)/hr contour line W= 100 cGy(rad)/h_r...contour I ine X= 20 cGy(rad)/ht ~ontour I ine (30 cGy(rad)/hr is used by NATO 
only). 
Start with line UNIFORM and plot the first coordinate given. Then plot the 
·second coordinate given. Immediately connect the two coordinates given in line·U with red penci I. Continue plotting and connecting the coordinates (as you go) given in I ine U. When the first and last coordinates of Iine U are the same the coordinates wi II form a closed area. When finished, label this contour line as 1,000 cGy(rad)/hr. The contour line should'·be "flowing"having rounded corners and absolutely no straight Iines. 
The coordinates of Iine V, W, and X are plotted and connected the same way except I ine V is drawn with green; line W is drawn with blue; and I ine X is drawn with black. When plotting is complete, the contour I ines wi I I be basically parallel, labeled-, and color coded. Marginal information is written next to the plot to identify it. Then give it to your supervisor. 
NOTE: Contour lines wi I I never cross! 
CALCULATE FALLOUT DECAY 
CONDITIONS 
Given residual radiation decay (fallout) nomogram, a hairline and a dose rate at any time. 
STANDARDS 
Calcul~te fallout decay within+ 5%. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES 
1. 
Determine Rt. 

2. 
Determine Rt. 


3 . De term i n e t. 
411 

HAZARDS FROM FALLOUT 
Radioactive Emissions from Fallout If it were possible to obtain some fallout particles and magnify them, theywould probably look I ike the picture on this page. 
FAllOUT PARTICLES 
Some fallout particles are large, some are small; all look something Iike dust, dirt or ashes. Most~_rthese fallout particles would be visible to the naked eye. While the fallout particles may look Iike dust and dirt, you must remember that the fission fragments of the nuclear explosion iself are trapped on and in some particles. These fission fragments of the nuclear explosion are radioactive. By "radioactive" we mean they are shooting out invisible rays (of radiation) in every direction. Two of the radiations emitted from fallout particles are of importance and can cause casualties in a fallout area. 
One of the emissions from fallout is called "beta radiation". Of the two 
types of radiation from fallout, ~eta radiation is the least hazardous. The beta radiation from fallout particles has very little penetrating power; in 
fact, it cannot even penetrate ordinary clothing to a great extent. If, however, the fallout particles ar~ lying directly on the skin, enough beta 
radiaion can penetrate th~ skin to cause skin burns. These "beta burns" look 
I ike heat burns and are stOw-to ~"eal. The lesson here is simple-to prevent beta burns, keep the fallout particles off the skin. When in a fallout area, keep clothing buttoned up. After leaving a fallout area, brush or wash the clothing thoroughly and bathe astsoon as possible. 
412 


There is another type of invisible and dangerous radiation emitted from fal ~out particles which is far more serious than beta radiation. This is "gamma" radiation. Gamma radiation is the over-riding hazard from fallout and is the killer of soldiers in the fallout area. Gamma radiation has many of the characteristics of X-rays. Since most people are more familiar with X-rays, the paragraph below wi I I compare gamma rays to X-rays. 
CHARACTERISTICS OF GAMMA RADIATION 

INVISIBLE 
HIGHLY PENETRATING 
PAINLESS 
DAMAGING TO LIVING TISSUES 

Invisible. X-rays are invisible and so are gamma rays. You don't see anything when you a chest X-ray or an X-ray of your arm. What his means is 
that you and your unit must protect yourselves against a hazard which you 
cannot see or detect with your five senses. 
Highly Penetrating. You know that X-rays are highly penetrating. When you get a chest X-ray, they shoot the X-rays into your back and they goal I the way through your body and..a€xpose the film which is in front of your chest. Gamma rays are also highly penetratin. They can easily penetrate I ight materials such as cloth, wood, glass and plastics. Heavy materials, however, such as steel, concrete, and dirt can stop considerable numbers of gamma rays 
if the heavy material is thick enough. 
Painless. When you get a chest X-ray you feel nothing. Both X-rays and gamma rays are painless when they strike the body. 
Damages I iving tissues. Both X-rays and gamma rays damage I iving tissues. In the case of X-rays, the damage is very smal I, it is directed toward a smal I portion of the body, and it is justified by the good it does in allowing doctors to diagnose certafn medical conditions. In a fallout area, the gamma rays which enter the body are far more serious because they are uncontrolled and strike the entire body. Each gamma ray which hits your body wi I I penetrate it and kill individual cells within your body. If enough cells are ki I led, you wi I I become sick and may, in serious cases, even die. 
There is one thing that gamma radiation cannot do; it cannot make other things 
radioactive. In other words, if gamma rays hit you or your vehicle or a can of beans in a fallout area, neither you nor your vehicle nor the can of beans wi I I become radioactive. Objects struck by gamma rays wi I I not give off gamma 
rays. Gamma radiation causes a physical kind of damage somewhat similar to sticking a pin in yourself-eel Is are ki I led, but that is alI. Vehicles, tools, weapons, food and other objects which have been in a fallout area are perfectly safe to use if ~hey are washed off to remove any radioactive fallout particles which might cl ~g to them. 
413 

The Radiation Field 
Let us now consider what it would be I ike to be in an area that is receiving fallout. If you are near the ground zero, fallout particles may start arriving within minutes after a surface explosion; if you are far away, it may be hours before the fat lout begins to arrive in your area. Remember that militarily significant fat loQt is normally visible to the naked eye, looking like dirt or dust. At firsf~ a little fallout will fall, then more and more. Eventually, when the fallout cloud has passed over, the fallout particles wi II arrive slower and then stop. 
The fallout particles wi II I ie on all horizontal surface, I ike snow. They wi I I be on roofs of buildings, on tops of vehicles, and on the ground. These particles look I ike ordinary dust particles but they are not -they are radioactive dust particles -shooting out invisible beta and gamma radiation. In the area contaminated with fallout particles, the air is literally filled or permeated with invisible gamma rays and is called a "radiation field". 
When you are in a radiation field, your body is bombarded by invisible and 
painless gamma rays from the soles of your feet to the roots of your hair. 
This exposure of your entire body to gamma radiation may be extremely 
dangerous, depending on how-lmany gamma rays there are in the area. 

Gamma rays can travel -relatively long distances in the air. This means that some of the gamma rays which strike a person standing in a fallout area come from fallout particles as far as 100 meters away. 
Gamma rays have a high penetrating abi I ity. This means that a person in a tent, vehicle, or building may be subject to potential lethal radiation coming from fallout particles on the roof of the building and on the ground outside even if there are no fallout particles inside the structure. Gamma rays can easily penetrate structures made of I ight materials such as wood, glass, fabric and thin sheet metal. People in light or flimsy structures have Iittle protection from gamma radialion coming from fallout particles outside the structure. This is the reason-why there can never be clothing which wi I I give any meaningful protection from gamma radiation in a tal lout area. Clothing prote~ts against beta radiation, not gamma radiation. 
One of the great misconceptions in the Army is that wearing the ponch is alI 
that is needed to protect a soldier who is in a fallout area. Wearing a 
:Poncho protects the skin against beta radiation; it does not protect aainst gamma radiation. Therefore, wearing a poncho in a fallout area is useful, but other actions must be taken to protect against the very hazardous gamma radiation. As was previously mentioned, only heavy materials such as earth wi I I stop gamma rays, if the heavy material is also thick enough. 
414 

RADIATION DECAY 
Principle of Radiation Decay 
In the lesson on predictions, we discussed how to construct falloutpredictions. Because fallout does not fal I in a uniform pattern throughoutthe area, the concentration_-Of radiation will also not be uniform. As aresult, units must be able'"t.o_ determine dose rates at selected locationswithin the predicted area. To complicate matters even more, the dose rate atany location within a contaminated area does not remain the same but decreaseswith time. The rate at which the dose rate decreases is cal led the decay
rate. 
If you stick a piece of iron in a fire until it is red hot and then take itout of the fire, what happens to it? It cools off. The exact same thinghappens to fallout particles. The fission frgments are made "hot" or
radioactive while in the firebal I. When the fallout particles leaves the
firebal I and begin fal Iing down to the ground, the fission fragments decrease
in radioactivity, giving off less and less gamma radiation as time goes by.The cooling off of fallout particles is called "radiation decay". Radiationdecay is important because it-means that a radiation field wi I I become lesshazardous as time goes by,~ontaining less and less gamma rays. If also meansthat, if soldiers can_ stay out of a fallout contaminated area, the gammaradiation from the fallout particles wi II decrease, leaving a lesser hazard ifthe fallout area must be entered later. 
The decrease in the number of gamma rays in a fallout area is quite rapid
during the first 12-24 hours afer a nuclear burst. The rate of decreaselessens after the first day or so, but the decrease continues, although at aslower rate. Study the diagram below which i I lustrates the rate of decrease(or rate of decay) of the gamma radiation from fallout particles. 
KIGH 
Af/iOUh!T 
OF RAD[ATfON 
GAf.'.fi1A DECAY 
1:/-..DI/....TIOI" 
~~~13~~-=-----
LOW 
1 1-: R. 12 1-:RS 24 HRS 1 WI( 2 \:\'!~$ 3 WI~S 4 \'l'I~S Tif,'~E .l:..FTE:P. E. UI;,S I 
415 
Dose calculations and pattern evaluations depend upon knowledge of the decay
rate; thus the decay exponent (n) must be known. In the fallout contamination, 
the value of (n) wi II not necessarily be constant throughout a particle
contaminated area although the pattern as a whole wi I I have an average value. 
This average value wi II vary from pattern to pattern. This variance in decay 
is attributed to the material used to make the nuclear device. These 
different fission fragmentsr-uranium and plutonium, wi I I decay differently . 

.... 
The amount of variation of n is expected to be from about 0.8 to 2.0 for 
fallout. The average value of n for most patterns wi I I be 1.2, which is 
referred to as standard decay. Standard decay may be assumed when decay-rate
estimations or determinations cannot be made. AI I decay calculations 
throughout this lesson wi I I use standard decay. However, to fully appreciate
battlefield conditions one must understand that decay variation exists. 
CALCULATE FALLOUT DECAY FOR FALLOUT AREA 
NOTE: Before we start with performance measures we must first understand the terms used in Rad calculations. 
R1 -This is the Do~ Rate one hour after the burst or H + 1 Hr. 
Rt -This is the Dose Rate measured at any given time after the burst other than H + 1 Hr.-
t -Time in hours after the burst. 
Determine R..!... Use nomogram on page __. 

Step 1. Locate the time on the index scale Iisted 1.2 and pin the hairline 

down on that point. 
Step 2. Rotate the hai rl in~ ~o the Rt reading on the Rt scale, and read 

the R1 value on the R1 scale; 

Step 3. When the hairline fai Is to cross a value on the R1 scale (fal Is off 
the top of the scale) multiply the Rt value by a whole number (i.e., 2, 5, 
or 10). 

Step 4. Repeat steps a and b and divide the R1 value by the same number you
multiplied the Rt value by. 

Step 5. When the hairline fai Is to cross the value on a R1 scale (fal Is off 
the bottom of the scale). Divide the Rt value by a whole number (i.e., 2, 
5, or 10). 

Step 6. Repeat steps a ancL~ and multiply the R1 value by the same number 
you divided the Rt value by.· 

Determine Rt. 

Step 1. Locate R on the R scale. 
416 

Step 2. Place your hairline over R1 and place a sharp penci I where the two 
Iines meet. 
Step 3. Locate tor the time of the dose rate (Rt) on the 1.2 scale or 
index I i ne. 

Step 4. Pivot your hairlipe over the index line and align on the t. 
Step 5. Read Rt on Rt scale where hair I ine intersects. 
Determine t. 
Step 1. Place ha i r I ine over Rt on R t scale. 
Step 2. AI ign with R. on R. scale. 

Step 3. Read t from center of index scale. 
Now that you are lost, let•s start again. wi I I g1ve you a problem and you 
may then work i t out. 
NOTE: In working with no~grams, CARE should be taken to be as consistent as 

possible when_joining values with the hair Iine. Be sure that the hairline intersects the vertical line and the interpolat~d value 
(TICKMARK!) as closely as possible. 
Example Problem 1 

GIVEN: Rt = 400 rad/hr at H t 6 hr; n-1.2 
FIND: R1 
SOLUTION: Arrange the inf9rrnation similar to nomogram. 

Locate H + 6 hr on the 1.2 or standard decay exponent Iine. 
Pivot thru 400 on Rt scale. 
Read the value on R1 scale at the point of intersection. 

ANSWR: 3260-3600 ~d/hr at H t 1 hr. Example Problem 2 A nuclear burst detonated at 1000Z. It is now 1400Z and your radiacmeter 
reads 150 rad/hr. Your commander wants to know the H t 1 dose rate. 
417 

SOLUTION: (Write the procedures to solve the problem) 
"'NOTE:: When the value of "n" is not g1ven-use n = 1.2 (Standard Decay) 

n = 1.2 
ANSWER: 752-832 cGy(rad)/hr at H + 1 hr. 
Convert R1 dose rate reading to Rt rate readings -Given R1 and Rt determine t. You may be given a reading at H + 1 hr or once you have calculated R1 you 
can determine the probable intensity of radiation at any time after burst. Example Problem 3 
GIVEN: R1 = 1000 cGy(rad)/hr 
FIND: Rt at H + 6 hr. 
SOLUTION: Like we did before arrange your information similar to your 
nomogram. n = 1.2 t 
H = 6 hrs 1000 cGy(rad)/hr ANSWER: 110-122 cGy(rad)/hr at H = 6 hrs. Example Problem 4 GIVEN: R, =200 cGy(rad)/hr 
t =H + 25 hrs FIND: Rt Locate H + 25 hours on the 1.2 decay exponent scale. Pivot and align 200 on 
the R1 scale. 
OH NO! What do I do?--It's off Scale! 
NOTE: When this occurs multiply by a common whole number (normally 2, 5, or 
10). Then divide by the s~e number. 
SO!! AI ign 2000 (200 X 10) on R1 scale. 
Read Tt scale at intersectiona and divide by 10. ANSWER: 4.0-4.4 cGy(rad)/hr at H +52 hours. 
418 
Example Problem 5 
GIVEN:  R,  =  200 rad/hr  
Rt  =  4  rad/hr  
FIND:  t  
SOLUTION:  Record  info rma t lan_  

11 More Monkey Business11 ! There is no 4 on the Rt scale! 
Multiply both Rt and R, value by a given whole number greater than 1. That wi I I bring the Rt on scale. 
NOTE: Never multiply time. Time wi I I always stay the same. 
419 

INDEX (standard) 
P. t 1.2 R, I 10
5.oooj 
.... 
4,000 = r
' 
' 
3,000~ c 
.3 ~ 
;.. 20
3 
:::_ 
-
-30 
40 
50 
60 70 
so 
90 100 
.s 
200
E
~ 
:: 
t:-300 2 
~ 400 
500 
s 
-.:.oo 
700 60 800
10 
900 50 1,000 
20 
10 
t,ooo 

3,000 
t: 
= 
r-4,000 -5,000 
420 


CROSS ARADIOLOGICALLY CONTAMINATED AREA 

) 	Nuclear weapons effects may be classified as initial and residual. This text deals with procedures and techniques to be used to mitigate the residual effects of nuclear weapons upon field operations. For the purpose of this ext, we wi I I discuss only two of the five main types of bursts. These two types are the air burst an~lthe surface burst; both may occur as a single burst or multiple bursts. An-"air burst" is defined as one in which the weapon is exploded in the air at an altitude below 100,000 feet, but a such a height that the fireball does not touch the surface of the earth. A "surface burst" is regarded as one which occurs either at, or slightly above the actual surface of land or water. Although the air burst may be preferred for immediate casualties, the surface burst is potentially the greatest casualty producer due to the amount of fallout or rainout produced which contaminates large areas for extended periods of time. 
Fallout or rainout can have a major impact on tactical operations due to their ability to produce casualties and restrict troop movement over large areas; delay logistical support, and impose the requirement of tremendous effort by the engineer and other service support units to decontaminate or neutralize the area. 
Fallout, by definition, consists of rock, soi I, and other material which is vaporized and taken into the firebal I as wei I as large amounts of dirt, dust, and other particles stirred up by the strong afterwinds and drawn up into the firebal I as it rises. These particles settle to the ground as radioactive debris of various sizes and is then cal led fallout. 
Rainout is a condition which occurs when the nuclear cloud is within or below a rain cloud. The nuclear cloud may be the product of a surface burst but the principal source wi I I be the air bursts with yields up to 60 kilotons: When precipitation of any kind passes through the nuclear cloud, the dust-like particles are washed from 1he cloud with the rain. The resultant contamination wi I I have the same effect as fallout except that the rate of decay wi I I be different. Whenever fallout is discussed, the reader should also consider the characteristics of rainout. 
Fallout contains alpha, beta, and gamma radiation. Alpha particles are not considered a tactical military hazard because they wi I I not penetrate the skin. Beta particles are considered a negligible hazard if they are not in direct contact with the skin, and a I imited hazard if they are in direct contact. After extended periods-of exposure the beta particles may cause skin damage ranging from reddening of the skin to open sores similar to third degree burns. The third and last type of radiation, gamma, is a severe tactical military hazad due to its abi I ity to readily penetrate the body, causing injury or even deajh. Since the primary personnel hazard is whole body gamma exposure, an aialysis of the emitted gamma radiation dose rate is used to determine the hazard exposure. 
421 

Neutron-induced activity is another residual radiation hazard which may be produced by surface bursts, but is more I ikely to be a result of air burst. 
CALCULATE TRANSMISSION FACTOR 
CONDITIONS: 
Given the mission to comput ~~e transmission factor for a shielded environment, paper and penci I. 
STANDARDS: 
Transmission factor is determined within +5 percent. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES: 
1. 
Take an outside (ground) does rate (OD) reading. 

2. 
Take an inside (shielded) dose rate (ID) reading. 

3. 
Use the formula shown below for calculating the transmission factor. 

4. 
Record TF for future reference. 


Neutrons are produced by al 1-nuclear weapons with some types of weaponscreating more neutrons than others. Some of these neutrons are captured bythe various elements in the soi I under the burst. As a result of this neutron capture, some of these elements become radioactive. Generally these elements emit beta particles and gamma radiation. They do not emit neutrons. These 
radioactive hazards are as dangerous as those found in fallout and may remain radioactive for extended periods of time following the explosion. If at alI possible, the area directly below the burst point should not be crossed immediately after the burst. 
In .a neutron-induced target area, the soi I is radioactive to a depth of about 
0.5 meters while fallout is only a deposit of radioactive dust on the surface. 
The decontamination of a fallout area is extremely difficult while the decontamination of a neutron-induced activity area is logistically impossible. 
It is necessary for commanders to have a means of predicting the amount of 
radiation in the area of operations. The commanders must attempt to control the amount of personnel radiation exposure while accomplishing their mission within the guidelines set by the ~igher headquarters operational exposure
guidance (OEG). 
The actual amount of radiation received by the personnel is indicaed by the unit dosimeters and noted~n the unit radiation dose status chart after the mission has been accompliShed. 
422 


Transmission Factors (TF) 
A transmission factor (TF) is that fraction of the ouside dose or dose rate that is received inside the enclosure that provides the shielding. TFs are always less than 1.0. A TF is used to find the reduction in dose or dose rate received when personnel are protected from radiation. TFs are alwaysdetermined in operational sit~ations by the unit NBC defense team. 
The TF is calculated using 	the-following formula: 
TF 	Inside dose or dose rate (10) (TF 10)
Outside dose or dose rate (00) 00 

This 	formula can be arranged to yield 10 and 00 as shown below: 
10 = 00 x TF and 00 = 	10 
TF 

The principal use of the TF is to find the 10. This process requiresmultiplication. 
A Iist of precalculated TFs-~is given below. These TFs are established for the 
most exposed occupant location using gamma radiation from cobalt-60. Since cobalt-60 radiation is almost twice as penetrating as the radiation from fallout, actual TFs should be much smaller which means that the personnel
would have more protection than indicated. These Tfs are not used under operational situations unless no other TF data exists. 
423 

TransmissioR 	factors for residual radiation 
E1\\'1 r. 0 Ill.', £11H.l SHIH Dl HG 	1RJ. HS f.'. IS Sl 0 f\ HC1 OR 
~EHICl!S 
tllt,OlANK 0.04 M~8A2 TANK 0.02 h\41 lANK 0.\ lo\11:0 APC 0.3
' 
Y.M 104 SP HOW. o.s M107 SP GUN 0.4 t.\108 SP HOW. 0.3 /.\109 SP HOW. 0.2 M110 SP HOW. 0.4 XM10b SP MORTAR 0.3 lo\125A SP MORTAR 0.3 M114 RECON VEHICLE 0.3 /t.llb CARGO VEHICLE O.b M548 CARGO VEHICLE 0.7 MEe RECOVXR)' v·EHIClE 0.09 /.',57 8 I:ECOVERY VEHICLE 0.3 /.\5 77 C 0 /o\ I.\ A NO POST CARRIER 0.3 M551 AR/o\C~ED RECON/ABN ASSAULT VEHICLE 0.2 /1\728 CO/.\BAT ENGR VEHIClE 0.04 
Tr.UC~S 
1/4-lCN 0.8 3/4-TON 0.6 2·1/2-lON 0.6 4-TON TO 7-TON 0.5 
SHUCTUr.tS r.:.ttislorr fuilding UPPER FlOOR 0.0\ lOWEP. FlOOR 0.1 
Frc~.a Hcuu FIP..ST FLOOR 0.6 BASE /!.EtH 0.\ 
U?.t.At~ AREA {In Open} 	o.7• 
\'lOCOS 	0.8. 
~HHTE~. UI.'OHGP..OU!~O 0.0002 (J.Iool cor!h <Over) 
FOXHOLES 	0.\ 
• 	lhc.sc feelers do nol apply lo srovnd survey d~se roles. -,'~Figure S-3. Trallsmi!!ion /acto1·s /or residual radiation. 
424 
425 

Precalculated TFs are provided for instruction and practice use. They are also used by commanders and operations personnel to judge the relative shielding abi I ity of various vehicles and shelters. 
The primary objectives of the commander are to accomplish the mission while keeping the total dose as low as possible. There are four principles of protection which the command~ may use to reduce total dose exposure. These 
four principles are Iisted below: 
o 
Avoid the area. Boundaries of contaminated areas are located through radiological reconnaissance teams. Whenever possible, troops should skirt the boundary of the contaminated area, or if available, aircraft can be used ·to by-pass the contaminated area. When the area cannot be avoided and the use of aircraft is not consistent with the mission, a route should be selected that can be traversed with exposure at the lowest dose rate possible. Under these circumstances, the number of personnel committed to the mission should be held to a bare minimum. 
o Reduce exposure time. Operations are planned to minimize time spent in contaminated areas. This can be accomplished by selecting the shortest, easiest to cross route which offers high speed movement across the area. 
o 
Delay time of entry. This wi I I allow for the natural decay of the contamination areas. Each hour of delay reduces the dose rate for alI decay rates. Estimates of the decay rate can be made using the 7:10 decay rate rule of thumb. This rule applies ton= 1.2 decay only and states that a dose rate decreases by a factor of ten for every sevenfold increase in time. For example, if the dose rate is 100 cGy(rad)/hr at H + 1, it wi I I decay to 10 cGy(rad)/hr by H + 7. If n is geater than 1.2, then the dose rate at H + 7 would be less than 10. If n is less than 1.2, then the H + 7 dose rate would be higher than 10. 
o Shield. AI I vehitles should have increased protection if possible. One good method of increasing·protection is to place sandbags on he tops, sides, and floors of armored personnel carriers (APCs) and on the floors and sidei of cargo trucks. 
If it is necessary to occupy or cross an area which contains residual 
radiation before the natural decay rate has had time to render the area safe, 
then the commander may use alI four principles to minimize the total dose rate 
to which personnel are exposed. 

Crossing Fallout Areas 

In analyzing the problems of crossing a contaminated area it is necessary to 
determine an average dos~ rate for total dose calculations. This is because 
the dose rate wi II incre<Hie. as the center of the area is approached and 
decrease as the far side is appoached. A reasonable appoximation of the 
average dose rate can be made by using half of the highest dose rate obtained. 

426 

This is written mathematically as: 
R1avg = Rmax2where: R1avg = average dose rate 
Rmax = highest dose _wate encountered or expected to be encountered.This text uses H + 1 dose rates or R1avg only. See the following example of
this calculation. -
Highest Dose Rate = 100 rad (Point A) 
= 1002 
= 50 rad 
427 
After computation of the average dose rate, the commander must calculate the 
length of exposure for the time of stay in the contaminated area. This is determined by dividing the length of the crossing by the constant speed of the crossing. In planning, the average speed of crossing may be used. 
Ts =distance 
speed 

where: Ts = Time of stay 
Speed,~f crossing 10 kilometers per ho'ur 
!I 
Ts =distance= 10 km = 1 hour '·speed 10 kmph 
428 

When a unit must cross a contaminated area it is given an OEG by the highercommand. The unit commander then calculates various entry times and stay
times and chooses the opportune times that wi I I keep the dose below the OEG. To make these calculations the average dose rate must be computed and 
transmission factors for vehicles applied to total doses or dose rates. 
For a coordinated attack i~-which alI action is scheduled to begin at a specified time, it may be necessary for a unit to cross a fallout area. When this occurs, the unit must calculate the time of entry (Te) into the contaminated area. The unit wi I I depart a known location at a speci fie time after the burst and travel at a constant speed unti I it reaches the contamination. Travel time is determined by the distance to the contamination divided by the assumed speed of travel. Thus departure time plus travel time equals time of entry. 
Depart assembly area at 600. Travel at 5 kmph. Therefore, 
Time = distance = 5 km = 1 hour to speed 5 kmph arrive at edge of contamination 
therefore: Te = 0600 + 1 hour = 700 
If the time of burst were 0100, then entry into the fallout area would equal H + 6 hours after the burst. 
429 

COMPUTE TOTAL DOSE 

CONDITIONS: Given appropriate nomogram, the dose rate (R1) at H + 1, the stay time (T 5 ) in hours, the time of entry into fallout area (Te) in hours after burst, hairline, penci I and paper, with the requirement to clculate the total dose received in a fa~ut area. 
STANDARDS: Total Dose (D) is determined within+ 5 percent. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES: 
l. Connect reading on the (Te) scale and reading on the (Ts) scale with the hair I ine. 
2. Pivot the hair! ine at its point of intersection with the index scale to reading of the (Rl) scale. 
3. 
Read number on (D) scale and record as the total dose. 

4. 
Inform commander or -supervisor of calculated total dose. 


·rotal Dose Calculations 
Total dose nomograms are based upon anticipated decay rates of n = 0.2 ton= 
2.0. They are used to solve total dose, time of entry, and time of staycalculations in fallout areas. Total dose nomograms are not used to determine the R1; decay nomograms are used for this purpose. 
For the purpose of training unit level personnel, a standard decay rate of n = 1.2 wi I I be used for alI calculations. These calculations wi II allow unit personnel to give their commanders an approximate value that can be used unti I battalion level or higher-n~tLfies the unit of the actual decay rate .. 
The total dose nomograms relate total dose, H + 1 dose rate, stay time, and entry time by means of an index scale which is located in the center of the nomogram and is used as a pivoting I ine for calculations. The other four value scales on the nomogram are defined as follows: 
o D = total dose in cGy(rad)/hr 

o R1 = dose rate in cGy(rad)/hour after burst (H + 1) 

o Ts = stay time in hours 


Te = entry time (hours after burst) 
In applying the given values, D and R1, or Ts and Teare used together.
When working with total dose nomograms, start the problem on the side of the nomogram for which two values are known. If D and R1 are given, start on the left side. If Ts and Te are\given, start on the right side. Do not 
begin a problem by joining D or R1 with either Ts or Te. 
430 

Since the R1 must already be known before total dose nomograms can be used 
and the index scale is known; if any two of the remaining three values (D,
T
5 , Te) are known, the missing value can be found by using the nomogram. Total Dose Nomogram Usage Problems Example Problem Given: R1 = 200 cGy(rad)/hr 
Te = H + 1.5 hours 
Ts = 1 hour 
n = 1.2 
Find: D 
Answer: 90 cGy(rad)/hr 
Solution: Select then= 1.2 total dose nomogram. Connect H + 1.5 hours on 
the Te scale and 1 hour on the T5 scale with a hairli~~. Pivot the hairline at its point of intersection with the inlet scare-to the 200 cGy(rad)/hr on the R1 scale. Read D = 90 cGy(rad)/hr on the total dose scale. 
Decay of Induced Areas 
The decay_characteristics of induced radiation are considerably different from those of fallout. Fallout is a mixture of many substances, alI with different rates of decay. Induced radiation is produced primarily in aluminum, manganese, and sodium. Other elements, such as si I icone, are less important because they either emit very Iittle gamma radiation or they decay rapidly during the first half hour after a burst. The princip<il-.contribution to induced radiation is radioactive aluminum. Aluminum is one of the most abundant elements and is found in almost alI soi Is. Radioactive aluminum has a half-1 ife of 2.3 minutes which means that almost alI of the radioactive aluminum has decayed within 1/2 hour after burst unti I 10 to 20 hours after burst, manganese and sodium are the principal contributors of radiation. After 10 to 20 hours after burst, sodium, which decays with a half-1 ife of about 15 hours, is the principal source of radiation. 
The most important factor in the decay of induced radiation 1s the composition of the soil in the contaminated area. The percentage, by weight, of elements present in the soi I determines the decay rate for induced radiation areas. Since soi I composition varies widely, even in a single area, the actual chemical composition of the soi I must be known to determine the rate of decay of induced radiation. For this purpose, all soi Is are-ct"Lvided into four types. Since the actual soi I composition wi II not be known, soi I type II (which has the slowest decay rate) is used for all calculations unti I advised by the NBCC to use a different so·i I type. 
431 

-..., 

TOTAL DOSE DOSE nATE 
(D) (n I) 
10 
-I 
-·-II -•--.I 
-·-10 
I INDEX
I 
ENTnY rrr.u (Tc)

--: 
-·-10 --I 
-I (hours after burst)
....... 10 

•o II 
10 
~ 10 10 

JC STAY TIME {T5 ) IF Te H+25
.tl<) 
10 II (hours) II 
-14 
"I<)
:+ 10 +,,
£10 D = Rte X Ts 
\)
~-"' I 0 
-........ 100 "i>

I ,.
,, 
\1
110 
\0 
' ' I
-llll 
I l 
I 
)00 

<00 N 
(") 
-.;:t
.I 
.II 
too 
100 -1-1 
-•~ I.C.OO 01 
~ 

01 
07 -L.., 
1.~ 
Ol 
1.000 01 
-; 
~ \ ,.. 
-·-1.000 
01 

-·-4.000 
\
I.CX'O 01 
\ 
_ on ·..
"\ ' ,.. 
01 >-' 
Unit Procedure 
Neutron-induced radiation areas are to be avoided whenever possible. AI I air bursts are assumed to create an induced hazard area. Bursts may be employed in multiple burst packages which wi I I create induced areas very near to one another. These areas may even interlock. To avoid these areas of contamination, the commander must know the boundaries and extent of the suspected area. GZ for an air burst should not be cross~ for 24 to 96 hours after burst. Routine occupancy of an area of induced -radJation area is possible 2 to 5 days after burst. In the case of occupancy, even low dose rates become significant due to the accumulated dose acquired over the period of exposure. The commander should seek the least contaminated area, dosimeters are checked frequently (once an hour i~ adequate) to monitor the radiation hazard. When crossing a contaminated area, the lowest dose-rate consistent with the mission is selected. This option of route selection may be influenced by unpassable terrain such as mountains or swamps and obstacles such as fires, rubble, or blown down trees. There may also be a limited number of avai table routes or the mode of movement may be restricted. 
If there is an option for the method of crossing an induced area, it should be selected in the following priority: 
o 
Use armored vehicles and APC. 
o 
Drive wheeled vehicles. 
o Move on foot. (Least desirable). 
If possible, alI vehicles used in crossing should be sandbagged to increase shielding. Cargo vehicles should be sandbagged on the floors and sides. APCs are sandbagged on top and bottom. Sandbags shou I d be f i I I ed wi.th uncontaminated soi I. 
COMPUTE TOTAL DOSE 
When working with the total dose nomogram, always start the problem on the side of the nomogram for which values are known. Never begin a problem by joining D orR, with either of the time values. 
Given 	R, = 200 cGy(rad)/hr 
Te = H + 1.5 hours 
Ts = 1 hour 

Find 	Total Dose (D) 
Solution: On the nomogram, connect H + 1.5 hours on the Te scale and hour on the Ts scale, with the hair I ine at its point of intersection with the index scale, to 200 cGy(rad)/hr on the dose rate (R;-Lscale. 
Answer: 	85.5-94.5 cGy(rads) 
433 

To determine the total dose personnel wi I I receive in a radiologically contaminated area (standard decay), but protected/shielded in a shelter, 
foxhole, or vehicle, you need certain information: 
o 
Total Dose-(D). 
4 Dose Rate (reference to 1 hour after the burst or H + 1 or R1). 
o Time of stay [amount of time stayed in the area of tuntamination (T s)]. 
Time of entry [time after H hour or time after the burst (Te)J.
o 
o Index scale -Is a I ine that is used to establish a pivot point between D and R1 and Ts and Te. 

o Transmission Factor -The TF for the shelter, foxhole, or vehicle the personnel are in. 

o Calculated dose-total shielded dose (05 ). 

o Remember: 

(1) 
D = Total Dose 

(2) 
R1 	= H + 1 Dose Rate 

(3) 
Ts 	= Time of Stay 

(4) 
Te 	= Time of Entry 

(5) 
TF 	= Transmission Factor 

(6) 
Ds 	= Total Shielded Dose 





o Any of the values (1-4) may be determined from the nomogram if the other three values are known. Ds or dose shield is calculated by multiplying the total dose (D) by the transmission factor (TF). 


Turn to the nomogram on next page. The figure you see-is used for predicting TOTAL DOSE received while operating in a fallout area. 
NOTE: When using this nomogram always use a dose rate referenced to H + 1 
hour (R 1). 
If the avai !able dose rate was taken at a time other than H + 1 hour (Rt) , Jhe value of R1 (dose rate at H + 1 hour) may be found by using the 
procedures mastered in Lesson 2. 
OK! Lets see if we can clear up these muddy waters by demonstrating what we 
expect you to do. 
Example 	Problem 1. 
Given: 	R1 = 200 cGy(rad)/hr. 
Te = H + 1.2 hrs 
Ts = 6 hrs 

434 
Find: D = ? So Iuti on: Like in Lesson 2 lets arrange the information in the order of the nomogram. 
D 
? 200 cGy(rad)/hr 6 hrs H +-1.~ hrs 
Step 1. Enter the nomogram on the side of the index I ine that we have complete information and connect 1.2 hour on Te scale and 6 hour on Ts scale. 
NOTE: Where the hairline crosses the INDEX SCALE. 
Step 2. PIVOT at the point of intersection with INDEX scale and align 200 on R, scale. 
Step 3. Read value on D scale. 
Answer: 275-305 cGy(rad) 
Step 4. Now you should inform your commander or supervisor of calculated total dose. 
That was a fairly easy problem because alI the information was straightforward. But in actuality it's not. You get information from your commander, from nuclear burst reports, and your report. So you must be able to identify your
information. 
435 

'iCTAL DOSE DOSE nATE 
(D) {n ,) 
10 
-l 
-II 
-•-I 
J-I:
-·-!0 
INDEX 
ENTnY Tlf,1E (Te) 
-I 
--I 

-·-lQ ., -'1o (hours after burst) 
-~ 10 II 
-·-10 
-~·~ 10 

IF Te H+25 
-~ "' 
II
10 
10 
!0 D = Rte X 'If?. 
100 
110 
<.D 
("') 
l.llOO '<:t 
1.000 
1.000 
S.OOO 
l.OOO 

1.000 
-·-1.(1.)0 

-•.000 
-10.000 
1.~ 
-l.CI'lO 
--1.000 
-1.000 
S.()(() 
' 
,, 
\
437 

Example Problem 2. 
Your commander calls you in and says "Look, NBC Specialist, I want to know what the total dose PV2 Repose wi I I receive in a fa I lout area if the dose rate at H + 1 was 100 cGy(rad)/hr and if he entered the area 2 hours after burst and stays in the area 3 hours. 
Solution: Let's fo II ow the same steps as our previous ~oblem and compute D. 
Step 1. Record known information. D R, Ts Te ? 100 cGy(rad)/hr 3 hrs H + 2 hrs 
Step 2. Enter the nomogram on the side of the index scale where we have NO unknowns. Align 2 on Te scale and 3 on the Ts scale; pivot at the intersection of INDEX SCALE. Step 3. Next pass the hairline through 100 on the R, ~scele. Step 4. Read value on D scale. 
Answer: 69-76 cGy(rad) 
Let me give you one more problem for you to work through on your own before we • 
cant i nue. ' 

Example Problem 3. 
Your unit must enter an area contaminated with fallout at H + 4 hours. Your 

mission wi I I require you to remain in the area for 6 hours and the known dose 
rate at H + 1 hr was 300 cGy(rad)/hr. 
You must determine the total dose personnel wi I I receive while in the area. 
Step 1. Record known information: 

D ? 300 cGy(rad)/hr 6 hrs H + 4 hrs Step 2. Enter the nomogram on the side of the index scale where we have no 
unknowns. Align 4 on Te scale and 6 on Ts scale, pivot at the 
intersection on the index scale. 
Step 3. Next pass the hair I ine through 300 on the R, scale. 
Step 4. Read value on D scale. 
Answer: 180.5-199.5 cGy(rad) 

438 
CALCULATE TIME OF ENTRY FOR FALLOUT AREAS 

CONDITIONS: 

Given appropriate nomogram, commander's guidance on total dose (D), the dose 
rate (R,) at H + 1 hr, stay time (T 5 ) in hours, hairline, penci I and 
paper, with the requirements to calculate the optimum time of entry for a 
fallout area. FM 3-12 is available. 
STANDARDS. Time of entry is determined within+ 5 percent. 
PERFORMANCE MEASURES: 
NOTE: If the available dose rate was taken at a time other than H + 1 hr, the value of R, may be found by using the residual radiation decay (fallout) nomogram found in FM 3-12. 
1. 
Connect reading on the D scale and reading on the R, scale with the ha i r I i ne. 

2. 
Pivot the hairline at its point of intersection with the index scale to reading on the Ts scale. 

3. 
Read number of Te scale and record as the time of entry (hours after burst). 


So far, you have learned to determine the Total Dose (D) which is an 
unshielded dose. To determine the total shielded dose (0 5 ) we simply add one more step. 
Example Problem 4. 
Your unit must enter an area contaminated with fallout at H + 3 hours. You are required to stay for 10 hours. You will be inside th~basement of a house with a (TF) Transmission Factor of 0.03. What wi I I the~ (fi5 ) calculated dose be if the dose rate at H + 1 was 450 cGy(rad)/hr? 
Step 1. Locate information given. 
TF D 
? 0.03 ? 450 cGy(rads)/hr 10 hrs H + 3 hrs 
Step 2. Working from the right side of the nomogram align the Te and the Ts 
Step 3. Pivot on the index 1ine and align the R, valu~.-read the Doff the D scale. 
439 

TF D 	R, 

12.9-14.1 0.03 450 cGy(rad) 450 10 hrs H + 3 hrscGy(rad) cGy(rad)/hr 
Step 4. To find the Ds we simply multiply the total dose (D) by the transmission factor (TF). D X TF = Ds 450 cGy(rad) x 0.03 = 12.9-14.1 cGy(rad) 
CALCULATE TIME OF ENTRY FOR FALLOUT AREAS When working with the total dose nomogram, always start the problem on the side of the nomogram for which two values are known. Never begin a problem byjoining D orR, with either of the time values. 
EXAMPLE 
Given Total dose (D) = 20 cGy(rad)
Dose rate (R,) = 100 cGy(rad)/hr
Stay time (T 5 ) = 1 hour 
Find time of entry (Te) 

Let's slow down once again and really look at this task. It's about the same as the last one, isn't it? AI I we are doing is reading in reverse. In many cases the commander has received a mission from higher headquarters
with time restrictions to accomplish a particular mission. 
The commander wi I I want to know at what time th~ unit may enter the area (Te) and not exceed the ''COMMAND DOSE'' --the TOTAL dose a commander feels the troops can be allowed to absorb and not reduce their~ombat effectiveness 
for a particular combat mission and for future combat missions. You use the same nomogram for time of entry calculations. The basic 
principles are the same except that now you wi I I enter the nomogram from theleft of the index Iine, as this is the side with complete information. Let's
practice: 
Example 	Problem 1: 
Given: 	D = 30 cGy(rad) 
R, = 150 cGy(rad)/hr 
Ts = 1.5 hrs 

Find: Te =? 
440 

So Iuti on: Identify given information. 
D 
30 cGy(rad) 150 cGy(rad)/hr 1.5 hrs ? 
Step 1. Enter the nomogram on the side of the index line that we have 

complete information. Enter the left side. Align 30 ~n ·\Pe D scale and 150 
on the R1 scale. 
NOTE: Hairline crosses the index Iine. 

·Step 2. Pivot at point of intersection with index _line and align 1.5 hours on 
Ts scaie. 
Step 3. Read value on Te scale. 
Answer: H + 4.42 -4.88 hours 
Try the next one on your own and see if you can find the solution. 

Example Problem 2: 
A nuclear burst occurred at XX1400Z. Your commander has been given the 
mission of securing an LZ. The commander estimates that the job wi I I take 5

hours. The monitoring data shows an H + 1 hr dose rate of 200 cGy(rads)/hr.
The command dose for the men involved is 40 cGy(rads). At what time can the 
unit enter the area and not exceed the command dose? 

CALCULATE TIME OF EXIT FOR FALLOUT AREAS CONDITIONS: Given a multiplication factor graph, FM 3-12, time of detQflation, location ofcontaminated area (map of area), average transmission factor, time (in hours)
required to move out of contaminated area, penci I and paper, with the requirement to calculate the optimum time for exit of fallout area. STANDARDS: Optimum time of exit is determined within± 5 percent. PERFORMANCE MEASURES (PM): 
1. 
Determine the average transmission factor (TF) for the fallout shelter 
(As) and the average transmission factor for the evacuation vehicles (Ae). 


2. 
Divide the average transmission factor for the fallout shelters (As) by
the average transmission factor of the evacuation vehicles (Ae). 



As 
Ae 

441 

3. 
Enter the verticle axis of multiplication factor chart at the value determined. 

4. 
Move horizontally along the As ratio to the curved I ine. Move straight 


Ae down to the horizontal axis and read the multiplication factor (MF). 
5. Multiply the multiplication factor (MF) by the evacuation time (Tev) in hours. The product is the optimum time, in hours after-d~onation, that the unit should leave its shelters and evacuate the area. -
Step 1. ? D R1 Ts Te 
Step 2. ? 
Step 3. ? 
Steep 4. ? 
Answer: Te = H + 11.7 -12.9 hours 
Practice Problem 3: 
T
Given: D =50 cGy(rad) 
R1 = 100 cGy(rads)/hr 
5 = 24 hours 

Find: T e = ? 
D R1 
Answer: Te = H + 14.52-15.96 hours 
CALCULATE TIME OF EXIT FOR FALLOUT AREAS 
I 
NOTE: Evacuation time is how long! it takes to move from your present location to the clear area. 
Here are some more new terms for you to learn. 
TF = Transmission factor 
As= Average transmission factor for the shelters you are in. 
Ae =Average transmission factor for the evacuation ~hicles. 
Tev =Estimated time required to clear contaminated area (time of 

evacua t ion) . MF =Multiplication factor. Topt =Optimum time of exit. 
442 
Determine the average transmission factor (TF) for the fallout shelter (As)
and the average transmission factor for the evacuation vehicles (Ae). 
In this case alI troops are in foxholes (As) TF = . 1 and we wi II use 2 1/2 tontrucks (Ae) TF = .6 to evacuate the area. 
Divide the average transmission factor for the fallout shelter (As) by the 
average transmission factor of the evacuation vehicles, 
As = .1 = .167 
Ae "l3 

NOTE: When dividing, carry only to the third decimal. 
Take the value you received, .167, and look on the left side 	As of the 
Ae 

chart and locate that value. 
Move horizontally across the chart unti I you hit the curved Iine. Then gostraight down the chart and read your multiplication factor (2.8). Multiply the multiplication factor 2.8 by the time it ~i I! take you to clear
the area (Tev). In this case we wi II say it wi II take 2 hours to clear the area. (MF x Tev = Topt or 2.8 x 2 = 5.6). Your optimum time of exit wi II be H + 5.6 hrs or about 5 hours and 36 minutes after the burst. 
Example Problem 1: GIVEN: As= 0.1 Foxholes Ae = 0.6 2 1/2 Ton Trucks Tev = 2 hours FINO: Top t Solution: As= 0.1 = .167 Ae 0.6 Multipl icating Factor (MF) = 2.8 MF x Tev = Topt 
2.80 x 2 hrs = H + 5.6 hours or about 5 hours and 36 minutes after the burst. Example Problem 2: Let's try a Iittle something different this time. GIVEN: As= .1 (Foxhole) and .7 Urban area (in open).Ae = .8 (1/4 Ton Truck) 
Tev = 2 hours 
FIND: Topt 

443 

Solution: As= .4 = .5 MF = .51 
Ae ~ 
MF x Tev =Topt .51 x 2 = H + 1.02 hour 

Where did you get .4 from? Before you go wild, I isten. You had two forms of shelters, the foxhole and urban area (in open) so, you added them together and divided the answer by two (.1 + .7 = .8 divided by 2 = .~ that gave you an average for the two. OK? Then we continued on as before 
444 

A s 
o. 0 0 -o A 
0 0 0
0 ~ l.n 

$ r-c 
--f 
tV
"r
(')'1--D
)>\~
--f 
z0 
l.n
.,p 
(') 0--f 0
N 
445 
Special Considerations 
o For ratios of As that are close to or greater than 0.5, the unit should 
Ae evacuate the fallout area as soon as possible. 
o If the optimum exit time is estimated to be before the actual arrival of fallout, the unit should evacuate the area as soon as pq§sible after fallout is complete and an uncontaminated area is available. 

o Leaving the contaminated area at the optimum time wi I I result in the smallest dose possible received by the unit. If the unit commander is wi II ing to accept up to a 10 percent increase in dose above the minimum possible dose, the unit may leave the shelters any time between one-half and twice the optimum time. 

o If possible, personnel should improve their shelters while waiting for the optimum exit time. The estimate of the optimum exit time should be recalculated if significant improvement is made in the shelters. Improvedshelters wi II mean that the unit should remain in shelters for a longer period of time to minimize the dose to the personnel. 


REVIEW NBC ANNEX TO UNIT SOP 
1. 
GENERAL: In this lesson you wi I I learn that each unit must have an SOP and each SOP should have an NBC Annex. The format of the SOP is not critical as long as provided information is in consonance with the accomplishment of the units mission. In preparation for operations in an NBC environment, a supervisor must review the SOP to ensure alI elements required to accomplish specific missions have been considered. 

2. 
TASKS: This lesson contains no testable tasks. 

3. 
LEARNING AIDS: None 

4. 
REFERENCES: 


DA PAMPHLETS (DA Pam) 
50-3 The Effects of Nuclear Weapons 

FIELD MANUAL (FM) 

3-3* NBC Contamination Avoidance (Coordinating Draft) 

3-4* NBC Protection (Coordinating Draft) 

3-5* NBC Decontamination (Coordinating Draft) 

3-100* NBC Operations (Coordinating Draft) 

3-8 Chemical Reference Handbook 
3-9 Military Chemistry 
3-12 Operational Aspects of Radiologicaf Defense 
3-22 Fallout Prediction 
3-87* Chemical Unit 
446 
8-9 NATO Handbook on the Medical Aspects of NBC Defensive 
Operations 21-2 Soldiers Manual of Common Task Ski I I Level 1 21-3 Soldiers Manual of Common Tasks Ski II Level 2,3, and 4 21-1 Field Hygiene and Sanitation 21-11 (TEST) First Aid for Soldiers 21-40 NBC Defense 21-48 PI ann ing and Conducting Chemica I , fti o Iog i ca I , 
Radiological (CBR), and Nuclear l{e-fense Training) 
FIELD CIRCULARS (FC) 3-3-1 Warning, Reporting and Predicting Chemical Hazards (TBP) 3-12-1 Nuclear Burst Data 3-12-2 Radiological Monitoring 3-12-3 Radiological Recon 3-12-4 Operational Aspects of Residual Radiation 
*Distribution made to Post, Division, and selected chemical staffs for review 
TRAINING CIRCULARS (TC) 
3-1 How to Conduct NBC Defense Training 

TECHNICAL MANUALS (TM) 

3-216 Technical Aspects of Biological Defense 3-220 Chemical, Biological and Radiological (CBR) Decon tam ina t ion 3-240 Field Behavior of Chemical, Biological, and Radiological Agents 
3-4230-204-12&P Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Decontaminating Apparatus, Portable, DS-2, 1-1/2 Quart, ABC-M11 
3-4240-279-10 Operator's Manual Mask, Chemical-Biological, Field, ABC-M17-Series 3-4240-279-20&P Organizational Maintenance Manual ~17-Series Protective Mask 3-4240-280-10 Operator's Manual, Mask, Chemical-Biological, M24 and M25 Series 3-4240-280-23&P Organizational and OS Maintenance Manual M24 and M25 Series Protective Mask 3-6665-225-12 Alarm, Chemical Agent, Automatic: Portable, Manpack,M8 3-6665-261-14 Operator's, Organization, OS & GS Maintenance Manual: Power Supply, Chem Agent Alarm, M10 3-6665-261-24P Organizational, OS, & GS Maintenance Repair Parts & Special Tools List: Chem Agent Alarm, M10 3-6665-273-20 Organizational Maintenance Manual: Installation Kit for Chemical Agent Alarm 3-6665-302-20P Organizational Maintenance Manual-. Automatic Chemical 
Agent Alarm 
3-6665-307-10 Operator's Manual, Detector Kit, Chemical Agent, M256 
3-6665-311-10 Operator's Manual, Paper, Chemical Agent Detector: M9 
447 

3-9905-001-10 Operator's Manual, Marking Set, Contamination: 
Nuclear, Biological, Chemical (NBC) 11-6665-209-15 RADIAC Sets AN/PDR 27J, L, and Q 11-6665-213-12 Operator's Manual, Radiacmeter IM93/PD, IM93/UD 
IM93A/PD, and IM147/PD 11-6665-224-15 RADIAC Set, AN/PDR27P 11-6665-224-20P Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts &Special Tools 
List: AN/PDR27P 11-6665-228-15 RADIAC Set, AN/PDR-27G 11-6665-228-20P Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts &Special Tools 
List: AN/PDR27G 11-6665-230-15 RADIAC Set, AN/PDR-27R 11-6665-230-20P Organizational Maintenance ~epair Parts &Special Tools 
List: AN/PDR27R 11-6665-232-12 Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual: IM174A/PD and IM174B/PD 11-6665-232-20P Organizational Maintenance Repair Parts &Special Tools List: IM174A/PD and IM174B/PD 
TECHNICAL BULLETINS (TB) 
43-180 Calibration Requirements for the Maintenance of Army 

Material SIG 226-8 Chargers, RADIAC Detector, PP15781~-and PP1578A/PD SIG 226-9 Field Expedient for Charging IM93/UD and IM147/PD 
SUPPLY BULLETINS (SB) 3-30-2 Chemical-Biological Canisters and Fi Iter Elements: Serviceabi I i ty Iists. 
COMMON TABLE OF ALLOWANCES (CTA) 8-100 Army Medical Department Expendable Supplies 50-900 Clothing and Individual Equipment (Active Army, Reserve 
Components, and DA Civi I ian Employees) 50-909 Field and Garrison Furnishings an~Equipment 50-970 Expendable Items (Except MedicaL, ~lass V, and Repair 
Parts) 
REVIEW NBC ANNEX TO THE UNIT SOP 
Standing Operating Procedures (SOP) are locally published procedures providingguidance to members of the unit on command pol icy or methods of accomplishingthe mission. SOPs are required at all levels of command. A unit SOP normallywi I I contain an NBC defense annex. An SOP can have an annex dealing only with chemical and biological (CB), and another annex dealing with the nuclear radiation aspects, or it can be combined into a single NBC defense annex. 
Each unit must have Standing Operating Procedures (SOP)-Jn NBC Defense procedures that are in consonance with the accomplishment of its mission. These procedures may vary from unit to unit depending upon their mission, equipment, and prior exposure to NBC agents. The Iist of tasks below should not be considered all inclusive, but minimum requirements that should be 
448 

included in each SOP. FM 3-10, FM 3-12, FM 3-22, FM 21-40, and Unit ARTEP describe the criteria in detai I and should be used as the guides for each area 
to further explain if required. Below are some of the areas the NBC defense annex should cover. For the purposes of reviewing the SOP in preparation for operations in an NBC environment, select the appropriate mission and review 
the Iisted considerations. 
in NBC environment.
Pre pare for operations an  
Considerat ions: 1 -NBC defense equipment is issued and operat2 -MOPP 3 -Decon equipment is deployed 4 -ABC-M11s are mounted/fi I led  ional  
Unit Considerat ions:  1 -Use of cover and concealment/shielding 2-Dispersal in a noncircular deployment patt3-Unit movement is planned/conducted during  ern I imited  

visibi I i ty 
0 Prepare for a nuclear attack 
Considerations: 	1 -Warn subordinate elements 2 -Establish a ground messenger service 3 -Vehicles disperse/place in defilade 4 -Electronic devices turned off/grounded/shielded 5-Periodic monitoring is initiated 6-Personnel seek shelter 7-Equipment, POL, munitions, food, and water are shelter 
0 Prepare for friendly nuclear strike. 
Considerations: 	1 -Acknowledge warning 2-Implement protective measures 
0 Respond to the initial effects of a nuclear attack. 
Considerations: 	1 -Take immediate action 2-Reestablish communications 3 -Send NBC 1 report and follow-up 4-Administer to casualties/fatalities 5 -Damage assessments forwarded 6-Implement continuous moni taring 
0 Respond to the residual effects of a nuclea attack. 
Considerations: 	1 -Prepare simp I i fied fallout prediction 2 Imp Iemen t continuous man i tori ng 3-When fal'lout arrives submit NBC 4 -r-eport 4 -Maintain total dose records, forward per SOP 
449 

Depending on Mission and OEG. 
Stay in place 
Move (Determine when best time to move) 

0 Conduct radiological reconnissance. 
Considerations: 	1 -Determine type of survey (Point, route, etc.) 2 -Determine turn-back dose and dosff-r~fB 3-Determine sites for obtaining correlation factor 4-Determine location of decon point/determine decon 
requirement using AN/PDR27 5-Reporting requirements to survey team defined 6 -Marking requirements briefed to team 7-Vehicle preparation 
0 Cross a radiologically contaminated area. 
Considerations: 1 -Route of least exposure is determined using an NBC 5 Report 2 -Advance party is dispatched/performs route survey/ 
determines time required to cross. 3-Turn-back dose/dose rate determined~ 4 -Maximum shielding of vehicles 5-Determine decon requirements using AN/PDR27 6-Unit total dose is reported to higher headquarters 
0 Perform radiological decontamination (unsupported). 
Considerations: 	1-Establish decon priorities 2 -Establish decon point 3-Mark contamination run-off 4 -Check for completeness 
0 Employ chemical agent alarms in a static situatton. 
Considerations: 1-Detector units are upwind 200-400 meters (no more than 150 meters from perimeter/and not separated more than 300 meters apart 
2-Alarm units positioned properly to ensure immediate 
action 3-Operators perform services as required 4-Detectors are repositioned when the wind changes 
0 Employ chemical agent alarms in a mobile situation. 
Considerations: 	1 -MOPP 2-Affix M9 detector paper to clothin~and equipment 3-Check protective equipment 4-Establish casualty evacuation procedures 5-Check detection kits and alarms 
450 

0 Respond to a persisent toxic chemical agent attack. 
Considerations: 	1 -Take immediate action 2-Affix M9 detector paper to clothing and equipment 3-Check protective equipment 4-Establish casualty evacuation procedures 5-Check detection kits and alarms 
0 Respond to a persistent toxic chemical agent arta~. 
Considerations: 	1 -Take immediate action 2 -MOPP 4 3-Warn Adjacent units 4-Submit NBC 1 (chemical) report 5 -Determine type agent 6-Determine extent of contamination 7-Decon casualties 8 -Shut down M8 alarms 9 -Request decon support 
10 -Prepare downwind hazard 11 -Initiate partial decon procedures 
0 Respond to a nonpersistent toxic chemical agent~aftack. 
Considerations: 	1 -Take immediate action 2-Warn subordinate and adjacent units 3 -Determine type agent/extent of attack 4-Submit NBC 1 5 -Determine when alI clear 6 -Prepare downwind hazard 
0 Cross an area 	contaminated by a persistent chemical agent 
Considerations: 	1 -Assume MOPP 4 2-Determine most expeditions route ustng an NBC 5 report 3 -Alert higher headquarters for decon--support 4-Vehicles are buttoned up or covered as much as possible 5-After crossing, determine extent of contamination 6-Establish decon priorities 
o 
Perform unit sustainment decontamination of chemical agents (unsupported). 
Considerations: 	1 -Use ABC-M11 on operator's controls 2 -Emergency decon complete in 15 minutes after attack 3-Clothing Exchange accomplished as far forward as possible 
as required 4-Vehicle decontamination accompl isrree as required/ASAP 5 -Determine adequacy of decon proced~s 6 -Request complete decon supply 
451 
0 
Coordination for complete decontamination of personnel and/or egu i pment. 
Considerations: 1-Establish unit's time of arrival 
2-Establish supplies unit required to bring 
3-Establish number of personnel required to support 
operation 
4 -Determine route to PDS/EDS 
The commander should also consider several appendicies to this annex to ensure all required information is available so subordinate leaders can make informed decisions. Appendicies should include: 
o Examples of NBC 1-5 reports, effective downwind message, and chemical downwind message. 
0 Unmasking procedures. 
-0 Radiation exposure chart. 
o 
Comprehensive listing of chemical potective equipment (with national stock numbers) required to conduct sustained operationa resupply. 
0 Procedures for simplified fallout prediction. 
0 Procedures for chemical downwind hazard prediction. 
After the annexes have been written and staffed through the appropriate sections, they should be given to the commander for approval. Once the annexes are approved and become a part of the unit SOP, they must be 
implemented in two phases. First, you must conduct instruction to ensure that alI members of the unit are fami Iiar with the contents. The second phase of 
implementing is to provide supervision to ensure that personnel follow the SOP. 
As changes are made to referenced publications, SOPs o-f nigher headquarters, or unit procedures, you must update your SOP. 
"'u.s. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1986-498·265/42412 
452